Owner's Manual

T-Cross

Owner's Manual

*2GP012720AJ*
2GP.012.720.AJ

Owner's Manual:
T-Cross
T-Cross

Stand: 16.02.2024 | PAN - XXXXXX

Englisch: 05.2024
Artikel-Nr.: 25A.5L1.TCR.20
Vehicle data sticker

Fig. 1

1 Vehicle identification number Delivery date:

2 Model, engine power, transmission
3 Engine code letters, transmission code letters, Volkswagen Brazil works continuously to develop No part of this manual may be entirely or partially
paint code, internal equipment and improve all its vehicles. Please understand that reprinted, reproduced or translated without the
we must therefore reserve the right to alter any part written permission of Volkswagen do Brasil.
4 Optional equipment, PR numbers of the vehicle and its equipment or technical specifi-
Volkswagen Dealership stamp All rights under the copyright laws are expressly re-
cations at any time. The data provided concerning
served by Volkswagen do Brasil. Subject to alteration
scope of delivery, appearance, performance, dimen-
and amendment.
sions, weights, fuel consumption, standards and ve-
hicle functions are all correct at the time of going to Printed in Brazil.
print. Some of the equipment described might not © 2024 Volkswagen do Brasil
yet be available in a particular vehicle (information
can be provided by your local Volkswagen Dealer- Manual printed in paper bleached without the
ship), and some equipment may not be available in use of chlorine.
certain countries. No legal commitment may be in-
ferred from the information, illustrations or descrip-
tions in this manual.
 Thank you for choosing Volkswagen
By purchasing this Volkswagen, you have become the owner of a vehicle fitted with the most up-to-date
technology and a multitude of convenience functions for your use and enjoyment.
Before using your vehicle for the first time, carefully read and observe the information in this Owner's Man-
ual to become familiar with your vehicle and all of its functions, in addition to learning about the potential
dangers to yourself and others and how to avoid them.
If you have any further questions about your vehicle, or if you think that the manual set has not covered
everything, please contact your local Volkswagen Dealership. Volkswagen Dealerships are always happy to
deal with your questions, suggestions or issues.
We hope you have a great driving experience in your new vehicle. Happy motoring.
Volkswagen do Brasil 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Thank you for choosing Volkswagen 1

Table of Contents
About this Owner's Manual 4 Lights
Description of symbols 5 – Turn signals 77
– Driving lights 77
– Interior lighting 82
Owner's Manual Visibility
– Window wipers and washers 83
Overview of the vehicle
– Mirrors 85
– Front view 6
– Sliding headliner 88
– Rear view 7
– Driver door 8 Heating and air conditioning
– Driver's side 9 – Heating, ventilating, cooling 89
– Centre console 10
– Front passenger side 11 Driving
– Symbols in the roof headliner 11 – Driving guidelines 94
– Starting and stopping the engine 101
Driver's information – Start-Stop system 105
– Warning lamps and indicator lamps 12 – Manual gearbox 107
– Instrument cluster 14 – Automatic gearbox 108
– Dash panel insert operation 24 – Uphill assist system 112
– Vehicle settings menu 26 – Steering assistance 113
Safety – Driving mode selection 114
– Off-road indicator 115
– Overall guidelines 26
– Adjusting the seat position 28 Driver assist systems
– Seat belts 30 – Cruise control system (GRA) 118
– Airbag system 38 – Speed limiter 119
– Transporting children in the vehicle 45 – Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 121
– In an emergency 53 – Front Assist 126
Open and close – Lane Assist 130
– “Blind spot monitor” 132
– Vehicle key 56
– Keyless locking and starting system Parking and manoeuvring
“Keyless Access” 58 – Parking 135
– Central locking button and doors 59 – Handbrake 136
– Anti-theft alarm system 63 – Parking systems safety instructions 136
– Interior monitoring system 64 – Park distance control (Park Pilot) 137
– Boot lid 65 – Rear view camera system 139
– Windows 67 – Park Assist 141
– Tilting panoramic sunroof 68 – Rear Traffic Alert 145
Steering wheel – Brake support systems 146
– Adjusting the steering wheel position 70 Practical equipment
Seats and head restraints – Stowage compartment 149
– Front seat 71 – Cup holder 153
– Rear seats 72 – Cigarette lighter 154
– Head restraints 74 – Socket 154
– Seat functions 76

2 Table of Contents
 VW Play Maintenance
– Welcome to VW Play 156 – Service 231
– Device overview 156 – Vehicle conservation 233
– Quick access screens 157 – Accessories, modifications, repairs and
– Radio 157 part replacement 242
– Media 157
Consumer information
– Connect 159
– Volkswagen warranty 246
– App store 160
– Additional service offers 246
– Apple CarPlay™ 161
– Information stickers and plates 247
– Android Auto™ 162
– Aerial and radio feed 248
– Settings 163
– Installing the radio 248
Transporting – Navigation system or radio volume 248
– Stowing items of luggage 166 – Headphones 248
– Luggage compartment 167 – Declarations of conformity 249
– Roof carrier 169
Technical data
– Towing a trailer 172
– Guidelines on the technical data 250
Fuel – Information on fuel consumption 251
– Fuel handling safety guidelines 176 – Vehicle identification data 252
– Fuelling and fuel types 177 – Vehicle identification number on the
– Engine control unit and exhaust gas windscreen 252
emission control system 179 – Information on the air conditioning
– Fuel quality 181 system 253
– Dimensions 253
If and when – Capacities 254
– Vehicle toolkit 182 – Petrol engine 255
– Window wiper blades 183 – TOTALFLEX engines 258
– Exterior lighting 185
– Fuses 186
– Jump starting 191 Abbreviations 260
– Towing 193
Index 262
Checking and refuelling
– In the engine compartment 196
– Service fluids and consumables 200
– Washer fluid 201
– Engine oil 201
– Engine coolant 205
– Brake fluid 208
– Vehicle battery 209
Wheels and tyres
– Tyre monitoring system 214
– Important information on wheels and
tyres 216
– Changing a wheel 226
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Table of Contents 3
About this Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual is valid for all available models
and versions of this vehicle. The Owner's Manual de-
scribes all of the equipment and models, without
identifying as special equipment or model variations.
Thus, there may be pieces of equipment described
which are not included in your vehicle or which are
only available to specific markets. The equipment
contained in your vehicle is detailed in the product's
sale documentation. Contact your local Volkswagen
Dealership for further information.
All data in this Owner's Manual correspond to the in-
formation available at the time of going to print.
Due to continuous technical improvement of the ve-
hicle, actual vehicle features and equipment may
differ from the indications provided in this manual.
No discrepancy in data, illustrations or descriptions
shall form the basis for any legal claim.
Please ensure that the complete manual set is al-
ways in the vehicle when lending or selling the vehi-
cle.
– An alphabetical index is included at the end of
this manual.
– A list of abbreviations detailing technical terms
and acronyms can be found at the end of the
manual.
– Directions and positions such as left, right, front
and rear are normally relative to the vehicle's di-
rection of travel, unless otherwise indicated.
– Illustrations assist with orientation and should be
regarded as schematic representations.
– Short definitions highlighted before some of the
sections in this manual, summarize the functions
and use of a system or piece of equipment. Fur-
ther information on the systems and equipment,
apart from their features, commands and system
limitations, is found in the respective sections.
– Any technical changes made to the vehicle after
publication of this booklet are provided in a Sup-
plement that is included with the manual set.

Standard booklets in the manual set:

– Owner's Manual
– Service Registry Booklet (for markets without dig-
ital service plan) (may not be available for some
countries)

Additional booklets in the manual set

(optional):
– Supplement 

4 About this Owner's Manual

 Description of symbols
Refers to an excerpt within a chapter that contains important information and safety notes
 . Such reference must always be observed.

 Indicates that the section is continued on the next page.

 Indicates the end of a section.

 Indicates situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as quickly as possible.

® The symbol indicates a registered trademark. However, the absence of this symbol does not
constitute a waiver of the rights concerning any term.
→
Symbols of this type reference warnings within the same section or page, indicating poten-
→
tial risks of accidents and injuries, as well as how they can be avoided.
→
→ Cross reference to information about possible damage to your vehicle within the same sec-
tion or on a given page.

DANGER
Texts with this symbol indicate extremely danger-
ous situations, which may lead to fatal or severe
injuries if you do not observe the warning.

WARNING
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situa-
tions which will lead to fatal or severe injuries if
you do not observe the warning.

CAUTION
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situa-
tions, which may lead to light or severe injuries if
you do not observe the warning.

NOTICE
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situa-
tions, which may lead to vehicle damages if you do
not observe the warning.

Texts with this symbol are environment pres-

ervation recommendations.

Texts with this symbol contain additional in-

formation. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Description of symbols 5
Overview of the vehicle

Front view

Fig. 2 Front view of the vehicle.

Key for → Fig. 2:

1 Exterior door handles............................................................................................................................................ 59
2 Headlights................................................................................................................................................................... 77
3 Front Park Distance Control sensors............................................................................................................... 137
4 Front towing eye housing behind a cover.................................................................................................... 193
5 Bonnet release lever.............................................................................................................................................. 198
6 Windscreen
– Windscreen wipers............................................................................................................................................ 83
– Rain and light sensor in the region of the interior mirror................................................................ 84 

6 Owner's Manual
 Rear view

Fig. 3 Rear view of the vehicle.

Key for → Fig. 3:

1 Roof aerial.................................................................................................................................................................. 246
2 High-mounted brake light
3 Rear window
– Rear window heating switch......................................................................................................................... 89
– Rear window wiper............................................................................................................................................ 83
4 Region for:
– Boot lid opening................................................................................................................................................. 65
– Rearview camera system................................................................................................................................ 139
5 Rear number plate lights...................................................................................................................................... 185
6 Rear fog lights (only on the left-hand side) and reflector on the right and left-hand sides
(depending on the version)
7 Rear Park Distance Control sensors................................................................................................................ 137
8 Jacking points........................................................................................................................................................... 229
9 Tail lights..................................................................................................................................................................... 77, 185
10 Tank flap...................................................................................................................................................................... 178
11 Exterior mirrors........................................................................................................................................................ 85
12 Roof railing................................................................................................................................................................. 169 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Overview of the vehicle 7

Driver door

Fig. 4 Overview of the controls in the driver door.

Key for → Fig. 4:

1 Region for:
– Setting rotary control for electric exterior mirrors.............................................................................. 85
– Buttons for operating electric windows................................................................................................... 67
2 Interior door handle............................................................................................................................................... 59
3 Central locking button for locking and unlocking the vehicle............................................................. 59
4 Central locking indicator lamp........................................................................................................................... 60
5 Storage compartment........................................................................................................................................... 149 

8 Owner's Manual
 Driver's side

Fig. 5 Overview of the driver side.

Key for → Fig. 5:

1 Air vents....................................................................................................................................................................... 89
2 turn signal and main beam lever...................................................................................................................... 77
3 Instrument cluster.................................................................................................................................................. 14
– with warning and indicator lamps.............................................................................................................. 12
4 Lever for window wipers and washers.......................................................................................................... 83
– with buttons to operate the ,  menus.................................................................................. 24
5 Multifunction steering wheel controls:
– Tiptronic paddles................................................................................................................................................ 109
– Audio, navigation  
– Cooperate the driver assistance systems , , , ,    or   ................................ 118
– Volume controls  , 
– Menu selection controls   , , , ............................................................................................ 25
– Voice command activation 
– Access the phone menu or answer a phone call  (depending on the vehicle and radio
version, this key has no function or phone calls can only be answered via the radio).
6 Horn (works only when the ignition is switched on)
7 Ignition lock............................................................................................................................................................... 101
8 Pedals........................................................................................................................................................................... 94
25A.5L1.TCR.20

9 Driver front airbag installation location........................................................................................................ 41

10 Steering column adjustment lever................................................................................................................... 70
11 Fuse box access cover........................................................................................................................................... 186 

Overview of the vehicle 9

12 Bonnet release lever.............................................................................................................................................. 198
13 Headlight range control switch......................................................................................................................... 80
14 Light switch .............................................................................................................................................................. 77 

Centre console

Fig. 6 Overview of the upper section of the centre Fig. 7 Overview of the lower section of the centre
console. console.

Key for → Fig. 6:

1 Radio............................................................................................................................................................................. 156
2 Hazard warning lights button ....................................................................................................................... 53
3 Front passenger front airbag deactivated indicator lamp  ........................................................ 39
4 Climatronic or air conditioning operating controls.................................................................................. 89
5 Guidelines for the braking support systems................................................................................................ 118
6 Air vents....................................................................................................................................................................... 89
– According to the version of the vehicle, there may exist air vents for the rear seat pas-
sengers.

Key for → Fig. 7:

1 Lever for:
– Manual gearbox................................................................................................................................................... 107
– Automatic gearbox............................................................................................................................................ 108
2 12-volt socket........................................................................................................................................................... 154
3 Card holder................................................................................................................................................................. 149
4 Stowage compartment with drink holder on the centre console...................................................... 153
5 Handbrake lever....................................................................................................................................................... 136 

10 Owner's Manual
 6 Engine starter button (Press & Drive)............................................................................................................. 101
7 Storage compartment
– with QI wireless charging function............................................................................................................. 150 

Front passenger side

Fig. 8 Overview of the front passenger side.

Key for→ Fig. 8:

1 Location of front passenger front airbag in the dashboard.................................................................. 38
2 Air vents....................................................................................................................................................................... 89
3 Vehicle key activated switch to deactivate the front passenger front airbag.............................. 42
4 Opening lever for the stowage compartment............................................................................................ 149 

Symbols in the roof headliner

Symbol Definition


, Interior and reading lights switch buttons → page 77.

, , 
 Sunroof switch → page 68.

 Solar protection curtain buttons → page 88

 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Overview of the vehicle 11

Driver's information Symbol Meaning →
Brake or swerve!
Collision warning via peripheral
Warning lamps and indicator monitoring system (Front Assist)
lamps
 → page 126
Or: collision warning from pedes-
trian detection → page 127
Warning and indicator lamps indicate a number
of warnings → , faults → or other specific Rear Traffic Alert detected an ob-
functions. Some warning and indicator lamps  stacle when reversing
→ page 145
light up when the ignition is switched on and
should go out once the engine is running or the Driver or front passenger seat belt
vehicle is in motion.  not fastened.
→ page 30
Depending on the version, additional text mes-
sages could appear in the display on the instru- Fault in the alternator.
ment cluster to provide further information or to  → page 209
ask you to perform certain tasks → page 14. Central warning lamp. Observe the
Depending on the vehicle equipment level, sym-  additional information displayed
on the instrument cluster.
bols may be displayed in the instrument cluster
instead of warning lamps. Lit: ESC damaged or switched off
by the system.
Sound signals can also be heard when certain → page 146
warning or indicator lamps light up.  Flashing: ESC or TCS enabled and
Symbol Meaning → running.
Central warning lamp. Observe the → page 146
Traction control (TCS) manually
 additional information displayed
on the instrument cluster.  disabled.
→ page 146
 Stop driving!
Collision warning disabled.
 Parking brake engaged.
→ page 136  → page 126

 Stop driving! Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) not


Brake fluid level too low or faulty  available.
→ page 121
brake system.
→ page 208 Lane keeping assist (Lane Assist)
 Stop driving!
 off. → page 130
Coolant temperature too high or Faulty blind spot sensor
 engine coolant level too low.  → page 132
→ page 205 The Rear Traffic Alert brakes
 Stop driving!  → page 145

 Engine oil pressure too low.

→ page 201 
ABS faulty or not functioning.
→ page 146
Flashing:  Stop driving! Steering Fog light switched on.
damaged.  → page 78
→ page 113 Driving illumination partially or to-
 On: electromechanical steering not  tally out of order.
working. → page 185
→ page 113 Fault in pollutant emission control
 system.
→ page 179 

12 Owner's Manual
 Symbol Meaning → Symbol Meaning →
Fault in electronic engine output Normal driving mode.
 control.  → page 114
→ page 179 Sport driving mode.
Reduced electromechanical steer-  → page 114
 ing.
→ page 113
Service reminder or service about

Tyre pressure to low or damaged

 to become due.
→ page 23
 tyre pressure control system.
→ page 214
Charge status of the connected
mobile phone battery.


Fuel tank almost empty.
→ page 17
 Only when activated by the facto-
ry-fitted mobile phone interface
On: Engine oil level very low. → page 156.
→ page 201 Front Assist system startup.
 Flashing: engine oil system dam-  → page 126
aged. Distance warning.
→ page 201  → page 126
Fault in front belt tensioner system Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) cali-
 or airbag.
→ page 38
 brating; vehicle detected in front.
→ page 121.
Automatic gearbox: damage in the Speed limiter on.
 automatic gearbox.  → page 119
→ page 108 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) cali-
Left or right turn signals. brating; no vehicle detected in
→ page 77  front.
Hazard warning lights switched on. → page 121
 → page 53 Outside temperature below +4° C.
Emergency brake activation lights.  → page 18
→ page 54 Instructions regarding vehicle wal-
On: Step on the brake pedal! (start  let information.
the engine).
→ page 108 WARNING
 Flashing: the interlock button of Failure to observe the warning lamps could
the selector lever is not engaged. lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic,
→ page 108 and to accidents and serious injuries.
Cruise control system (GRA) on. ● Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
 → page 118 sages that appear.
Lane keeping assist (Lane Assist) ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and
 active.
→ page 130
when safe to do so.
● Stop the vehicle at a safe distance away from
Main beam is switched on or the moving traffic and ensure that no part of the
 headlight flasher is being operated.
→ page 77
exhaust system can come into contact with
any inflammable material underneath the
Start-Stop system enabled. vehicle, e.g. dry grass, fuel or oil, etc.
 → page 105 ● Broken-down vehicles lacking due signalling
Start-Stop system not available. increase the risk of accidents both for you
 → page 105 and for other road users. Always switch on
25A.5L1.TCR.20

the hazard warning lights and set up the

Eco
 → page 114 driving mode.
warning triangle to warn other road users. 

Driver's information 13
● Before opening the engine compartment After starting the engine with the vehicle's bat-
cover, switch off the engine and allow it to tery completely flat, or with a replacement bat-
cool down sufficiently. tery in the vehicle, the system's configuration
(time, date, comfort and programming configura-
● The engine compartment of any motor vehi-
tions) may have been deleted or become corrup-
cle is a dangerous area and may cause severe
ted. Check and adjust the settings after the vehi-
injuries → page 196, Safety guidelines for
cle battery has been sufficiently recharged.
work in the engine compartment.
WARNING
NOTICE
Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is
Failure to observe the illuminated indicator
distracted.
lamps could lead to vehicle damages. 
● Never operate the instrument cluster's but-
tons while the vehicle is in motion.
● To prevent the risk of accidents and injuries
proceed with all the settings of the indica-
Instrument cluster tors of the instrument cluster's display and
those of the radio system's display only
when the vehicle is stopped. 
 Introduction

According to it's version, the vehicle may be

equipped with a digital instrument cluster (Active
Info Display) version 1 or version 2.

Digital instrument cluster (Active Info Display) - version 1

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 14.

Fig. 9 Active Info Display on the dash panel (version 1).

Depending on the vehicle version and country,

The Active Info Display is a digital instru- the digital instrument cluster (version 1) and the
ment cluster with a high resolution colour trip data display functions may not be available. 
TFT display. Through the selection of dif-
ferent information profiles other round
classic instruments can be displayed, such
as rev counter or speedometer.

14 Owner's Manual
 OR
Explanations to the instruments → Fig. 9:
1 Engine temperature indication  – Standard: no additional displays.
→ page 18. – Profile 1: the profile can be configured based
2 Rev. counter (running engine speed in revo- on the user's preferences.
lutions x 1.000 per minute) → page 17. – Profile 2: the profile can be configured based
3 Information profile indicator. The displayed on the user's preferences.
content varies according to the selected in-
formation profile. To configure Profile 1 or Profile 2, select one of
the profiles on the radio display:
4 Display indicators → page 18.
1 Touch one of the round instruments to open
5 Speedometer (speed indicator).
the indicator menu.
6 Fuel gauge → page 17.
2 The following indicators can be selected:
7 Digital speed display. – Range
8 Currently engaged gear or selector lever po- – Audio
sition → page 108.
– Acceleration
Information profiles – Indicator
– Distance covered
Different information profiles specifically related
to certain themes can be selected via the button – Travel time
 in the radio system, in the function button 3 Next, click SAVE to save the changes made to
 , select Active Info Display OR on the main the profile.
screen of the radio display, slide once to the left
and select Active Info Display . Navigation map on the Active Info Display
According to the radio version and theselected Depending on the vehicle version and country,
information profile, additional information is the navigation map may not be available for
shown at the centre of the round instruments viewing in the instrument cluster.
→ Fig. 9 3 of the Active Info Display. The follow- According to the version, the Active Info Display
ing information profiles can be selected: can display a detailed map. For this select Naviga-
– Classic: without additional displays. tion on the instrument cluster menu → page 24.
– Consumption & Fuel range: digital display of The navigation map can be displayed in two win-
average consumption and graphic display of dow sizes. When the bigger display size is chos-
the current fuel consumption in the centre of en, the round instruments will be hidden. To ad-
the rev counter. Digital fuel range display in just the desired map size, proceed as follows:
the centre of the speedometer. – Press the  button on the multifunction
– Efficiency: digital display of average consump- steering wheel → page 25 to toggle between
tion and graphic display of the current fuel map sizes.
consumption in the centre of the rev counter. – OR: press the arrow button  or  on the
– Navigation: driving to destination active, dis- multifunction steering wheel to select the de-
play of the remaining distance to destination sired map display size. The selection is marked
and time of arrival in the centre of the rev by a border.
counter and arrow navigation in the centre of – Confirm the selection by pressing the  but-
the speedometer. With driving to destination ton on the multifunction steering wheel.
inactive, altitude display in the centre of the
rev counter and compass display in the centre According to the version, the navigation is dis-
of the speedometer. played on just one screen. The navigation map
– Driver assist system: graphic representation of can be shown in the Active Info Display or the ra-
different driver assist systems or digital travel dio system. In last case, only the navigation ar-
rows are displayed on the Active Info Display. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

time display in the centre of the rev counter.

Arrow navigation or compass display in the
centre of the speedometer.

Driver's information 15
Digital instrument cluster (Active Info Display) - version 2
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 14.

Fig. 10 Active Info Display on the dash panel (version 2).

– Summary: after completing the readiness

The Active Info Display is a digital instru- check: displays information on vehicle status
ment cluster with a high resolution colour in areas 1 , such as current mileage.
TFT display. Additional content may be – Digital view: digital speedometer with infor-
displayed by selecting different profiles mation profiles.
and indicators. – Speed: classic speedometer representation as
a round gauge.
Depending on the vehicle version and country, – Rev. counter: classic rev. counter representa-
the digital instrument cluster (version 2) and the tion as a round gauge.
trip data display functions may not be available.
Information profiles
Explanations to the instruments → Fig. 10: The information profiles 1 can be configured or
1 Information profile indicator. hidden separately from each other. Multiple data
can be displayed on driving, navigation warnings
2 Time and temperature.
or information regarding audio playback or the
3 Main display area. phone interface.
4 Currently engaged gear or selector lever po-
Selecting driving profiles:
sition.
– In the multifunction steering wheel, press 
5 Driver assistance enabled..
or  to select the right or left information
6 Range. profile area.
– Use the arrow buttons  or  to select the
Main indicator desired information profile.
Depending on the vehicle version, the informa-
– Press  to confirm the selection.
tion available in the cluster may not be available.
Selecting driving profiles in the round gauge:
The main display → Fig. 10 3 can be switched by
pressing View on the multifunction steering – To select a driving profile in the main display
wheel. The representation in the display area can 3 with view adjusted to round gauge, pro-
show the following views: ceed as follows:
– Use the arrow buttons  or  to select the
desired information profile.
– Press  to confirm the selection. 

16 Owner's Manual
 Tachometer (Rev counter)
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 14.

The start of the red zone on the rev counter indi-

cates the maximum engine speed of a run and
warm engine for each selected gear. Change to
the next higher gear, position the selector lever
to D/S or relieve the accelerator pedal before the
needle reaches the red zone → . Fig. 12 On the digital instrument cluster: fuel
gauge (version 2).
NOTICE
● While the engine is cool, avoid high rotations, The fuel gauge may vary depending on the vehi-
total acceleration and increased engine load. cle model → Fig. 11 or → Fig. 12.
● To avoid engine damages, the rev. counter
needle must not remain in the red area of the  Fuel tank almost empty
scale for more than a short period of time. The yellow indicator lamp must light up. The re-
serve fuel (red mark) will be consumed → .
Switching to higher gears in advance helps – Fill the tank as soon as possible → .
save fuel and reduce operating noises. 
When switching the ignition on, certain warning
and indicator lamps flash to check functions.
Such lamps go out after a few seconds.
Fuel gauge
WARNING
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
Driving the vehicle when the fuel level is too
on page 14.
low could lead to your vehicle breaking down in
traffic, accidents and serious injuries.
● When the fuel level is too low, the fuel sup-
ply to the engine could be irregular, especial-
ly when driving up or down hills and inclines.
● The steering, all driver assist systems and
brake assist systems will not function if the
engine stops due to a lack of fuel or irregular
fuel supply.
● Always fill the tank when it is still 1/4 full.
This reduces the risk of running out of fuel
and breaking down.

NOTICE
Fig. 11 On the digital instrument cluster: fuel ● Failure to observe the illuminated indicator
gauge (version 1). lamps and its descriptions and meanings could
lead to vehicle damages.
● Do not run the tank completely empty. Irregu-
lar filling periods can cause backfiring and al-
low unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system.
This could damage the catalytic converter! 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Driver's information 17
 The small arrow next to the fuel pump sym- A Cold zone. The engine has not yet reached its
bol → Fig. 11 or → Fig. 12 in the display in-
operating temperature. Avoid engine over-
strument indicates the side of the vehicle on
loading and high rotation while the engine is
which the tank flap is located.  cooled.
B Normal zone.
C Warning zone. Coolant temperature too
Engine coolant temperature high.
indicator
 and  Engine coolant
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter The red centre warning lamp is on. In addition a
on page 14. text message is displayed on the instrument
cluster display.
The engine coolant level is not correct or the
coolant system is faulty.
Stop driving!
– Stop the vehicle, turn the engine off and let it
cool down.
– Check coolant level, if the level is low, refill
with engine coolant → page 206.
– If the warning lamp remains lit despite the
coolant level being correct, then there is a
fault in the system. Contact a Volkswagen
Dealership. 

Fig. 13 Engine coolant temperature indicator in the

digital instrument cluster (version 1): A cold zone;
B normal zone; C warning zone. Display indicators - version 1
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 14.

On the dash panel insert display several different

pieces of information may be displayed according
to the version of the vehicle:
– Doors, bonnet and boot lid open
– Warning and information displays → page 21
– Distance displays
– Time
Fig. 14 Engine coolant temperature indicator in the
digital instrument cluster (version 2): A cold zone; – Exterior temperature
B normal zone; C warning zone. – Selector lever positions (automatic gearbox)
→ page 108
The engine coolant temperature indicator may
vary depending on the vehicle version – Gear recommendation → page 95
→ Fig. 13or → Fig. 14. – Driving data indicator (multifunction display)
and menus for several settings → page 24
– Service interval display → page 23
– Fuel level display → page 17
– Engine coolant temperature display → page 18
– Fuel saving driving status . 

18 Owner's Manual
 Doors, bonnet and boot lid open Engine code
After unlocking the vehicle and during driving, – On the instrument cluster Trip data menu, select
the open doors as well as an open bonnet or an the Fuel range display.
open boot lid are indicated on the display of the – Hold the OK button on the multifunction
instrument cluster as well as announced by steering wheel pressed for about five seconds,
sound alarms. The screen may vary according to upon release, the Services menu will be dis-
the version of the fitted instrument cluster. played → page 23.
Distance displays – Go to the Engine code menu item.
The odometer records the total distance travelled
WARNING
by the car.
There may be ice layers on roads and bridges
The trip recorder (trip) shows the distance travel- even if the exterior temperature is above freez-
led since the trip recorder was last reset. The last ing temperature.
digit stands for 100 m.
● There may be ice layers on roads even if the
– Use the multifunction steering wheel arrows exterior temperature is above +4°C and the
 or  , select the menu Driving data, select the “snowflake symbol” is not indicated on the
trip display and briefly press  on the multi- display.
function steering wheel. ● Never consider only the exterior temperature
indicator! 
Exterior temperature indicator
Whenever the exterior temperature is below
+4°C, a “snowflake symbol”  appears on the ex-
terior temperature indicator (ice on the road). Display indicators - version 2
This symbol remains lit until the outside temper-
ature rises above +6 °C → .  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
If the vehicle is parked or moving at a very low on page 14.
speed, the indicated temperature may be slightly
higher than the actual exterior temperature, due On the dash panel insert display several different
to the heat generated by the engine. pieces of information may be displayed according
to the version of the vehicle:
The measurement range is -40°C to +50°C.
– Doors, bonnet and boot lid open
Selector lever positions (automatic gearbox) – Warning and information displays → page 21
The gear selected is displayed on the side of the – digital
selector lever and on the display in the instru-
– Date and Time
ment cluster. With the selector lever in D/S posi-
tion as well as with Tiptronic, the respective se- – Radio displays
lected gear may be indicated, if the case, on the – Exterior temperature
instrument cluster → page 108. – Selector lever positions (automatic gearbox)
→ page 108
Gear-change indicator
– Gear recommendation → page 95
Depending on the vehicle version, a gear selec-
tion recommendation may be indicated on the – Service interval display → page 23
instrument cluster display to optimize fuel sav- – Fuel saving driving status 
ings → page 95. – Engine code
Radio – Driver assist system display
In some versions, certain radio functions are indi- – Cooling fan return display
cated on the instrument cluster display only – Driving data indicator (multifunction display)
while the vehicle is running. and menus for several settings → page 24
25A.5L1.TCR.20

– Engine oil temperature

– Phone guidance 

Driver's information 19
Doors, bonnet and boot lid open WARNING
After unlocking the vehicle and during driving,
There may be ice layers on roads and bridges
the open doors as well as an open bonnet or an
even if the exterior temperature is above freez-
open boot lid are indicated on the display of the
ing temperature.
instrument cluster as well as announced by
sound alarms. The screen may vary according to ● There may be ice layers on roads even if the
the version of the fitted instrument cluster. exterior temperature is above +4°C and the
“snowflake symbol” is not indicated on the
Automatic gearbox selector lever positions display.
The gear selected is displayed on the side of the ● Never consider only the exterior temperature
selector lever and on the display in the instru- indicator! 
ment cluster. The gearshift pattern is shown
when pressing the brakes or the selector lever on
the instrument cluster → page 16.
Multifunction displays
Exterior temperature indicator
Whenever the exterior temperature is below  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
+4°C, a “snowflake symbol”  appears on the ex- on page 14.
terior temperature indicator (ice on the road).
This symbol remains lit until the outside temper- There are several representations of driving data
ature rises above +6 °C → . available in the information profiles.

If the vehicle is parked or moving at a very low Depending on the vehicle version, different driv-
speed, the indicated temperature may be slightly ing data may be displayed. Driving data displayed
higher than the actual exterior temperature, due vary according to the driver's driving behaviour,
to the heat generated by the engine. the vehicle's conditions and the current driving
conditions (e.g. urban traffic, highways). Driving
The measurement range is -40°C to +50°C. data are determined as a medium value in sec-
tions of different lengths. Therefore, the value
Gear-change indicator
currently shown may differ from the actual medi-
Depending on the vehicle version, a gear selec- um value.
tion recommendation may be indicated on the
instrument cluster display to optimize fuel sav- Resetting multifunction displays
ings → page 95. – Press  or  to reset multifunction displays.
Fuel saving driving status  – Use the arrow buttons  or  to select the
respective multifunction display in the settings
While driving, the instrument cluster display
menu.
shows the vehicle's fuel saving driving status .
– In the submenu, select Restore data and press 
Engine code to confirm.
– Open the Service → page 23 menu.
Phone
– Go to the Engine code menu item.
If the Phone information profile is enabled and a
Radiator fan return display mobile phone is connected via Bluetooth®, the
instrument cluster display will show the Blue-
This display is shown after completing the driv-
tooth®  symbol. In addition, the symbol indi-
ing readiness check and if the radiator fan is in
cates the mobile phone's battery level.
return.
Subsequent radiator fan operation time may be When not driving for more than two hours,
conditioned by: the Since start memory is reset. The Since refu-
elled memory is reset after refuelling. The Long
– Active brake cooling after downhill driving.
term memory is not reset automatically.
– Engine heat dissipation after high load (e.g.
● The memory collects the driving data for up to
towing a trailer).
19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59
minutes of travel time or 1,999.9 km or
9,999.9 km of driven distance. When one of 

20 Owner's Manual
 these maximum marks is surpassed, the mem- Information text.
ory is deleted. The maximum marks vary ac- Information about various procedures within the
cording to the version of the instrument clus- vehicle.
ter.
According to the version some adjustments
If warning messages are shown regarding and displays may be made/seen on the ra-
operational faults after switching on the ig- dio system.
nition, some settings or information displayed
may be different than described. In this case, op- When there are several warnings, the icons
erating fault repairs must be made at a will be displayed in sequence a few seconds
Volkswagen Dealership.  each. The symbols will appear until the faults are
rectified. 

Warning and information texts

Driver alert system (interval
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter recommendation)
on page 14.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
The system runs a check on certain components on page 14.
and functions in the vehicle when the ignition is
switched on or while the vehicle is in motion.
Function faults are indicated by red and yellow
warning symbols with warning and information
text messages on the instrument cluster display
(→ page 12), and, if required, also by acoustic
alarms. The display of the icons and texts may
vary according to the fitted instrument cluster.
Existing functional faults can also be accessed Fig. 15 On the instrument cluster display: driver
manually. To do so, access the Vehicle status menu alert system icon.
→ page 24.

Priority 1 warning message The driver alert system warns the driver
The red central warning lamp blinks or is on - when his driving attitude indicates tired-
partly in association with warning buzzers or ad- ness.
ditional symbols.  Stop driving! Dangerous sit-
uation. Check the damaged function and elimi-
nate its cause. Seek assistance from a Depending on the vehicle version, the driver alert
Volkswagen Dealership, if necessary. system indicator may not be available.

Function and operation

Priority 2 warning message The driver alert system senses the driving behav-
The yellow central warning lamp blinks or is on -
partly in association with warning buzzers or ad- iour at the beginning of a trip and from this de-
ditional symbols. Faulty functions or lack of fluids rives possible weariness indications. This is con-
may damage or interrupt vehicle operation. stantly compared to the actual driving behaviour.
Check the faulty function as soon as possible. Should the system detect signs of fatigue of the
Seek assistance from a Volkswagen Dealership, if driver, it sounds a “gong” alarm and displays a
necessary. visual warning with an icon → Fig. 15 on the dis-
play of the instrument cluster together with a
 Guidance on information in the owner's supplementary text message. The text message
on the instrument cluster display is displayed for
manual
about 5 seconds and, if necessary, is repeated
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Further guidance on the current warning mes-

sage can be found in the owner´s manual. once. The last message is saved by the system. 

Driver's information 21
The message on the instrument cluster display encourage the driver to take risks. When driv-
can be turned off by pressing the  button ing over longer distances take regular and long
on the wipers lever or the  button on the mul- enough breaks.
tifunction steering wheel → page 24. The mes-
● The driver is ultimately always responsible
sage on the instrument cluster display may be
for his driving capacity.
accessed again through the multifunction indica-
tor → page 21. ● Never drive a vehicle when tired.
● The system does not recognize a low level of
Operating conditions alertness under all circumstances. Observe
Driving behaviour is only assessed at speeds be- the information provided in section “Opera-
tween 60km/h and approximately 200km/h. tional limitations” → page 22.
● In some situations the system may incorrect-
Turning on and off ly interpret an intentional driving manoeuvre
Depending on the vehicle and radio version, the for lack of alertness from the driver and an
Driver Alert System can be activated or deactiva- indication for weariness.
ted through the radio system with the selection ● No critical warning is sounded for episodes
surface  OR by the selection surface  . Sim- of the so called “microsleep (napping at the
ply touch the function button Car → page 26. steering wheel)”!
Operating limitations ● Pay attention to the indications on the in-
The alertness detection system has system limi- strument cluster display and follow the cor-
tations. The following conditions may cause the responding instructions.
alertness detection system to operate only in a The alertness detection system was solely
limited way or not to operate altogether: developed for driving on highways and well
– Speeds below 60 km/h. paved roads.
– Speeds above 200 km/h. In case of malfunction, seek assistance from
– Curvy stretches. a Volkswagen Dealership. 
– Roads in poor condition.
– Unfavourable climate conditions.
– When the driver is too inattentive. Time
Under the following conditions the driver alert  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
system gets reset: on page 14.
– Ignition is turned off.
Time setting by way of the radio system
– Driver's safety belt is loose and the driver door
is open. Depends on the radio and vehicle version.
– The vehicle is standing still for over 15 mi- – Press the radio  button.
nutes. – Touch the function button  to open the Vehi-
When driving over a longer period at low speed cle Settings menu.
(less than 60 km/h), the assessment is automati- – Select the menu item Date and time to set the
cally reset by the system. When driving faster time → page 26.
later on, the driving behaviour is recalculated. – OR
– Touch the  function button.
WARNING
– Touch the Car function button to open the
The intelligent alertness detection technology menu.
is not able to overcome physical limitations and
operates only within the limitations of the sys- – Select the menu item Date and time to set the
tem. The higher level of convenience provided time → page 26. 
by the alertness detection system should not

22 Owner's Manual
 Time setting by way of the digital instrument Reset the oil change service
cluster (Active Info Display - version 1) Select the Reset oil service menu and follow the in-
– On the menu Trip data, select the Range display. structions on the digital instrument cluster dis-
– Keep the OK button on the multifunction play.
steering wheel pressed for about five seconds,
Reset the inspection service
upon release, the services menu will be dis-
played on the digital instrument cluster display Select the Reset inspection menu and follow the in-
→ page 23. structions on the digital instrument cluster dis-
play.
– Select the Time menu.
– Set the time with the arrow buttons  or  . Reset the trip recorder in the digital
instrument cluster (version 1)
Time setting by way of the digital instrument
To reset the trip recorder, select the Reset trip
cluster (Active Info Display - version 2)
menu and follow the instructions on the digital
– Open the Service → page 23 menu. instrument cluster display.
– Select the Time menu
Engine code
– Select the Time menu.
Select the Engine code menu. The engine code is
– Set the correct time with the OK button. 
displayed on the digital instrument cluster dis-
play.

Services Menu Set the time

Select the Time menu and set the correct time
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter with the arrow buttons  or  .
on page 14.
Copyrights
Depending on the vehicle version, settings may Select the Copyright menu to access copyright in-
be configured using the Service menu of the digi- formation. 
tal instrument cluster (Active Info Display).

Open the Service menu in the digital

instrument cluster (version 1) Service interval display
On the Trip data menu of the instrument cluster
select the Range indicator and keep the OK but-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 14.
ton on the multifunction steering wheel pressed
for about five seconds, upon release the Service
The service interval indicators show on the in-
menu is displayed. Browse through the menu us-
strument cluster display or on the radio system
ing the multifunction steering wheel buttons.
display.
Open the Service menu in the digital There being different instrument cluster and ra-
instrument cluster (version 2) dio system versions available, display indications
Access the Travel type/trip information profile. On may vary.
the Travel type/trip, press and hold  or  on the
multifunction steering wheel in the same direc- Service warning
tion for 6 seconds. Browse through the menu us- When a service is becoming due, a service warn-
ing the arrow buttons  and  . ing is displayed when turning the ignition on.
The mileage or specified interval time correspond
Reset the service interval display
to the mileage or interval until the next service. 
Select the Service menu and follow the instruc-
tions on the digital instrument cluster display.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Driver's information 23
Service reminder Dash panel insert operation
When a service is about to become due a warn-
ing is sounded and, for a brief instant, the
wrench icon  may be displayed on the instru-  Introduction
ment cluster display along with other displays:
– Service now! Some menu options can only be called up when
the vehicle is stationary.
Access the service deadline
With the ignition turned on and the vehicle sta- The multifunction display is operated exclusively
tionary, it is possible to access the current service through the multifunction steering wheel but-
deadline. tons.
Service deadline access via the radio system, de- WARNING
pends on the vehicle and radio versions.
Drivers distracted while driving could lead to
– Press the radio  button.
accidents and injuries.
– Touch the function button  to open the Vehi-
● Never access the instrument cluster menus
cle Settings menu.
while the vehicle is in motion. 
– Select the Service item on the menu to display
the service information.
– OR
Dash panel insert menus
– Touch the  function button.
– Touch the Car function button to open the  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
menu. on page 24.
– Select the Service settings item on the menu to
view service information. The scope of the menus and information indica-
tors depends on the electronic components ship-
Checking the service interval on the digital instru-
ped with the vehicle and vehicle version scope.
ment cluster (Active Info Display).
– The service interval can be checked in the Serv- Some menu options can only be accessed with
ice menu → page 23. the engine running.
Trip data → page 20
Resetting the service interval display
Audio → page 156
If the service was not performed by a
Phone → page 156
Volkswagen Dealership, the instrument cluster
display can be reset as follows: Vehicle status → page 24 
The service interval display can only be reset via
the Service menu → page 23.
Do not reset the display between service inter-
vals. This may result in incorrect displays.
If the oil change service has been manually reset,
the service interval will also switch to fixed serv-
ice interval in vehicles with flexible oil change
service.
The service message will disappear after a
few seconds with the engine running or af-
ter pressing the OK button on the multifunction
steering wheel. 

24 Owner's Manual
 Operation by way of the – To show and navigate the menu, press 
or  → Fig. 16 or → Fig. 17.
multifunction steering wheel
– To access the menu or the information display
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter screen, press OK or wait a few seconds for the
on page 24. menu or the information screen to open on its
own.

Changing the menu settings

– On the displayed menu use the arrow buttons
 or  → Fig. 16 or → Fig. 17 to select the
desired item.
– Press OK → Fig. 16 or → Fig. 17 to confirm the
selected change. A “tick-off sign” indicates
that the function or system is enabled.
– When the selection box on the function button
is ticked off , the corresponding function is
enabled.

Returning to the main menu

Press the  button or select Return menu item.
Fig. 16 Right hand side of the multifunction steer-
ing wheel (version 1): menu operation and instru-
VIEW button in the multifunction steering
ment cluster information exhibit buttons.
wheel (version 2)
Vehicles with digital instrument cluster (Active
Info Display - variant 1): The VIEW
→ page 25button can be used to switch between
the classic representation of round instruments
and the enlarged view with highlighted informa-
tion profiles. In the classic view, large round indi-
cators are shown to the left and right, and the
selected information profile is displayed in the
middle. Press and hold the VIEW button to select
the list of preset information profiles

(Clássico) View without information profiles.

(Automático) Information profiles adapt to the
chosen driving profile. Only in vehicles with
Fig. 17 Right hand side of the multifunction steer- driving profile selection.
ing wheel (version 2): menu operation and instru-
ment cluster information exhibit buttons. Entrada de memória 1, 2 e 3 Individual selec-
tion of information profiles. 
While a priority 1 warning message is displayed,
it is not possible to call up any menu. All warning
messages automatically disappear after a few
seconds. In addition, some warning messages
can be confirmed and hidden using the OK but-
ton on the multifunction steering wheel.

Menu or information screen selection

– Switch on the ignition.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

– If the vehicle pictogram or a message appears,

press OK → Fig. 16 or→ Fig. 17, or press multi-
ple times, if necessary.

Driver's information 25
Vehicle settings menu Safety

 Introduction Overall guidelines

In the Infotainment system vehicle set-

tings, you can switch individual functions
and systems on and off as well as carry
out settings.

Accessing the Vehicle settings menu

– Switch on the ignition.
– Case required turn the radio system on.
– Press the radio  button.
– Touch the function button  to open the Vehi-
cle Settings menu.
– Touch the respective function buttons on the Fig. 18 Driver side mat attached to the floor pin.
Vehicle settings menu to access other menus or
to configure the menu items. Preparations for travel and driving safety
Observe the following information both before
System configurations and vehicle and during every journey to ensure your own
information exhibits safety, and the safety of all passengers and other
Depending on the vehicle version, some informa- road users→ :
tion and settings can be performed on the main  Check that all lights and turn signals are
radio screen, dragging to the left and selecting working properly.
the respective function:
 Check the tyre pressure (→ page 219) and
– Trip data. fuel level (→ page 14).
– Vehicle status.  Ensure that you have a good, clear view
– Operating mode → page 114. through all of the windows.
– Active Info Display → page 14.  The supply of air to the engine may not be
suppressed and the engine should not be
– Off-road display → page 115.
covered with covers or insulating materials
→ in Safety guidelines for work in the en-
WARNING
gine compartment on page 197.
Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is
 Secure any objects and luggage in the stow-
distracted. Operation of the radio system may
age compartments, the luggage compart-
distract from the surrounding traffic happen-
ment or on the roof → page 166.
ings.
 Ensure that you are able to operate the ped-
● Always drive carefully and responsibly.
als freely at all times.
After starting the engine with the vehicle's  Secure any children travelling in the vehicle
12 V battery completely flat, or with a re- in a restraint system suitable for their weight
placement battery in the vehicle, the system's and size → page 45.
configuration (time, date, convenience and pro-  Adjust the front seats, headrests and mirrors
gramming configurations) may have been de- properly in accordance with the size of the
leted or become corrupted. Check and adjust the occupants → page 28.
settings after the 12 V vehicle battery has been
 Wear proper shoes that provide good grip for
sufficiently recharged. 
your feet when using the pedals. 

26 Owner's Manual
 Preparations for travel and driving safety  Is there unleaded petrol with the correct oc-
(Continued) tane number and free of metallic additives
 The floor mat in the footwell on the driver (such as manganese) in the destination coun-
side must be securely fastened to ensure the try?
pedal area is unobstructed. Depending on  Are the correct engine oil (→ page 201) and
the version of the vehicle, the driver mat may other service fluids that comply with
be attached to the floor mat pin → Fig. 18. Volkswagen specifications available in the
 Assume a correct sitting position before and destination country?
while driving. This also applies to all passen-  Are special tyres required for travelling in the
gers → page 28. destination country?
 Fasten your seat belt correctly before setting Checks when fuelling
off and keep it properly fastened throughout
the journey. This also applies to all passen- Never carry out any work on the engine or in the
gers → page 30. engine compartment if you are not familiar with
the necessary procedures and the general safety
 Each vehicle occupant must sit in a seat of
requirements, as well as without available re-
their own and must have their own seat belt.
sources, fluids and tools→ page 196! The work
 Never drive if your driving ability is impaired, should be carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership
e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs, among or qualified workshop. Please ensure that the fol-
other substances capable of influencing your lowing points are checked regularly, preferably
perception and reaction. every time you fill the tank:
 Do not allow yourself to be distracted from  Windscreen washer fluid level → page 201
the traffic (e.g. by passengers, telephone
 Engine oil level → page 201
calls, browsing through display menus.)
 Engine coolant level → page 205
 Always adjust speed and driving pattern ac-
cording to visibility, climate, road, and traffic  Brake fluid level → page 208
conditions, under respective speed limits.  Tyre pressure → page 219
 Observe traffic regulations and speed limits.  Vehicle lighting necessary for traffic safety:
 When travelling long distances, stop and – Turn signals
take a break regularly – at least every two – Side light, dipped beam and main beam
hours. headlights
 Carry animals in the vehicle using restraint – Tail light lamps
systems based on their weight and size. – Brake light
Driving abroad – Rear fog lights
– Number plate light
Some countries adopt special safety regulations
and relevant prescriptions for exhaust gases Information about changing bulbs → page 185.
which may differ from the structural condition of
the vehicle. Volkswagen recommends that you DANGER
learn about any legal requirement and the fol- Follow the important safety instructions rela-
lowing issues concerning your destination before ted to the front passenger's front airbag
travelling abroad: → page 47, Installation and child seat usage in
 Does the vehicle need any technical modifi- the vehicle.
cations for driving abroad, e.g. masking or
switching the headlights over? WARNING
 Are the necessary tools, diagnostic equip- Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs,
ment and spare parts available for service medication and/or narcotics can cause serious
and repair work? accidents and fatal injuries. 
 Is there a Volkswagen Dealership in the des-
25A.5L1.TCR.20

tination country?

Safety 27
● Alcohol, drugs, medication and/or narcotics ● All vehicle occupants must assume a correct
can severely impair perception, reaction sitting position before setting off and main-
times and driving safety. This could cause tain this position throughout the trip. This al-
you to lose control of the vehicle. so applies to the use of seat belts.
● The number of vehicle occupants must never
WARNING exceed the number of seats with seat belts
Always observe current traffic regulations and in the vehicle.
speed limits, and think ahead when driving. ● Always secure children in the vehicle with an
Correct interpretation of a driving situation can authorised restraint system suitable for their
make the difference between reaching your height and weight → page 45, Transporting
destination safely and having an accident with children in the vehicle, → page 38, Airbag
severe injuries. system.
● Always keep your feet in the footwell while
NOTICE the vehicle is in motion. Never place your
Volkswagen may not be held liable for damages feet on the seat or on the dash panel and
caused to the vehicle due to low-quality fuel, in- never hold your feet out the window. The
sufficient/incorrect maintenance, and use of airbag and seat belt can otherwise not pro-
non-genuine parts. vide optimal protection and can actually in-
crease the risk of injury during an accident. 
Regular servicing of your vehicle not only
maintains its value, but also ensures that
your vehicle remains roadworthy and in perfect
working order. Servicing work should therefore Dangers of an incorrect sitting
always be carried out in accordance with the position
Volkswagen maintenance guidelines. Under sever
operating conditions it may be necessary to carry  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
out some maintenance jobs prior the next sched- on page 28.
uled service. Additional information on adverse
conditions is available on → page 231, which pri- If the seat belts are not worn or are worn incor-
or reading is essential. Contact a Volkswagen rectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increa-
Dealership for more information.  ses. Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
tion if the seat belt routing is correct. An incor-
rect sitting position considerably impairs the lev-
el of protection provided by the seat belts. This
Adjusting the seat position could lead to severe or even fatal injuries. The
risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially aug-
mented when a triggered airbag hits an occupant
 Introduction who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.
The driver is responsible for all vehicle passen-
gers, especially if they are children.
Number of seats The following list contains examples of sitting
The vehicle has a total of 5 seats: 2 front seats positions that could be dangerous for all occu-
and 3 rear seats. Each seat is equipped with safe- pants.
ty belts.
Whenever the vehicle is in motion:
WARNING – Never stand in the vehicle.
Assuming an incorrect sitting position in the – Never stand on the seats.
vehicle can increase the risk of severe or fatal – Never kneel over the seats.
injuries during a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvre, in the event of a collision or accident, – Never tilt the backrest too far to the rear.
or if the airbags are triggered. – Never lean against the dash panel.
– Never lie on the rear seat. 

28 Owner's Manual
 – Never sit on the front edge of a seat. The following points describe the correct sitting
– Never sit sideways. positions for the driver and passengers.
– Never lean out of a window. Persons who due to their physical build are un-
– Never put your feet out of a window. able to sit correctly in the vehicle should contact
a Volkswagen Dealership to learn about possible
– Never put your feet on the dash panel. special installations. The seat belts and airbags
– Never place your feet on the seat cushion or can only provide a maximum level of protection if
seat backrest. a correct sitting position is assumed. Volkswagen
– Never travel in a footwell. recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for
– Never travel on a seat without wearing the this purpose.
seat belt. Volkswagen recommends the following seating
– Never travel in the internal luggage compart- position for your own safety and to minimize in-
ment. juries in the event of sudden braking manoeuvres
or accidents:
WARNING
Points for the driver:
Any incorrect sitting position in the vehicle in-
– Move the backrest into an upright position so
creases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the
that your back rests fully against it.
event of an accident or sudden driving or brak-
ing manoeuvre. – Adjust the seat so that the distance between
the steering wheel and the driver's chest is of
● All vehicle occupants must maintain a cor-
at least 25 cm → Fig. 19 A and so the driver
rect sitting position and wear their seat belt
can firmly hold the steering wheel by its outer
properly while the vehicle is in motion.
rim with both hands and with slightly flexed
● Sitting in an incorrect position, not fastening arms.
the seat belt, or leaving too short a distance
– The steering wheel must always point towards
to the airbag exposes the occupants to the
the breastbone and not towards the face.
risk of sustaining critical or fatal injuries, es-
pecially if the airbags are triggered and strike – Adjust the driver's seat lengthwise so that the
an occupant who has assumed an incorrect pedals may be reached with slightly flexed legs
sitting position. and so that the distance between the knees

and the dashboard is at least 10 cm → Fig. 19
B.
– Adjust the height so that you can reach the
Correct sitting position highest point of the steering wheel.
– Always leave both feet in the footwell to main-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
tain control of the vehicle at all times.
on page 28.
– Fasten seat belts properly → page 30.

Points for the front passenger:

– Move the backrest into an upright position so
that your back rests fully against it.
– Push the front passenger seat as far back as
possible so that the airbag can provide maxi-
mum protection if it is triggered.
– Always keep your feet in the footwell while
the vehicle is in motion.
– Fasten seat belts properly → page 30. 
Fig. 19 Correct distance between the driver and the
steering wheel, correct seatbelt position and correct
25A.5L1.TCR.20

headrest adjustment.

Safety 29
Points for rear vehicle passengers: seat and keep it fastened properly through-
– Adjust the head rest so its top edge is at the out the trip. This applies to all passengers in
same height as the top of the head → Fig. 19 – any traffic condition.
but not below eye level. Position the back of ● While the vehicle is in motion, secure all chil-
your head as close to the head restraint as dren travelling in the vehicle in a restraint
possible. system suitable for their age, as well as
– In case of short stature individuals, push the properly secured seat belts → page 45,
head restraint all the way down, even if the Transporting children in the vehicle.
head is then located underneath the top edge ● Only start driving when all passengers have
of the head rest. correctly fastened their seat belts.
– For taller people, push the head rest up as far ● Only ever insert the latch plate into the
as possible. buckle of the associated seat, and always en-
– Always keep your feet in the footwell while sure that it engages properly. Using a buckle
the vehicle is in motion. that does not belong to the seat that you are
– Adjust and fasten seat belts properly occupying reduces the level of protection
→ page 30.  and can lead to severe injuries.
● Never let any foreign bodies or liquids enter
the seat belt buckle slot. This could prevent
belt buckles from working properly.
Seat belts ● Never unfasten the seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
● Never allow more than one person to share
 Introduction the same seat belt.
● Never allow children or babies to be trans-
ported on someone's lap, or while being
Check the condition of all seat belts regularly. In
held.
case of damages to belts, connections, automatic
belt retractor, or seat belt latches, the respective ● Never drive wearing loose, bulky clothing
seat belt must be immediately replaced by a (such as an overcoat over a jacket). This
Volkswagen Dealership → . The qualified work- could prevent the seat belts from fitting and
shop must use correct spare parts that are com- functioning properly.
patible with the vehicle, equipment level and
model year. Volkswagen recommends using a WARNING
Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Damaged seat belts are extremely dangerous
and can cause severe or fatal injuries.
WARNING ● Never damage the belt by trapping it in the
Incorrectly fastened or unfastened seat belts door or in the seat mechanism.
increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Seat ● If the belt bands fabric or any other part of
belts will only offer the optimum level of pro- the seat belt becomes damaged, the seat
tection when they are fastened and used prop- belt may tear during an accident or sudden
erly. braking manoeuvre.
● Seat belts are the most effective means of ● Damaged seat belts must be replaced imme-
reducing the risk of severe and fatal injuries diately with new seat belts at a Volkswagen
in case of accidents. For the protection of Dealership. Seat belts used during an acci-
the driver and of all vehicle occupants, seat dent and subjected to stress or belt tension-
belts must always be fastened properly when er activation must be replaced by a
the vehicle is in motion. Volkswagen Dealership. Replacement may be
● Before every trip, each vehicle occupant necessary even if there is no apparent dam-
must assume a correct sitting position, cor- age. The belt anchorage should also be
rectly fasten the seat belt belonging to their checked. 

30 Owner's Manual
 ● Never attempt to repair, modify or remove The seat belt status indication is shown for ap-
the seat belts yourself. All repairs to seat proximately 60 seconds whenever a seat belt is
belts, belt retractors and buckles must be fastened or removed in the rear seats. The indi-
carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership.  cation can be hidden by pressing    on the
instrument cluster display.
If a rear seat belt is removed while driving, the
seat belt status indicator flashes for up to 60
Warning lamp seconds. A sound warning is also activated when
driving at speeds higher than 25 km/h.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 30. WARNING
Incorrectly fastened or unfastened seat belts
increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Seat
belts will only offer the optimum level of pro-
tection when they are used properly. 

Frontal collisions and the laws of

physics
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
Fig. 20 Instrument cluster display warning lamp. on page 30.

Fig. 21 Seat belt status indicator for rear seats in

the instrument cluster display.

An acoustic warning sounds for a few seconds if Fig. 22 Unbelted occupants in a vehicle heading for
the seat belts are not fastened prior to reaching a a brick wall.
speed of approximately 25 km/h or whenever the
seat belts are unfastened while driving. In addi-
tion, the warning lamp flashes  → Fig. 20.
The warning light  switches off when, with the
ignition turned on, the driver and front passenger
have fastened their respective seat belts.

Rear seat belt status indicator

After switching the ignition on, the seat belt sta-
tus indicator → Fig. 21 shows in the instrument
cluster display whether rear seat passengers
have fastened their seat belts. Fig. 23 Unbelted occupants in a vehicle striking a
The symbol indicates that the passenger in brick wall. 

25A.5L1.TCR.20

this seat has fastened the seat belt.

The symbol indicates that the passenger in
 this seat has not fastened the seat belt.

Safety 31
The physical principles involved in a frontal colli- What happens to passengers who
sion are relatively simple. As soon as the vehicle
is in motion → Fig. 22, both the moving vehicle have not fastened their seat belts
and its passengers gain movement energy. Such
energy is known as “kinetic energy”.  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 30.
The higher the vehicle speed and the heavier the
weight of the vehicle, the greater the amount of
energy that will have to be released in the event
of an accident.
However, the most significant factor is the vehi-
cle speed. For example, when the speed doubles
from 25 km/h to approximately 50 km/h (15 mph
to approximately 30 mph), the kinetic energy in-
creases fourfold!
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on the
vehicle speed and weight of the vehicle and pas-
sengers The higher the speed and the heavier the
weight, the greater the amount of energy that
will be released in the event of an accident.
Passengers not wearing seat belts are, therefore, Fig. 24 An unbelted driver is thrown forward.
not “connected” to the vehicle. In the event of a
frontal collision they will continue to move for-
ward at the same speed at which the vehicle was
travelling before impact, until something stops
them. Because the passengers in our example are
not restrained by seat belts, the entire amount of
kinetic energy will only be released at the point
of impact against the wall → Fig. 23.
At a speed of approximately 50 km/h (30 mph),
the forces acting on the body during an accident
can easily exceed one tonne (1,000 kg). These
forces are even greater at higher speeds.
This example applies not only to frontal colli-
sions, but to all kinds of accidents and collisions.  Fig. 25 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown for-
ward violently, hitting the belted driver.

Many people believe that they can brace their

weight with their hands in a minor collision. This
is not true.
Even at low speeds, the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that occupants
cannot brace themselves with their arms and
hands. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers
are thrown forward and will make unchecked
contact with parts of the vehicle interior, e.g. the
steering wheel, dash panel, or windscreen
→ Fig. 24.
The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat
belts. When triggered, airbags only provide addi-
tional protection. Airbags are not triggered in all
kinds of accidents. Even if the vehicle is equipped 

32 Owner's Manual
 with an airbag system, all vehicle occupants, in- Passengers wearing seat belts correctly benefit
cluding the driver, must fasten their seat belt and greatly from the ability of the belts to reduce the
wear it correctly while the vehicle is in motion. kinetic energy generated. The front crumple
This reduces the risk of severe or fatal injuries in zones and other passive safety features (such as
the event of an accident - regardless of whether the airbag system) are also designed to mitigate
an airbag is available. kinetic energy. The amount of energy generated
will thus decrease, thereby reducing the risk of
An airbag can only be triggered once. To achieve
injury.
best possible protection, seat belts must always
be worn properly. This also ensures that protec- The illustrated examples describe frontal colli-
tion is provided in accidents in which the airbag sions. Properly worn seat belts also substantially
is not triggered. Any vehicle occupant not wear- reduce the risk of injury in all other types of acci-
ing a seat belt can be thrown out of the vehicle dents. This is why seat belts must be fastened
and sustain even more severe or even fatal inju- before every trip - even if your only planning on
ries as a result. going “around the block”. Ensure that all passen-
gers also wear their seat belts properly.
It is also essential for rear passengers to wear
seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be Accident statistics have shown properly worn
thrown forward violently in an accident. Rear seat belts to be an effective means of substan-
passengers who are not wearing seat belts en- tially reducing the risk of injury and improving
danger not only themselves and the driver, but the chances of survival in severe accidents. Fur-
also other people in the vehicle → Fig. 25.  thermore, properly worn seat belts ensure proper
airbag operation in case of accidents. This is why
wearing a seat belt is a legal requirement in most
countries.
Seat belts protect
Although the vehicle is equipped with airbags,
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter seat belts must be used at all times. For example,
on page 30. the front airbags will only be triggered in certain
types of frontal collision. Front airbags will not
be triggered during minor frontal collisions, mi-
nor side collisions, rear collisions, rolls or acci-
dents in which the airbag trigger threshold in the
control unit is not exceeded.
Therefore, always wear your seat belt and ensure
that your passengers have fastened their seat
belts properly before driving. 

Using seat belts

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 30.
Fig. 26 Driver restrained by a properly positioned
seat belt during a sudden braking manoeuvre. Checklist

Correctly fastened seat belts can make a major Using seat belts→ :
difference. When fastened properly, seat belts  Check the condition of all seat belts regular-
hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting ly.
positions and considerably reduce the kinetic en-  Keep the seat belts clean.
ergy in the event of an accident. Seat belts also
 Never let any foreign bodies and liquids get
help to prevent uncontrolled movements that
on to the seat belt, the latch plate or into the
25A.5L1.TCR.20

could lead to severe injuries. Additionally, wear-

slot for the seat belt buckle.
ing seat belts properly reduces the risk of being
thrown from the vehicle → Fig. 26.  Do not trap or damage the seat belt and
latch plate (e.g. when closing the door). 

Safety 33
Checklist (Continued)
Fastening and unfastening seat
 Never remove, modify or repair the seat belt belts
or any part of the belt fixture system.
 Always fasten the seat belt correctly before  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
driving and wear it properly while the vehicle on page 30.
is in motion.

Twisted seat belt

If it is difficult to remove the seat belt from the
belt guide, the seat belt may have become twis-
ted if it was returned too quickly into the side
trim: In this case:
– Take hold of the latch plate then slowly and
carefully pull out the seat belt.
– Untwist the seat belt and guide it back slowly
by hand.
Fig. 27 Inserting the seat belt latch plate into the
Fasten the seat belt even if you are unable to un- buckle.
do the twist. However, the twist should not be in
an area of the seat belt that comes into direct
contact with the body! The twist should be cor-
rected immediately by a Volkswagen Dealership.

WARNING
Using seat belts incorrectly increases the risk of
severe or fatal injuries.
● Regularly check to see if the seat belt and its
related parts are in perfect working condi-
tions.
● Keep the seat belts clean. Fig. 28 Removing the seat belt latch plate into the
buckle.
● Do not allow the belt bands to become jam-
med, damaged or to rub on any sharp edges. If worn properly, seat belts hold the vehicle occu-
● Always keep the latch plate and slot in the pants in the correct sitting position during an ac-
buckle free from foreign bodies and liquids.  cident or braking manoeuvre, giving occupants
maximum protection → .

Fastening the seat belts

Fasten seat belts before driving.
– Always properly adjust the front seats and
head rests → page 28.
– Lock the rear seat backrest in it's proper posi-
tion → .
– Gently pull the seat belt through the latch
plate, across the chest and the pelvic area. Do
not twist the seat belt → .
– Insert the latch plate securely into the buckle
of the respective seat → Fig. 27.
– Pull test the seat belt to ensure that the latch
plate is securely locked in the buckle. 

34 Owner's Manual
 Unfastening the seat belts
Unfasten seat belts only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary → .
– Press the red button in the buckle → Fig. 28.
The latch plate is released and springs out.
– Guide the belt back so that it rolls up easily,
without twisting the seat belt and without
damaging the trim.

WARNING
Incorrect seat belt routing can cause severe or
fatal injuries in the event of an accident.
● The seat belts only offer best protection Fig. 30 Correct seat belt routing during pregnancy.
when the backrests are in the proper posi-
tion and the seat belts have been fastened Seat belts only provide an optimum level of pro-
properly according to the occupant's height. tection during an accident and reduce the risk of
● Unfastening seat belts while the vehicle is in severe or fatal injuries when they are routed cor-
motion can lead to severe or fatal injuries in rectly. Correct seat belt bands routing also holds
the event of an accident or sudden braking the vehicle occupants in position so that an in-
manoeuvre. flating airbag can offer the maximum level of

protection. Therefore, always fasten your seat
belt and ensure that the seat belt routing is cor-
rect → Fig. 29.
Seat belt routing An incorrect sitting position can cause severe or
fatal injuries → page 28, Adjusting the seat posi-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter tion.
on page 30.
Correct seat belt routing
– The shoulder part of the seat belt must always
lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck, over or under the arm, or behind the
back.
– The lower seat belt strap must always lie
across the pelvis, never across the stomach.
– The seat belt must always lie flat and firm
against the body. Slightly stretch the seat belt
if necessary → Fig. 29.

Fig. 29 Correct seat belt routing and head rest ad- For pregnant women, the seat belt must be posi-
justment. tioned over the chest and as low as possible over
the pelvis, so that no pressure is exerted on the
lower body – this applies to all pregnancy stages
→ Fig. 30.

Correct seat belt routing according to height

The seat belt routing can be adjusted as follows:
– Belt height adjuster for the front seats
→ page 36.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

– Front seat with height adjustment → page 71. 

Safety 35
 WARNING Belt height adjuster
Incorrect seat belt routing can cause severe in-
juries in the event of an accident or a sudden  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
braking / driving manoeuvre. on page 30.
● The seat belts only offer best protection
when the backrests are in the proper posi-
tion and the seat belts have been fastened
properly.
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on
the centre of the shoulder and never under
the arm or across the neck.
● The seat belt must lie flat and firmly over the
chest.
● The lower seat belt strap must always lie
across the pelvis, never across the stomach.
The seat belt must lie flat and firmly over the
pelvis. Slightly loosen the seat belt if neces-
sary. Fig. 31 Next to the front seats: seat belt height ad-
● For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat juster.
belt must be as low as possible over the pel-
vis around the “bulge” of the belly. The seat belt height adjusters for the front seats
can be used to adjust the seat belt position on
● Do not twist the belt bands while securing
the shoulder area according to the body size, so
the seat belt.
it can be fastened properly:
● Never hold the seat belt away from the body
by hand. – Press and hold the shoulder belt guide as indi-
cated by the arrows → Fig. 31.
● The belt bands should not lie over hard or
fragile objects, such as glasses, pens or keys. – Push the shoulder belt guide up or down so
that the seat belt lies over the middle of the
● Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or
shoulder → page 35, Seat belt routing.
similar items to alter the seat belt routing.
– Let go of the shoulder belt guide.
If a person's physical build prevents them – Pull sharply on the seat belt to check whether
from routing the seat belt properly, contact the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely.
a Volkswagen Dealership to find out about any
special modifications so that the seat belts and WARNING
airbags can provide the optimum level of protec-
tion.  Never adjust the seat belt height when the ve-
hicle is in motion. 

Automatic belt retractor, belt

tensioner and belt roll-back
function
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 30.

Seat belts are part of the vehicle's safety system

→ page 40 and are made up of the following im-
portant functions: 

36 Owner's Manual
 Automatic belt retractor Service and disposal of belt
The safety belts are fitted with an automatic re-
tensioners
triever roller, this device keeps the safety belt ad-
justed to the passenger's body. Full freedom of  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
movement in the passenger's upper body area is on page 30.
made possible when the seat belt is pulled slowly
or when the vehicle is travelling at normal
Seat belts may become damaged during any
speeds. However, the automatic belt retractor
work on the belt tensioners or while removing or
locks the seat belt if the belt is pulled out quickly,
refitting any vehicle parts in conjunction with any
during sudden braking, when driving uphill or
other repair work. Such damages will not always
downhill or around bends, and during accelera-
be noticeable. The consequence may be that the
tion.
belt tensioners could function incorrectly, or not
Seat belt tensioners function at all, in the event of an accident.
Front seat belts are equipped with belt tension- Regulations must be observed to ensure that the
ers and roll-back function. Rear seat belts are not effectiveness of the belt tensioner is not reduced
equipped with these features. and that removed parts do not cause any injuries
or environmental pollution. Volkswagen Dealer-
Belt tensioners are activated by sensors during ships are familiar with such requirements.
severe frontal and rear collisions, tightening the
seat belts against the direction in which they are WARNING
pulled. Safety belt clearances are eliminated
when the belt tensioner is activated, reducing The risk of severe or fatal injuries may be in-
the forward movement of passengers towards creased if the seat belts, automatic belt retrac-
the impact direction. Belt tensioners works to- tors and belt tensioners are not used correctly,
gether with the airbag system. Belt tensioners or if they are repaired by a non-professional. In
are not activated in minor front collisions, rolls or this case, the belt tensioners may not be trig-
accidents in which the threshold in the control gered when they should, or they may be trig-
unit is not exceeded. gered unexpectedly.
● Only Volkswagen → page 242, Accessories,
A fine dust may be generated upon activation.
modifications, repairs and part replacement
This is perfectly normal and does not represent
may carry out repairs, adjustments or remov-
fire risk.
al and refitting of parts in the belt tensioner
Seat belt roll-back function system or seat belts.
The front seat belts are equipped with roll-back ● Belt tensioners and automatic belt retractors
function. cannot be repaired. They must be replaced.
The seat belt roll-back function minimizes seat ● Belt tensioners can only be activated once.
belt force acting over the body in case of acci- Once the belt tensioners are activated, they
dents. must be replaced.

All safety requirements must be observed Airbag modules and belt tensioners may
when the vehicle or components of the sys- contain toxic substances. This product can-
tem are scrapped. Volkswagen Dealerships are not be disposed / discarded along with common
familiar with such requirements.  trash. For your own safety and comfort,
Volkswagen recommends replacing belt tension-
ers and airbag modules only at Volkswagen Deal-
erships. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Safety 37
Airbag system WARNING
The airbag system only supports a single airbag
triggering event. If the airbags are triggered,
 Introduction the airbag system must be replaced.
● Airbags that have been triggered, and any af-
The vehicle is equipped with one front airbag for fected system parts, must immediately be
the driver and one for the passenger. Front air- replaced with new parts that are approved
bags can provide the driver and front passenger by Volkswagen for the vehicle.
with additional chest and head protection if the ● Airbag system repairs and part replacements
seat, seat belts, head rests and, in the case of the must only be carried out by Volkswagen
driver, steering wheel are adjusted and used cor- Dealerships. Volkswagen Dealerships have
rectly. Airbags are meant to provide additional the necessary tools, diagnostic equipment,
protection. Airbags are not a substitute for seat repair information and qualified personnel
belts. Seat belts must always be worn, even for this purpose.
when the vehicle is equipped with front airbags. ● Never use recycled airbag components or
components that have been taken from end-
WARNING of-life vehicles in your vehicle.
Never rely solely on the airbag system for your ● Never alter any components of the airbag
protection. system.
● Even if an airbag is triggered, it only offers
additional protection. WARNING
● The airbag system only enhances protection A fine dust (non-toxic) may be generated upon
if the seat belt is properly used, in order to activation. This is perfectly normal and does
mitigate injuries → page 30, Seat belts. not represent fire risk.
● Before every trip, each vehicle occupant ● The fine dust can cause irritation to the skin
must assume a correct sitting position, cor- and eye membranes and cause breathing dif-
rectly fasten the seat belt belonging to their ficulties, particularly for people suffering
seat and keep it fastened properly through- from asthma or people who have or had oth-
out the trip. er respiratory problems. To help reduce
breathing difficulties, get out of the vehicle
WARNING or open the windows or doors for more fresh
The risk of injury increases if there are any air.
items located between the occupant and the ● If you come into contact with the dust, wash
deployment area of the airbag when it is trig- your hands and face with a mild soap and
gered. This will impinge on the deployment water before eating.
zone of the airbag or the items will be flung ● Do not let the dust get into your eyes or into
against the body. open wounds.
● Never hold any objects in your hand or on ● If dust has entered your eyes, rinse them
your lap while the vehicle is in motion. with water.
● Never transport any objects on the front pas-
senger seat. Objects could enter the deploy- WARNING
ment zone of the airbag during sudden brak-
Cleaning products case the airbag module sur-
ing or driving manoeuvres and then be flung
faces to become porous and brittle. In case of
dangerously through the vehicle interior if
activation, such parts could break and cause se-
the airbag is activated.
vere injuries.
● People, animals or objects must never be in-
● Never apply any chemical or cleaning prod-
between the vehicle's front seat occupants,
ucts to the airbag module surfaces. Use only
the rear side seat occupants and the airbag
damp cloths to clean these areas. 
expansion areas. Ensure this is also followed
by children and passengers.

38 Owner's Manual
 Front passenger front airbag The yellow indicator lamp on the instru-
 ment cluster display lights up briefly after
system type switching on the ignition to test for proper
operation, and goes off after a few sec-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter onds.
on page 38.
Front passenger front airbag disabled.
Front passenger airbag system with front
  The yellow indicator lamp on the cen-
tre console is permanently on → Fig. 32 .
airbag deactivation
Front passenger front airbag.enabled.
The front passenger airbag is manually deactiva-   The yellow indicator lamp on the cen-
ted through a switch activated by the vehicle key
tre console turns off automatically around
→ page 42.
60 seconds after turning the ignition on or
Signs of the airbag system with front passenger after enabling the front passenger front
airbag deactivation: airbag with the key-activated switch
– Front passenger front airbag in the dash panel. → Fig. 32 .
– Indicator lamp  on the Instrument cluster If, with disabled front passenger front airbag, the
display. PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp in the
– Indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG   in upper part of the centre console is not perma-
the upper part of the centre console. nently lit or if it lights up together with the 
indicator lamp on the instrument cluster, the air-
– Indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG   in
bag system may be malfunctioning → .
the upper part of the centre console.
– Key-activated switch next to the dash panel on DANGER
the front passenger side (visible only with
open door). When the airbag system indicator lamp is lit,

there are damages in the airbag system and it
may not trigger correctly, may not trigger at all
or may trigger unexpectedly. This can cause se-
Indicator lamp vere or fatal injuries.
● The airbag system must be checked by a
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter Volkswagen Dealership as soon as possible.
on page 38. ● Never fit a child seat on the front passenger
seat while the airbag system is activated!
The passenger front airbag may be triggered
in an accident, despite damages. 

Troubleshooting
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 38.

 Airbags system or belt tensioner

damaged
The yellow indicator lamp is permanently on. A
Fig. 32 In the upper part of the centre console: message will also be shown on the instrument
front passenger front airbag indicator lamp off  or cluster display.
on . A malfunction was identified in at least one air-
bag or belt tensioner. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Safety 39
– Contact a Volkswagen Dealership. The most important factors regarding airbag trig-
– Belt tensioners and the airbag system must be gering are the type of accident, the vehicle im-
checked. pact area, the angle, the intensity of the impact,
the vehicle structure, and the obstacle to which
  Front passenger front airbag the vehicle collided. Therefore, airbags are not
triggered in all collisions.
disabled
The yellow indicator lamp is permanently on for The airbag system's triggering depends on the
the deactivated front passenger front airbag. intensity of the impact registered by an electron-
The front passenger front airbag is deactivated. ic control unit. If the accident's characteristics do
not fall under the parameters configured in the
– Check whether the front passenger front air- control unit, the airbags are not triggered. Vehi-
bag needs to stay deactivated, for instance, cle damages and cost repairs are used as indica-
while using a child seat on the front passenger tors that they airbag system should have been
seat. triggered. Important factors in the triggering of
the airbag include the nature (hard or soft) of the
  Front passenger front airbag enabled object that the vehicle hits, the angle and inten-
The yellow indicator lamp for the front passenger sity of impact, and the vehicle impact area.
front airbag turns on for approximately 60 sec-
Airbags are merely used as additional safety fea-
onds after turning the ignition on or after acti-
tures for the seat belts in some accidents in
vating the front passenger front airbag with the
which the impact intensity is sufficient to trigger
key-activated switch.
the airbags. Airbags can only be triggered once
The front passenger front airbag is on. and only in certain situations. The seat belts are
– Check whether the front passenger front air- always there to provide protection in situations
bag should remain on.  in which the airbags are not triggered or have al-
ready been triggered. For example, if the vehicle
collides with a further vehicle following the initial
collision, or is hit by another vehicle.
Description and function of the The airbag system is part of the vehicle's overall
airbags passive safety concept. The airbag system can
only work effectively when the occupants are
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter wearing their seat belts correctly and have as-
on page 38. sumed a proper sitting position  → page 28.

The airbag protects the vehicle's occupants in an Components of the vehicle safety concept
accident, cushioning the occupant's movements The following vehicle safety equipment makes up
in case of frontal collisions. the vehicle's safety concept to reduce the risk of
When an airbag is triggered, it is inflated by a gas severe and fatal injuries. Depending on the vehi-
generator. This causes the airbag covers to break, cle version, some of the equipment may not be
and the airbags inflate forcefully to cover their fitted in your vehicle or may not be available at
deployment zones within milliseconds. After all in some countries.
holding vehicle occupants in place, who must al- – Optimised seat belts for all seats.
ways wear their respective seat belts, inflated
– Belt tensioners for the driver and front passen-
airbags release a gas through openings located
ger.
away from the vehicle occupants. This can re-
duce the risk of severe and fatal injuries. A trig- – Belt tension limiter for the driver and front
gered airbag will not always prevent other inju- passenger.
ries such as swelling, bruising and grazing. Heat – Belt height adjuster for the front seats.
by friction can also be generated during an airbag – Seat belt warning lamp .
triggering event.
– Front airbags for driver and front passenger.
Airbags provide no protection for the arms or – Driver and front passenger's airbags.
lower body parts.
– Airbag indicator lamp . 

40 Owner's Manual
 – PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp on Front airbags
the upper part of the centre console.
– PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp on  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
the upper part of the centre console. on page 38.
– Sensors and control units.
– Height-adjustable head restraints optimised
for rear impact.
– Adjustable steering column.
– If necessary, child seat anchoring points on the
rear side seats.
– If necessary, anchoring point for the upper
child seat fastening belt.

Situations in which the front and side airbags

are not triggered:
– If the ignition is switched off during a collision.
– If the impact intensity measured in control
units is too small during frontal collisions. Fig. 33 Location and deployment zone of the driver
– During minor side collisions. front airbag.
– During rear collisions.
– If the vehicle rolls over.
– If the impact intensity measured by the control
unit is insufficient to trigger the airbags.

In case of airbag triggering - Crash detection

function
Whenever airbags are deployed during an acci-
dent, the crash detection functions is activated
and the following actions may occur:
– Vehicle doors unlocking (valid for vehicles
equipped with central locking system)
→ page 59.
– Fuel supply cut off → page 177. Fig. 34 Installation location and expansion zone of
the passenger front airbag.
– Activation of inner vehicle lights → page 82.
– Activation of warning lamps → page 53. In conjunction with the seat belts, the front air-
bag system gives the front occupants additional
Warning lamps may be switched off via the dash
protection for the head and chest in the event of
panel switch. 
a severe frontal collision. Farthest distance from
the front airbag is recommended; at least 25 cm
→ page 28. This allows the front airbags to in-
flate fully when triggered, thus providing maxi-
mum protection.
The driver's front airbag is placed in the steering
wheel→ Fig. 33 and the front airbag for the front
passenger is placed in the dash panel → Fig. 34.
Airbag locations are identified by the text “AIR-
BAG”.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Safety 41
The areas highlighted in red → Fig. 33 and Airbag system parts must never be reused
→ Fig. 34 are covered by the front airbags when in case of vehicle or component scrapping.
triggered (deployment zone). For this reason, you All applicable environment disposal standards
must never leave or attach any items in these must be followed, in addition to other safety
areas → . standards in effect. Volkswagen Dealerships are
familiar with such requirements. 
The airbag covers fold out from the steering
wheel → Fig. 33 or from the dashboard → Fig. 34
when the driver and passenger front airbags are
triggered. The airbag covers remain connected to Switching the passenger front
the steering wheel or the dashboard.
airbag on and off manually with the
DANGER key activated switch
Once triggered, the airbag inflates at high  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
speed. on page 38.
● Always leave the deployment zones of the
front airbags clear.
● Never attach any items, such as drink or tele-
phone holders, GPS, etc., to the covers of the
airbags or anywhere in the airbag deploy-
ment zone.
● Front seat occupants must never carry any
people, pets or objects in the deployment
zone between themselves and the airbags.
● Do not attach objects, such as GPS devices,
to the windscreen above the front passeng-
er's front airbag. Fig. 35 On the dash panel on the front passenger
● Do not attach, line, modify, or place any ma- side: key activated switch to enable or disable the
terials over the centre steering wheel surface front passenger front airbag.
(horn activation) and the front passenger air-
When securing a rear-facing child seat in the
bag module surface, on the dash panel.
front passenger seat, the front passenger front
airbag must be switched off!
WARNING
The front airbags are triggered in front of the Enabling the front passenger front airbag
steering wheel → Fig. 33 and dash panel – Switch off the ignition.
→ Fig. 34.
– Open the front passenger door.
● When driving, always hold the steering – Unfold the vehicle key bit → page 56.
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring: 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. – Using the key bit, turn the key-activated
switch → Fig. 35 → to  .
● Adjust the driver seat in such a way that
there is at least 25 cm between your breast- – Remove the vehicle key from the key activated
bone and the hub of the steering wheel. If switch and fold the key bit inward.
your physical build makes it impossible to – The PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp
fulfil this requirement, you must contact a in the upper part of the centre console lights
Volkswagen Dealership in order to imple- up and turns off after about 60 seconds
ment any necessary modifications. → page 39.
● Adjust the passenger seat so that the dis- – Close the front passenger door.
tance between the passenger and the dash- – While the ignition is switched on, check that
board is as wide as possible. the PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp
in the upper part of the centre console is not
lit → page 39. 

42 Owner's Manual
 Disabling the front passenger front airbag NOTICE
– Switch off the ignition.
Do not leave the vehicle key inserted into the key
– Open the front passenger door. activated switch as this may cause damage to
– Unfold the vehicle key bit → page 56. the door lining, to the dash panel, to the key acti-
– Using the key bit, turn the key-activated vated switch and to the vehicle key when closing
switch → Fig. 35 → to  . the front passenger door. 
– Remove the vehicle key from the key activated
switch and fold the key bit inward.
– Close the front passenger door. Side airbags
– The PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator lamp
in the upper part of the centre console is per-  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
manently lit while the ignition is on → page 39. on page 38.

Disabled front passenger front airbag

indicator
A disabled front passenger front airbag is indica-
ted exclusively by the PASSENGER AIR BAG  
indicator lamp permanently lit in the upper part
of the centre console (  permanently-lit yel-
low light) → page 39.
When the PASSENGER AIR BAG   indicator
lamp in the upper part of the centre console is
not permanently lit or if it is lit together with the
 indicator lamp on the instrument cluster, no
child restraint system must be assembled on the
front passenger seat for safety reasons. The front
passenger front airbag could be triggered in an Fig. 36 On the left side of the vehicle: side airbag
accident. deployment zone.

WARNING
The front passenger front airbag may only be
deactivated in special cases.
● Switch the front passenger front airbag on
and off only while the ignition is switched off
to prevent damages to the airbag system.
● The driver is responsible for the correct posi-
tioning of the switch activated by the key.
● Disable the front passenger front airbag only
when, under special circumstances, there is a
child seat mounted on the passenger seat.
● Enable the front passenger front airbag
again as soon as the child seat is no longer Fig. 37 Front seat side: installation location and de-
being used on the front passenger seat. ployment zone of the side airbags.

NOTICE The side airbags are placed in the driver and front
passenger seat’s backrest outer padding
An insufficiently inserted key blade may get → Fig. 37. Airbag installation locations are identi-
damaged when turning the key in the key activa- fied with the inscription “AIRBAG”. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

ted switch.

Safety 43
The red highlighted areas → Fig. 36 and → Fig. 37 Curtain airbags
are covered by the side airbags when triggered
(deployment zones). For this reason, you must  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
never leave or attach any items in these areas on page 38.
→ .
In the case of a side collision, the side airbags on
the collision side are triggered and thereby re-
duce the risk of injuries to the body parts turned
towards the impact side of the vehicle's occu-
pants.

WARNING
Once triggered, the airbag inflates at very high
speed in a fraction of seconds.
● Leave the deployment zones of the side air-
bags clear.
● People, animals or objects must never be in-
between the vehicle's front seat occupants,
the rear side seat occupants and the airbag Fig. 38 Left side of the vehicle: location and de-
expansion areas. Ensure this is also followed ployment zone of the curtain airbag.
by children and passengers.
The vehicle is fitted with curtain airbags on the
● Hang only light clothes on the vehicle's driver and front passenger side, above the doors
clothing hook. Do not leave any heavy or cut- → Fig. 38.
ting objects in the pockets.
The installation locations of the curtain airbags
● Do not install accessories on the doors.
are identified by the text “AIRBAG”.
● Apply only seat or protective covers express-
ly released for use in the vehicle. Otherwise The area highlighted in red and covered by the
the side airbag may not insufflate when trig- deployed curtain airbag (deployment zone)
gered. → Fig. 38 For this reason, preferably do not place
or secure objects in this area→ .
WARNING Curtain airbags are deployed in the event of a
Inadequate handling of the front seats may side collision.
prevent the side airbags from operating cor- Curtain airbags reduce the risk of injuries for oc-
rectly and cause serious injuries. cupants in the front and rear seats, protecting
● Never remove the vehicle front seats or alter the area of the body facing the side of the colli-
parts thereof. sion.
● When excessively high forces are applied to
WARNING
the side supports of the seats backrest, the
side airbags may not operate correctly, may Once triggered, the airbag inflates at high
not operate at all or be accidentally trig- speed.
gered. ● Leave the deployment zones of the side air-
● Damages to the original seat covers or to the bags clear.
seams in the area of the side airbag modules ● Preferably do not place objects in the cover
must be checked immediately by a or the deployment area of the curtain airbag.
Volkswagen dealership.  ● People, animals or objects must never be in-
between the vehicle's front seat occupants,
the rear side seat occupants and the airbag
expansion areas. Ensure this is also followed
by children and passengers. 

44 Owner's Manual
 ● Hang only light clothes on the vehicle's ● Never leave a child seat facing backwards on
clothing hook. Do not leave any heavy or cut- the front passenger seat without disabling
ting objects in bags. the airbag for risk of possible injuries from
● Do not install accessories on the doors. the triggered airbag.
● Only install window curtains specifically au- ● Volkswagen recommends to always trans-
thorized for use in the respective vehicle. port children of age under 12 years or less
than 1.50 m high on the rear seat.
● Only fold the sun visor towards the side win-
dows if no object is attached to the sun vi- ● Always secure children in the vehicle with an
sor, such as pens or garage door openers.  authorised restraint system suitable to their
height and weight.
● Always fasten children’s seat belts or child
seats, or secure all chairs transported to the
ISOFIX system and ensure the proper sitting
Transporting children in the position.
vehicle ● Ensure that the seat belt routing is correct
for each use condition. If the seat belt must
be passed over the child's body, ensure that
 Introduction the seat belt passes through the child's
shoulder and never through the child's neck.
Child seats reduce the risk of injury in an acci- ● Never allow children or babies to be trans-
dent. Always transport children in child seats, ac- ported on someone's lap, or while being
cording to applicable laws! held.
● Only ever fasten one child into each child
Note:
seat.
– Child seats are grouped according to the
● Read and observe the child seat's manufac-
child's size, age and weight.
turer instructions, especially regarding prop-
– Installing child seats in the vehicle can be exe- er seat belt attachment.
cuted with different retaining systems.
● Replace child seats that withstand any force
For safety reasons child seats must preferably be during an accident as they could have sus-
mounted on the backseats → page 47, Installa- tained damage that may not be visible.
tion and child seat usage in the vehicle.
Before transporting babies and children in child WARNING
seats on the front passenger seat, it is imperative An unsecured, unoccupied child seat could be
to read all airbag system information and learn flung through the vehicle interior in the event
about potential injuries airbag deployment can of a sudden braking manoeuvre or accident.
cause children in the 0 and 0+ group. This could cause injuries.
This information is very important for the safety ● Always secure child seats safely, even if they
of the driver and all passengers, especially babies are not being used, or have it safely stowed
and small children. in the luggage compartment when driving. 
Volkswagen recommends using child seats from
the Volkswagen Original Accessories Program.
These child seats were developed and approved
for use in Volkswagen vehicles.

WARNING
Children who are not strapped in or who are
not strapped in properly could sustain severe or
25A.5L1.TCR.20

fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion.

Safety 45
 Child seat types Country-specific standards for transporting
children in vehicles
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter Child seats must conform to the ECE-R 441)
on page 45. standard (Europe). Additional information can be
obtained from your Volkswagen Dealership and
online at www.volkswagen.com.

Country-specific securing systems

Child seat types → Fig. 39:
A Portable crib or baby convenience seat
B Child seat
C Lifting seat

The systems are made up of attachments for

child restraint systems for children wearing the
seat belt in the rear seat.

Fastening variants → Fig. 40:

Fig. 39 Figures A , B and C illustrate the main D ISOFIX or i-Size retaining eyebolts and top
securing points for the child restraint system for fastening belt, type “Top Tether”
children only wearing the seat belt.
E Universal LATCH and “Top Tether” type se-
curing belt.
F Automatic three-point seat belt and “Top
Tether”.

The systems show the securing of the child re-

straining system with a Top Tether securing belt
and the bottom mounting points on the seat.

Group classification for child seats according

to ECE-R 44
Child's
Weight class Age
weight
up to approximate-
Group 0 up to 10 kg
Fig. 40 On the rear seat: figures D e E illustrate ly 9 months
the securing principle of the child retention system up to approximate-
Group 0+ up to 13 kg
to the bottom retention eyes and the top tether. ly 18 months
Figure C illustrates how to fasten the child re- approximately 8
straint system with the vehicle seat belt and the top Group 1 9 kg to 18 kg months to 31/2
tether.
years
Always secure child seats properly, safely and in 15 kg to 25 approximately 3 to
Group 2
accordance with the installation instructions kg 7 years
from the child seat manufacturer. 22 kg to 36 approximately 6 to
Group 3
The mounted child seat must be secured by the kg 12 years
vehicle's seat belts or the ISOFIX and Top Tether In addition to age range, other aspects must be
system and must not allow any longitudinal or considered for child seat adjustment purposes,
transversal movement. such as weight, height, and physical build of the
child, since the child's biotype may not 

1) ECE Regulation: Economic Commission for Europe-Regelung

46 Owner's Manual
 correspond to the majority of the population muscles and bones are not yet fully developed.
within the same age range. In case of doubts, Children have a higher risk for children of sus-
please contact a Volkswagen Dealership. taining severe injuries in case of an accident.
Child seats that have been tested and approved Children must be transported using child re-
under the ECE R 44 standard bear the test mark straint systems that are specifically suited to
firmly on the seat: a capital E in a circle, below their size, weight and physical build, as children's
the test number. bodies are not yet fully developed.

Child seats by approval categories Country specific specifications

Child seats can have the approval category “uni- In relation to the use of child seats and their se-
versal”, “semi-universal”, “vehicle-specific” (all curing possibilities, there are divergent prescrip-
according to ECE-R 44) or “i-Size” (according to tions and legal determinations in force in the dif-
ECE-R 129). ferent countries. Not all countries allow you to
transport children on the front passenger seat.
(Universal:) “universal” approved child seats are Legislation and legal requirements take prece-
approved for installation in all vehicles. A dence over the descriptions in this Owner's Man-
template list is not required. With universal ual.
approval for ISOFIX, the child seat must be
additionally secured using a top tether strap Guidelines on the installation of a child seat
(Top Tether). On the installation of a child seat, observe the
(Semiuniversal:) a “semi-universal” approval re- following general guidelines. They are valid for all
quires, in addition to the normal require- child seat securing systems.
ments for universal approval, safety devices – Read and follow the child seat manufacturer
to secure the child seat that require addition- instructions → .
al testing. Child seats with “semi-universal”
approval have a list of models in which the – Preferably mount the child seat on the rear
vehicle must be contained. bench seat behind the front passenger seat so
that child may exit the vehicle on the sidewalk
(Específica do veículo:) a vehicle-specific appro- side.
val requires, for each vehicle model, a dy-
namic test of the child seat in the vehicle, – Only assemble child seats with the rear seat in
carried out separately. Child seats with “vehi- the upright position→ page 73, Rear seat
cle specific” approval also have a list of mod- backrest rake adjustment.
els. – Disable the front passenger front airbag when
(i-Size:) child seats with “i-Size” approval must mounting a child seat facing backwards on the
meet the requirements laid down in the ECE- front passenger seat.
R 129 standard with regard to installation – When assembling child seats on the front pas-
and safety. Consult the child seat manufac- senger seat, place the front passenger seat
turer to find out which child seats are ap- backwards according to the child seat’s as-
proved for that vehicle according to i-Size.  sembly instructions→ page 28.
– Always leave sufficient clear space around the
child seat. Adjust the seat in front of the child
seat, if necessary. Observe and follow without
Installation and child seat usage in fail the correct driver seat or front passenger
the vehicle seat position → page 28.
– The child seat backrest must fully rest against
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter the vehicle seat backrest. Adjust the backrest
on page 45. position to have the child seat fully resting
against it. Should the installed child seat touch
The laws of physics, which come into force on a the head restraint of the vehicle seat, prevent-
vehicle during a collision or any other kind of ac- ing it from correctly resting on the vehicle's
25A.5L1.TCR.20

cident, also apply to children → page 30. In con- backrest, push the head restraint way up or re-
trast to adults and teenagers, however, children's move and store it safely in the vehicle
→ page 74. 

Safety 47
Airbag sticker DANGER
In the vehicle there will exist stickers with impor-
Never use child seats facing backwards in the
tant information on the front passenger front air-
front passenger seat while the front passenger
bag. The content depends on the country and
airbag is activated. The child may be killed upon
may vary. Check the sticker attached to the driver
front airbag deployment, since the child seat is
and/or front passenger sun visor.
impacted with great strength and projected
Prior installing a child seat backwards it is imper- against the backrest.
ative to observe the warnings → .
DANGER
Hazards of transporting children on the front
passenger seat Using child seats backwards on the front pas-
senger seat increases the risk of severe or fatal
Not all countries allow you to transport children
injuries to the child in case of an accident.
on the front passenger seat.
● Disabling the front passenger front airbag . If
Exceptions provided to transport children in the the front passenger front airbag cannot be
front seat → . disabled it is not permitted to use child seats
– When the number of children below the age of turned backwards.
10 exceeds the rear seat capacity. In this case, ● Use only child seats approved by the child
children with greatest stature may be trans- seat manufacturer for use on the front pas-
ported in the front seat, using the vehicle's senger seat with front and side airbag.
seat belt or the appropriate securing system
according to the child's age. WARNING
The triggering of the front passenger front airbag Risk of injury with incorrectly installed child
while using a backwards installed child seat may seats.
result in severe or fatal injuries → . ● Observe and follow the child seat manufac-
A backwards installed child seat on the front pas- turer's installation instructions and warnings.
senger seat is to be used only when the front
passenger front airbag is disabled. A disabled WARNING
font passenger front airbag is indicated by a PAS- Risk of injury when using a child seat turned
SENGER AIR BAG   warning light permanent- frontward on the front passenger seat.
ly lit on the centre console. Disabling the front
● Position the front passenger seat as far back
passenger front airbag → page 42.
as possible, based on the child seat’s installa-
Do not disable the front passenger front airbag tion instructions, in order to ensure the child
when using a forward turned child seat. When seat remains as far away as possible from
installing a child seat, adjust it to be as far as the front passenger front airbag.
possible from the front passenger front airbag, ● Place the seat backrest in a vertical position
also respecting the child seat's installation guide- that allows the child seat to fit in place.
lines. The triggering of the front passenger front
airbag may cause severe injuries → . ● The seat belt height adjustment must be ad-
justed to the most adequate position for the
Not all child seats have been approved for use on height of the child or the child seat.
the front passenger seat. The child seat must
● Use only child seats approved by the child
have been specially approved by the manufactur-
seat manufacturer for use on the front pas-
er for its use on the front passenger seat of vehi-
senger seat with front and side airbag.
cles with front and side airbags. Volkswagen
Dealerships keep an up-to-date list of approved
child seats. WARNING
In the event of an accident, the rear seat is the
Hazards related with side airbags safest place for children with properly fastened
When triggered, the side airbag may hit the seat belts. 
child's head and severely injure the child → .

48 Owner's Manual
 ● A suitable child seat, correctly fitted and WARNING
used on one of the rear seats, will provide
To prevent injuries from a triggered curtain or
the maximum level of protection for children
side airbag:
up to 12 years old in most accident scenar-
ios. ● Ensure that the child is not in the airbag's
deployment zone → page 38, Airbag system.
● Do not place objects in the side airbag's de-
ployment zone. 

Attaching the child seat using the lower anchor points (ISOFIX, i-Size or
LATCH)
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter The 2 retaining rings for each child seat equipped
on page 45. with ISOFIX system or i-Size can be accessed
through the openings on the rear seat lining
→ Fig. 41.

ISOFIX installation overview

Depending on the size category A to G of the
ECE-R 161) European standard, the possibilities
of installing child seats to the ISOFIX retaining
system on the respective vehicle seats are listed
in the following table.

Fig. 41 On the vehicle seat: identification of lower

retaining rings for child seats.

Group (weight class) of child seats with ISOFIX

Group 0: up to 10 kg
Group 0: up
Group 0+: up to Group 1: 9 kg to 18 kg
to 10 kg
13 kg
Rear-facing Rear-facing
Rear-facing
(opposite to (opposite to Front-facing
Installation direction (opposite to the driv-
the driving di- the driving di- (driving direction)
ing direction)
rection) rection)
Size class F G C D E C D A B B1
Installation on the front
Seat without retaining rings; ISOFIX/LATCH fastening not available
passenger seat:
Installation in rear seats IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IUF/IL-SU

IL-SU: suitable seat to install child seats with Installing child seats with ISOFIX or i-Size
ISOFIX, with “semi-universal” approval; refer to The installation location of the lower anchor
the list of vehicles of the child seat manufacturer. points is marked with an ISOFIX symbol or an i-
IUF: suitable seat to install child seats with ISO- Size symbol. 
FIX, with “universal” approval and Top Tether
seat belt support.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

1) ECE Economic Commission for Europe-Regelung

Safety 49
 Identification of ISOFIX anchorage – When fastening belts are provided along with
points for child seats on rear seats. the child seat, place the child seat on the seat
Identification of i-Size anchorage points surface and hook the fastening belt hooks to
for child seats on rear seats. the retaining rings → Fig. 41.
– Push the head restraint fully upwards or re-
Child seats with rigid attachment (ISOFIX or i- move it altogether to prevent interference
Size) with the child seat → page 74.
Guides can be used to install fixed-slot child – Evenly stretch the fastening belts in the re-
seats, if provided along with the respective child spective adjustment device. The child seat
seat. Guides assembled before the seat's cou- must be properly supported on the vehicle
pling to the ISOFIX retaining rings facilitate the seat.
installation process and preserve the seat lining. – Perform a traction test in both sides of the
Guides are locked in both of the vehicle's ISOFIX child seat to ensure both locks are secured.
retaining rings → .
– Observe and follow the instructions WARNING
→ page 47, Installation and child seat usage in The lower child seat retaining rings must not be
the vehicle. used as cargo strapping rings. Only secure ap-
– Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc- propriate child seats in the lower retaining
tions when installing or removing child seats rings.
→ . ● Only the fastening belts provided with the
– If necessary, fold down the protective cover of respective child seat must be used to secure
the ISOFIX or i-Size anchor points. child seats with adjustable tethers (LATCH).
Adapted or improvised belts must never be
– Fit the child seat onto the retaining rings
used to secure child seats.
→ Fig. 41 in the direction of the arrow. The
child seat must be safely and audibly (clicking
sound) secured in place. NOTICE
– Push the head restraint fully upwards or re- ● ISOFIX fastening guides may be eventually
move it altogether to prevent interference provided along with child seats. To prevent
with the child seat → page 74. permanent markings on the padding, these
guides must be removed from the retaining
– Perform a traction test in both sides of the
rings when the child seat is not installed in the
child seat to ensure both locks are secured.
vehicle.
Child seat with adjustable tethers (LATCH) ● In order to avoid damages to fabrics or uphols-
– Observe and follow the instructions tery, the aforementioned fastening guides
→ page 47, Installation and child seat usage in must always be removed from the retaining
the vehicle. rings before folding the rear seat forward. 
– Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-
tions when installing or removing child seats
→ .

50 Owner's Manual
 Securing child seats with Top – Secure the child seat to the lower retaining
rings or using the seat belt. The seat must be
Tether securely and audibly fitted into place (clicking
sound).
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 45. – Open the rear lid and remove the luggage
compartment cover → page 168.
– Case provided with the child seat, place the
child seat Top Tether over the rear seat back-
rest, securing it to the retaining ring located
on the back of the seat backrest → Fig. 42.
– Stretch the upper tether until the child seat
rests against the upper part of the seat back-
rest.
– Install the luggage compartment cover
→ page 168.

Reinstall the headrest after installing the child

seat → page 74.

WARNING
Fig. 42 retention eyes for the top tether on the
back side of the rear seat. Child seat with lower retaining rings and top
tethers must be assembled as per the manufac-
Besides being secured to the ISOFIX anchoring turers' instructions. Otherwise, users may be
points, ISOFIX child seats with universal approval subject to severe injuries.
must also be secured with a top tether. ● Always secure only one top child seat strap
Secure the top tether only to the appropriate re- to one retaining ring in the luggage compart-
tention eyes. The appropriate eyes for the top ment.
tether are identified by a symbol, and, if the case, ● Always use appropriate retaining rings for
by the inscription “TOP TETHER”. the respective straps.
– Observe and follow the instructions ● Never secure straps to strapping eyelets.
→ page 47, Installation and child seat usage in ● Only the belt provided along with the re-
the vehicle. spective child seat (if available) must be used
– Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc- in the Top Tether. Adapted or improvised
tions when installing or removing child seats tethers cannot be used. 
→ .
– Push the head restraint fully upwards or re-
move it altogether to prevent interference
with the child seat → page 74.

Securing child seats using the seat belt

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 45.

Universal child seats may be secured with the

seat belt of seats indicated on the table with u.
When such seats cannot be secured, an x is indi-
25A.5L1.TCR.20

cated. 

Safety 51
 Front passenger seat
Child seat as-
Front passen- Front passen- Rear side seats rear central
Weight class sembly direc-
ger airbag ena- ger airbag disa- seat
tion
bled bled
Secured oppo-
Group 0
site to the driv- X u u X
: up to 10 kg
ing direction
Secured oppo-
Group 0+
site to the driv- X u u X
: up to 13 kg
ing direction
Secured oppo-
site to the driv- X u u X
Group 1 ing direction
: 9 to 18 kg Secured in the
driving direc- u X u X
tion
Secured in the
Group 2
driving direc- u X u X
15 to 25 kg
tion
Secured in the
Group 3
driving direc- u X u X
22 to 36 kg
tion

Securing child seats using the seat belt – Child seats must never be supported on the
– Observe and follow the instructions seat belt latch.
→ page 47, Installation and child seat usage in – Pull test the seat belt to ensure that the latch
the vehicle. plate is securely locked in the buckle.
– Read and follow the instructions provided by
the child seat manufacturer. Removing child seats
Unfasten seat belts only when the vehicle is sta-
– If the child seat is assembled on the front pas-
tionary → .
senger seat, push the front passenger seat as
far back as possible and adjust the backrest to – Press the red button in the buckle. The latch
an upright position to comfortably fit the child plate is released and springs out.
seat. – Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up
– The seat belt height adjustment must be ad- easily, without twisting the seat belt and with-
justed to the most adequate position for the out damaging the trim.
height of the child or the child seat. – Remove the child seat from the vehicle ac-
– Place the child seat over the seat and pass the cording to the instructions given by the child
seat belt as per the child seat manufacturer's seat manufacturer.
instructions.
– Push the head restraint fully upwards or re- WARNING
move it altogether to prevent interference Unfastening seat belts while the vehicle is in
with the child seat → page 74. motion can lead to severe or fatal injuries in the
– Ensure that the seat belt is not twisted. event of an accident or sudden braking or driv-
– Insert the seat belt latch plate into the respec- ing manoeuvres.
tive buckle until a "clicking" sound is heard. ● Unfasten seat belts only when the vehicle is
– The seat belt must lie firmly and adequately stationary . 
over the child seat or the child.

52 Owner's Manual
 Childproof lock Enabling or disabling the childproof lock
– Unlock the vehicle and open the respective
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter rear door.
on page 45. – Fold the vehicle key blade out → page 56.
– Insert the key blade into the childproof lock
groove to enable or disable the lock → Fig. 43.

WARNING
When the childproof lock is enabled, the door
cannot be opened from the inside.
● Never leave unattended children or people
with special needs in the vehicle with the
doors locked. This may mean that these peo-
ple lock themselves in the vehicle in case of
emergencies. Locked individuals can be ex-
posed to extremely high or low temperatures
Fig. 43 Childproof lock:  rear left door,  rear or lack of breathable air.
right door. ● Depending on the time of year, locked vehi-
cles can be subjected to extremely high or
low temperatures. This can cause serious in-
juries and illness or fatalities, particularly for
small children. 

In an emergency

Making you and your vehicle safe

Fig. 44 On the rear door (right-hand side): child-

proof lock.

Key for→ Fig. 43:

1 Childproof lock disabled.
2 Childproof lock enabled.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from

being opened from the inside (e.g. so that chil- Fig. 45 On the upper portion of the centre console:
dren cannot open the doors accidentally while warning lamp switch.
the vehicle is in motion).
When the childproof lock is activated the door Observe any legislation concerning the safety of
can only be opened from the outside. a broken down vehicle. For example, many coun-
tries stipulate that you have to switch on the
hazard warning lights → page 55. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Safety 53
Checklist If the hazard warning lights are not working, use
To ensure your own safety and the safety of your an alternative method of drawing attention to
passengers, observe the following points in the the broken down vehicle (according to applicable
order given→ : legal provisions).
1. Stop the vehicle at a safe distance away from Emergency brake lights - ESS (Emergency
moving traffic and on a suitable surface Stop Signal)
→ .
For vehicles with ESS function and anti-lock
2. Switch on the hazard warning lights with the brake system (ABS), during sudden and continu-
 → Fig. 45 button. ous braking at speeds greater than 80 km/h, the
3. Apply the handbrake → page 135. brake light lamp may flash to warn cars coming
4. Position the gear shift lever in the neutral in from behind.
position → page 107 or move the selector If the braking manoeuvre is further extended,
lever to P → page 108. maintaining the same deceleration rate, the
5. Stop the engine and remove the key from the warning lights are automatically activated and
ignition lock → page 101. flash when the vehicle reaches a speed lower
than approximately 10 km/h. Upon resuming ve-
6. Ensure that all occupants exit the vehicle
hicle movement, warning lights are automatically
away from moving traffic and proceed to a
deactivated.
safe position, e.g. behind the guardrail.
7. Take all vehicle keys with you when you Warning lamps may also be switched off via the
leave the vehicle.  dash panel → Fig. 45 switch.
8. Place the warning triangle in position to WARNING
draw the attention of other road users to
your vehicle. Broken-down vehicles lacking due signalling in-
crease the risk of accidents both for you and for
9. Allow the engine to cool down and, if neces-
other road users.
sary, seek expert assistance.
● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe
When the hazard warning lights are switched on, location.
all turn signals flash at the same time. The turn ● ark the vehicle at a safe distance from mov-
signals   and an indicator light at the switch ing traffic in order to lock all doors securely
 flash at the same time. The hazard warning in an emergency.
lights also work when the ignition is switched
● Switch on the hazard warning lights and set
off.
up the warning triangle to warn other road
Lit indicator lights could indicate a change in di- users.
rection or lane while towing or by activating the ● Never leave unattended children or people
turn signal lever. The indicator lights are tempo- with special needs in the vehicle with the
rarily interrupted. doors locked. This may mean that they are
locked in the vehicle in an emergency. Per-
Examples in which hazard warning lights
sons locked in the vehicle may be exposed to
must be switched on:
extremely high or low temperatures.
– When traffic ahead suddenly starts moving
more slowly or you reach the tail end of a traf-
WARNING
fic jam. This will warn vehicles behind you.
Ignoring any of the points on this important
– When there is an emergency.
safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju-
– When the vehicle breaks down. ries.
– When being towed. ● Always follow the instructions on the check-
Always follow local regulations for the use of the list and comply with applicable safety pre-
hazard warning lights. cautions. 

54 Owner's Manual
 WARNING The fire extinguisher must correspond to the le-
gal requirements, be always ready for use, and be
The components of the exhaust system be- regularly inspected (see the inspection seal on
come very hot. This can cause fires and serious the fire extinguisher).
injuries.
● Never park the vehicle so that parts of the WARNING
exhaust system can come into contact with Loose objects may be projected inside the vehi-
inflammable material underneath the vehi- cle in the event of a sudden driving or braking
cle, e.g. dry grass, fuel, etc. manoeuvre, as well as during accidents, and
The vehicle battery will discharge if the haz- may cause severe injuries.
ard warning lights are left on over a long ● Secure the warning triangle in the respective
period of time – even if the ignition is switched straps.
off.
The warning triangle must comply with ap-
Whenever airbags are activated in acci- plicable legal provisions in each country. 
dents, warning lights may be automatically
activated → page 41. 

Emergency equipment

Fig. 46 On the rear lid: warning triangle holder.

Warning triangle
The warning triangle may not be available for
some export markets.
With the rear lid open, remove the support from
the housing → Fig. 46 (arrow) and remove the
warning triangle.
After using the triangle, place it back into the
housing

Fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher may not be available for
some export markets.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

According to the vehicle version, the fire extin-

guisher support may be situated in the footwell
under the front passenger seat.

Safety 55
Open and close disable the sound warning → page 26. For the re-
maining vehicles go to a Volkswagen dealership
to enable/disable the audible confirmation.
Vehicle key
WARNING
Vehicle key functions Improper or unsupervised use of the vehicle
keys can cause severe accidents or injuries.
● Always take all vehicle keys with you every
time you leave the vehicle. Children or unau-
thorised persons could lock the doors and
boot lid, start the engine, switch on the igni-
tion and thus operate electrical equipment,
such as the electric windows.
● Never leave unattended children or people
with special needs in the vehicle. They could
become trapped in the vehicle in an emer-
gency and may not be able to get themselves
Fig. 47 Vehicle key. to safety. Depending on the time of year, for
example, locked vehicles can be subjected to
very high or very low temperatures. This can
Key for → Fig. 47:
cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities,
1 Central locking button: unlock the vehicle. especially for small children.
2 Unlock the rear lid separately. ● Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
3 Central locking button: lock the vehicle. tion lock when the vehicle is in motion.
4 Folding and unfolding the key blade.
5 Indicator lamp: flashes after pressing the
NOTICE
button. Every vehicle key contains electronic compo-
nents. Protect the key from damage, moisture
Locking or unlocking the vehicle from the and excessive vibration.
outside
Press the buttons on the key only when the
– Unlock: press  . Keep pressed for conven- corresponding function is actually needed.
ience opening. Pressing a button when the function is not re-
– Lock: press  . Keep pressed for convenience quired could lead to the vehicle being unlocked
closing. unintentionally or the alarm going off. This also
– Press the  button → page 65. The rear lid is applies when it is believed to be beyond the ef-
unlocked. fective range. 
– Lock: all lights flash once to confirm.
– Unlock: all lights flash twice to confirm.
Replacing the battery
Note: according to the central locking function
setting on the radio system → page 26, all doors
and the boot lid will only be unlocked after the
 button is pressed for the second time.

It is possible to enable/disable the sound signal

(horn) of the alarm activation/deactivation con-
firmation. Depending on the vehicle and radio
version, on the radio system's button  , in the
menu Vehicle settings OR touching the selection
surface  and function button Car to enable or

Fig. 48 Vehicle key: replacing the battery. 

56 Owner's Manual
 Key for → Fig. 48: Synchronize the vehicle key
1 Remove the cover.
When it is impossible to unlock or lock the vehi-
2 Remove the battery. cle with the vehicle key, synchronize the vehicle
Volkswagen recommends having the battery key or replace the battery → page 56.
changed by a Volkswagen Dealership. – Fold the vehicle key blade out.
– Fold the vehicle key blade out. – Remove the protective driver side door handle
– Remove the cover 1 in the direction of the cover → page 61.
arrow → . – Press the vehicle key button  . Meanwhile,
– Remove the battery from the battery compart- remain next to the vehicle.
ment using an appropriate tool 2 . – Use the key bit to open the vehicle within one
– Position the new battery and push it in the op- minute. The synchronization process will be
posite direction to the arrow 2 into the bat- completed.
tery compartment → . – Reinstall the protective driver side door handle
– Press the cover in the opposite direction of the cover. 
arrow 1 onto the vehicle key housing until it
engages.
Troubleshooting
DANGER
Should 20 mm diameter batteries or other lithi- Vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
um batteries be swallowed, severe or even fatal The remote control vehicle key may be tempora-
injuries may result within a short period of rily disabled due to obstacles, bad weather con-
time. ditions, weak battery, or excessive transmitters
● Always keep the vehicle key, key ring with operating in the same frequency range near the
batteries, spare batteries, round cells and vehicle (e.g. mobile phones or transmitters).
other batteries out of the reach of children. OR: if the buttons in the vehicle key or one of the
● Seek medical assistance immediately if you central locking buttons are pressed repeatedly
suspect someone has swallowed a battery. within a short period of time, the central locking
system will switch off briefly to prevent over-
NOTICE loading. The vehicle will then be unlocked. Lock
● The vehicle key may be damaged if the battery the vehicle if necessary.
is improperly changed.
The indicator lamp does not flash
● Unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle
When the indicator lamp of the vehicle key does
key. Discharged batteries should only be re-
not flash, this may indicate that the battery or
placed with new batteries of the same voltage
the key itself must be replaced → page 56.
rating, size and specification.
● Ensure that the battery is fitted the right way Spare key
round. To acquire a key for the vehicle, the vehicle iden-
tification number is required.
The batteries contain toxic substances. This
product cannot be disposed / discarded Several vehicle keys may be valid for a vehicle.
along with common trash. There are specific le- New vehicle keys can be obtained at a
gal requirements regarding the disposal / dis- Volkswagen Dealership. 
carding of used batteries. For your safety and
convenience, Volkswagen recommends replacing
the battery only at a Volkswagen Dealership. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Open and close 57

Keyless locking and starting Unlocking the vehicle

system “Keyless Access” 1 Press the button → Fig. 50 A on the outside

of the door handle.

 Introduction Locking the vehicle

1 Park the vehicle and switch off the ignition.
Depending on the vehicle version, the Keyless Ac- 2 Press the button → Fig. 50 A on the outside
cess locking and starting system may not be of the door handle.
available.
Unlocking is indicated by a double flash of all the
The Keyless Access locking and starting system turn signals, locking is indicated by a single flash.
enables that the vehicle be unlocked and locked
without the active use of the key. For such, a val- Unlock and lock the boot lid
id vehicle key must be located near the vehicle.  When the vehicle is locked and a vehicle key is
within the proximity range → Fig. 49 of the boot
lid, the lid automatically unlocks when being
Unlocking or locking the vehicle opened.
with Keyless Access The boot lid is automatically locked after its clos-
ing.
When the vehicle is fully unlocked, the boot lid
does not lock itself automatically after being
closed.

Disable the Keyless Access temporarily

So that unauthorized third parties do not unlock
and start the vehicle improperly, it is possible to
temporarily deactivate the Keyless Access un-
locking function:
– Lock the vehicle with the  button on the ve-
hicle key.
– Within 5 seconds, press the button on the out-
side of the door handle → Fig. 50 A . So, don't
Fig. 49 Keyless Access: proximity areas. grab the door handle. The Keyless Access lock-
ing and starting system is temporarily disa-
bled.
– To confirm the system is disabled, wait at least
10 seconds and pull the door handle. The door
must not open.
The vehicle can only be unlocked with the vehicle
key. After the next unlocking the Keyless Access
is again enabled.

Configure Keyless Access

Depending on the radio version, Keyless Access
Fig. 50 On the door handle: button to unlock or
lock. can be configured in the menu Car from the radio. 

A Button on the outside of the door handle.

58 Owner's Manual
 Keyless Access can be configured in two ways: Central locking button and
– Single door: by pressing the button once, only
the respective door is unlocked. When pressed doors
again, all doors are locked.
– All doors: By pressing the button once, all  Introduction
doors are unlocked. When pressed again, all
doors are locked.
The doors and boot lid can be manually locked
NOTICE and partially unlocked, for example, when the ve-
For vehicles with the Keyless Access function, hicle key or central locking system fails.
when the central locking is already activated and The central locking locks all the doors and the
the vehicle key is accidentally left inside the lug- boot lid. The vehicle cannot be locked with the
gage compartment, upon closing the boot lid, it driver door open.
locks and automatically unlocks again.
The vehicle can only be locked when the ignition
With a low or flat vehicle or key battery, the is turned off or when the driver leaves the vehicle
vehicle may possibly not be unlocked or with the engine turned off.
locked by means of the Keyless Access. The vehi- A symbolic representation → page 12 on the in-
cle may be manually unlocked or locked strument cluster display indicates that one or
→ page 62. more doors are not closed.  Stop driving! Open
To make it possible to control a successful the respective vehicle door and close it again.
locking of the vehicle, disable the unlocking These symbols are also visible when the ignition
function for a few seconds. is switched off. The indicator turns off a few mi-
nutes after the vehicle is locked with the doors
A vehicle with automatic gearbox can only
closed.
be locked when the selector lever is in the P
position.
WARNING
If the sensor surface is touched twice, inte- Door that are not closed properly can open
rior monitoring is switched off and the door suddenly while the vehicle is in motion and
opening monitoring system remains active.  may cause severe injuries.
● In this case, stop the vehicle immediately
and close the door.
Troubleshooting ● Ensure that the door is closed properly and
that the lock has engaged.
All turn signals flash four times ● Doors must only be opened or closed after
– The last used vehicle key is still in the vehicle. ensuring there is nothing or no one is in its
path.
If no valid vehicle key is inside the vehicles
interior, or if same is not recognized, a cor-
responding message will be displayed on the in- WARNING
strument cluster display. This may be the case Doors that are being held open by the door
when the vehicle key suffers interference from check may close in strong winds or if the vehi-
another radio signal or when covered by another cle is on a slope, which may result in injuries.
object, for example, an accessory for mobile de- ● Always keep a good grip on the handle when
vices or an aluminium suitcase.  opening and closing doors.

WARNING
The path of the doors is a dangerous area and
may cause injuries.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

● Doors should only be opened or closed when

you are sure that nobody is in their path. 

Open and close 59

 WARNING NOTICE
An emergency closing or opening of the doors When carrying out an emergency opening or
without sufficient care may result in severe in- closing procedure, remove and install parts care-
juries. fully in order to avoid damage to the vehicle. 
● When the vehicle is locked from the outside,
it is not possible to open the doors and the
electric windows from the inside.
Driver door indicator lamp
● Never leave unattended children, animals or
people with special needs in the vehicle.  Please refer to and at the start of the
They could become trapped in the vehicle in chapter on page 59.
an emergency and may not be able to get
themselves to safety. The central locking indicator lamp is located in
● Depending on the time of year, for example, the driver door → page 8.
locked vehicles can be subjected to very high
The vehicle locks: the red LED flashes for about
or very low temperatures. This can cause se-
two seconds in short intervals, then more slowly.
rious injuries and illness or fatalities, espe-
The indicator lamp does not flash, when the vehi-
cially for small children.
cle was locked with the locking button of the
central locking system in the driver door
WARNING → page 61. 
Improper use of the central locking system
could cause serious injuries.
● The central locking system locks all doors. Automatic locking and unlocking
Locking the vehicle from the inside may pre-
vent the doors from being opened uninten-  Please refer to and at the start of the
tionally and unauthorised persons from en- chapter on page 59.
tering the vehicle. However, locked doors
can delay assistance to passengers inside the The central locking system enables you to lock
vehicle in the event of an accident or emer- and unlock all doors, the boot lid and the tank
gency. flap.
● Never leave unattended children or people
Depending on the vehicle and radio version, cen-
with special needs in the vehicle. All doors
tral locking settings can be set in the radio sys-
can be locked from the inside using the cen-
tem with the button  OR function button 
tral locking button. This may mean that peo-
and function button Car → page 26.
ple lock themselves in the vehicle. Persons
locked in the vehicle may be exposed to ex- Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
tremely high or low temperatures.
The vehicle locks automatically upon reaching a
● Depending on the time of year, locked vehi- speed of approximately 20 km/h. When the vehi-
cles can be subjected to extremely high or cle is locked, the indicator lamp  on the central
low temperatures. This can cause serious in- locking button will shine in yellow.
juries and illness or fatalities, particularly for
small children. Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock)
● Never leave anyone inside a locked vehicle. When one of the following condition occurs, all
They could become trapped in the vehicle in the doors and the boot lid are automatically un-
an emergency and may not be able to get locked:
themselves to safety.
– The vehicle is stopped and the vehicle key has
● Open and close doors and the boot lid only been removed (only for vehicles without Key-
when there is no one near its opening/clos- less Access).
ing range.
– OR: the vehicle is stationary and the  button
was pressed. 

60 Owner's Manual
 – OR: the door handle was activated to open the Closing or opening the driver door
door.
in case of emergency
– OR: the airbags were triggered in an accident
→ page 41.  Please refer to and at the start of the
The automatic unlocking enables the access of chapter on page 59.
rescuers to the interior of the vehicle.
A vehicle with automatic gearbox can only be
locked when the selector lever is in the P posi-
tion. 

Central locking button

 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 59.

Fig. 51 On the driver door: central locking button.

Key for → Fig. 51: Fig. 52 Driver's door handle: lock cylinder. 
 Unlocks the vehicle.
 Lock the vehicle.

The central locking button works either with the

ignition on or off, only when all doors are closed.
If the vehicle was locked with the vehicle key, the
central locking buttons will e disabled.
If the vehicle was locked from the inside with the
central locking button, then:
– The indicator lamp  on the button lights up in
yellow when all the doors and the boot lid are
closed.
– The anti-theft alarm system will not be activa-
ted.
The doors can be opened from the inside by pull-
ing the door handle. The indicator lamp  on the
button turns off. The doors that were not
25A.5L1.TCR.20

opened, as well as the boot lid, remain locked

and may not be opened from the outside. 

Open and close 61

 – Upon turning on the ignition, the electronic
immobiliser recognizes a valid vehicle key and
disables the anti-theft alarm.
– After unlocking an emergency start must be
performed → page 104.
The anti-theft alarm is activated after man-
ually locking the vehicle with the key blade
→ page 61. 

Locking the front passenger door

and rear doors in case of
emergency
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 59.

Fig. 53 Driver's door handle: remove cover.

All doors are usually locked when manually lock-

ing the door. Only the driver door is manually un-
locked. Observe the anti-theft alarm instructions
→ page 59.

– Unfold the vehicle key bit .

– Insert the key blade from underneath into the
cover opening → Fig. 52 (arrow). Fig. 54 On the doors, front right and rear: emergen-
– Keep the index finger underneath the key cy locking of the vehicle with the metallic stem of
blade. the key.
– Lift the cover cap with the vehicle key in the The front passenger door and the rear doors can
direction indicated by the arrow → Fig. 53. be manually locked. The anti-theft alarm system
– Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder and will not be activated.
lock/unlock the vehicle.
– Open the door.
– Pull the door handle and put the cover cap
– Insert the metal shaft of the wrench into the
back on again.
slot → Fig. 54 and press.
Particularities of manual unlocking – Close the door completely.
– The anti-theft alarm remains enabled in the – Check that the door is locked by the external
unlocked vehicle. However no alarm is trig- handle.
gered → page 62. – Repeat this process in other doors, if necessa-
– The alarm is triggered immediately after open- ry.
ing the driver's door.
The doors can be unlocked and opened
from inside by pulling the interior door han-
dle. 

62 Owner's Manual
 Troubleshooting – Remove the key from the vehicle and close
→ page 56.
 Please refer to and at the start of the – OR: press the central locking  button in the
chapter on page 59. driver door → page 61.
With a low or flat vehicle or key battery, the
Indicator lamp of the driver door permanently
vehicle may possibly not be unlocked or
on
locked by means of the Keyless Access. The vehi-
The LED light on the driver door flashes at short cle may be manually unlocked or locked
intervals and thereafter remains lit for about 30 → page 61.
seconds, flashing again thereafter.
If no valid vehicle key is inside the vehicles
The locking system is malfunctioning.
interior, or if same is not recognized, a cor-
– Contact a Volkswagen Dealership. responding message will be displayed on the in-
The doors and boot lid can be manually unlocked strument cluster display. This may be the case
or locked when the vehicle remote control key or when the vehicle key suffers interference from
central locking system → page 62 e → page 66 another radio signal or when covered by another
fails. object, for example, an accessory for mobile de-
vices or an aluminium suitcase. 
Turn signals do not flash
When the turn signals do not flash to confirm the
locking of the vehicle: Anti-theft alarm system
– At least one of the doors or the boot lit is not
shut. The anti-theft alarm system is automatically en-
gaged when locking the vehicle with the vehicle
Vehicle automatically locked key or by touching the door sensor, for vehicles
When one of the following conditions is applied, with Keyless Access.
the vehicle locks itself automatically after about The anti-theft alarm emits audible warning sig-
30 seconds. nals for about 25 seconds (per event) and visual
– The vehicle was unlocked but not opened. warning signals for up to 5 minutes when the fol-
lowing non authorized actions are executed to
– The ignition was not turned on. the locked vehicle: Depending on the alarm trig-
– The boot lid was not opened. ger source is and how it behaves during the trig-
ger period, it may occur that the audible warning
Procedure when locking with a second vehicle signals are activated for up to 10 consecutive cy-
key cles (per event), where each of these cycles is
Keyless Access: the vehicle key that is inside the comprised of the audible warning signals for ap-
vehicle is blocked against engine starting as soon proximately 25 seconds, which are followed by a
as the vehicle is locked from the outside by a 5 second pause.
second vehicle key. Press the  button on the
vehicle key left inside the vehicle to enable it to When does the system trigger an alarm?
start the engine → page 101. – Approximately 15 seconds after the opening of
a mechanically unlocked door with the vehicle
Locking the vehicle after airbag deployment key, there being no valid ignition activation
The entire vehicle is unlocked when the airbags during this period.
are triggered during an accident. Depending on – A door is opened.
the level of damage, the vehicle may be locked as
follows after an accident: – The engine compartment cover is opened.
– The boot lid is opened.
– Switch off the ignition.
– Turning the ignition on with a non-valid vehi-
– Open and close one of the doors once. cle key.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Open and close 63

– One of the windows is removed, broken or When movement is detected in the interior of a
opened. locked vehicle with enabled anti-theft alarm, the
– Movement inside the vehicle, for vehicles with alarm is triggered and goes off → Fig. 55.
interior movement monitoring system
Switching on the interior monitoring system
→ page 64.
Lock the vehicle. When the anti-theft alarm is
Switching off the alarm switched on, the interior monitoring system is al-
– Unlocking the vehicle with the  unlocking so activated.
button of the vehicle key.
Temporarily disabling the vehicle interior
– OR: turning the ignition on with a valid vehicle monitoring system
key. A brief alarm may occur for about a sec-
– Switch on the ignition.
ond.
– Disable the vehicle interior monitoring system
– On vehicles with Keyless Access, the alarm can
in the radio system button  OR selection
also be disabled by touching the door handle
button  and function button Car → page 26,
→ page 58.
depending on the vehicle and radio versions.
The alarm goes off once again if, after the – Close all doors and the boot lid.
previous trigger, a new attempt to break in- – Lock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
to the same vehicle area or another protected
area occurs. The vehicle interior monitoring system is disa-
bled until the next vehicle locking.
The anti-theft alarm system is not activated
by locking the vehicle from inside with the Under the following situations it is advisable to
central locking button  . disable the vehicle interior monitoring:

When the driver door is mechanically un- – When the vehicle needs to be carried.
locked with the key, only the driver door is – When the vehicle is transported.
unlocked, not the entire vehicle. The central lock- – When the vehicle needs to be towed with sus-
ing button is only enabled after the ignition is pended axle.
switched on, after which all doors can be electri- – When the vehicle needs to be put in an auto-
cally unlocked. matic vehicle washing system.
The anti-theft alarm will not function cor-
rectly if the vehicle battery is weak or dis- Risk of false alarm
charged.  The vehicle interior monitoring only works with
the vehicle completely shut. Legal provisions
must be followed. An alarm failure may occur un-
der the following situations:
Interior monitoring system
– If a window or the sunroof are fully or partly
open.
– When easily moving items such as loose
sheets of paper or mirror decoration items
(e.g. air-fresheners) are left in the vehicle.
– If a mobile telephone that is left in the vehicle
vibrates.
A permanent disabling of the vehicle interi-
or monitoring is not possible.
When upon enabling the anti-theft alarm
the doors or the boot lid are still open, only
the anti-theft alarm will be enabled. Only after
the closing of the doors and of the boot lid the
Fig. 55 On the roof console: vehicle interior moni- vehicle interior monitoring is also enabled. 
toring sensors (arrows).

64 Owner's Manual
 Boot lid ple lock themselves in the vehicle. Persons
locked in the vehicle may be exposed to ex-
tremely high or low temperatures.
 Introduction
NOTICE
Before opening the boot lid, check whether there
The boot lid is locked and unlocked together with
is sufficient space to open and close the boot lid
the doors.
(e.g. when parked in garages).
WARNING
NOTICE
Incorrect and unsupervised unlocking, opening
or closing of the boot lid can cause accidents Never use the rear window wiper or the rear
and severe injuries. spoiler to secure loads or to hold on to. This may
result in damages and may rip off the wiper or
● The boot lid must only be opened or closed spoiler. 
after ensuring there is nothing or no one is in
its path.
● Under no circumstances is the rear lid to be
closed with the hand on the rear window. Opening and closing the boot lid
The rear window may splitter and cause inju-
ries.  Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 65.
● After closing the boot lid, check to make sure
that it is closed and locked correctly so that
it does not open while the vehicle is in mo-
tion. The closed boot lid must be flush with
the body panels.
● Always keep the boot lid closed while the ve-
hicle is in motion so that no toxic exhaust
fumes enter the vehicle's interior.
● Never open the boot lid when there is a load
secured to it such as bikes. An open boot lid
may lower due to additional weight. If nec-
essary, support the boot lid or remove the
additional load. Fig. 56 On the boot lid: button to open the boot lid.
● Close and lock the boot lid and all vehicle
doors when the vehicle is not in use. Ensure
that no one remains in the vehicle.
● Never leave children playing unattended in or
around the vehicle, especially when the boot
lid is open. Children could climb into the lug-
gage compartment and shut the boot lid,
trapping themselves inside. Depending on
the time of year, locked vehicles can be sub-
jected to extremely high or low tempera-
tures. This can cause serious injuries and ill-
ness or fatalities, particularly for small chil-
dren.
● Never leave unattended children or people
with special needs in the vehicle. All doors Fig. 57 Open boot lid: recesses (arrows) to pull and
close. 
can be locked from the inside using the cen-
25A.5L1.TCR.20

tral locking button. This may mean that peo-

Open and close 65

If, for instance a bicycle is installed on the boot Emergency boot lid unlocking
lid luggage holder the boot lid cannot be opened
→ . Always remove items attached to the  Please refer to and at the start of the
luggage holder before opening the boot lit and chapter on page 65.
support the open boot lid.

Opening the boot lid

– To unlock the boot lid press the vehicle key 
button.
– OR: depending on the vehicle version, press
and hold the selection surface  for a few
seconds.
– To open the boot lid press the button → Fig. 56
and lift the boot lid.

Closing the boot lid

– Pull the boot lid down by the recess in the in-
terior lining → Fig. 57 with vigour so that it en- Fig. 58 In the luggage compartment: unlock the
gages the lock → . boot lid.
When the doors are locked the boot lid is also – Fold the rear seat backrest forwards
locked. → page 72.
An icon on the instrument cluster display – Remove luggage items in order to reach the
→ page 18 indicates when the boot lid is not boot lid from the vehicle interior.
properly shut. – Unfold the vehicle key bit → page 56.
The boot lid is automatically locked when the ve- – Insert the key blade into the opening in the
hicle is moving. boot lid → Fig. 58 and move the release lever
in the direction indicated by the arrow. 
WARNING
Incorrect and unsupervised unlocking or open-
ing of the boot lid can cause accidents and se-
vere injuries.
Troubleshooting
● With a luggage holder attached over the  Please refer to and at the start of the
boot lid, an unlocked boot lid is not always chapter on page 65.
recognized. An unlocked boot lid might sud-
denly open while driving. The boot lid cannot be opened or closed
Check if something is blocking the boot lid. It
WARNING must be possible to move the boot lid by hand.
Incorrect and unsupervised locking of the boot This may require additional force. 
lid can cause accidents and severe injuries.
● When closing the rear lid, watch your hands
keeping them out of reach of the closing
sweep of the rear lid.

If the boot lid is not opened within a few

minutes after its unlocking it will be auto-
matically locked again. 

66 Owner's Manual
 Windows For this a valid vehicle key must be in the area of
approach. Once all windows and the sunroof are
shut, the turn signals will flash once to confirm.
Open or close windows Depending on the vehicle and radio version, win-
dow control settings can be set in the radio sys-
The buttons are located on the doors → page 8. tem with the button  OR function button 
Opening the window: press the button. and function button Car → page 26.
 Closing the window: pull the button.
Press to disable the rear door electric win-
WARNING
 dows operating buttons. Improper or careless use of the electric win-
dows may cause severe injuries.
The windows can still be operated using the door
buttons for a brief period after the ignition has ● Electric windows must only be opened or
been switched off, provided the driver or front closed when you are sure that nobody and
passenger door is not opened. nothing is in their operating area.
● Never leave children or people who require
One-touch opening and closing special assistance unsupervised in the vehi-
The one-touch opening and closing function cle when the vehicle is locked.
makes it possible to fully open and close the win- ● Always take all vehicle keys with you every
dows with a single touch. With this function it is time you leave the vehicle. After switching
not required to hold the Individual button press- the ignition off and while the driver or front
ed while fully opening or closing the window. passenger door is not opened, the windows
One-touch closing: pull the respective window can still be operated for a brief period using
button upwards to its second stage. the door buttons.
● When transporting children on the rear
One-touch opening: press the respective window
seats, always disable the rear electric win-
button downward to its second stage.
dows using the safety button so they cannot
Interrupting the one-touch action: press or pull be operated.
the respective window operating button once
again. NOTICE
Convenience opening and closing Rain water can enter the vehicle interior and
damage the vehicle.
With the ignition switched off, windows can be
opened or closed from the outside using the ve- The one-touch and roll-back functions will
hicle key: not work if there is a fault in the electric
– Press and hold unlock button  or lock button windows. Visit a Volkswagen Dealership or quali-
 on the vehicle key. All electric windows are fied workshop. 
opened or closed.
– Unlocking vehicles with Keyless Access unlock-
ing and starting system: hold the door handle Roll-back function for the electric
and simultaneously press the sensor on the in- windows
side part of the handle and the surface of the
sensor → page 58. The roll-back function for the electric windows
– Locking vehicles with Keyless Access unlocking can reduce the risk of injuries when the windows
and starting system: keep a finger for a few are closing.
seconds on the door handle locking sensor
When the one-touch closing operation of a win-
surface → page 58 until the windows are shut.
dow encounters a difficulty of movement be-
– To interrupt the functions, release the lock or cause it is stiff or obstructed, the window will
unlock button OR remove finger from the sen- automatically open again → . 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

sor surface.

Open and close 67

– Check to see why the window has not closed. – Pull the respective window button upwards
– Try to close the window again. and keep it there for a few seconds.
– After a few repeated activations of the roll- – Release the button, then pull it up again and
back function, the automatic window closing hold it in this position (till when, please?). The
feature may be disabled. One -touch function is up and running again
for use.
Closing the window without the roll-back
It is possible to reenable the One-touch function
function
for the windows individually or for several of
– Try to close the window again within a few them simultaneously. 
seconds by holding the button. The roll-back
function will be deactivated for a small sec-
tion of the path of the closing window.
– If the closing procedure takes longer than a
few seconds, the roll-back function enabled
Tilting panoramic sunroof
again. The window stops in case of difficulty to
move on and opens again automatically.
Opening or closing the tilting
– Please refer to a Volkswagen Dealership or
panoramic sunroof
qualified workshop if the window still cannot
be closed.

WARNING
Closing the electric windows without the roll-
back function can lead to severe injuries.
● Always pay attention when closing electric
windows.
● Ensure that nobody obstructs the path of the
electric windows, especially if the roll-back
function is not active.
● The roll-back function does not prevent fin-
gers or other body parts from being pressed
against the window frame, resulting in inju-
ries. Fig. 59 Headliner: sunroof and sun blind buttons.

The roll-back function also acts with the Depending on the vehicle version, the tilting pan-
window and sunroof convenience closing oramic sunroof may not be available.
with the vehicle key. 
The tilting panoramic sunroof is a roof glass
opening system comprised of two glass ele-
ments. The rear glass element is fixed and does
Troubleshooting not have an opening function.
Parallel to the sunroof, the sun blind opens auto-
Restoring the one-touch opening and closing matically if it is located in front of the sunroof.
function The sun blind can only be completely opened or
When the battery is disconnected or low with the closed if the sunroof is closed.
windows not completely shut or, after some roll
The button  has two stages. First stage: lifts,
back operations, the One touch function will be
opens or closes the sunroof completely or parti-
disabled and needs to be reenabled:
ally. Second stage: brings the sunroof automati-
– Switch on the ignition. cally to the respective final position. Press the
– Shut all windows and doors. button again to stop the one-touch action. 

68 Owner's Manual
 Lifting, opening and closing the tilting panoram- Leaves and other loose objects must be re-
ic sunroof moved from the sunroof tracks manually or
– Lift the sunroof: press button → Fig. 59 B un- using a vacuum cleaner.
til the first stage. One-touch action: press but- The roll-back function will not operate
ton B until the second stage. properly if the sunroof is malfunctioning.
– Close the lifted sunroof: press button A until Seek qualified workshop assistance. 
the first stage. One-touch action: press button
A until the second stage.
– Open sunroof: press button C until the first
stage. One-touch action until the convenience
Convenience opening or closing of
position: press button C until the second the tilting panoramic sunroof
stage.
Convenience opening and closing
– Close the sunroof: press button D until the
first stage. One-touch action: press button D The sunroof can be opened and closed from out-
until the second stage. side using the vehicle key:
– Stop opening/closing one-touch action: press – Press and hold the vehicle key locking or un-
button C or D . locking button. The sunroof is raised or closed.
– In vehicles with Keyless Access unlocking and
WARNING starting system: On vehicles with Keyless Ac-
Improper or unsupervised use of the sunroof cess: keep finger on the sensor surface of the
may result in serious accidents or injuries. door handle for a few seconds until the sun-
● The sunroof must only be opened or closed roof is closed → page 58.
when nobody is in the operating area. – Release the locking or unlocking button to
● Always take all vehicle keys with you when stop the process.
you leave the vehicle. The convenience closing function closes all door
● Never leave unattended children or people windows and the sunroof. If all windows and the
with special needs in the vehicle, especially if sunroof are closed, the turn signals will flash
they have access to the vehicle's keys. Im- once to confirm. 
proper use of vehicle keys may lock the vehi-
cle, start the engine, start the ignition, and
activate the sunroof.
Panorama Sunroof roll-back
● After switching off the ignition, the sunroof
may still be opened or closed for a while,
function
while the front driver or passenger doors are
The roll-back function reduces the risk of injury
not opened.
due to crushing → . When the sunroof is ob-
structed during closing, it will immediately open
NOTICE again.
● To avoid damages at low temperatures, re-
– In this case, check what prevented the sunroof
move all ice and snow before opening or lifting
from closing.
the sunroof.
– Try to close the sunroof again.
● Always close the sunroof before leaving the
vehicle or during a rainy day. If the sunroof is – If the sunroof still does not close, close the
opened, rain will enter the vehicle and poten- sunroof without the roll-back function. 
tially damage the electrical system. This may
also cause other vehicle damages.
● To avoid damages to the sunroof, it is recom-
mended to only open or close the sunroof
while the vehicle is stationary.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Open and close 69

Closing the sunroof without the roll-back
function
Steering wheel
– Press the  button down to the second
stage → Fig. 59 D , until the sunroof is com- Adjusting the steering wheel
pletely closed.
– The sunroof will now close without the roll-
position
back function!
– Please refer to a qualified workshop if the sun-
roof still cannot be closed.
If the switch is released during the closing proce-
dure, the sunroof will automatically open.

WARNING
Closing the sunroof without the roll-back func-
tion can lead to severe injuries.
● Always close the sunroof with caution.
● Ensure that nobody obstructs the path of the
sunroof, especially if the roll-back function is
disabled.
Fig. 60 Below and to the left of the steering wheel
● The roll-back function does not prevent fin- next to the steering column trim: steering wheel po-
gers or other body parts from being pressed sition adjustment lever.
against the roof frame, resulting in injuries.

The roll-back function is also enabled in the

window and sunroof convenience closing
with the vehicle key. 

Troubleshooting
Sunroof does not close
– The sunroof only works if the ignition is on. Af-
ter switching off the ignition, the sunroof may
still be opened or closed for a while, while the
front driver or passenger doors are not
opened. Fig. 61 On the steering wheel: 9 o'clock and 3
– If the sunroof cannot be closed electrically, it o'clock positions.
must be closed manually. Sunroof emergency
closing is only possible after disassembling ve- Adjust the steering wheel position before driving
hicle parts. Go to a Volkswagen Dealership or and only while the vehicle is stationary → .
qualified workshop.  – Push the lever down, holding it by the handle
→ Fig. 60 1 .
– Adjust the proper distance between the driver
and the steering wheel → page 29 using the
driver seat controls → page 72. 

70 Owner's Manual
 – Adjust the steering wheel position in order to
be able to hold it by its outer rim in 9 o’clock
Seats and head restraints
and 3 o’clock positions → Fig. 61 with both
hands and slightly flexed arms.
Front seat
– Firmly hold the lever by the handle and push it
upwards until the steering wheel is locked in  Introduction
place → .

WARNING Front seat adjustment options are detailed be-

● Always firmly push the lever 1 upwards by low. Always ensure the seat is secured in position
the handle after adjusting, to secure the → page 28.
steering wheel in place.
WARNING
● Never adjust the steering wheel when the
vehicle is in motion. If you require adjusting Always adjust the seat and head restraints be-
the steering wheel while driving, safely park fore driving.
the vehicle before adjusting the steering ● Push the front passenger seat as far back as
wheel. possible.
● Failure to follow these precautions may ● Adjust the driver seat in such a way that
compromise the driver’s ability to turn the there is at least 25 cm between your breast-
steering wheel while driving. bone and the hub of the steering wheel. Ad-
● To maximize airbag efficiency in case of an just the driver seat longitudinally in order for
accident, the steering wheel must be posi- pedals to be fully pressed with slightly bent
tioned facing the chest area (and not the legs, and ensuring a minimum distance be-
face). tween the driver's knees and the dash panel
of 10 cm. If your physical build makes it im-
● While driving, always keep both hands on the
possible to fulfil this requirement, contact a
rim of the steering wheel, at the at the 9
Volkswagen Dealership in order to imple-
o'clock and 3 o'clock positions → Fig. 61, to
ment any necessary modifications.
reduce the risk of injury in case the driver
front airbag is deployed. ● Never travel with the backrest tilted far back.
The further back the backrest is tilted, the
● Never hold the steering wheel in the 12
greater the risk of injury caused by incorrect
o’clock position or other positions in which
seat belt routing or an incorrect sitting posi-
the arms are located over the airbag, since
tion.
this may result in arm and hand injuries in
case the airbag is deployed. ● Never travel with the backrest tilted for-
wards. When an airbag is triggered it could
● Failure to observe the above instructions
force the seat backrest backwards and injure
have a direct negative influence on the driv-
vehicle occupants on the back seats.
ers protection in case of a frontal collision of
the vehicle. ● Adopt and maintain the greatest possible

distance to the steering wheel and dash pan-
el.
● You should always sit upright with your back
against the seat backrest with the front seats
properly adjusted. Do not position any body
part too close where the airbags are fitted.
● The risk of serious injury is increased for pas-
sengers on the rear seat if they are not sit-
ting upright because the seat belts are incor-
rectly positioned. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Seats and head restraints 71

 WARNING 3 Only the driver seat, move the lever several
times up or down to adjust the seat height.
Incorrect seat adjustment may cause accidents
4 Pull the lever to move the front seat forward
and severe injuries.
or backward into the desired position. Re-
● The seats may only be adjusted when the ve- lease the lever and ensure the seat is secured
hicle is stationary, since the seat could oth- in place. 
erwise change position unexpectedly while
the vehicle is in motion, leading to a loss of
vehicle control. Additionally, an incorrect
seating position is adopted while adjusting
the seat. Rear seats
● Only adjust the height and tilt of the front
seats when the area around the seat is clear.
● The area for adjustment of the front seats
 Introduction
may not be restricted by any items. 
The adjustment options for the rear seat are de-
scribed below. Ensure that the seat position is
properly adjusted → page 28.
Manual front seat adjustment
Rear seat bench
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
The rear seat bench has clamping sleeves that
on page 71.
secure the seat in place. The clamping sleeves
may be damaged if the seat is disassembled, in
which case they must be replaced.
Volkswagen does not recommend disassembling
the seat bench or replacing the clamping sleeves
without assistance. Contact a Volkswagen Deal-
ership for more information.

WARNING
Improperly secured rear seat benches may
cause severe injuries.
● Ensure the seat belt is not caught or dam-
aged in the rear seat bench.
● No passengers of any age must be transpor-
ted in the rear seat bench if it is not secured
in place.

WARNING
Fig. 62 On the front seat: controls. An incorrect rear seat adjustment may cause
accidents and severe injuries.
All the possible controls are described below. Ac-
● Adjust the rear seat only with the vehicle at
cording to the seat version the quantity of con-
standstill, as to the contrary, the rear seat
trols may vary.
may move unexpectedly while driving. Addi-
Adjusting the seat position tionally, an incorrect seating position is
adopted while adjusting the seat.
Key for → Fig. 62: ● Adjust the rear seat only when there is no
1 Press the lever to adjust lumbar support. one in the adjustment area of the rear seat. 
2 Action the lever and adjust the backrest rake
to the desired position. Release the lever to
secure the seat backrest in place.

72 Owner's Manual
 NOTICE Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
– Route the seatbelt through the clip on the side
With the rear seat folded objects may enter the
seat cover → Fig. 63 1
space between the seat and the luggage com-
partment floor. Prior pushing the rear seat back- – Push the head rest all the way down
wards, remove possible objects from the inter- → page 74.
mediary space.  – Pull the release button → Fig. 63 2 forward
and simultaneously fold the rear seat backrest
forward.
– The respective section of the rear seat back-
Folding the rear seat backrest rest will be released when the red marker
forward or backwards → Fig. 63 3 pops up.

 Please refer to and at the start of the Folding the rear seat backrest backwards
chapter on page 72. – Fold the rear seat backrest backwards and
firmly press it until it clicks securely in place
→ .
– The red marker → Fig. 63 3 must no longer be
visible.
– The rear seat backrest must always be securely
engaged in order to ensure proper protection
of the rear seat belts.
– Release the seat belts from the placeholders.

Rear seat backrest rake adjustment

The rear seat backrest rake can be adjusted to
expand the luggage compartment area.
Adjust the tilt before folding the rear seat back-
Fig. 63 On the rear seat backrest: unlocking button. rest backwards.
– Position A : place the lever → Fig. 64 in the di-
rection of the arrow A to return the seat
backrest to its original position.
– Position B : place the lever → Fig. 64 in the di-
rection of the arrow B to expand the luggage
compartment.

WARNING
Injuries can be caused if the rear backrests are
folded forwards and backwards carelessly.
● When folding the rear seat backrest for-
wards, always ensure that there is no one in
the rear seat backrest area.
Fig. 64 Behind the rear seat: seat backrest rake ad- ● Never fold the rear seat backrest forwards or
justment lever backwards while the vehicle is in motion.
● Ensure that the seat belt is not trapped or
The rear seat back rest is split. Each part of the damaged when folding back the rear seat
rear seat backrest can be separately folded for- backrest.
ward to expand the luggage compartment area. ● Always keep hands, fingers, feet or other
25A.5L1.TCR.20

body parts away from the seat area when

folding the rear seat backrest forwards and
backwards. 

Seats and head restraints 73

● The rear seat backrest must always be se- Correct head rest setting
curely engaged in order to ensure proper Adjust the head rest so that its top edge is at the
protection of the rear seat belts. This applies same height as the top of the head – but not
especially to the centre seat of the rear seat. lower than eye level. Position the back of your
If a seat is occupied and the respective rear head as close to the head restraint as possible.
seat backrest has not clicked securely into
place, the seat occupant and rear seat back- Head restraint setting for shorter people
rest may move forward in the event of a sud- Push the head restraint all the way down, even if
den braking or driving manoeuvre or during the head is then located underneath the top edge
accidents. of the head rest. There may be a small gap be-
● The red marking 3 indicates that the back- tween the head rest and backrest in the lowest
rest section is not docked. Always check position.
whether the red marking is visible while the
rear seat back rest is in upright position. Head restraint setting for taller people
● If the rear seat backrest is tilted forward or is Push the head restraint up as far as possible.
not securely locked in place, people or chil-
dren of any age cannot be transported in WARNING
such seat. Driving without head restraints or with incor-
● Only assemble child seats with the rear seat rectly adjusted head restraints increases the
in the upright position. risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident or sudden driving or braking manoeu-
vre.
NOTICE
● If a seat is occupied, the head restraint for
Folding the rear seat backrest back and forth in
that seat must be fitted and adjusted proper-
an uncontrolled or careless fashion may result in
ly.
damages to the vehicle and other objects.
● Each vehicle occupant must adjust the head
● Before folding the rear seat backrest forward,
restraint to suit their body size, to help re-
adjust the front seats in order to ensure that
duce the risk of neck injuries in case of acci-
the rear seat upholstery or head restraint do
dents. At the same time, the top edge of the
not come into contact with the front seats.
head restraint must be level with the top of
● Always prior folding the rear seat backrest for- the head, but no lower than eye level. Posi-
ward, ensure that there are no objects in the tion the back of your head as close to the
rear seat backrest area. head restraint as possible.
Volkswagen does not recommend assem- ● Never adjust the head restraint when the ve-
bling child seats with the rear seat in posi- hicle is in motion.
tion B → Fig. 64. 
NOTICE
When removing or fitting head restraints, make
sure that they do not hit the roof or front seat
Head restraints backrest. Otherwise, the roof and other vehicle
parts could otherwise be damaged. 

 Introduction

The headrest adjustment and extension possibili-

ties are described below. Ensure correct posture
is adjusted → page 28.
All seats are equipped with head rests. The cen-
tre rear head restraint is designed solely for use
with the centre rear seat. For this reason do not
install the head restraint in other positions.

74 Owner's Manual
 Adjusting the head rests Fitting and removing headrests
 Please refer to and at the start of the  Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 74. chapter on page 74.

Fig. 65 Front seat head restraint: adjust. Fig. 67 Front seat head restraint: removal.

Fig. 66 Rear seat head restraints: adjust. Fig. 68 Rear seat head restraint: removal

Adjusting the head rest height Removing the front head rest
– Move the head restraint up- or downward as – Push the head rest all the way up → in In-
indicated by the arrows, with the → Fig. 65 1 troduction on page 74.
or → Fig. 66 1 button pressed → in Intro- – Press and hold → Fig. 67 1 to remove the
duction on page 74. head rest.
– The head restraint must click securely into po-
sition.  Fitting the front head rest
– Position the head rest correctly over the head
rest guides and then insert into the guides of
the corresponding seat backrest.
– Push the head restraint fully downward while
holding the → Fig. 67 1 button pressed.
– Adjust the head restraints so that a correct sit-
ting position can be assumed. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Seats and head restraints 75

Removing the rear head rest WARNING
– If needed, adjust the seat backrest so that the
The front centre armrest may restrict the driv-
head restraint may be removed.
er's liberty of arm movement and lead to se-
– Push the head rest all the way up → in In- vere accidents and injuries.
troduction on page 74.
● Always keep the centre armrest stowage
– Press and hold → Fig. 68 1 to remove the area closed while driving.
head rest.
● Never ever transport a person or a child of
Fitting the rear head rest any age on the centre armrest. Needless to
say that it is forbidden to do so. 
– Release the rear seat backrest and fold it a bit
forward → page 72.
– Position the head rest correctly over the head
rest guides and then insert into the guides of
the corresponding seat backrest.
– Press and hold → Fig. 68 1 to push the head
rest downwards.
– Push back the rear seat backrest and allow to
engage securely.
– Adjust the head rest so that a correct sitting
position can be assumed → page 75. 

Seat functions

Centre arm rest

Fig. 69 Front centre arm rest.

Depending on the vehicle version, the centre

armrest may not be available.

Front centre arm rest

To raise, pull the centre armrest gradually up-
ward in the direction indicated by the arrow
→ Fig. 69.
To lower, pull the centre armrest downward.

76 Owner's Manual
 Lights WARNING
Misuse or lack of use of turn signals, as well as
Turn signals forgetting to switch them on when appropri-
ate, may confuse other road users. This could
lead to accidents and severe injuries.
Turn signals on /off ● Changing lanes, overtaking and conversion
manoeuvres must always be indicated ap-
propriately by using the turn signals.
● Turn off turn signals after changing lanes or
completing overtaking and conversion ma-
noeuvres.

The hazard warning lights also work when

the ignition is switched off → page 53. 

Fig. 70 On the left on the steering column: turn sig- Driving lights
nal and main beam lever.

– Switch on the ignition.

Lights, switching on and off
– Move the turn signal and main beam lever
from the centre position to the following posi-
tion:

A Right turn signal .

B Left turn signal .

– Place the turn signal and main beam lever into

its basic position to switch the turn indicators
off.
If the sound signal does not sound with the turn
indicator turned on, visit your Volkswagen deal-
Fig. 71 Next to the steering wheel: light switch
ership or specialized workshop to have the vehi-
(one variant).
cle checked.
Observe any country-specific regulations when
Intermittent convenience signals
using vehicle lighting.
To enable the convenience turn signal, move the
turn signal and main beam lever up or down just Turning the lights on
to the point of resistance and release it. The turn – Switch on the ignition.
signals flash three times.
– Turn the light switch to the corresponding po-
To interrupt the convenience turn signal before sition:
time out, move the lever immediately in the con-
trary direction until the point of resistance and  Automatic activation of the driving lights:
release it. the driving lights are automatically turned
on and off according to the brightness and
Depending on the vehicle and radio version, con- weather condition → , → page 78.
venience turn signals can be enabled or disabled  Side lights switched on. The icon on the
in the radio system with the button  OR func- light switch shines in green colour.
tion button  and function button Car
25A.5L1.TCR.20

 Dipped beam headlights switched off. 

→ page 26.

Lights 77
Turning the lights off ● Turn the dipped beam on manually in case of
– Switch off the ignition. special weather conditions, such as fog. 
– Turn the light switch to the corresponding po-
sition:
 The lights are off. Rear fog lights and fog lights
 The “Leaving home” function (orientation on/off
lighting) may be on → page 80.
 Side lights switched on. The icon on the Depending on the vehicle version, rear fog lights
light switch shines in green colour.  may not be available.
 Dipped beam off - while the vehicle key is With the ignition on, the fog lamp can be switch-
inserted in the ignition or, on vehicles with ed on with the light switch in positions , po-
Keyless Access the driver door is closed, sition lights  or fog lamp :
the side lights stay on. – Switch rear fog light on : Pull the light
switch out → Fig. 71. The control light  lights
Daytime running lights
up in the instrument cluster in yellow.
Depending on the vehicle equipment available,
daytime running lights may increase vehicle visi- – To switch off fog lights, push the light switch
bility in urban traffic during daytime. down or turn to position .

The daytime running light turns on every time When the automatic dipped beam switch-
the ignition is turned on, when the light switch is ing on  is activated, the rear fog light
switched to ,  or  (with brightness detec- comes on and the dipped beam also comes on
tion), so long as the fog light is not turned on. regardless of the ambient brightness. 
The daytime running lights cannot be switched
on or off manually.
Functions of the lights
WARNING
Severe injuries and accidents may occur if the Side light
road is not adequately illuminated and if the When the light switch is turned to position ,
vehicle or pedestrians are not visible. both headlights with the side lights, parts of the
● Assist lighting systems are merely ancillary. tail lights, the registration plate light, the button
The driver is responsible for controlling prop- lights on the centre console and on the instru-
er vehicle lighting. ment cluster turn on.

Automatic driving light control 

WARNING
The automatic driving light control is simply an
The side lights are not powerful enough to illu- ancillary system, which may not sufficiently rec-
minate the street and make your vehicle seen ognize all driving conditions.
by other road users.
While the automatic driving light control is acti-
● Always switch dipped beam headlights on
vated, low beams and lamps are automatically
with low light, fog or poor visibility.
switched if the twilight sensor detects low light-
● The rear lights are not connected to the day- ing on the exterior environment, such as when
time running lights. A vehicle without rear crossing a tunnel during the day, or during night
lights on may not be seen by other drivers in time. Whenever the vehicle is in an environment
darkness, during rainstorms or other poor with intense solar lighting, with the light switch
visibility conditions. in position , low beams and lamps will be au-
tomatically switched off by the electric central
WARNING system. And the daytime running lights will turn
The automatic driving light control () only on. 
switches the dipped beam on or off in case of
lighting variations.

78 Owner's Manual
 Cornering light WARNING
In slow conversions or sharp curves, the corner-
Setting headlights too high, and the incorrect
ing light is automatically switched on. The cor-
use of the main beam, could distract and dazzle
nering light is integrated to the fog lights and is
other road users. This could lead to accidents
only switched on when driving below approxi-
and severe injuries.
mately 40 km/h.
● Always ensure that the headlights are adjus-
Upon selecting the reverse gear, the cornering ted correctly.
light may be switched on in both vehicle sides
during a manoeuvre. ● Never use the main beam or the headlight
flasher if other road users could be dazzled. 
Acoustic warnings if lights are not switched
off
When the vehicle key is removed from the igni- Turn parking light on /off
tion and the driver door is opened, acoustic
warnings will be emitted under the following cir-
cumstances:
– light switch in position .
With the “Coming Home” function turned on,
when the driver door is opened, no acoustic
alarm is sounded to indicate that the lights are
still on. 

Main beam on/off Fig. 73 On the left on the steering column: turn sig-
nal and main beam lever.

The parking light may not be available for some

countries.

Unilateral parking lights

With the parking light switched on, the respec-
tive vehicle side headlight with the side light and
part of the taillight light up:
– Switch off the ignition.
– Move the turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 72 On the left on the steering column: turn sig- from the centre position to the following posi-
nal and main beam lever. tion → Fig. 73:
– Turn ignition and dipped beam on. A Right side parking light on.
– Move the turn signal and main beam lever B Left side parking light on.
from the centre position to the following posi-
tion: – Place the turn signal and main beam lever into
its rest position to turn the parking light off.
A Main beam turned on.
The parking light can only be turned on with the
B Operate the headlight flasher or turn the
ignition turned off and the turn signal and main
main beam off. The headlight flasher remains
beam lever in centre position prior to turning on.
lit for as long as the lever is pulled.
Permanent parking light on both sides
25A.5L1.TCR.20

With the main beams on or when flashing the

headlights the blue indicator lamp lights up  on With the permanent parking light switched-on,
the dash panel insert. on both sides, the side lights in both headlights
turn on, as well as part of the tail lights: 

Lights 79
– With the ignition turned on, rotate the light OR by touching the selection button  and the
switch to position . Car function button to open the Light settings
– Switch off the ignition. menu → page 26:
– Lock the vehicle from the outside. Turning the “Coming Home” function on
Automatic side light or parking light switch – Switch off the ignition.
off – Action the headlight flasher for about one sec-
The vehicle detects when the 12 V battery is run- ond.
ning low and turns the side light or parking light The “Coming Home” lighting is turned on upon
off in time to still be able to start the engine - opening of the driver door. The switch off delay
however at least after two hours. time starts with the closing of the last vehicle
Should the battery capacity be insufficient for door or of the boot lid.
two hours running the side light or parking light,
the 12 V vehicle battery may run flat to the point Turning the “Coming Home” function off:
of being unable to start the engine → . – Automatically after the set lighting delay time
has run out.
WARNING – OR: automatically when after about 30 sec-
If the vehicle is at standstill without sufficient onds after having been turned on, a door or
illumination and can therefore not be seen by the boot lid of the vehicle remains open.
other drivers, serious accidents and injuries – OR: rotate the light switch to position .
may occur. – OR: turning the ignition on.
● Always stop and park the vehicle safely with
sufficient lighting and observing the country Turning the “Leaving Home” function on:
specific legal requirements. – Unlock the vehicle when the light switch is
● Should it be necessary to illuminate the vehi- positioned to  and the rain and light sensor
cle for several hours, turn on the right or left detects darkness.
parking light only, if possible. The running
time for one sided parking light turned on is Turning the “Leaving Home” function off
usually double the running time of the per- – Automatically after the set lighting delay time
manent parking light on both sides.  has run out.
– OR: locking the vehicle.
– OR: rotate the light switch to position .
“Coming Home” and – OR: turning the ignition on. 
“Leaving Home” functions
(orientation lighting)
Headlight range control
With the orientation lighting, the area next to the
vehicle is illuminated when leaving (“Coming
Home”) and when arriving at the vehicle (“Leav-
ing Home”). For vehicles with light and rain sen-
sors, the “Leaving Home” function is automati-
cally controlled.
By activating the “Coming Home” or “Leaving
Home” function, the dipped beam headlight and
side lights are lit up as orientation lighting.
Depending on the vehicle and radio versions, the
switch-off delay may be configured in the radio
system through the button  in the Vehicle set- Fig. 74 Next to the steering wheel: control of the
tings menu and enabling or disabling the function headlight range 1 (variant 1). 

80 Owner's Manual
 WARNING
Heavy objects in the vehicle may affect head-
light visibility and distract other road users.
This could lead to accidents and severe injuries.
● Always adjust the light beam to current vehi-
cle occupation and luggage compartment
load conditions, in order to avoid dazzling
other road users. 

Masking or switching over

headlights
Fig. 75 In the engine compartment: headlight range
control switch (variant 2). When driving in countries with opposite driving
directions, the asymmetric dipped beam head-
With the headlight range control, the low beam
lights may dazzle oncoming traffic. Therefore,
light can be adjusted based on vehicle occupa-
the headlights must be masked or switched over
tion and luggage compartment load conditions.
when driving in such countries.
Thereby the driver has the best possible visibility
conditions without dazzling the opposite drivers. If applicable, mask certain areas of the headlight
with thin layers or switch over the position in a
Headlight range adjustment with a switch specialized company. Additional information can
next to the steering wheel: be obtained from your Volkswagen Dealership or
The headlight range can be adjusted with the qualified workshop.
→ Fig. 74 switch:
The use of thin layers over the headlights is
Occupied front seats and empty luggage only allowed for short periods of time. Seek
 compartment. out a Volkswagen Dealership for a permanent
All seats occupied and empty luggage switch over. 
 compartment.
All seats occupied and loaded luggage
 compartment. Troubleshooting
Only the driver seat occupied and fully loa-
 ded luggage compartment. Turn signals
  Left or right turn signals. The indicator
Headlight range adjustment with switch in
lamp flashes twice as fast from normal
engine compartment:
when one of the vehicle's turn lights has
The headlight range can be adjusted with the burned out. Check vehicle lighting.
→ Fig. 74 switch. Turn the switch in the direction
of (arrow): Driving lighting
Occupied front seats and empty luggage Driving lights completely or partially out.
 compartment.
 Check the vehicle lights and replace the re-
All seats occupied and empty luggage spective bulb when burned out
 compartment. → page 185. When all bulbs are in good or-
der, call on a specialized workshop. 
All seats occupied and loaded luggage
 compartment. OR
Only the driver seat occupied and fully loa-
ded luggage compartment.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Lights 81
Interior lighting In addition, the front footwell area may also be
lit.
The light brightness can be adjusted in the vehi-
Instruments and switches lighting cle settings on the radio system, through the
button  OR by touching the selection surface
Depending on the vehicle and radio version,  and the function button Car → page 26.
switch and instrument lighting brightness can be
adjusted in the radio system with the button  The interior and reading lights are switched
OR function button  and function button Car off after locking the vehicle or a few mi-
→ page 26. nutes after the key is removed from the ignition.
This prevents the battery from discharging.
The adjusted brightness is automatically adjusted
according to the ambient brightness in the vehi- When airbags are triggered during an acci-
cle. dent, interior lights may be automatically
activated → page 41, In case of airbag triggering
When the light switch is turned to , a sensor
- Crash detection function.
automatically switches the dipped beams, as well
as the instrument and switch lighting on and off The lights are switched off after locking the
according to the ambient brightness. vehicle or a few minutes after the key is re-
moved from the ignition. This prevents the 12-V
With the light switched off and the ignition
battery from discharging. 
on, the instruments lighting (needles and
dials) is turned on. With the decrease of the am-
bient brightness the lighting of the dials is auto-
matically reduced and, if necessary, turned off
completely. This function should remind the driv-
er to turn on the dipped beams, for example,
when driving through tunnels. 

Interior and reading lights,

background lighting

Press the respective button:

Turning the front interior lighting on and
 off.
Interior lights are switched on automati-
 
cally upon unlocking the vehicle, open-
ing a door, or removing the key from the
ignition cylinder.
Switches the reading lights on or off.

Glove and luggage compartment lights
Depending on the vehicle version, the glove com-
partment light may not be available.
Upon opening and closing the glove compart-
ment or the boot lid, a light automatically turns
on or off.

Ambient lighting
Depending on the background lighting version,
indirect lighting lights up several areas inside the
vehicle.

82 Owner's Manual
 Visibility F  The windscreen washer system is active
while the lever is pulled.
Window wipers and washers 1  Adjust the rain sensor sensitivity.
G  Rear window wiper system on. The rear
window wiper performs a swipe at approxi-
Window wiper lever mately every 6 seconds.
H  The rear window washer system is active
while the lever is pressed.

WARNING
At low winter temperatures, the water of the
windscreen washer system without sufficient
antifreeze can freeze on the windscreen and
limit front visibility.
● At winter temperatures, only use windscreen
washing water with sufficient antifreeze.
● Never use the windscreen washer system at
winter temperatures before the windscreen
has been heated with the ventilation system.
Fig. 76 To the right of the steering column: control The antifreeze mixture may otherwise freeze
the windscreen wipers/washers. on the windscreen and restrict vision.

WARNING
Worn or dirty window wiper blades reduce visi-
bility and increase the risk of accidents and se-
vere injuries.
● Windscreen wiper blades should therefore
always be changed when they are damaged
or worn.

NOTICE
If the ignition is switched off while the wind-
Fig. 77 To the right of the steering column: control screen wipers are switched on, the windscreen
the rear window wiper/washer. wipers will resume operation from the same po-
sition after the ignition is switched back on;
Wipers only work with the ignition turned on,
however, in this condition (ignition switched off
while washers also work when the ignition is off.
while windscreen wipers were switched on), the
move the windscreen wipers lever to the desired windscreen wipers return to the default position.
position→ : Ice, snow, and other obstacles on the window
can damage the windscreen wipers and the
A  Windscreen / rear window wipers switch- windscreen wiper motor.
ed off.
● Remove snow and ice from the windscreen
B  Interval wipe of the windscreen wipers or wipers before driving.
operation of the rain and brightness sensor.
The windscreen wiper interval wipe operates ● Carefully release the frozen window wipers
according to the vehicle's speed. The faster from the window. Volkswagen recommends
the vehicle, the more frequent will be the using an antifreeze spray for such activity. 
wiping of the wipers.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

C  Slow wipe.

D  Fast wipe.
E x touch wipe – brief cleaning.

Visibility 83
 NOTICE Enabling and disabling the rain and brightness
sensor
Do not switch the windscreen wipers on when
the window is dry. Dry wiping can damage the Press the lever into the required position
window glass. → Fig. 78:
– Position A - rain sensor disabled.
NOTICE – Position B - rain sensor enabled, automatic
In icy conditions, always check if the windscreen wiping if necessary.
wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before Depending on the vehicle and radio version, au-
using the windscreen wipers!  tomatic wipers can be enabled or disabled in the
radio system with the button  OR function
button  and function button Car → page 26.
Function of the window wipers When the automatic wiping is disabled in the ra-
dio system, the interval time is adjusted at fixed
Automatic rear window wiper operation levels.
The rear window wiper turns on automatically
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
when the windscreen wipers are on and reverse
gear is engaged. Depending on the vehicle and The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted
radio version, the automatic rear window wiper manually with the switch on the wiper lever
activation function in reverse gear can be ena- → Fig. 78 1 → .
bled or disabled in the radio system, through the – Turn the switch to the right – high sensitivity.
button  OR by touching the selection surface
 and selection button Car → page 26.
– Turn the switch to the left – low sensitivity.

WARNING
The rain and brightness sensor may not suffi-
Rain and brightness sensor ciently detect rain and fail to activate the win-
dow wipers.
● If necessary, manually activate window wip-
ers whenever the rain affects visibility. 

Troubleshooting
Altered behaviour of the rain and brightness
sensor activation
The possible causes for damages and misinter-
Fig. 78 To the right of the steering column: window pretations in the sensitivity surface area of the
wipers lever. rain sensor are among others the following:
– Damaged windscreen wiper blades: a water
Depending on the vehicle version, the rain and
film or wiping stripes due to damaged wiper
brightness sensor may not be available.
blades may extend the activation period, re-
The activated rain and brightness sensor auto- duce wiping intervals, or result in quick contin-
matically controls the window wiper intervals ac- uous wiping.
cording to rain intensity. – Insects: the presence of insects may activate
automatic wiping.
– Salt streaks: during winter time, salt streaks
on the window may cause extremely long wip-
ing patterns until the window is nearly dry. 

84 Owner's Manual
 – Dirt: dry dust, wax, glass lining (lotus effect), ● Only adjust exterior and interior mirrors
and detergent residues (car wash) may reduce while the vehicle is stationary.
the rain sensor's sensitivity, eventually reduc-
● When parking, changing lanes and during
ing its speed or effectiveness. Regularly clean
overtaking or conversion manoeuvres, al-
the rain sensor's sensitive surface → page 236
ways observe the vehicle's surroundings,
and regularly check the window wiper blades
since other vehicles or objects may be loca-
for damages.
ted in blind spots.
– Crack in the windscreen: the impact of a rock
● Always ensure that the mirrors are properly
will activate a wiping cycle when the rain sen-
adjusted and that rear visibility is not limited
sor is enabled. After that, the sensor detects
by misting or other objects.
the reduced sensitivity surface and adjusts. Ac-
cording to the rock's impact area, rain sensor
activation behaviour may be affected.
WARNING
– Stickers and labels: the sensor region must not Inaccurate assessment of the distance of vehi-
be externally or internally covered; otherwise, cles coming from behind may cause severe ac-
the automatic lighting functions and rain sen- cidents and injuries.
sor will not operate properly. ● The domed surfaces of exterior mirrors (con-
vex) increase visibility and make objects ap-
A glass-cleaning product, such as alcohol, is rec- pear smaller and more distant.
ommended to remove wax and polishing resi-
dues from the windows. ● Using the left and right-hand exterior mirrors
to assess the distance of vehicles coming
Wipers will attempt to remove any obsta- from behind when changing lanes is inaccu-
cles on the windscreen. If the obstacle con- rate and may cause severe accidents and in-
tinues to block the windscreen wipers movement juries.
the wipers will stop. Remove the obstacle and re- ● Whenever possible, use the internal mirror to
activate the wipers.  ascertain the distance of vehicles coming
from behind or the distance to other objects.
● Ensure that rear visibility is always unob-
structed.
Mirrors
WARNING
The interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle
 Introduction function contains an electrolytic fluid which
may leak, should the mirror glass be broken.
In order to ensure safety, the driver must proper- ● The leaked electrolytic fluid may irritate the
ly adjust exterior and interior mirrors before driv- skin, eyes and breathing organs, especially of
ing → . people suffering from asthma or similar dis-
eases. Ensure the immediate entry of suffi-
Drivers are able to notice traffic movements be-
cient fresh air and leave the vehicle or, if this
hind them and adjust driving behaviours accord-
is not possible, open all windows and doors.
ingly using the exterior and interior mirrors.
There are some areas to the side and behind the ● In case of contact of the electrolytic fluid
vehicle that cannot be seen through the exterior with the eyes or skin, wash immediately with
and interior mirrors. Such areas are called blind plenty water for at least 15 minutes and seek
spots. There may be other vehicles, pedestrians medical attention.
and objects in blind spots. ● In case of contact of the electrolytic fluid
with footwear or clothes wash them imme-
WARNING diately with plenty water for at least 15 mi-
Adjusting exterior and interior mirrors while nutes. Carefully clean the affected clothing
driving may distract the driver. This could lead items prior using them again.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

to accidents and severe injuries. ● In case of ingestion of the electrolytic fluid,

immediately wash the mouth with plenty
water for at least 15 minutes. Do not induce 

Visibility 85
 vomiting unless directed to do so by medical Rear visibility may be hindered or eliminated by
personnel. Immediately seek medical assis- objects placed over the luggage compartment
tance. cover, for example.

Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror

NOTICE
With the ignition switched on, the sensors meas-
The electrolytic fluid contained in automatic anti-
ure the incidence of light from behind → Fig. 79
dazzle mirrors may leak due to a broken mirror 1 and from the front 2 .
glass. This fluid damages plastic surfaces. Re-
move the fluid as quickly as possible, for exam- Depending on the measured values, the interior
ple, with a damp sponge.  mirror is automatically anti-dazzled.
When the light incidence detected by the sensors
is compromised or interrupted, the interior mir-
ror with automatic anti-dazzle function may mal-
Interior mirror function. Similarly external navigation devices on
the windscreen or near the automatic anti-dazzle
 Please refer to and at the start of the
interior mirror may negatively affect the sensors
chapter on page 85.
→ .
In some situations the automatic anti-dazzle is
disabled, for instance, when reverse gear is en-
gaged.

Manual anti-dazzle interior mirror

– Day position: the lower mirror edge lever
points towards the windscreen.
– Night position: pull the lever → Fig. 80 (grey
arrow), to avoid glare from the headlights of
vehicles travelling behind.

WARNING
The display light from a mobile phone or porta-
ble navigation device may compromise the
proper operation of the automatic anti-dazzle
interior mirror, potentially leading to severe ac-
cidents and injuries.
Fig. 79 On the windscreen: automatic anti-dazzle ● A malfunctioning automatic anti-dazzle may
interior mirror. prevent the use of the interior mirror to cor-
rectly determine the distance to the vehicle
following behind or the distance to other ob-
jects.
● Never hang objects on the automatic anti-
dazzle interior mirror, such objects may im-
pair the proper operation and cause the au-
tomatic anti-dazzle to malfunction.

Visibility is hindered by using interior mir-

rors in the night position. 

Fig. 80 On the windscreen: manual anti-dazzle in-

terior mirror.

The driver must adjust the interior mirror so that

he/she can see clearly through the rear window.

86 Owner's Manual
 Exterior mirrors When the rotary button of the electrically adjust-
able exterior mirror is in the  position, the exte-
rior mirrors stay folded inward.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 85. Saving the right-hand exterior mirror
adjustments for reverse gear (tilt down)
– Select a valid vehicle key to which the setting
is to be attributed.
– Unlock the vehicle with this vehicle key.
– Switch on the ignition.
– Selecting reverse gear.
– Adjust the right exterior mirror in order to al-
low proper visibility of kerb edge, for example.
– The set exterior mirror position is automatical-
ly saved and attributed to the vehicle key.
Accessing the right-hand exterior mirror adjust-
ments for reverse gear (tilt down)
Fig. 81 On the driver door: rotary adjusting knob for – Rotate the rotary knob for the exterior mirror
the electric exterior mirrors. to .
– With the ignition turned on, engage the re-
Electric exterior mirrors verse gear. The exterior mirror takes up the
– Switch on the ignition. saved position.
– Rotate the rotary knob in the driver door until
The saved reverse gear position of the right exte-
reaching the desired icon → Fig. 81.
rior mirror will be abandoned when driving for-
– Move the rotating knob forward, backward, to ward again at a speed greater than about 15
the right or to the left, as indicated by the ar- km/h or when the rotary switch is moved from
rows, to adjust the exterior mirror. position  to another position.
Electrically folding exterior mirrors inwards Exterior mirrors can be manually folded (rotated)
 (not available in some versions) → . inwards and outwards. The use position is de-
Adjusting the left exterior mirror. fined by a clear locking position in both sides (left
 and right).
Adjusting the right exterior mirror.
 WARNING
Neutral position. The exterior mirrors can-
 not be adjusted and all functions are disa- Exterior mirrors should only be adjusted when
bled. the vehicle is stationary, in order to prevent the
driver from being distracted.
Enabling the exterior mirror functions
WARNING
Depending on the vehicle and radio version, the
following exterior mirror functions must be set in Careless folding of exterior mirrors may cause
the radio system with the button  OR function injuries.
button  and function button Car → page 26. ● Make sure there are no obstacles in the oper-
– Enable on the displayed menu the respective ating area when folding exterior mirrors in or
function of the exterior mirror. out.
● Handle with care in order to prevent fingers
Folding exterior mirrors inward when parking from getting stuck between the exterior mir-
If the vehicle is locked or unlocked from the out- ror and the mirror frame, while the mirror is
side, the exterior mirrors will automatically fold moving. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

in or out. For this the rotary knob must be in po-

sition ,  or .

Visibility 87
 NOTICE NOTICE
Always fold in exterior mirrors in automatic Handle sun visors and vanity mirror covers care-
washing systems. fully in order to avoid damages. 
● Do not fold electric exterior mirrors in or out,
since this could damage the electrical system.

In case of failure, electric exterior mirrors Tilting panoramic sunroof sun blind
may be manually adjusted by pressing the
edge of the mirror surface. 

Sliding headliner

Sun visor

Fig. 83 On the headliner: sun blind control buttons.

The electric sun blind only works with the igni-

tion turned on.
When the sunroof is in the maximum deflector
position, the sun blind is automatically placed in
ventilation position. The sun blind remains in this
position after the sunroof is closed.

Open and close the sun blind

Fig. 82 Sun visor.
Buttons → Fig. 83 1 and 2 have two stages.
Press the buttons into the first stage to open or
Various positions for the driver and front close the sun blind completely or partially.
passenger sun visors: Briefly press the buttons into the second stage to
– Folding the sun visor down to the windscreen. automatically move the sun blind into the corre-
– Carefully remove the sun visor from the sup- sponding final position. Briefly press the button
port, holding the support base, and swivel to- again to interrupt the process.
wards the door → Fig. 82 A .
– Open the sun blind: Press button 1 to the
Vanity mirrors first stage. One-touch opening: Briefly press
button 1 until the second stage.
A vanity mirror is located behind a cover on the
folded down sun visor. When opening the cover – Close the sun blind: Press button 2 to the
→ Fig. 82 B a lamp lights up 1 . first stage. One-touch opening: Briefly press
button 2 until the second stage.
The lamp will go out when the vanity mirror cov-
– Interrupt one-touch opening or closing: Press
er is pushed back or the sun visor is folded back
button 1 or 2 again.
up.
The sun blind can still be opened or closed for a
WARNING few minutes after the ignition is turned off, pro-
Sun visors folded downwards may reduce the vided that the driver or front passenger doors are
field of vision and decrease safety. not opened. 
● Sun visors and sunblind should always be re-
placed in their holder if they are not being
used.

88 Owner's Manual
 Sun blind roll-back function
The roll-back function can reduce the risk of in-
Heating and air
jury when closing the sun blind → . If the sun conditioning
blind is obstructed while closing, it will immedi-
ately open again. Heating, ventilating, cooling
– Check what prevented the sun blind from clos-
ing.  Introduction
– Try to close the sun blind again.
– If the sun blind still cannot be closed due to an
obstacle or resistance, it will immediately open The following equipment may be installed in
again. Once the sun blind is open, it can be the vehicle:
closed without the roll-back function for a The ventilation and heating system heats and
short period of time. ventilates the vehicle interior. The ventilation and
– If the sun blind cannot be closed, close it with- heating system does not cool.
out the roll-back function. The air-conditioner or Climatronic cool and de-
humidify the air. They work best when all win-
Closing the sun blind without roll-back dows are closed. In case of accumulated heat in
function the vehicle interior, ventilation may speed the
– Press the → Fig. 83 button 2 within approxi- cooling process.
mately 5 seconds after activating the roll-back
function, until the sun blind is completely Indication of active functions
closed. The lighted LEDs on controls and buttons indi-
– The sun blind will now close without the roll- cate that a function is active.
back function!
WARNING
– If the sun blind still does not close, seek assis-
tance from a Volkswagen Dealership or a Poor visibility through all windows increases
qualified workshop. the risk of collisions and accidents, which can
lead to severe injuries.
WARNING ● Always ensure that all windows are free of
Closing the sun blind without the roll-back ice, snow and mist in order to have good visi-
function may cause serious injuries. bility.
● Always be cautious when closing the sun ● Maximum heat output, which is needed to
blind. defrost the windows as quickly as possible, is
only available when the engine has reached
● Ensure that nobody obstructs the path of the
its operating temperature. Do not start your
sun blind, especially if the roll-back function
journey until you have good visibility.
is disabled.
● Always ensure that the heating and fresh air
● The roll-back function does not prevent fin-
system or air conditioning and rear window
gers or other body parts from being pressed
heating system are used properly in order to
against the roof frame, resulting in injuries.
guarantee proper exterior visibility.
When the sunroof is open, the electric sun ● Never use the air recirculation mode for ex-
blind can only be closed until the front edge tended periods. If the cooling system is
of the sunroof.  switched off, the windows can mist up very
quickly in air recirculation mode and reduce
visibility considerably.
● Always switch off the air recirculation mode
if it is not required. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Heating and air conditioning 89

 WARNING NOTICE
Stale air can cause tiredness and lack of con- ● Switch off the air conditioning system if you
centration in the driver, which in turn can cause suspect that it has been damaged. This can
collisions, accidents and severe injuries. help to prevent further damage. The air condi-
● Never leave the blower off for extended peri- tioning system must be checked by a
ods and never use the recirculation mode for Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop.
extended periods, since this prevent fresh air ● Repairs to the air conditioning system require
from entering the vehicle. specific knowledge and tools. Volkswagen rec-
ommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for
NOTICE this purpose. 
Do not place food, medicines or other tempera-
ture sensitive object in front of the vents. Food,
medicines or other heat or cold sensitive objects
may be damaged or rendered unusable by the air
outflow.

Air conditioning controls

 Please refer to and at the start of the chapter on page 89.

Fig. 84 Air conditioning controls.

Fig. 85 Climatronic controls. 

90 Owner's Manual
 Some functions and buttons are version  – Air recirculation mode
dependent and depend o the type of system fit-
In air recirculation mode, no fresh air enters the
ted.
interior of the vehicle → page 93.
Turning off – Air Conditioner: press the  button→ Fig. 84
6.
– Air conditioner: rotate the blower regulator to
level  → Fig. 84 5 . – Climatronic: Touch the function button 
→ Fig. 85 5 .
– Climatronic: slide your finger to the left under
the function surface → Fig. 84 7 , then press Air distribution
the leftmost  button.
– Air-conditioning: rotate the right regulator
 –Automatic mode → Fig. 84 4 to the desired position.
When touching the function button  – Climatronic: touch the function button
→ Fig. 85 10 it is possible to switch on the Clima- → Fig. 85 6 on the desired position, the se-
tronic automatic mode. lected distribution will be indicated on the dis-
play 3 .
The automatic mode ensures constant tempera-
tures in the vehicle interior. The air temperature,
the air volume and its distribution is automatical-  – Air distribution to the upper body part with
ly regulated. Automatic operation turns off when the chest vents in the dash panel.
ventilation is changed manually → Fig. 85 7 or
by changing the air distribution across the func-  – Distribution of air to the footwell.
tion button → Fig. 85 6 .
 Climatronic – Air distribution to the upper
 – Cooling mode body part and the footwell.
– Air Conditioner: press the button  → Fig. 84
2 to turn the cooling operation on and off.  – Air distribution to the windscreen and the
– Climatronic: touch the function button footwell area.
 → Fig. 85 4 to turn on and off the cooling
functioning.  Air conditioning – Air distribution to the
windscreen.
In cooling mode the air is dehumidified.

 /  – Temperature  Climatronic – Air distribution to the wind-

screen.
– Air-conditioning: rotate the left rotary regula-
tor → Fig. 84 1 .  |  – Defrost function
– Climatronic: slide your finger under the func- The defrosting function eliminates the frost from
tion button → Fig. 85 9 . the windscreen.
On the Climatronic display → Fig. 85 3 the set – Air conditioning: rotate the right rotary regula-
temperature is displayed. tor to  → Fig. 84 4 .
 – Blower – Climatronic: Touch the function button 
→ Fig. 85 1 .
– Air-conditioning: rotate the blower regulator
→ Fig. 84 5 . Air-conditioning: under the defrosting function
– Climatronic: slide your finger under the func- the air circulation mode is disabled and the air
tion button → Fig. 85 7 . conditioner compressor is turned on to remove
the humidity from the air. With the defrost func-
tion enabled, the air circulation mode cannot be
turned on and the air conditioner compressor
cannot be turned off.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Climatronic: under the defrost function, the air is

dehumidified and the blower is set to a high lev-
el. 

Heating and air conditioning 91

 – Rear window defrost function Air conditioning menu in VW Play
To turn the rear window heating on and off with For vehicles with VW Play, press MENU → Fig. 85
the engine running. 8 to open the air conditioning menu on the ra-
dio.
– Air Conditioner: press the button  → Fig. 84
3. The air conditioning menu on the VW Play display
– Climatronic: touch the function button  is only available in Climatronic.
→ Fig. 85 2 . It is possible to partially control the air condition-
The rear window defroster is turned of automati- ing via radio (Low and Hi temperatures, not avail-
cally after about 10 minutes. able). To achieve this condition, control must be
carried out using the air conditioning control.
Recommended air conditioner settings In the air conditioning menu you will find, for ex-
– Switch the air recirculation mode off. ample, the temperature adjustment → page 90
– Adjust the blower to level  or . and air distribution functions → page 91.
– Put the temperature adjuster in the middle po- The top part of the screen shows the current air
sition. conditioning settings, for example, the automatic
– Open and align all the vents of the dashboard. mode air conditioning profile.
– Set the air distribution controller to the de- The bottom part of the screen shows function
sired position. areas for frequently used air conditioning func-
tions.
– Press the  button on the panel to switch
the cooling system on. Air conditioning operating states
The air conditioning operating states are dis-
Climatronic recommended settings
played in colour:
– Touch the function button  .
– Set the temperature to +22 °C.  Cool down.
 Warm.
– Open and align the dash panel vents.

Fast cooling inside the vehicle NOTICE

In order to obtain fast cooling inside the vehicle, To prevent damages to the rear window defrost-
follow the instructions below: er, no sticker should be stuck on the inside on the
filaments.
– Turn the temperature regulator or touch the
function button fully to the left. After the window is cleared, the function
– Set the air distribution to the position . must be switched off. Lower current con-
sumption also decreases fuel consumption.
– Turn regulator or touch fan function button to
maximum level. The air conditioner and air re- If the air conditioner and air recirculation
circulation mode are automatically turned on. mode are turned off manually, the system
– Case the air conditioner does not turn on, will not automatically turn them on next time the
press the  key or touch the function button blower is switched off and on again. The system
to switch the cooling system on. will only start working automatically again after
the temperature switch is removed from the full
– If the vehicle is exposed to the sun for exten-
left position and placed back into this position. 
ded periods, open the front door windows par-
tially or completely for a brief amount of time
(1 to 3 minutes), in order to remove the hot air
mass inside the vehicle.
– Close the windows and, if necessary, press the
 key or touch the function button to turn
the air recirculation mode on.

92 Owner's Manual
 Air recirculation mode Troubleshooting
 Please refer to and at the start of the  Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 89. chapter on page 89.

The air recirculation mode prevents outside air The following hints and operational instructions
from entering the vehicle. help with the correct use of the system.
– Press the  key or touch the function button The cooling system for the vehicle interior only
on the dash panel to turn the air recirculation works when the engine is running and the blower
mode on or off. is switched on.
The air conditioning system operates most effec-
When is the air recirculation mode turned off?
tively with the windows closed. However, if the
The air recirculation is turned off under the fol- vehicle has heated up after standing in the sun
lowing situations → : for some time, the air inside can be cooled more
– When the Climatronic  function button is quickly by opening the windows for a short time.
turned on.
Why does the cooling system turn off
– When the air conditioner air distribution regu- automatically or cannot be turned on?
lator or surface button is positioned to posi-
– The engine is not running.
tion .
– The blower is switched off.
WARNING – The air conditioning system fuse has blown.
Stale air can cause tiredness and lack of con- – Room temperature is below approximately +3
centration in the driver, which in turn can cause ℃.
collisions, accidents and severe injuries. – The air conditioner compressor has been tem-
● Never leave the blower off for extended peri- porarily deactivated because the engine cool-
ods and never use the recirculation mode for ant temperature is too high.
extended periods, since this prevent fresh air – There is a fault on the vehicle. The air condi-
from entering the vehicle. tioning system must be checked by a
● With the cooling system switched off, the Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop.
windows can mist up very quickly in air recir-
culation mode, reducing visibility considera- Settings for optimal road visibility
bly. – Keep the air entrance of the windscreen free
● Always shut down the air recirculation mode of ice or leaves to increase the heating or cool-
when no longer necessary. ing power and prevent the frosting of the win-
dows → page 231.
NOTICE – Keep the air slot of the rear area of the lug-
Do not smoke with the air recirculation mode gage compartment free so that the air may
turned on. The smoke drawn into the cooling flow freely from the front to the back through
system can leave a residue on the evaporator and the vehicle.
the dust and pollen filter, producing a permanent – When the engine coolant has reached its op-
unpleasant odour. erational temperature, the highest heating
power will have been reached and the fastest
At very high outside temperatures, it is rec- window defrosting.
ommended to select the recirculation mode
for a short time, to cool down the interior of the Dust and pollen filter
vehicle faster.  The dust and pollen filter with activated charcoal
reduces the level of particles in the outside air
entering the vehicle.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

The pollen and dust filter needs to be regularly

replaced to keep the air conditioner's efficiency
unimpaired. Case the vehicle is frequently used in 

Heating and air conditioning 93

heavily polluted environments, the filter should
be replaced between servicing events
Driving
→ page 231.
Driving guidelines
Water vapour underneath the vehicle
If the outside humidity and temperature are high, Pedals
condensed water may drip off the cooling sys-
tem's evaporator and form a pool of water un-
derneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not
indicate a leak!
The air conditioning supercharger con-
sumes engine power during cooling, thus
contributing to increased fuel consumption. To
reduce cooling time to a minimum, observe the
following instructions:
● If a vehicle stationary under the sun is too hot,
open the doors and windows for a few sec-
onds in order to let the hot air out. Fig. 86 In the footwell: pedals in vehicles with
● Ensure that external hot air does not enter the manual transmission.
vehicle, for example, through an open window,
while the air conditioning is switched on.
● If it is possible to reach the desired tempera-
ture without switching the air conditioning on,
only use the ventilation system.
When arriving at destination (about 2 mi-
nutes before), turn the air conditioner off
leaving only the ventilation operating. This helps
reducing the humidity in the evaporator, reduc-
ing the appearance of unpleasant odours in the
interior of the vehicle.
Fig. 87 In the footwell: pedals in vehicles with au-
The air conditioning compressor may mo- tomatic gearbox.
mentarily shut down in some situations,
such as stepping on the brakes, accelerating or Key for → Fig. 86 and → Fig. 87:
manoeuvring.  1 Gas pedal
2 Brake pedal
3 Clutch pedal, in vehicles with a manual gear-
box.

The operation and freedom of movement of all

pedals must never be impaired by objects or floor
mats.
Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area free
and can be securely fastened in the footwell.

WARNING
Items in the driver footwell can hinder pedal
operation. This can lead to loss of control of the
vehicle and increase the risk of serious injury.
● Ensure that all pedals can always be operat-
ed without any hindrance. 

94 Owner's Manual
 ● Always safely secure foot mats. allow safely following the gearshift indicator
● Additional foot mats or other floor coverings (e.g. when overtaking or driving with fully-
should never be placed over the fitted foot loaded vehicles).
mat.
Enhanced gear selection decreases fuel
● Ensure that no objects can enter the driver consumption.
footwell while the vehicle is in motion.
Warning texts may vary according to the in-
NOTICE strument cluster version.
Ensure that you are able to operate the pedals In vehicles with manual gearbox the gear-
freely at all times. For example, the braking dis- change indicator display turns off when the
tance to fully stop the vehicle will be longer if a clutch pedal is actuated or, in vehicles with auto-
braking circuit is faulty. The brake pedal will have matic gearbox, when leaving the Tiptronic gate. 
to be depressed further and harder than normal. 

Economical driving style

Gear change recommendation

Fig. 88 On the instrument cluster: gear change in-

dicator.

Key for → Fig. 88:

A Current engaged gear. Fig. 89 Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km at
B Recommended gear shift. two distinct ambient temperatures.

Depending on the vehicle version, a gear shift

recommendation may be indicated on the instru- Driving correctly it is possible to reduce
ment cluster display to optimize fuel savings. fuel consumption, harming the environ-
In vehicles with automatic gearbox the selector ment and engine, brake and tyre wear.
lever must be in the Tiptronic position Below are some tips on minimizing the
→ page 108. environmental impact and save.
When the ideal gear is already selected, no gear
shift is recommended. The currently engaged Fuel consumption, environmental impact and
gear is displayed. wear on the engine, brakes and tyres depend
largely on 3 factors:
CAUTION
– Personal driving style.
The gear-change indicator is merely a support-
– Conditions of use (such as weather and road
ing system and must not distract the driver
surface characteristics).
from traffic.
– Technical conditions.
● The gearshift indicator merely assists the
driver in increasing fuel savings. The driver is By adopting an economical driving style and an-
25A.5L1.TCR.20

exclusively responsible for assessing whether ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
current vehicle, road, and traffic conditions easily reduce fuel consumption by 10 to 15%. 

Driving 95
A car uses most fuel when accelerating. If you When driving on a motorway, it is much more ef-
think ahead when driving, you will need to brake fective to drive at a constant moderate speed
less and thus accelerate less. Wherever possible, than to drive with constant acceleration and
let the car roll slowly to a stop, for instance when braking. As a rule, driving with a constant style
you can see that the next traffic lights are red. will get you to your destination just as quickly.

Changing gear earlier Using additional equipment in moderation

Basically: the highest gear is always the most It is always important to be comfortable in your
economical gear. As a rule of thumb, the follow- vehicle, but it is also important to consider the
ing applies to most vehicles: at a speed of 30 environment.
km/h (19 mph) drive in 3rd gear, at 40 km/h (25 Some equipment will increase fuel consumption
mph) in 4th gear and at 50 km/h (31 mph) in 5th when switched on (examples):
gear.
– Air conditioning cooling system: if the air con-
If traffic and driving scenarios are suitable, “skip-
ditioning system is set to a very high or low
ping” gears when changing up a gear will also
temperature it will require a lot of energy,
save fuel.
which is generated by the engine. Therefore
Do not drive gears to their upper limit. Use 1st the temperature setting in the vehicle should
gear only for pulling away then quickly change up not vary too much from the outside tempera-
to 2nd gear. ture. It may be a good idea to air the vehicle
Vehicles with gearshift indicator help reduce fuel before setting off and then to travel a short
consumption by recommending ideal gears for distance with the windows open. The air con-
each specific situation. ditioning system should then be switched on
once the windows have been closed.
Rolling to a stop – Keep the windows closed when driving at high
Taking your foot off the accelerator will interrupt speeds. Open windows increase fuel consump-
the supply of fuel to the engine and decrease fuel tion.
consumption. – Switch off the rear window defrost function
Therefore, in situations such as approaching a when the window is clear.
red traffic light, let the vehicle roll without apply-
Other factors which increase fuel
ing the accelerator. Only press on the clutch ped-
consumption (examples):
al to disengage if the vehicle becomes too slow
or if the stopping distance is longer. The engine – Fault in engine management system.
will then run at idling speed. – Driving in hilly regions.
Switch off the engine in situations in which the – Driving with a trailer.
vehicle might be stationary for a long time, e.g.
at a level crossing. Avoid short journeys
Directly after a cold start, the engine has a very
Thinking ahead when driving, and driving with high fuel consumption. The engine reaches its
the “flow” of traffic working temperature after a few kilometres,
Frequently applying the brake and accelerator when fuel consumption will return to a normal
will increase fuel consumption. By thinking ahead level.
when driving and by maintaining a sufficient dis- The engine and catalytic converter need to reach
tance to the vehicle in front, simply keeping your their proper working temperature in order to
foot off the accelerator will stop the speed from minimise fuel consumption and pollutant emis-
fluctuating. This means that active braking and sions. The outside temperature also has a deci-
accelerating is not always necessary. sive influence.
Driving smoothly and evenly The different rates of fuel consumption for the
Smoothness is even more important than speed. same distance at both +20°C (+68°F) and at
The more evenly you drive, the lower your fuel -10°C (+14°F) are shown in → Fig. 89.
consumption will be. Therefore, avoid making too many short journeys
and car share whenever possible. 

96 Owner's Manual
 Under the same conditions, the vehicle will use Information on the brakes
more fuel in the winter than in the summer.
Not only is it illegal in some countries to “warm New brake pads cannot generate the full braking
up” cold engines, it is also technically unnecessa- effect during the first 300 km and must first be
ry and a waste of fuel. “run in” → . However, you can compensate for
the slightly reduced braking force by applying
Adjust tyre pressure more pressure to the brake pedal. During the
The correct tyre pressure reduces rolling resist- run-in period, the braking distance is longer
ance and therefore also fuel consumption. when the brakes are depressed fully or during
emergency braking than with brakes that have
When purchasing new tyres, always make sure
been fully run in. In the run-in period, the brakes
that the tyres have optimum rolling resistance.
should not be depressed fully and situations
Using low friction engine oil should be avoided that create a heavy load on
the brakes. For example, when driving too close
Fully synthetic low-viscosity engine oils, known
to other vehicles.
as low-friction engine oils, reduce fuel consump-
tion. Low viscosity engine oils decrease frictional The rate of wear of the brake pads depends to a
resistance in the engine and spread better and great extent on use conditions and driving style.
more quickly, especially for cold starts. They are When frequently driving in city traffic and short
especially effective in vehicles which make a lot distances or in sporty manner, the brake pad
of short journeys. thicknesses needs to be periodically checked by a
Volkswagen dealership or a specialized work-
Always make sure that the engine oil level is cor-
shop.
rect and that you keep to the service intervals (oil
change intervals). When driving with wet brakes, for example after
driving through water, after heavy rainfall or af-
When purchasing engine oil, always make sure it
ter washing the vehicle, the braking effect may
complies with engine oil standards and has been
be delayed as the brake discs will be wet, or pos-
approved by Volkswagen.
sibly iced up (during the winter). Brakes must be
Avoid unnecessary loads “dried” as soon as possible by carefully braking at
higher speed. Ensure that no following vehicle
The lighter the vehicle, the more economical and and no other road user is put at risk as a result of
environmentally-friendly it is. An extra weight of this action → .
100 kg increases fuel consumption, for example,
by up to 0.3 l/100km. A layer of salt that accumulates on the discs and
pads will delay the braking effect and increase
Remove all unnecessary items and loads from the the braking distance. If the brakes on the vehicle
vehicle. have not been applied for a long time on roads
that have been gritted with salt, the layer of salt
Remove any unnecessary special equipment
must be reduced through careful braking → .
and accessories
The more aerodynamic a vehicle, the lower its Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt in the brake
fuel consumption. Special equipment and acces- pads are facilitated through long periods of inac-
sories, such as roof carriers or bicycle carriers, tivity, low mileage and low load levels. If there
make the vehicle less aerodynamic. has been little or no use of the brake pads, or if
there is corrosion, Volkswagen recommends that
You should therefore remove any special equip- the brake discs and brake pads be cleaned by
ment and luggage carriers that are not being carefully braking several times at higher speed,
used, especially if you are going to be driving at always in compliance with speed limits and cur-
high speeds. rent driving conditions (e.g. wet or dry roads,
night or day driving). Ensure that no following
WARNING vehicle and no other road user is put at risk as a
Adapt your speed and distance from the vehi- result of this action → . 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

cles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions. 

Driving 97
Brake servo WARNING
The brake servo will only function when the en-
Driving without the brake servo can considera-
gine is running and reinforces the pressure ap-
bly increase the braking distance and thus
plied by the driver on the brake pedal.
cause accidents and serious injuries.
If the brake servo is not functioning or the vehi- ● Never allow the vehicle to roll if the engine is
cle is being towed, the brake pedal will have to switched off.
be depressed more forcefully, since the braking
distance will be increased due to the lack of as- ● If the brake servo is not functioning or the
sistance for the brake system → . vehicle is being towed, the brake pedal will
have to be depressed more forcefully, since
WARNING the braking distance will be increased due to
the lack of assistance for the brake system.
New brake pads will not have the optimal brak-
ing effect when first fitted. NOTICE
● New brake pads cannot generate the full
● Never let the brakes “rub” by applying light
braking effect during the first 300 km and
pressure to the brake when it is not necessary
must first be “run in”. A reduced braking ef-
to brake. Continual pressure on the brake ped-
fect can be increased by applying more pres-
al will overheat the brakes. This can considera-
sure to the brake pedal.
bly reduce the brake effect, increase the brak-
● You must drive particularly carefully when ing distance and, in certain circumstances,
driving with new brake pads in order to re- cause the brake system to fail completely.
duce the risk of accidents, severe injuries and
● Before driving down a long, steep gradient, re-
loss of vehicle control.
duce speed and change to a lower gear or
● Never drive too close to other vehicles when move the selector lever to a lower gear. This
running in new brake pads, and never create will make use of the engine braking effect and
a driving situation that will place a heavy relieve the load on the brakes. The brake sys-
load on the brakes. tem could otherwise overheat and fail. Only
use the brakes to slow down or stop the vehi-
WARNING cle.
Overheated brakes reduce the braking effect
If the front brake pads are tested, the rear
and considerably increase the braking distance.
brake pads should be tested at the same
● When driving downhill the brakes are placed time. visual check of the thickness of all brake
under particular strain and become hot very pads should be carried out regularly by checking
quickly. the brake pads through the openings in the
● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers wheels or from the underside of the vehicle. If
could restrict the airflow to the brakes and necessary, remove the wheels to carry out a
cause them to overheat. comprehensive check. Volkswagen recommends
using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. 
WARNING
Wet brakes or brakes coated with ice or road
salt react more slowly and require longer brak- Driving a loaded vehicle
ing distances.
● Carefully apply the brakes to test them. For good vehicle handling when driving a loaded
● Always dry brakes and clean off any coating vehicle, please observe the following:
of ice and salt with a few cautious applica- – Stow all items of luggage securely → page 166.
tions of the brake when visibility, weather,
– Accelerate carefully and gently.
road and traffic conditions permit.
– Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres.
– Brake earlier than in normal driving.
– If applicable, observe the information concern-
ing driving with towing mode → page 172. 

98 Owner's Manual
 WARNING WARNING
Moving loads can severely impair the vehicle's Poisonous exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
stability and driving safety, which can cause ac- interior when the boot lid is open. This could
cidents and severe injuries. result in loss of consciousness, carbon monox-
● Secure objects properly to prevent them ide poisoning, serious injury and accidents.
from sliding. ● Always drive with the boot lid closed in order
● Use suitable straps when securing heavy ob- to prevent toxic gases from entering the ve-
jects. hicle.
● Secure the rear seat backrest in an upright ● If exceptional circumstances require you to
position.  drive with an open boot lid, you must do the
following to reduce the quantity of toxic ex-
haust fumes that could enter the vehicle:
– Close all windows.
Driving with the rear lid open – In vehicles with air conditioning, switch
off the air recirculation mode.
Driving with the boot lid open is particularly dan-
– Open all vents in the dash panel.
gerous. Ensure that the open boot lid and any
objects are secured properly, and adopt appropri- – Switch the blowers to the highest setting.
ate measures to reduce the quantity of toxic ex-
haust fumes entering the vehicle. NOTICE
The vehicle level changes when the boot lid is
WARNING open. 
Driving with an unlocked or open boot lid can
cause serious injuries.
● Volkswagen recommends not driving with an Driving through water on roads
open boot lid. However, if such scenario is
absolutely indispensable, observe the follow- Avoid driving through water on roads. Driving un-
ing instructions: der such conditions hinders the driveability, and
– Always stow all objects in the luggage may cause severe damages to the vehicle, com-
compartment securely. Loose objects can promising the safety of the driver and other pas-
fall out of the luggage compartment and sengers. If absolutely necessary to cross the floo-
injure other road users. ded area, observe the following in order to pre-
– Always drive carefully and defensively. vent damages to the vehicle, driver, and passen-
– Avoid any abrupt or sudden driving and gers:
braking manoeuvres as this can cause the – Check the water depth before driving through
open boot lid to move unpredictably. water on roads. The water level must be no
– Any objects protruding from the luggage higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body
compartment must be marked to ensure (underneath the doors) → .
that they are visible to other road users. – Do not drive faster than walking speed.
Legal provisions must be followed.
– Never stop the vehicle, reverse or switch off
– In case of objects protruding from the lug-
the engine while in water.
gage compartment, the boot lid must nev-
er be used to “hold” or “fasten” objects. – Oncoming vehicles create waves that can in-
– Remove the load mounted over the boot crease the water level for your vehicle to such
lid whenever it is necessary to drive with an extent that it is not safe to drive through
the boot lid open. the water.
– When crossing flooded areas, vehicles with
Start-Stop system disable the system manually
→ page 105.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Driving 99
 WARNING If the engine is run in gently, the life of the
engine will be increased and its oil con-
After driving through water, mud and dirt roads sumption reduced. 
the brakes may be hindered due to the humidi-
ty or freezing of brake pads or disks, increasing
the braking distance.
● “Dry the brakes and eliminate ice” through Using the vehicle in other countries
careful braking manoeuvres. Proceed with- and continents
out putting other drivers at risk or failing to
abide by legal requirements. The vehicle is produced specifically for a certain
● Avoid sudden braking manoeuvres after country and complies with this country's regis-
crossing through water in roads. tration regulations valid at the time of vehicle
production.
NOTICE If the vehicle is going to be sold in another coun-
● When driving through water in roads, some try or used in another country for an extended
vehicle components such as the engine, trans- period, the legal requirements applicable in that
mission, chassis or electrical system, may be country must be observed.
severely damaged. In some cases, certain equipment will have to be
● Never drive through salt water, since salt can fitted or removed and functions deactivated. The
cause corrosion. Rinse all components that scope and type of service available may also be
have been exposed to salt water immediately affected. This is particularly important if the ve-
with fresh water.  hicle is driven in another climate region for a long
period of time.
Because different frequency bands are used in
different countries, the factory-fitted radio or
Running-in navigation system may not work in other coun-
tries.
A new engine needs to be run in during the first
1,500 kilometres. All the moving parts must be
NOTICE
able to adjust themselves to each other. During
the first hours of operation the engine has to ● Volkswagen may not be held liable for dam-
cope with a higher internal friction than later on. ages caused to the vehicle due to low-quality
fuel, inadequate servicing work, and use of
Up to 1,000 kilometres, the following applies: non-genuine parts.
– Do not fully depress the accelerator. ● Volkswagen may not be held liable in case the
– Do not drive the vehicle at more than 2/3 of vehicle does not comply or only partially com-
the top engine speed. plies with legal requirements from other coun-
– Do not drive with a trailer attached. tries and continents. 
Between 1,000 and 1,500 kilometres
– Gradually increase the speed and engine rpm,
limited to the respective driving location. Troubleshooting
The style of driving during the first 1,500 kilome- Brake system malfunction
tres will also affect the engine quality. Even after
the engine has been run-in, and especially with a A brake circuit may have failed if you have to re-
cold engine, drive the vehicle at moderate rpm's duce speed and the vehicle does not brake as
in order to reduce engine wear and to increase its normal (sudden increase in braking distance).
useful life span. This will be indicated by the warning lamp  and
in some cases a text message. Go to a
Do not drive at engine speeds which are too low. Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop as
Always shift down gear if the engine is not run- soon as possible. Drive at low speed when doing
ning “smoothly”. this and anticipate much longer braking distan-
ces and an increase in the pressure required on
the pedal. 

100 Owner's Manual

 Starting and stopping the ● Always take all vehicle keys with you when
you leave the vehicle. The engine can be
engine started and electrical equipment such as the
window controls can be operated, which may
lead to severe injuries.
Ignition cylinder
● Never leave unattended children or people
with special needs in the vehicle. They could
become trapped in the vehicle in an emer-
gency and may not be able to get themselves
to safety. Depending on the time of year, for
example, locked vehicles can be subjected to
very high or very low temperatures. This can
cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities,
especially for small children.
● Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
tion cylinder while the vehicle is in motion.

NOTICE
With the ignition turned on and engine off, the
battery of the vehicle may discharge and render a
new start up of the engine impossible.
● Always turn off the ignition prior leaving the
vehicle.
Fig. 90 Next to the steering wheel, to the right: ve- In vehicles with automatic gearbox, if it is
hicle key positions on the ignition cylinder. not possible to remove the vehicle key from
the ignition lock with the vehicle stopped, move
Positions of the key in the vehicle → Fig. 90 the selector lever to position P. If necessary,
0 Ignition switched off. The vehicle key may be press and release the selector lever interlock but-
removed. ton. 
1 Ignition switched on.
2 Step on the brake pedal – (vehicles with au-
tomatic gearbox), or on the clutch pedal (ve- Starter button
hicles with manual gearbox) and turn the en-
gine on. When the engine catches on, release
the ignition key. Upon release, the vehicle
key returns to position → Fig. 90 1 .

Ignition-on indicator
According to the version of the vehicle, the igni-
tion-on indicator may not be available.
When the driver door is opened with the ignition
on, the warning IGNITION ON  may appear on the
instrument cluster display in addition to an
acoustic warning. Fig. 91 On the lower part of the centre console: en-
gine start button.
The acoustic warning is to remind the driver to
turn the ignition off prior leaving the vehicle.
The (Press & Drive) starter button replaces
25A.5L1.TCR.20

WARNING the ignition lock. 

Improper vehicle key use may cause severe in-
juries.

Driving 101
According to the vehicle version, the start button Longer stopped periods with the ignition
may not be available. turned on may discharge the 12V vehicle
The vehicle's engine is started with the (Press & battery to the point when it is no longer possible
Drive) start button. to start the engine.

The vehicle can only be started when there is a If, for example, the vehicle key battery is
valid key inside the vehicle. If the key is out of flat or very weak, the engine may not start
range, the vehicle is not activated and the warn- with the start button. In this case use the emer-
ing on the dash panel cannot be issued immedia- gency start function → page 104. 
telly.

Switching the ignition on or off

Start the engine
Press the start button once, without hitting the
brake or clutch pedal → . – Vehicles with ignition lock: rotate the vehicle
key to → Fig. 90 1 . Ignition switched on.
Automatic ignition turn off
When the driver moves away from the vehicle – Vehicles with engine start button: press the
with the vehicle key and ignition on, the ignition start button once. Ignition switched on.
will automatically turn off after some time. – Press and firmly hold the brake pedal pressed.
Should the dipped beam be turned on during this – Vehicles with manual gearbox: step fully into
time, the side lights stay on for about 30 mi- the clutch pedal, place the gear lever into neu-
nutes. The side light can be turned off by locking tral and hold the pedal until the engine is run-
the vehicle → page 59 or manually → page 77. ning.
After the vehicle has detected that the driver is – Vehicles with automatic gearbox: position the
absent with the automatic engine turn off ena- selector lever to position P or N.
bled, the ignition is automatically turned off after – Vehicles with ignition lock: turn the vehicle key
a given span of time. in the ignition lock to position → Fig. 90 2 –
do not accelerate. When the engine catches,
WARNING release the ignition key.
Unsupervised vehicle movements may cause – Vehicles with engine start button: press the
severe injuries. start button → page 101 – do not accelerate.
● To turn the ignition on, do not hit the brake To start the engine there must be a valid vehi-
or clutch pedal as this will immediately start cle key in the vehicle's interior. When the en-
the engine. gine catches on, release the start button.
– If the engine does not start, stop the proce-
WARNING dure and repeat it after approximately one mi-
Improper or unsupervised use of the vehicle nute.
keys can cause accidents or injuries. – Vehicles with start button: if necessary, exe-
● When leaving the vehicle, turn off your en- cute the emergency start → page 104.
gine and always carry all the vehicle keys – Release the handbrake if you wish to pull away
when leaving the vehicle. Whenever you lock → page 136.
your doors, make sure there are no people
inside. Unauthorized people or children can WARNING
lock the vehicle, start the engine or turn the The risk of serious injury can be reduced with
ignition on and thereby operate the electric the engine running or when starting the en-
equipment such as, for example, the electric gine.
windows.
● Never start or run the engine in unventilated
When leaving the vehicle, always turn the or closed spaces. The exhaust fumes contain
ignition off manually or, should it be the carbon monoxide, an odourless and colour-
case, observe the instructions on the instrument less poisonous gas. Carbon monoxide can
cluster display. cause loss of consciousness and death. 

102 Owner's Manual

 ● Never leave the engine running if you leave – Vehicles with start button: press the start but-
the vehicle unattended. The vehicle could ton briefly → Fig. 91. If the engine won't stop,
move suddenly or something unexpected execute the emergency shut down
may happen that may cause damage and se- → page 104.
rious injuries. – Observe the instructions on the instrument
● Never use a start booster. A start booster can cluster → page 12.
explode and cause the engine to suddenly
run at high revs. WARNING
Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is
WARNING in motion. This can lead to loss of control of the
Never leave the vehicle while the engine is run- vehicle and cause severe accidents and injuries.
ning. The vehicle may move unexpectedly and ● The airbags and belt tensioners will not work
cause severe accidents and injuries, especially if the ignition is switched off.
with the selected gear or respective gear posi- ● The brake servo will not work when the en-
tion. gine is switched off. When the engine is
switched off, greater force is required on the
NOTICE brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
● The starter engine or engine may be damaged ● When the vehicle key is removed from the
when attempting to start the engine while ignition lock, the steering lock may engage
driving or when the engine is started immedi- and it will no longer be possible to manoeu-
ately after being switched off. vre the vehicle.
● While the engine is cool, avoid high rotations,
total acceleration and increased engine load. WARNING
● Do not push or jump start the engine. Unburnt The components of the exhaust system be-
fuel may damage the catalytic converter. come very hot. This can cause fires and serious
injuries.
Do not leave the engine running when the
● Never park the vehicle so that parts of the
vehicle is stationary. Immediately resume
exhaust system can come into contact with
driving when there is good visibility in the win-
inflammable material underneath the vehi-
dows; be careful not to force the engine while
cle, e.g. leaves, dry grass, spilt fuel, etc.
cold. This allows the engine to reach its opera-
tion temperature faster and reduces emissions. ● Never apply underseal or anti-corrosion
coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
When starting the engine, major electrical verter, diesel particulate filter or the heat
consumers are switched off temporarily. shields on the exhaust system.
When starting from cold, the engine may be
a little noisy for a short period of time. This NOTICE
is quite normal, and no cause for concern.  If the vehicle has been driven at high load for a
long period, the engine could overheat when it is
switched off. In order to avoid damage to the en-
gine, allow the engine to run in neutral for ap-
Stopping the engine proximately 2 minutes before switching it off.

– The vehicle must be completely stationary Vehicles with automatic gearbox, if it is not
→ . possible to remove the key from the igni-
– Vehicles with ignition lock: rotate the vehicle tion lock with the vehicle stopped, move the se-
key in the ignition lock to → Fig. 90 0 . lector lever to position P. If necessary, press and
release the selector lever interlock button.
After the engine is switched off, the radia-
25A.5L1.TCR.20

tor fan in the engine compartment may run

on for some minutes, even if the ignition is 

Driving 103
switched off or the vehicle key has been re- Instrument cluster indicator and warning
moved. The radiator fan will switch itself off au- lamps
tomatically.  The indicator and warning lamps are on:
Engine management system fault (Elec-
 tronic Power Control). The engine must im-
Electronic immobilizer mediately be checked at a Volkswagen
Dealership.
The immobilizer helps prevent the engine from Faulty emissions in the exhaust system
being started and driven with an unauthorised  (OBD). Reduce your speed. Carefully drive
vehicle key. to the nearest Volkswagen Dealership. The
There is a chip in the key. It automatically deacti- engine must be checked.
vates the immobilizer when the vehicle key is in-
Unauthorized vehicle key
serted into the ignition cylinder.
When an unauthorized vehicle key is inserted in
The electronic immobilizer is automatically acti- the ignition lock it can be removed as follows:
vated when the vehicle key is removed from the
ignition lock → page 59. For vehicles with Keyless – Vehicles with manual gearbox: remove the key
Access, the vehicle key must be outside the vehi- from the ignition lock.
cle → page 58. – Vehicles with automatic gearbox: press and re-
For this reason it is only possible to start the en- lease the interlock button on the selector lev-
gine with a correspondently coded genuine er. Remove the vehicle key from the ignition
Volkswagen vehicle key. Coded vehicle keys can lock.
be obtained at a Volkswagen Dealership.
Emergency start function
→ page 56
When no valid vehicle key inside the vehicle is
Proper vehicle operation is only guaranteed detected, execute the emergency start function.
with genuine Volkswagen keys.  A corresponding indicator will come up on the in-
strument cluster display. This can be the case
when, for example, the vehicle key battery is
weak or discharged.
Troubleshooting
– Press and hold the brake pedal.
– Hold the vehicle key after pressing the start
button directly to the right of the steering col-
umn → Fig. 92.
– The ignition is automatically turned on, and, if
the case, the engine is started.

Emergency shut down

When the engine does not stop when the start
button is briefly pressed, the emergency shut
down needs to be executed:
– Press the start button twice within a few sec-
onds or keep it pressed once for a long time.
Fig. 92 To the right of the steering column: emer- – The engine automatically shuts down → in
gency start function of vehicles with Keyless Access Starter button on page 102.
locking and start system.
Immobiliser malfunction
When an invalid vehicle key is used or when the
system is damaged, a corresponding indication
pops up on the instrument cluster display. The
engine will not be able to be switched on. Use a
valid vehicle key or visit a Volkswagen dealership. 

104 Owner's Manual

 Start-Stop system Vehicles with manual gearbox
– During inertial movement or with the vehicle
stopped, place it in neutral and release the
Start-Stop system clutch pedal. The engine is turned off.
– To turn the engine back up, simply step on the
clutch pedal.

Vehicles with automatic gearbox

– To stop the vehicle, step on the brake pedal
and keep it pressed. Shortly before the vehicle
stops or upon stopping, the engine shuts
down.
– To start the engine up again, remove foot from
the brake pedal or step on the accelerator.

Important conditions for the automatic

Fig. 93 On the upper section of the centre console:
Start-Stop system button.
engine shutdown to work
– The driver must fasten the seat belt.
Depending on the vehicle version, country and/or – The driver’s door must be closed.
radio system, the Start-Stop and/or the Start-
– The bonnet must be closed.
Stop system button may not be available.
– A minimum engine temperature must be
The Start-Stop system automatically turns off reached.
the engine after stopping the vehicle and during
the vehicle stopping stages. If necessary, the en- – Vehicles with Climatronic: the vehicle interior
gine automatically starts up again. temperature is within the set temperature
range and the humidity is not too high.
Turn on the Start-Stop system – The air conditioning defrost function must be
The function is automatically enabled whenever off.
the ignition is switched on. The instrument clus- – The 12-V vehicle battery must have enough
ter display shows information regarding the cur- charge.
rent status. – The 12-V vehicle battery’s temperature must
In the radio system other information regarding not be too high or too low.
Start-Stop mode can be accessed via the CAR – The vehicle is not on a steep up- or downhill
button or the MENU function button and the incline.
function buttons Vehicle , Selection , Vehicle status
– Vehicle with automatic gearbox: the steering
OR on the main radio screen, drag to the left
wheel is not intensely turned.
once and select Vehicle status .
– The windscreen wiper must not be on.
When crossing through flooded areas, always
– The reverse gear must not be engaged.
manually turn the Start-Stop system off.
– The Park Assist system must not be activated.
Indicator lamps
If the automatic engine shutdown conditions are
When the  indicator lamp is on, it indicates that only reached during a stop, the engine will shut
the Start-Stop system is on and the automatic down subsequently, for example, upon turning
engine stop is active. off the defrost function.
When the  indicator lamp is on, the Start-Stop
system is not available or the engine was auto- Conditions for a new automatic start
matically started by the Start-Stop system The engine can start automatically under the fol-
→ page 105. lowing conditions:
25A.5L1.TCR.20

The Start-Stop system’s status is shown on the – If the vehicle interior gets too hot or too cold.
instrument cluster display. – When the vehicle starts moving. 

Driving 105
– When the 12 V battery charge is low. ignition on and thereby operate the electric
– When the steering wheel is moved. equipment such as, for example, the electric
windows.
Conditions that require a manual engine start
The engine must be started manually under the WARNING
following conditions: Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is
– When the driver door is opened. in motion. This can lead to the loss of control of
the vehicle, to severe accidents and injuries.
– When the bonnet is opened.
● The airbags and belt tensioners will not work
Essentially: the engine will always automatically if the ignition is switched off.
start up again when such is required for the vehi-
● The brake servo will not work when the en-
cle and for the detected situation.
gine is switched off. A stronger action on the
Drive on function brake pedal is required to stop the vehicle.
When a valid vehicle key is not detected inside ● The power steering works when the engine
the vehicle after turning the engine off, it is pos- is not running.
sible to start he engine again within five seconds. ● When working in the engine compartment
A corresponding message will be displayed on the Start-Stop system must be disabled.
the instrument cluster.
After this short period of time it is no longer pos- NOTICE
sible to start the engine without a valid vehicle If the Start-Stop system is used for an extended
key inside the vehicle. period of time at excessively high exterior tem-
peratures, the 12-V battery may be damaged.
Manually enable and disable the Start-Stop
system In some cases, the engine has to be man-
– Press  on the centre console → Fig. 93 OR on ually restarted. Follow the message shown
the radio display to manually disable the sys- on the instrument cluster display.
tem. At temperatures above 38°C, the engine
– Press  on the centre console → Fig. 93 OR on shutdown function may be automatically
the radio display again to manually reenable turned off.
the system.
For vehicles with selectable driving profile,
Whenever the  button is pressed, the instru- when the Eco profile is selected the Start-
ment cluster display will indicate the Start-Stop Stop system is automatically enabled.
system status.
When crossing through flooded areas, al-
If the engine was shut down by the Start-Stop
ways manually turn the Start-Stop system
system, it will start up again as soon as the sys-
off. 
tem is disabled by pressing the  button.
When crossing through flooded areas, always
manually turn the Start-Stop system off.
Troubleshooting
WARNING
The engine does no longer start automatically
Improper or unsupervised use of the vehicle
Vehicles with automatic gearbox: if the engine
keys can cause accidents or injuries.
does not start automatically, the following warn-
● When leaving the vehicle, turn off your en- ing message Error: Vehicle power system. Go to a work-
gine and always carry all the vehicle keys shop. May be displayed on the instrument cluster
when leaving the vehicle. Whenever you lock display. 
your doors, make sure there are no people
inside. Unauthorized people or children can
lock the vehicle, start the engine or turn the

106 Owner's Manual

 – Manually start the engine → page 102. – Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal.
– Manually turn off the Start-Stop system. – Position the gear selection lever into the neu-
– Immediately seek assistance from a tral position → .
Volkswagen Dealership or a qualified work- – Gently release the clutch pedal to start mov-
shop.  ing.
Volkswagen recommends stepping fully on the
clutch pedal to start the engine.

Manual gearbox Selecting reverse gear

– Reverse gear should only be selected when the
vehicle is stationary.
Manual gearbox: engaging the gear – Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal → .
– Move the gear lever to the neutral position and
push down.
– Push the gear lever fully to the left and then to
the front into the reverse gear position
→ Fig. 94 and → Fig. 95 R .
– Gently release the clutch pedal to start mov-
ing.

Shifting down gears

You should always select the next immediate
gear when shifting down a gear whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion. Engine revs should not be too
high when doing so → . The clutch, gearbox
and engine may be damaged if one or more gears
Fig. 94 Gear shift pattern of a 5-speed manual
are skipped when shifting down a gear at high
gearbox.
speeds or high engine revs, even if the clutch is
not released in the process → .

WARNING
When the engine is running, the vehicle will
start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and
the clutch released.
● Never switch off the engine while the vehicle
is in motion.
● Never select reverse gear while the vehicle is
in motion.

WARNING
Shifting gears incorrectly to a lower gear can
Fig. 95 Gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual lead to a loss of control of the vehicle, which
gearbox. can cause accidents and serious injuries. 
Depending the vehicle version and country, the
manual gearbox may not be available.

Engaging a forward gear

25A.5L1.TCR.20

Each gear position is illustrated on the gear lever

→ Fig. 94 and → Fig. 95.

Driving 107
 NOTICE  – Parking lock
The traction wheels are mechanically blocked.
The clutch, gearbox and engine may be severely
Engage only while the vehicle is stationary. To
damaged if the gear stick of the manual gearbox
move the selector lever from its position with the
is shifted to a gear which is too low when travel-
ignition turned on, actuate the brake pedal and
ling at high speeds or at high revs. This also ap-
press the interlock button on the selector lever.
plies if the clutch remains depressed and the
gears do not engage.
 – Reverse gear
Reverse gear engaged. Engage only while the ve-
NOTICE hicle is stationary.
Please note the following points in order to avoid
damage and premature wear:  – Neutral
● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when The gearbox is in the neutral position. No force is
driving. The pressure from your hand is passed transmitted to the wheels and the braking effect
onto the selector forks in the transmission. of the motor is not available.
● Ensure that the vehicle has come to a full stop
before engaging reverse gear.  – Permanent forward driving position
Position : normal style program
● Always fully depress the clutch pedal when
changing gear. All forward gears are shifted up and down auto-
matically. The timing of the gear shift is deter-
● Do not hold the vehicle by “riding” the clutch
mined by the engine load, your individual driving
on a hill with the engine running. 
style and the speed of the vehicle.
Position : sport style driving program
The gear levels are increased later and reduced
Automatic gearbox earlier than when in D position to make the best
use of the power reserves of the engine. The tim-
ing of the gear shift is determined by the engine
Automatic gearbox: engaging gears load, your individual driving style and the speed
of the vehicle.
Move the selector lever backwards  → Fig. 96 to
switch between position D and S.
In this, the selector lever will always elastically
return to the D/S position. This also works for the
Tiptronic gate → page 109.

Selector lever lock

In position P or N, the selector lever lock pre-
vents an accidental selector move that would in-
voluntarily put the vehicle in motion.
To release the selector lever lock with the igni-
tion on, push the brake pedal down and keep it
pressed. At the same time, press the selector lev-
Fig. 96 Automatic gearbox selector lever with inter-
er lock button into the direction indicated by the
lock button (arrow).
arrow → Fig. 96.
According to the vehicle version, the automatic For fast gear change passing through the N posi-
gearbox may not be available. tion, for example, from R to D/S, the selector lev-
The engaged gear or gearbox driving programme er is not locked. Thereby it is possible to “rock” a
is indicated on the instrument cluster when the vehicle back and forth out of a bog. The selector
ignition is on. lever lock engages when, with the brake pedal 

108 Owner's Manual

 released, the lever lingers in the N position for Shifting gears with the Tiptronic
over about a second and at a speed of less than
about 5 km/h.

WARNING
Engaging an incorrect selector lever position
may lead to the loss of control of the vehicle,
accidents and severe injuries.
● Never depress the gas pedal when selecting
a gear.
● When the engine is running and the selector
is in a drive position, the vehicle will start
moving as soon as the brake pedal is re-
leased.
● Never move the selector lever to reverse or
to P while driving. Fig. 97 Selector lever in Tiptronic position.

WARNING
Unsupervised vehicle movements may cause
severe injuries.
● The driver must never leave the driver seat if
the engine is running and a gear has been se-
lected. If you have to leave the vehicle while
the engine is running, always firmly apply
the handbrake and move the selector lever
to position P.
● With the engine running and the selector
lever engaging position D/S or R, it is neces-
sary to step on the brake to keep the vehicle
stationary. Even when the engine is idling,
Fig. 98 Steering wheel with Tiptronic gear shift
the vehicle will “creep forward/backward” as
paddles.
the power transmission is not fully interrup-
ted.
● Never move the selector lever into P with the With the automatic gearbox, the gears
vehicle in motion. can be manually stepped up or down with
● Never leave the vehicle with the selector lev- the Tiptronic.
er in position N. The vehicle will roll downhill
regardless of whether or not the engine is
Operating the Tiptronic with the selector lever
running.
– In position D/S, move the lever to the right up
to the Tiptronic gate.
NOTICE
– Move the selector lever forward + or back-
When, with the vehicle stationary, the handbrake
ward – to increase or decrease the speed
is not engaged and the brake pedal is released
→ Fig. 97. 
with the selector lever in position P, the vehicle
can still roll a few centimetres back and forth.

If while driving, the N position is accidental-

ly selected, let go off the accelerator. Await
25A.5L1.TCR.20

the engine idle rotation in neutral position before

selecting a different gear. 

Driving 109
Operating the Tiptronic with the shift paddles Kick-down
– Pull the right steering wheel paddle lever The kick-down function allows maximum accel-
→ Fig. 98 to step up the gears. eration with the selector lever in position D/S or
– Pull the left steering wheel paddle lever to in the Tiptronic position.
step down the gears. Upon fully stepping down on the accelerator, the
– Pull the right shift paddle towards the steering automatic gearbox engages a lower gear This will
wheel for about one second to disable the Tip- make use of the full vehicle acceleration → .
tronic. With the kick-down, the automatic increase to
The Tiptronic is automatically disabled when the the next gear occurs only when the maximum
shift paddles are not used for a while or the se- prescribed engine rpm is reached.
lector lever is not in the Tiptronic gate.
WARNING
NOTICE A rapid acceleration can cause loss of traction
● When accelerating, the gearbox automatically and skidding, particularly on slippery roads.
shifts up to the next gear shortly before the This can lead to loss of control of the vehicle,
maximum permitted engine speed is reached. severe accidents and injuries.
● When shifting down a gear manually, the gear- ● Always adjust your driving style in accord-
box will not change gear until the engine can ance with the flow of traffic.
no longer be overrevved.  ● The Kick-Down function or fast acceleration
must only be used visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions permitting and other
road users are not compromised due to the
Driving with automatic gearbox vehicle acceleration and driving style.

Forward gears are shifted up and down automat-

WARNING
ically.
Never “ride” the brake pedal. Do not overuse
Driving downhill the brake pedal. Constant braking will cause
The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear you the brakes to overheat. This can considerably
will need. Lower gears increase the braking ef- reduce the brake effect, increase the braking
fect of the engine. Never allow the vehicle to roll distance and, in certain circumstances, cause
down mountains or hills in the neutral position N. the brake system to fail completely.

– Reduce your speed. NOTICE

– Press the selector lever from position D/S to ● If you stop the vehicle on an incline, do not at-
the right in the direction of the Tiptronic gate tempt to stop it from rolling back by depress-
→ page 109. ing the accelerator when a gear has been se-
– Gently push the selector lever to the rear to lected. This may overheat and damage the au-
change down gear. tomatic gearbox.
– OR: reduce the gear speed with the shift pad- ● Never allow the vehicle to roll with the selec-
dles on the steering wheel → page 110. tor lever in position N , particularly when the
ignition is switched off. The automatic gearbox
Stopping and proceeding uphill is not lubricated and can be damaged.
The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear you
will need. NOTICE
When stopping on an uphill slope with engaged ● Never let the brakes “slip” by applying light
gear, the vehicle must always be prevented from pressure to the brake when it is not really nec-
moving by stepping on the brake pedal or engag- essary to brake. This will increase wearing.
ing the handbrake. Release the brake or hand- ● Before driving down a long, steep downhill
brake only upon pulling away → . gradient, reduce the speed and change to a
lower gear. This will make use of the braking
effect of the electric drive and relieve the load 

110 Owner's Manual

 on the brakes. The brake system could other- – press the brake pedal and release the pedal
wise overheat and fail. Only use the brakes again.
when necessary to slow down or stop the ve-
hicle. Emergency unlocking the selector lever

Should the vehicle need to be towed during a
failure of power supply, for example, a flat 12 V
vehicle battery, an emergency unlocking of the
Troubleshooting selector lock lever will have to be performed.
Seek expert assistance for this.
The emergency unlock is located underneath the
selector lever frame cover.

Removing the selector lever cover

– Apply the handbrake.
– Switch off the ignition.
– Carefully pull the cover with the electric cables
connected upward in the area of the selector
lever trim.
– Double the cover up over the selector lever
→ .

Emergency unlock the selector lever lock

Fig. 99 Remove the selector lever cover and man-
ually emergency unlock the selector lever lock. – With the help of a screwdriver carefully press
the release lever in the direction indicated by
Warning and indicator lamps on the the arrow and keep it in that position
instrument cluster → Fig. 99.
The indicator lamps light up. – Press the interlock button on the selector lever
and move the lever to the N position.
  Stop driving! Gearbox damaged. Let – After emergency unlocking, reinstall and care-
the gearbox cool down with the selector fully press the cover on the centre console,
lever in position P. If the warning does not paying attention to the correct position of the
turn off, do not drive on and seek special- electric cables.
ized technical assistance. Otherwise the
gearbox may suffer severe damage. Emergency program
Brake pedal not pressed, for example, dur- The system is damaged when all selector lever
 ing an attempt to select another gear posi- position indicators are highlighted by a light
tion with the selector lever. Step on the background on the instrument cluster display.
brake pedal to select a gear. The automatic gearbox operates under an emer-
gency programme. Under the emergency pro-
The indicator lamps flash.
gram the vehicle can still run, however at re-
The interlock button of the selector lever is duced speed and not in all gears.
 not pressed. The pull away is impeded. En-
gage the lock of the selector lever lock With automatic gearbox, in some cases it will no
→ page 108. longer be possible to drive in reverse gear.
In all cases, the automatic gearbox must immedi-
Selector lever troubleshooting ately be checked by a Volkswagen Dealership. 
On rare occasions the selector lever lock
 may not engage on vehicles with automat-
ic gearbox. The drive is then deenergized
to prevent an unsupervised pull away. The
25A.5L1.TCR.20

indicator light flashes and, in addition, an

informative text is displayed. To engage
the selector lever lock, proceed as follows:

Driving 111
Automatic gearbox overheating Uphill assist system
The automatic gearbox may get very hot,
 for example, from frequent pulling away, The uphill assist system (HHC - Hill Hold Control)
“slow driving”or heavy stop-and-go traffic. assists the driver with pulling away uphill, by
Its overheating is indicated by the warning holding the vehicle.
lamp and, if it is the case, by a text mes-
sage on the instrument cluster display. An The uphill assist system is automatically
acoustic alarm may also be sounded. Stop enabled under the following circumstances
the vehicle and wait until the transmission Vehicles with manual gearbox
cools down → .
The following conditions must be simultaneously
The vehicle does not move backward nor met:
forward despite the engaged gear level
1 Keep the vehicle stopped with the brake
If the vehicle does not move in the desired direc- pedal on an uphill gradient of about 5%.
tion, the gear position may not be properly en-
gaged. Next, step on the brake pedal and select
2 The engine runs “in a regular way”.
the desired gear once again. 3 Step fully on the clutch pedal and engage the
gear shift lever in the 1st gear to drive uphill
If the vehicle still does not move to the desired
forward, or in the R position to drive uphill in
location, the system is faulty. Seek specialized
reverse gear.
technical support and inspect the system.
To pull away, take foot off the brake pedal and at
WARNING same time release the clutch pedal (engage) and
Never take the selector lever out of the P posi- accelerate as needed. Upon releasing the brake
tion while the handbrake is not engaged. Oth- pedal, the vehicle is held in place for approxi-
erwise, on slopes, the vehicle may roll away un- mately 2 seconds. The brake is slowly released
expectedly and thereby cause severe accidents upon starting. If starting does not occur within
and injuries. two seconds, the brake is released and the vehi-
cle will move backwards.
NOTICE Vehicles with automatic gearbox
When the vehicle is driven for a longer period
with the engine turned off and the selector lever The following conditions must be simultaneously
in position N, or at a higher speed, the automatic met:
gearbox will be damaged, for example, when be- 1 Keep the vehicle stopped with the brake
ing towed. pedal on an uphill gradient of about 5%.
2 The engine runs “in a regular way”.
NOTICE 3 With the selector lever in position D/S to
● As soon as the transmission overheating is drive forward up hill or in position R to drive
shown for the first time, the vehicle must be in reverse up hill.
safely parked or driven at speeds above 20
km/h. To pull away, take foot off the brake pedal and
accelerate as needed. The brake is slowly re-
● When the text message and the acoustic
leased upon starting.
warning are repeated every 10 seconds, the
vehicle must be stopped safely immediately The uphill assist system is immediately
and the engine shut off. Wait until the trans- disabled:
mission cools down.
– If any of the aforementioned conditions are no
● To prevent damage to the gearbox, drive-on longer available → page 112, The uphill assist
only when the acoustic alarm is no longer system is automatically enabled under the fol-
sounded. While the transmission is overhea- lowing circumstances.
ted, starting the vehicle or driving at walking
speeds must be avoided. – When the driver door is opened. 


112 Owner's Manual

 – In case of irregular running of the engine or conductor on the wheel to turn the vehicle. The
deficiencies in the engine. electromechanical assist only works when the
– When the engine is turned off or "dies". engine is running.
When the electromechanical assist is reduced or
Adverse conditions: malfunctioning, a lot higher strength than usual
The electronic stability program (ESC) may not will be required to manoeuvre the vehicle. But
identify very steep slopes (over 30%). This cir- never will the driver loose control over the steer-
cumstance may affect the regular operation of ing wheel of the vehicle.
the electronic stability program (ESC) and conse-
For vehicles with selectable driving profile the
quently the hill assist system (HHC - Hill Hold
behaviour of the electromechanical steering as-
Control), emergency braking assistant (Front As-
sistance can be influenced through the selected
sist) and parking sensor.
driving profile.
To restore the aforementioned systems, it is suf-
ficient that the vehicle is turned off and on again Mechanical lock of the steering column
and that the driver starts the car and drives it at a (steering lock)
speed greater than 25 km/h for a few seconds. The mechanical lock of the steering column
(steering lock) may not be available for some
CAUTION countries.
● When the vehicle does not pull away imme- On vehicles with ignition lock, the steering col-
diately after the brake pedal is released, it umn is mechanically locked:
may eventually roll backwards. In this case
immediately hit the brake pedal or pull the – Stop the vehicle and place the selector lever in
handbrake. position P or the manual gear lever into the
neutral position.
● If the engine quits, step immediately on the
brake pedal or pull the handbrake. – Remove the vehicle key.
● When on an uphill slope with intense traffic, – Turn the steering wheel a bit until the lock au-
to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward dibly engages.
when pulling away, step on the brake for To unlock the steering column:
some minutes. 
– Turn the steering wheel a bit to relieve the
steering lock.
– Insert the vehicle key into the ignition lock.
Steering assistance – Keep the steering wheel in position and turn
the ignition on.

Information on steering WARNING

● The electromechanical power steering assist
Electromechanically assisted steering consumes only works when the engine is running. In
less power from the vehicle in comparison to hy- case of engine malfunction while the vehicle
draulically assisted steering wheels, as it is acti- is moving, the electromechanical assist
vated only when the steering wheel is turned, works for a few minutes longer in order to
while with the hydraulically assisted steering, the safely park the vehicle.
hydraulic system is always being run, even with ● Never allow the vehicle to roll if the engine is
the vehicle moving straight ahead. With the elec- switched off.
tromechanically assisted steering a computerized
control unit associated with an electric motor, ● Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
sensors and a gear box replaces the hoses, pump, tion cylinder while the vehicle is in motion. 
reservoir and fluid of a hydraulic system.
The electromechanical power steering assist is
25A.5L1.TCR.20

automatically adjusted based on the driving

speed, the torque and the angles applied by the

Driving 113
Troubleshooting Select driving mode
Warning and indicator lamps on the
instrument cluster
When switching the ignition on, certain warning
and indicator lamps light up briefly to check their
functions and turn off after a few seconds. If the
lights turn on again:

  Stop driving! Electromechanical steer-

ing assist out of action. Contact a
Volkswagen Dealership immediately.
Electromechanical steering assist with Fig. 100 On the top part of the centre console:
 limited operation. Contact a Volkswagen MODE button to select driving mode.
Dealership as soon as possible. 
Depending on the vehicle version, driving mode
selection and/or the MODE button may not be
available.
Driving mode selection The profile can be selected with the ignition on
and the vehicle stopped or while driving → .
If a driving mode is selected while driving, the
 Introduction vehicle's systems immediately switch to the new
mode, except the engine.
– When traffic permits, quickly remove foot
The driver can adjust several features of from accelerator pedal to allow the selected
the vehicle systems to the current driving driving mode to be applied to the engine as
conditions, the desired driving conven- well.
ience, and a fuel saving driving style using
Select the driving mode with the MODE
the driving profiles. Among the vehicle’s
button
systems that can be adjusted are the run-
ning gear, engine control, and air condi- 1 Press  → Fig. 100.
tioning. 2 To select the driving mode, press  once
again or touch the desired driving profile on
Depending on the vehicle version, different driv- the radio display.
ing modes are available for selection. The influ- OR
ence of vehicle systems in individual driving
modes depends on the vehicle version.  Select the driving mode on the radio display

1 Switch on the ignition.

2 On the main radio screen, swipe left once
and select Driving mode .
3 Touch  Eco , Normal or Sport to select
the desired driving mode on the radio dis-
play.

Show information in the driving mode.

– To show more information on the selected
driving mode, touch INFO on the radio display. 

114 Owner's Manual

 WARNING Behaviour of driving modes when switching
the ignition off and on again
Adjusting driving modes while driving may dis-
When switching the ignition off and on again, the
tract drivers and cause accidents.
last driving mode selected remains active.
● Always drive carefully and responsibly. 
Behaviour of engine vehicle system when
switching the ignition off and on again
As soon as the ignition is switched off and on
Characteristics of driving modes again, the engine vehicle system settings are re-
set to the Normal driving mode settings.
Eco: places the vehicle in low consumption
 mode and promotes economical driving. – Select the desired driving mode again.
Normal: the driving mode represents basic – OR: to reactivate Sport driving mode settings,
 settings of vehicle systems and offers a move the selector lever in the automatic gear-
moderate combination, for example, for box backwards, into position S.
day-to-day use.
When switching the ignition off and on again, all
Sport: provides a sporting feeling to the
 driving experience and can change the en-
other vehicle systems store the settings. 
gine sound. In the Sport driving mode, in
vehicles with automatic gearbox, the se-
lector lever position is automatically Troubleshooting
switched to position S. 
Vehicle systems or driving mode do not
behave as expected
Default behaviours of driving Observe the default behaviours of vehicle sys-
tems or driving modes → page 115. 
modes and vehicle systems
With the ignition off, the Normal driving mode
represents basic settings of the vehicle systems.

Off-road indicator

Fig. 101 On the radio system: off-road indicator (version 1). 

25A.5L1.TCR.20

Driving 115
Fig. 102 On the radio system: off-road indicator (version 2).

range between -49° and 49°. If the steering

The off-road indicator shows digital in- wheel is turned to the left, the value will be
struments with additional information on positive; if it is turned to the right, the value
the vehicle and surroundings. This pro- will be negative.
vides a more accurate assessment of the – Compass: the compass shows the current driv-
current driving status. ing direction.
– Coolant temperature indicator: this indicator
Depending on the vehicle version, the off-road is equivalent to the temperature gauge on the
indicator may not be available. instrument cluster. If the engine is submitted
to significant effort and excessive exterior
Open the off-road indicator temperatures, the pointer moves clockwise or
– Press the  button or function pad of the the vertical bar moves up (depending on the
radio system. vehicle version). This is of no relevance as long
as the  warning lamps do not light up or
– Press the function button Vehicle. flash on the instrument cluster.
– Press the function button Selection. – Oil temperature indicator: the pointer stays in
– Press the function button Offroad. the central zone when the engine reached the
OR operating temperature. If the pointer is loca-
ted in the lower left area, this means that the
– On the main radio screen, swipe left once and engine has not yet reached the operating tem-
select Offroad . perature. If the engine is submitted to exces-
sive stress or high exterior temperatures, the
Select the instruments and units pointer moves clockwise. This is of no rele-
The display shows multiple instruments vance as long as the  warning lamps do not
→ Fig. 101 and → Fig. 102. light up or flash on the instrument cluster
Swipe up on the display to switch between in- → page 201.
struments. – Fuel level indicator: this indicator is equivalent
to the fuel gauge on the instrument cluster. As
The units of some instruments may be adjusted
the vehicle consumes fuel, the vertical bar
on the radio system.
moves down. This is of no relevance as long as
Off-road indicator instruments (depending on the control indicator light  does not light up
the version): on the instrument cluster. 
– Altimeter: The altimeter shows the current al-
titude from sea level.
– Steering angle indicator or wheel angle indica-
tor: (depending on the version) the steering
angle or wheel angle indicator is shown in a

116 Owner's Manual

 Adjust viewing areas based on driving WARNING
conditions
Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is
Depending on the vehicle version, the instru-
distracted. Operation of the radio system may
ments can be selected based on the driving con-
distract from the surrounding traffic happen-
ditions, as well as the respective terrain and
ings.
surroundings:
● Always drive carefully and responsibly. 
– Sandy terrain: oil temperature, steering angle,
and coolant temperature indicators
– Slops: altimeter, steering angle, and coolant
temperature indicators
– Mountainous terrain: steering angle indicator,
altimeter and compass
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Driving 117
Driver assist systems ● In order to prevent unexpected speed adjust-
ments, always switch off the GRA after us-
Cruise control system (GRA) ing.
● It is dangerous to resume stored speeds if
the speed is too high for current road, traffic,
 Introduction or weather conditions.
● On downhill slopes, the GRA may not keep
the vehicle speed constant. The vehicle's
weight increases speed by itself. Reduce the
The speed regulator system (GRA) assists
gear or apply the brakes. 
the driver keeping constant a set speed.

Depending on the vehicle version, the cruise con-

trol (GRA) may not be available. Operating the GRA by way of
multifunction steering wheel
Speed range
The GRA is available for forward driving from 20  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
km/h onwards. on page 118.

Changing gear
As soon as the clutch pedal is stepped on, the
cruise control is interrupted and automatically
taken up again after the gear change.

Driving downhill
When driving downhill the set speed may be ex-
ceeded due to the slope gradient.
Use the brake to reduce the speed of the vehicle
accordingly and shift to a lower gear if necessary.

How do I control the GRA?

The GRA is controlled through the multifunction
steering wheel→ page 118. Fig. 103 Left side of the multifunction steering
wheel (version 1): GRA operating buttons.
WARNING
When it is not possible to drive safely over a
sufficient distance and at a constant speed, the
cruise control system may cause severe acci-
dents and injuries.
● Never use the cruise control system (GRA) in
intense traffic, over short distances, steep,
sinuous, and slippery circuits, such as ice,
snow, humidity, or gravel and also not on
flooded roads.
● Never use the GRA in free terrain or unpaved
roads.
● Adjust the speed and safety distance to vehi-
cles ahead based on weather, road, and traf- Fig. 104 Left side of the multifunction steering
fic conditions. wheel (version 2): GRA operating buttons.

Depending on the vehicle version and country,

some functions may not be available. 

118 Owner's Manual

 Switch on Troubleshooting
– Press  .
No speed is saved and no control is yet active.  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 118.
Starting the cruise controlling
– While driving, press  . The cruise control is automatically
interrupted.
The current speed is saved and controlled. In ad-
Several causes are possible:
dition the green indicator lamp lights up .
– The driver has hit the brake.
Set speed – The vehicle exceeded the set speed over a lon-
The saved speed may be adjusted while the GRA ger time period.
is controlling: – System malfunction. Disable the GRA and have
 + 1 km/h it checked at a Volkswagen Dealership. 
 - 1 km/h
 + 10 km/h
 - 10 km/h
Speed limiter
To alter the set speed continuously, keep the 
button or the  button pressed. The system ad-
justs the current speed accelerating or slowing  Introduction
down the vehicle accordingly. The vehicle does
not actively brake.

Interrupting the control The speed limiters establishes a maximum

– Version 1: briefly press  or  . speed limit.
– Version 2: briefly press  or  .
– Or step on the brake as an alternative. Depending on the vehicle version, the speed lim-
The speed will remain stored. iter may not be available.

Resume operation Speed range

– Press the  button. The speed limiter is available for forward driving
from 30 km/h onwards.
The current speed is resumed and adjusted.
Driving with the speed limiter
Switch off The speed limiter may be switched off at any
– Press the  button for a moment. moment by fulling pressing the brake pedal and
exceeding resistance. As soon as the preset
The GRA is turned off and the saved speed de-
speed is exceeded, the green indicator lamp 
leted.
flashes and a sound warning may be heard. The
The  button does not have any function speed will remain stored.
for GRA.  As soon as the preset speed is below the limit,
the regulation is automatically switched back on.

How to operate the speed limiter

The speed limiter can be controlled through the
multifunction steering wheel → page 120. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Driver assist systems 119

Display indicators Speed limiter controls in the
If the speed limiter is switched on, the instru- multifunction steering wheel
ment cluster display will show the stored speed
and the speed limiter status:  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
Speed limiter on and speed stored. on page 120.

 Displayed small or grey: regulation off.
 Displayed large or white: regulation on.
Driving downhill
When driving downhill, the preset speed may be
exceeded due to the slope gradient. In this case,
the warning and indicator lamps light up . An
acoustic alarm may also be sounded.
Use the brake to reduce the speed of the vehicle
accordingly and shift to a lower gear if necessary.

WARNING
Fig. 105 Left side of the multifunction steering
To avoid unsupervised speed regulation, always wheel (version 1): speed limiter operating buttons.
switch off the speed limiter after use.
● Using the speed limiter does not exempt the
driver from driving responsibilities. Do not
drive with maximum acceleration unless nec-
essary.
● Using the speed limiter in adverse conditions
is dangerous and may cause severe accidents
(e.g. aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves). Only use
the speed limiter in proper road and weather
conditions.
● On downhill slopes, the speed limiter may
not limit the vehicle's speed. Speed may in-
crease due to the vehicle's own weight. Re-
duce the speed or press the brake pedal. 
Fig. 106 Left side of the multifunction steering
wheel (version 2): speed limiter operating buttons.

Switch on
– Press  .
The last preset speed is stored. No regulation is
active.

Starting the cruise controlling

– Press  while driving.
The current speed is stored as the maximum
speed. In addition, the green indicator lamp 
lights up. 

120 Owner's Manual

 Set speed The speed limiter only switches off completely
for safety reasons when the accelerator pedal is
The stored speed can be adjusted:
released once or if the system is manually
 + 1 km/h switched off. 
 - 1 km/h
 + 10 km/h
 - 10 km/h
To alter the set speed continuously, keep the  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
button or the  button pressed.

Interrupting the control  Introduction

– Version 1: briefly press  or  .
– Version 2: briefly press  or  .
– Or step on the brake as an alternative. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains a
constant speed defined by the driver. If
The speed will remain stored.
the vehicle approaches another vehicle
– Press  or  . ahead, the ACC automatically adjusts the
The speed will remain stored. speed to maintain an adequate distance.

Resume operation
Depending on the vehicle version, Adaptive
– Press the  button. Cruise Control (ACC) may not be available.
As soon as the current speed is lower than the
stored speed, the speed limiter will be reactiva- Does the vehicle have ACC?
ted. The vehicle has ACC if it is possible to make set-
tings relating to automatic distance control in
Switch off the assistant menu of the ACC Infotainment sys-
– Press and hold  for a few moments. tem.

The speed limiter will be switched off and the Speed range
speed remains stored (even with the ignition off). You can set a speed between 20 km/h (15 mph)
and 210 km/h (130 mph). Depending on the
Go to the Cruise Control System (GRA) or
country and version, the maximum adjustable
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
speed may be lower.
– Press the  button.
– Select the desired system on the instrument Driving with ACC
cluster display. You can override regulation via ACC at any time.
Regulation is interrupted when pressing the
The speed limiter will be switched off. 
brake pedal. If you accelerate, the adjustment
will be interrupted during the acceleration proc-
ess and then continue at the set speed.
Troubleshooting If a tow is connected, ACC regulation will be less
dynamic.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 120. Driver intervention request
If automatic deceleration via ACC is not
The cruise control is automatically  sufficient or if system limits are reached,
interrupted. ACC will prompt you to brake as well via a
– System malfunction. Switch off the speed lim- message in the instrument cluster. In addi-
iter and look for a Volkswagen Dealership. tion, a red warning lamp lights up and a
25A.5L1.TCR.20

warning sound is played. Take control of

the vehicle and be ready to brake! 

Driver assist systems 121

 WARNING Preventative speed regulation
If a traffic sign recognition system and an Info-
ACC cannot replace the driver's attention and
tainment system with navigation are available in
operates exclusively within the limits of the
the vehicle, ACC can preventively adapt the
system. ACC cannot recognize all driving situa-
speed to detected speed limits and the route of
tions and may not react, react late or react un-
the journey.
desirably. If you are careless, there is a risk of
accidents and serious injuries or even death. Overtaking
● Always remain vigilant and do not rely solely After activating the left turn signal (left-hand
on the system. The driver is responsible for traffic: activate right turn signals) to overtake an-
all driving tasks at all times. other vehicle, the ACC accelerates the vehicle
● Observe system limits → page 123. and reduces the distance from the vehicle ahead.
● Adapt your speed and distance from the ve- This is performed without exceeding the preset
hicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road speed.
and traffic conditions. If the ACC does not detect any vehicle ahead af-
● Immediately take control of the vehicle if a ter changing lanes, the system accelerates the
driver intervention request appears on the vehicle until reaching the preset speed.
instrument cluster display or if speed reduc-
tion via ACC is insufficient. Intense traffic
● Brake if the vehicle moves unintentionally, ACC can brake vehicles with automatic transmis-
for example, after a request for intervention sions to a complete stop and hold them station-
from the driver. ary for a few seconds. ACC remains active, the in-

strument cluster display shows ACC ready to start.
During this period, the vehicle will drive again au-
tomatically as soon as the vehicle in front starts
Special driving scenarios off.
After this period, the vehicle applies the brake
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter automatically, the vehicle rolls and the ACC ad-
on page 122. justment is cancelled.
Extend readiness for departure:
– Step on the brake pedal.
ACC remains active until you press the brake
pedal. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, the ACC is ready to start for a few
seconds.
– Press the  button
The start readiness is expanded for a few sec-
onds.
Ready to start will be terminated if the driver's
Fig. 107 On the instrument cluster display: slower seat belt is removed.
vehicle detected on the left-hand lane (schematic
view). Preventing overtaking on the right (traffic on
the left: preventing overtaking on the left)
The functions described below are version Vehicles prevented from overtaking on the right:
dependent and are not available in all countries. If ACC detects a vehicle travelling at a slower
speed in the left lane (traffic on the left: in the
right lane), ACC will brake smoothly within the
system limits, preventing unauthorized overtak-
ing. The function is active from approximately 80
km/h (around 50 mph). 

122 Owner's Manual

 Vehicles not prevented from overtaking on the
right: If there are vehicles traveling at a lower
speed in the passing lane on a multi-lane road,
stop the adjustment.

WARNING
When the ACC ready to go message appears in
the instrument cluster display and the vehicle
in front starts, the vehicle itself will start auto-
matically. Occasionally, obstacles on the route
may not be detected. This could lead to acci-
dents and severe injuries.
● Control driving and press the brake pedal in
each starting procedure, if necessary.  Fig. 109  Changing lanes.  Vehicle turning or
stopped.

Do not use the ACC in the following cases

Automatic distance control system Depending on the system, ACC use is not ade-
limits quate in the following driving scenarios. Interrupt
regulation → page 124:
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
– Driving in heavy rain, snow or intense fog.
on page 122.
– Driving in tunnels.
– Driving in work sites.
– Driving in roads with several curves (e.g.
mountain roads).
– Driving in parking lots.
– Driving in roads with metallic objects incorpo-
rated to the road (e.g. train tracks).
– Driving in gravel roads.
– Vehicles with no right-side overtaking impedi-
ment: driving in roads with multiple lanes
when other vehicles in the overtaking lane are
slower.

Delayed reaction
Fig. 108  Curve condition.  Vehicles outside the
radar sensor range If the radar sensor is exposed to environmental
conditions that affect its operation, there may be
a delay before the system identifies such condi-
tions. Therefore, potential operating limitations
when starting and during driving are shown with
a delay → in Introduction on page 122.

Undetected objects
The radar sensor only detects vehicles moving in
the same direction. The sensor does not detect:
– People
– Animals
25A.5L1.TCR.20

– Parked vehicles 

Driver assist systems 123

– Vehicles crossing or driving in the opposite di- Turn on the ACC
rection – Press  .
– Other stationary obstacles
The ACC is not immediately activated; the indica-
For example, if a vehicle detected by the ACC tor lamp corresponding to the current driving
turns or changes lanes, and if there is a parked condition lights up in grey
vehicle in front, the ACC will not react to the
parked vehicle → Fig. 109 . Starting the cruise controlling
– Press  while driving forward.
Curves
The ACC stores the current speed and maintains
The radar sensor always performs straight-line
the adjusted distance. If the current speed is out
measurements. Therefore, vehicles in sharp
of the predefined speed range, the ACC adjusts
curves may be accidentally detected or vehicles
the minimum speed (low-speed driving) or maxi-
in front may not be detected → Fig. 108 .
mum speed (accelerated driving).
Vehicles out of sensor range Depending on the driving situation, the following
The ACC may not react or react improperly or indicator lamps light up:
with a delay in the following driving scenarios: ACC operating.
– Vehicles driving out of the sensor's range,

No vehicle detected ahead.
close to the vehicle, such as motorcycles
→ Fig. 108 .

Vehicle detected ahead.
– Vehicles changing to the same lane of the ve- 
hicle, at a close distance → Fig. 109 .
Cancel operation
– Vehicles with accessories protruding out of the
vehicle. – Briefly press  or step on the brake pedal.
The indicator lamp  lights up in grey; the speed
WARNING and distance remain stored.
Using the ACC in these scenarios may lead to If ASR is disabled, ACC regulation is automatically
severe accidents and injuries, as well as poten- cancelled.
tial traffic violations. 
Resume operation
– Press  .
Turn ACC on and off The ACC resumes the last stored speed and dis-
tance. The instrument cluster display shows the
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter stored speed; the indicator lamp corresponding
on page 122. to the driving situation lights up.

Turn off the ACC

– Press and hold  for a few seconds. The stor-
ed speed is deleted.

Switch to speed limiter

– Press  .
– Select the speed limiter on the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC will turn off. 

Fig. 110 Left side of the multifunction steering

wheel: ACC operating buttons.

124 Owner's Manual

 Adjust the ACC Adjust regulation behaviour
It is possible to influence how dynamically the
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter ACC regulates:
on page 122. – Vehicles with driving profile selection:
Configure the desired driving profile.
– Vehicles without driving profile selection:
Set the desired driving program in the Infotain-
ment system assistant menu.

WARNING
ACC cannot correctly recognize all driving sit-
uations. There will be a risk of accident if the
minimum distance from the vehicle travelling
ahead is reached or if the difference between
the speed of the vehicle travelling ahead and
the vehicle is so great that a speed reduction by
the ACC alone is insufficient. This can cause se-
Fig. 111 On the instrument cluster display: adjust
rious injury and even death.
the distance (schematic view, the ACC will adjust).
● Be ready at any time to brake the vehicle au-
Set distance tonomously.
The distance can be set to five levels (very short ● To cancel speed and distance control, step
to very long): on the accelerator pedal. In this case, the
ACC does not brake autonomously.
– Press  and then select  or  .
● Always follow minimum distance require-
– Alternatively, press repeatedly until reach-

ments in the respective country.
ing the desired distance.
● Always set a greater distance limit in case of
The instrument cluster display shows the set dis- rain, snow or poor visibility.
tance → Fig. 111 1 . Follow specific minimum
distance requirements. Some settings may be saved in custom user
The distance to be set when starting operation accounts and, therefore, change automati-
can be configured in the vehicle settings, in the cally whenever the user account is changed. 
Infotainment system → page 156.
When the ACC does not operate, the set distance
and vehicle are not highlighted in the instrument Troubleshooting
cluster display.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
Set speed on page 122.
The stored speed can be set within the prede-
fined speed range using the multifunction steer-  ACC not available
ing wheel buttons, as shown below: A Pictogram is shown on the display
 + 1 km/h, only while ACC is on – The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sen-
 - 1 km/h, only while ACC is on sor → page 233.
 + 10 km/h – Radar sensor visibility may be compromised
 - 10 km/h due to weather conditions (e.g. snow), or de-
tergent residue. Clean the radar sensor
To continuously alter the set speed, keep the re-
→ page 233. 
spective button.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Driver assist systems 125

– Radar sensor visibility compromised by attach- Front Assist
ed pieces, decorative trims and license plant
supports or stickers. Keep the area around the
radar sensor unobstructed.  Introduction
– Radar sensor is maladjusted or damaged (e.g.
due to front end damage). Check for damages
→ page 242.
Emergency braking assistant (Front As-
– Damages or faults. Turn the engine off and
sist) can detect imminent frontal colli-
back on.
sions and warn against them. Additional-
– Paintwork or structural changes were made to
ly, the system can assist with braking and
the front-end of the vehicle.
initiate automatic braking.
– The original Volkswagen logo is not being
used.
– Seek assistance from a Volkswagen Dealership Depending on the vehicle version, the Front As-
if necessary. sist system may not be available.
Front Assist can help avoid accidents; however, it
ACC not working as expected does not replace the driver's attention.
– The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sen-
Front Assist works exclusively within system lim-
sor → page 233.
its. Alert moments vary depending on the traffic
– The system's limits are maintained situation and the driver's behaviour.
→ page 123.
– Brakes are overheated; regulation was auto- Functional scope
matically interrupted. Wait until the brakes Front Assist includes the following extended
cool down and check operation. functions, depending on version and country:
– Seek assistance from a Volkswagen Dealership – Pedestrian detector.
if necessary.
– Cyclist detector.
Unable to start ACC The mentioned functions are automatically acti-
Ensure the following premises are met: vated when Front Assist is switched on.
– Selector lever in D/S position or Tiptronic se- Identifiable objects
lector course.
Front Assist can recognize the following objects,
– Brake lights working. depending on country and version:
– ESC not regulating.
– vehicles.
– Brake pedal not working.
– two-wheeled vehicles.
Unusual noises during automatic braking – pedestrians.
– These may occur and do not indicate system
malfunction.  Driving with Front Assist
You can stop automatic braking interventions by
driving or pressing the accelerator pedal.

Automatic braking procedure

Front Assist can slow the vehicle to a stop. How-
ever, the vehicle is not kept parked after that.
Step on the brake pedal!
During an automatic braking procedure, the
brake pedal becomes a little harder. 

126 Owner's Manual

 WARNING Influencing factors
Whether and in what speed range Front Assist
Front Assist cannot replace the driver's atten-
reacts to the mentioned objects depends on the
tion and operates exclusively within the limits
following factors:
of the system. Front Assist cannot recognize all
driving situations and may not react, react late – object type.
or react undesirably. If you are careless, there is – direction of movement of the object.
a risk of accidents and serious injuries or even
– speed of the object.
death.
– vehicle speed.
● Always remain alert and do not rely solely on
the system. The driver is responsible for all The working area may therefore be restricted if
driving tasks at all times. the vehicle approaches an object too quickly and
● Observe system limits → page 128. there is little time to react.
● Adapt your speed and distance from the ve- Furthermore, not all alert levels are covered in all
hicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road situations. Depending on the speed, there is, for
and traffic conditions. example, no initial warning or critical alert, but
● Consider canceling automatic Front Assist in- rather automatic braking to protect the detected
terventions if necessary. object as best as possible.
● Depending on traffic conditions, brake im-
mediately or swerve away from obstacles as
Distance warning 
Front Assist detects whenever there is a safety
soon as warned by the Front Assist system.
threat due to excessively near driving. The indica-
● If you are unsure about the functions inclu- tor lamp lights up. Increase distance!
ded in the vehicle depending on the version
and country, before starting to drive, consult
a specialized and qualified company on the
Initial warning 
Front Assist warns of a possible collision and pre-
subject. Volkswagen recommends seeking pares the vehicle for a possible emergency brak-
out a Volkswagen Dealership.  ing procedure. A sound warning is heard and a
red warning lamp lights up. Brake or swerve!

Critical warning
Alert and braking intervention If you do not react to the initial warning, a brief
levels brake bump may occur to warn the driver of the
increasing risk of collision. Brake or swerve!
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 127. Automatic braking
Front Assist can automatically brake the vehicle
Speed ranges by increasing braking force at various levels. De-
In these speed ranges, Front Assist provides max- creasing the speed may mitigate the consequen-
imum assistance: ces of a potential accident.
– Reaction to vehicles: approximately 5 km/h Braking intervention
(approximately 3 mph) to approximately 250
If the system detects that you are not braking
km/h (approximately 155 mph).
enough in case of an imminent collision, Front
– Reaction to pedestrians: approximately 5 km/h Assist may increase the braking power to help
(approximately 3 mph) to approximately 250 avoid a collision. Braking intervention only occurs
km/h (approximately 155 mph). as long as you press the brake pedal firmly. 
– Reaction to two-wheeled vehicles: approxi-
mately 5 km/h (approximately 3 mph) to ap-
proximately 85 km/h (approximately 53 mph).
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Support can cover initial warning, critical alert, as

well as automatic braking and braking interven-
tion. A distance alert may also be displayed.

Driver assist systems 127

Front Assist system limits Turn off Front Assist
For systemic reasons, Front Assist use is not ade-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter quate in the following driving scenarios and the
on page 127. system must be turned off → :
– When not driving in public roads (e.g. dirt
Sensor limits roads or tracks).
Front Assist recognizes driving conditions using a – If the vehicle is towed or hauled.
radar sensor located in the front of the vehicle.
– If accessories are covering the radar sensor
The radar sensor's range is approximately 120 m
(e.g. additional headlights).
(about 400 feet).
– If the radar sensor is defective.
After vehicle start  – After force has been exerted on components in
Immediately after starting the vehicle, the Front the area of the radar sensor, for example after
Assist system is not available or is available in a a rear-end collision accident.
limited manner. During this period, the white in- – In case of repeated unwanted activations.
dicator lamp remains lit on the instrument clus-
ter display. WARNING
Unidentifiable objects If Front Assist is used in the aforementioned
situations, accidents and serious or even fatal
Front Assist may not react or may react delayed injuries may occur.
to the following objects:
● Turn off Front Assist in the mentioned situa-
– Vehicles crossing or in the opposite direction. tions.
– Pedestrians standing or approaching; Without
pedestrian detector, there is generally no reac- Observe the radar sensor limits → page 123.
tion to people. Always be attentive and, if necessary, inter-
vene directly! 
– Cyclists stopped or approaching; Without a cy-
clist detector, there is no reaction to cyclists at
intersections.
– Pedestrians and cyclists who cannot be detec- Operate the peripheral monitoring
ted as such, because they are, for example, system
fully or partially covered.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
Operating limitations
on page 127.
In addition to the situations mentioned regarding
sensor limits, in the following situations, Front After switching on the ignition, Front Assist and
Assist may not react, react late or in an undesired initial warning (depending on country) are
way, among others: switched on automatically.
– Reverse gear. However, as long as the white control light
– If the ASR is manually turned off.  is on, Front Assist is only available to a
– If the ESC is regulating. limited extent or not at all.
– If multiple brake lights are malfunctioning. Volkswagen recommends always keeping the
– If several brake lights are faulty on the electri- Front Assist system and the distance warning
cally connected tow. and initial warning functions enabled, except
→ page 128, Front Assist system limits.
– If the vehicle is suddenly accelerated or if the
accelerator pedal is fully pressed.
Turn on and off
– In unpredictable driving scenarios (e.g. vehicles You can manually turn Front Assist on and off
in the front suddenly braking or swerving). and view the activation status.
– If the Front Assist system is malfunctioning.
On the instrument cluster display: 

128 Owner's Manual

 – Press the button  Front Assist not available, insufficient radar
– Turn Front Assist on or off. sensor visibility.
– The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sen-
On Infotainment system:
sor → page 233.
– Open the wizards menu. – Radar sensor visibility may be compromised
– Switch Front Assist on or off in the corre- due to weather conditions (e.g. snow), or de-
sponding submenu. tergent residue. Clean the radar sensor
→ page 233.
 When you turn off Front Assist, distance – Radar sensor visibility compromised by attach-
alert and advance warning are also automatically ed pieces, decorative trims and license plant
turned off. The yellow indicator lamp lights up on supports or stickers. Keep the area around the
the instrument cluster display. radar sensor unobstructed.
– Radar sensor is maladjusted or damaged (e.g.
Adjust distance warning and initial warning due to front end damage). Check for visible
If Front Assist is switched on, you can make the damages → page 242.
following settings in the Infotainment system as- – Paintwork or structural changes were made to
sistant menu, depending on version and country: the front-end of the vehicle.
– Depending on vehicle version and radio ver- – The original Volkswagen logo is not being
sion, turn the desired feature on or off in the used.
radio system's vehicle settings: touch the se- – If the problem persists, turn off Front Assist
lection button  and the Car → page 156 and seek out a Volkswagen Dealership.
function button.
Depending on the version, it is also possible to Front Assist not working as expected or
set the initial warning time. performing several unwanted interventions
– The radar sensor is dirty. Clean the radar sen-
Depending on the version, the  button is sor → page 233.
located on the multifunction steering wheel
– The system's limits are maintained
or on the turn signal and high beam lever.
→ page 128.
Some settings may be saved in custom user – If the problem persists, turn off Front Assist
accounts and, therefore, change automati- and seek out a Volkswagen Dealership.
cally whenever the user account is changed. 
Adverse conditions:
The electronic stability program (ESC) may not
identify very steep slopes (over 30%). This cir-
Troubleshooting
cumstance may affect the regular operation of
the electronic stability program (ESC) and conse-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
quently the hill assist system (HHC - Hill Hold
on page 127.
Control), emergency braking assistant (Front As-
sist) and parking sensor.
 Front Assist starts
To restore the aforementioned systems, it is suf-
White indicator lamp lights up.
ficient that the vehicle is turned off and on again
– Front Assist system unavailable or limited. Af- and that the driver starts the car and drives it at a
ter driving forward for some time, Front Assist speed greater than 25 km/h for a few seconds. 
becomes available and the indicator light goes
out. If the vehicle is not driven, the indicator
lamp remains on.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Driver assist systems 129

Lane Assist Lane Assist system limits
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
 Introduction on page 130.

Limits of the sensor system

Lane Assist recognizes road lane marking using
Lane Assist helps the driver, within the
the camera behind the windscreen.
system limits, to stay in the lane. The
function is not suitable and is not pre- Unrecognized or incorrectly recognized road
pared to maintain the lane on its own. lane marking
Lane Assist does not correctly recognize all road
If the vehicle approaches too close to a detected lane marking. If road lane markings are not rec-
lane boundary line, Lane Assist will alert the driv- ognized or are incorrectly recognized as such, a
er with corrective steering intervention. Steering failure in the assistance control or unwanted in-
correction intervention can be taken over by the terventions by Lane Assist may occur. In addition
driver at any time. to the situations mentioned in the camera limits,
this may occur in the following situations, among
Speed range others:
If the traffic lane line is recognized, Lane Assist is – If there are no road lane markings.
ready to regulate within the system limits from
– In case of very dynamic driving.
approximately 60 km/h (approximately 35 mph)
(system status active). – Off roads or highways in good condition.
– On bad tracks, track structures or objects.
DANGER – In the case of reflections and dazzling effects.
Lane Assist cannot replace the driver's atten-
Always be attentive, intervene yourself if neces-
tion and operates exclusively within the limits
sary and cancel any unwanted intervention by
of the system. Lane Assist cannot recognize all
the system immediately. Temporarily turn off
driving situations and may not react, react late
Lane Assist if necessary.
or react undesirably. If you are careless, there is
a risk of accidents and serious injuries or even Lane Assist is not ready to control
death.
Lane Assist is not ready to control under the fol-
● Always remain vigilant and do not rely solely lowing conditions (passive system status):
on the system. The driver is always responsi-
ble for maintaining the lane. – The electronic stability program (ESC) is turned
off or ESC Sport is active.
● Observe system limits → page 130.
– The driving speed is less than approximately
● Adapt your speed and distance from the ve-
60 km/h (about 35 mph) or more than approxi-
hicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road
mately 215 km/h (about 135 mph).
and traffic conditions.
– Lane Assist did not recognize any road lane
● Always keep your hands on the steering
markings.
wheel to be ready to manoeuvre at any time.
– In the case of very narrow lanes and sharp
● Immediately counteract unwanted system
curves.
intervention by turning the steering wheel.
– Temporarily, in case of very dynamic driving.
● Observe the indications on the instrument
cluster display and follow the corresponding – If the driver cancels a system intervention.
instructions if the traffic situation permits.  – In the event of intervention by the emergency
braking assistant (Front Assist).
In the following situations, Lane Assist is not
ready to control on at least one side: 

130 Owner's Manual

 – With the turn signal lights on, in the direction 1 Road lane marking detected. The system is
of the planned lane change.
ready to control on the represented side.
– Inside a curve that you deliberately drive into. 2 Road lane marking detected. The system
Observe the limits of the camera. Always be controls in an auxiliary way on the represen-
attentive and intervene yourself if necessa- ted side.
ry! 
3 The system is not ready to control on the
represented side.

Driving with Lane Assist Depending on the driving situation, one of the
following warning lights comes on in the instru-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter ment cluster:
on page 130.
 System active and ready to control on at
least one side.

 The system takes control on the side rep-

resented (corrective steering intervention).
If no indicator lamps come on, Lane Assist is not
ready to control on both sides (passive system
status) or is switched off.

Driver intervention prompt

In the absence of driving activity, Lane Assist will
prompt you, via a display on the instrument clus-
ter display and audible alerts, to drive in the mid-
dle of your own lane.
If you don't react to this, Lane Assist will switch
Fig. 112 On the instrument cluster: lane keeping to passive.
assistant display indicators.
Regardless of steering activity, if the corrective
Turn on and off steering intervention lasts longer, a display on
Depending on the country, after switching on the the instrument cluster display and audible alerts
ignition, Lane Assist always remains activated. prompt you to drive in the middle of your own
You can also manually turn Lane Assist on and off lane.
and view the current status.
Steering wheel vibration
On the instrument cluster display: The following situation may cause the steering
wheel to vibrate:
1 Press the  button.
2 Turn Lane Assist on or off. – During heavy steering intervention, the system
can no longer recognize any lane.
On Infotainment system: Additionally, you can select the Vibration or
1 Open the wizards menu. Steering wheel vibration option in the Infotain-
ment system assistant menu. In this case, cross-
2 Turn the “Blind Spot” Monitor on or off in the
ing a road lane marking with Lane Assist active
corresponding submenu.
produces a vibration in the steering wheel.
If you switch off Lane Assist, the yellow in-
 dicator lamp will come on in the instru-
Depending on the version, the button is lo-
cated on the multifunction steering wheel
ment cluster, depending on the country.
or on the turn signal and high beam lever. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Driver assist systems 131

Troubleshooting Radar sensors behind the rear bumper cover
monitor the area behind the vehicle. The system
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter measures the distance and speed difference to
on page 130. the other vehicle and informs the driver through
optical signals on the exterior mirror.
Fault message, Lane Assist unavailable The Blind Spot Monitor should only be used on
A indicator lamp will be lit in the instrument clus- paved roads.
ter. A message will also be shown on the instru-
ment cluster display. Speed range
When the “Blind Spot” Monitor is on, it is activa-
– The camera's field of view is dirty. Clean the ted from approximately 15 km/h (about 9 mph).
windscreen.
– The camera's visibility is compromised by WARNING
weather conditions, for example snow, or by The “Blind Spot” Monitor does not replace the
residues of detergent or coatings. Clean the driver's attention, and works exclusively within
windscreen. the system limits. The Blind Spot Monitor may
– Camera visibility is compromised by attached not detect all driving situations and all objects
parts or adhesives. Keep the area around the in the vicinity, meaning it may not react, react
camera's field of view clear late or in an undesired way. If you are not care-
– The camera is out of adjustment or damaged, ful, there is a risk of accidents and serious inju-
for example due to damage to the windscreen. ries, including fatalities.
Check for damages. ● Always remain alert and do not rely exclu-
– The camera has automatically turned off due sively on the system. The driver is always re-
to high ambient temperature or long periods sponsible for all driving tasks and changing
of direct sunlight. If the camera is available lanes.
again, Lane Assist will also be available again. ● Observe system limits
Turn the engine off and back on. ● Adapt your speed and distance from the ve-
– Damages or faults. Turn the engine off and hicles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road
back on. and traffic conditions.
– If the problem persists, look for a suitably ● Always keep your hands on the steering
qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends wheel so you are ready to take the wheel at
seeking out a Volkswagen Dealership. any time.
● Observe indications on the exterior mirrors
The system behaves differently than expected
and on the instrument cluster display and act
– Do not add objects to the steering wheel. as requested. 
After turning on the ignition, it may take a
few seconds to detect a fault in the system. 
Sensor system limits of “blind
spot”
“Blind spot monitor”  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 132.

 Introduction Sensor limits

The “Blind Spot” Monitor detects driving situa-
tions with the help of radar sensors in the rear
The Blind Spot Monitor helps the driver to area. 
detect the traffic situation behind the ve-
hicle.

132 Owner's Manual

 Operating limitations
On Infotainment system:
The “Blind Spot” Monitor may, among other
1 Open the wizards menu.
things, not correctly interpret the traffic situation
in the following driving situations: 2 Turn the “Blind Spot” Monitor on or off in the
corresponding submenu.
– When driving in the middle of two lanes.
– On roadways of different widths. As soon as the “Blind Spot” Monitor is ready for
use, the indicator lamp  illuminates briefly
– In subdivisions with special margins, for exam-
once in the exterior mirror glass.
ple, high or displaced guardrails.
Automatic deactivation
Limited visibility
If you use the factory-installed towing device
In the event of solar radiation, the visibility of the
and have established the necessary electrical
control light in the exterior rear-view mirror glass
connection, the “Blind Spot” Monitor will be
may be reduced.
switched off automatically. As soon as a trailer is
Observe the limits of the radar sensors and electrically connected to the vehicle, and the
always be alert!  driver starts the vehicle, a text message appears
on the instrument cluster display that the “Blind
Spot” Monitor is deactivated. After disconnecting
the electrical connection, the “Blind Spot” Moni-
Driving with “blind spot” monitor tor will automatically switch on again.
If the towing devices are not factory installed,
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 132. you must manually turn the “Blind Spot” Monitor
off and on.

Indicators on exterior mirror

 Flashing: a vehicle was detected in the
blind spot and the turn signals were also
activated in the direction of the detected
vehicle.
 On: Your own vehicle is being overtaken or
you are overtaking another vehicle with a
difference of up to approximately 10 km/h
(about 6 mph). When overtaking signifi-
cantly faster, the indicator is not displayed.
The faster another vehicle is approaching, the
sooner an indication will occur in the exterior
Fig. 113 On the exterior mirrors: Blind Spot Monitor mirror glass.
indicator.
“Blind spot” Monitor “Plus”
Turn on and off In vehicles with lane keeping assist (Lane Assist),
You can view the current status of the “Blind you are alerted in the event of a possible critical
Spot” Monitor in the instrument cluster display situation during a lane change (information level,
and in the infotainment system. There, you can alert level) by means of a corrective steering in-
also turn the “Blind Spot” Monitor on and off. tervention when the lane keeping assist in the
lane (Lane Assist) is on. Steering intervention oc-
On the instrument cluster display: curs even if you have activated the turn signals
1 Press the  button. for the respective direction. If you neutralize the
steering intervention, an additional alert will be
2 Turn the “Blind Spot” Monitor on or off in the
issued via a vibration of the steering wheel. To do
25A.5L1.TCR.20

corresponding submenu.
this, steering wheel vibration must be activated
in the Infotainment system assistant menu. 

Driver assist systems 133

 If there is a system failure, the Blind Spot – The side windows were subsequently coated
Monitor may automatically turn off.  with tinting films → page 242.
– If the problem persists, look for a suitably
qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends
seeking out a Volkswagen Dealership.
Troubleshooting
The system will only be available again
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter when the ignition has been turned off and
on page 132. on again and the Blind Spot Monitor has been
turned on. 
 Faulty “blind spot” sensor
Damages or faults. The indicator lamp in the in-
strument cluster display lights up yellow.

1 Damages or faults. Turn the engine off and

back on.
2 If the problem persists, look for a suitably
qualified workshop. Volkswagen recom-
mends seeking out a Volkswagen Dealership.

Sensor without visibility, malfunction

warning, the system turns off
– Clean the radar sensors and remove stickers or
accessories from the radar sensors or bumper
→ page 233.
– Check whether damage is detectable.
– Clean the radar sensors and remove stickers or
accessories from the radar sensors
– If the problem persists, look for a suitably
qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends
seeking out a Volkswagen Dealership.

The system behaves differently than expected

– The radar sensors are dirty. Clean the radar
sensors → page 233.
– The radar sensors are covered in water.
– Visibility of the radar sensors is compromised
by weather conditions, e.g. snow, detergent
residue or layer formation. Clean the radar
sensors → page 233.
– The system's limits are maintained→ page 132.
– The vehicle is damaged in the area of the radar
sensors, for example through minor collisions
during parking. Check whether damage can be
recognized.
– The visibility of radar sensors is compromised
by attached parts, bicycle carrier systems or
adhesives. Keep the area around the radar sen-
sors unobstructed .
– Painting services were carried out in the area
of the radar sensors, on the rear of the vehicle
or on the chassis → page 242.

134 Owner's Manual

 Parking and manoeuvring WARNING
Leaving and parking the vehicle incorrectly may
cause the vehicle to move. This could lead to
Parking accidents and severe injuries.
● Ensure that the handbrake is correctly en-
Stopping the vehicle
gaged.
Always park the vehicle in the indicated se-
● Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
quence.
tion cylinder while the vehicle is in motion.
Park the vehicle always on a level and stable sur- ● Always take all vehicle keys with you when
face → . you leave the vehicle. The engine can be
– Stopping the vehicle. With a manual gearbox, started and electrical equipment such as the
press the clutch pedal fully down. window controls can be operated, which may
– Depress and hold the brake pedal until the en- lead to severe injuries.
gine has stopped. ● Never leave unattended children or people
– With an automatic gearbox, move the selector with special needs in the vehicle. They could
lever to position P. become trapped in the vehicle in an emer-
gency and may not be able to get themselves
– Lift the handbrake lever up → page 136. to safety. Depending on the time of year, for
– Switch off the engine. The  indicator lamp example, locked vehicles can be subjected to
on the instrument cluster should be lit up in very high or very low temperatures. This can
red. cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities,
– Remove the key from the ignition. especially to small children.
– In vehicles with manual gearbox, select 1st
gear for flat ground and uphill inclines, or re- NOTICE
verse gear for downhill inclines, and then re- ● Only release the brake pedal after pulling the
lease the clutch. handbrake, in order to prevent sudden vehicle
– Let go off the brake pedal. movement after parking.
– Ensure that all occupants, particularly children, ● Drive carefully in parking lots with long kerbs
have left the vehicle. or fixed posts. Objects higher than the ground
level may damage the bumper and other vehi-
– Take all vehicle keys with you when you leave
cle parts when parking. On order to avoid any
the vehicle.
damage, stop the vehicle before the wheels
– Lock the vehicle. touch the bollards or kerbs.
Parking on uphill and downhill slopes ● Carefully drive through entrances and slumps
in terrains, ramps, kerbs, and other objects.
Before switching off the engine, turn the steering
Lowered vehicle parts, such as the bumper,
wheel so that the front wheels will roll against
spoiler and chassis, engine or exhaust parts
the kerb if the parked vehicle starts to move.
may be damaged in these situations.
– When facing downhill, turn the wheels so that
they face the kerb. Please adhere to relevant legislation when
stopping and parking your vehicle. 
– When facing uphill, turn the wheels so that
they face the centre of the road.

WARNING
The components of the exhaust system be-
come very hot. This can cause fires and serious
injuries.
● Never park the vehicle so that parts of the
25A.5L1.TCR.20

exhaust system can come into contact with

inflammable material underneath the vehi-
cle, e.g. leaves, dry grass, spilt fuel, etc.

Parking and manoeuvring 135

Handbrake NOTICE
Only release the brake pedal after pulling the
handbrake, in order to prevent sudden vehicle
Engaging the handbrake movement after parking. 

Parking systems safety

instructions
The following are parking systems:
– Park Distance Control → page 137.
– Rearview camera system → page 139
Which of the listed systems is installed will de-
Fig. 114 Between front seats: handbrake lever. pend on the version of the vehicle.
Always pull the handbrake lever when leaving or Limits of parking systems
parking the vehicle. Objects such as thin poles and bars, fences, trees,
very low or high obstacles as well as open or
Applying the handbrake
opening boot lids may not be detected by the
– Press the interlock button and pull the hand- sensors or cameras.
brake lever upwards → Fig. 114 (arrow).
In some cases dirt or ice covering the sensors or
The handbrake is engaged when the  indicator cameras may be taken for an obstacle.
lamp, with switched on ignition, lights up on the
instrument cluster. Limits of the reverse camera
The rear view camera only shows two-dimen-
Releasing the handbrake
sional images on the display. Due to the absence
– Pull the handbrake lever slightly upwards and of image depth, protruding objects or recesses in
press the interlock button → Fig. 114 (arrow). the road may be difficult to identify or not be
– Guide the handbrake lever down while press- identifiable at all.
ing down the interlock button. The orientation lines are superimposed on the
image regardless of the surroundings of the vehi-
WARNING cle, there is no automatic identification of ob-
Incorrect use of the handbrake can cause se- jects. The driver is responsible for the assess-
vere accidents and injuries. ment of whether the vehicle fits or not into the
● The handbrake should never be used to brake parking space.
the vehicle, except in emergencies. The brak-
ing distance is considerably longer as only WARNING
the rear wheels are braked. Always use the The intelligent technology shipped with the
foot brakes. parking systems cannot go beyond the limits
● Never drive with the handbrake lever slightly imposed by physics and will only operate within
pulled. This could overheat the brake and the limitations of the system. The increased
compromise the braking system. In addition, convenience provided by the parking assist sys-
this causes premature wearing of rear brake tems must not let you ignore a risk situation.
pads. The parking assist systems cannot replace the
● Never drive the vehicle with the handbrake driver's full attention.
lightly applied. The vehicle can move even ● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
while the handbrake is applied. visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions. 

136 Owner's Manual

 ● Unsupervised vehicle movements may cause By way of sensors in the front and rear bumper
severe injuries. the parking assist determines the distance of an
obstacle from the vehicle → page 6. The system
● Always keep in mind the parking direction
indicates on the radio system through acoustic
and the relevant areas around the vehicle.
signals when there is an obstacle in the sensors'
● Do not let your attention be deviated from detection range.
the surrounding traffic by the images dis-
played on the instrument cluster display or System limitations
on the radio system. Objects such as towing bars, thin poles and bars,
● Always keep your attention on the surround- fences, trees, very low or high obstacles as well
ings of the vehicle as small children, animals as open or opening boot lids may not be detec-
and objects are not always detected by the ted by the sensors.
parking systems.
In some cases dirt or ice covering the sensors
● The parking systems have blind spots in may be taken for an obstacle. 
which obstacles and people cannot be detec-
ted.
● External acoustic sources and certain object
surfaces and clothing may influence the sen- Enabling and disabling
sor signals. Under certain circumstances
people and objects may not be detected or
mistakenly detected.
● Due to the display's resolution and in condi-
tions of insufficient lighting, certain objects,
such as thin posts or fences, may not be dis-
played at all or only partially so.
● The signals and indications of the parking
systems demand a reaction time witch at a
too fast approximation may not be sufficient
to emit a warning.
Fig. 115 On the centre console: manual park dis-
Volkswagen recommends practicing the use tance control on/off button.
of the parking distance control in a low-
traffic area or a parking lot to get properly ac- Depending on the vehicle or radio version, the
quainted with the system's quirks.  button to enable and disable park distance con-
trol may not be available.

Enabling the park distance control

– Selecting reverse gear.
Park distance control (Park
– OR: press  or on the radio display, touch the
Pilot) selection surface  .
The park distance control is automatically ena-
 Introduction bled when the vehicle moves in reverse gear.
According to the vehicle version, the park dis-
tance control system may also be enabled auto-
matically.
The park distance control system assists
the driver with parking and manoeuvring. Disabling the Park Distance Control
– Press  or on the radio display, touch the se-
According to the vehicle version, the park dis- lection surface  .
25A.5L1.TCR.20

tance control system may not be available. – OR: accelerate the vehicle forward at a speed
higher than approximately 0 to -15 km/h. 

Parking and manoeuvring 137

Automatic enabling (version dependent) Representation on the display
The Park Distance Control is also enabled when
the vehicle is driven at a speed of less than 15
km/h against an obstacle in the front area. Auto-
matic activation can be enabled on the radio sys-
tem.
The automatic activation only works when the
approximate speed of 15 km/h is not reached is
not reached for the first time. A renewed auto-
matic enabling is possible if the park aid feature
is disabled and enabled through the button  or
by touching the selection surface  on the radio
menu.
Fig. 116 Indication on the radio system: full screen
Further, the automatic activation can also be en- mode. The detected areas depend on the vehicle
abled again by switching the ignition off and on version.
again.
On the radio system the detected areas are rep-
Manoeuvre braking resented by various segments → Fig. 116. The
When the vehicle is equipped with the manoeu- more the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the
vre braking function, the manoeuvre braking will more the segment will also approach the illustra-
activate an emergency braking as soon as an ob- ted vehicle. Simultaneously acoustic alarms are
stacle is detected ahead while driving in reverse sounded.
gear. The purpose of the manoeuvre braking is to  Nearby obstacle. A continuous acoustic
reduce the possibility of a front and rear collision. sound is sounded. Stop driving!
The following requirements must be met for an  Obstacle in the way of the vehicle's course.
automatic brake intervention: An intermittent acoustic sound is sounded.
The shorter the distance, the shorter the
– “active” manoeuvring braking function in the intervals between acoustic alarms.
selection box, through the radio
 Obstacle out of the vehicle's course.
menu→ page 26;
Muting the acoustic warnings.
– The parking aid system is active when select- 
ing reverse gear or when activating the park
aid system through the button  or by touch-  Enabling and disabling the manoeuvre
braking (depends on the version).
ing the selection surface  on the radio dis-
play, depending on the vehicle version;  Switching to the rear view camera system
(version dependent).
– Speed must not exceed 10 km/h; / System with malfunction in the surveyed
The automatic braking function is disabled in the area (version dependent). 
following conditions:
– If the park assist system is activated automati-
cally; Troubleshooting
– For five metres after braking in the same di-
rection, and active once again after changing Sensor without visibility, malfunction
gears. warning, the system turns off
In case of damage to a sensor, the detection
Touch the  function pad on the radio menu to
range of the sensor is permanently turned off.
enable or disable the manoeuvre braking.
Malfunctions of the parking aid are displayed at
To operate the automatic braking function, the
first turning on by a text message with acoustic
ultrasound sensors of the Park Assist system are
warning and the flashing of the warning lamp on
used. Absolute collision prevention cannot be
the  button. When the sensors are dirty or
guaranteed by these ultrasound sensors.  covered, the corresponding group of sensors is 

138 Owner's Manual

 displayed on the Park Distance Control display Rear view camera system
exhibition. Furthermore a cleaning indication is
displayed (version dependent).
– Clean the sensors or remove stickers or acces-  Introduction
sories from the sensors and from the rear view
camera system → page 236.
– Check for damages. The rear view camera on the rear of the
vehicle facilitates the driver's rear view
The system behaves different from expected
and assists with the parking manoeuvre.
Several causes are possible:
– The sensors are dirty → page 236. Apart from
According to the version of the vehicle, the rear
dirt and snow, the visibility of the sensor may
view camera system may not be available.
also be compromised by cleaning products
residues or linings. The rear view camera displays the area behind
– The system's prerequisites must be satisfied the vehicle on the radio system display screen.
→ page 137. According to the mode, orientation lines support
the rear view.
– The sensors are covered with water.
– The vehicle is damaged in the area of the sen- WARNING
sors, for example by parking bumps.
The use of the cameras to asses the distance to
– The sensors' viewing areas are obstructed by obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) is imprecise
accessories such as bike support systems. and may cause serious accidents and injuries.
– Modifications to the paint in the vicinity of the ● The camera lenses amplify and distort the
sensors or constructive modifications have field of vision making the displayed objects
been made, for example, to the front or chas- seem altered or imprecise. 
sis of the vehicle.
– Noise sources, such as rough asphalt or cob-
blestone pavements interfere with the ultra-
sound signal. Enabling and disabling
Possible solutions  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
– Turn the system off temporarily. on page 139.
– Check whether one of the mentioned possible
Enabling the rear view camera system
causes matches the problem.
– Selecting reverse gear.
– After eliminating the source of the malfunc-
tion, the system can again be turned on. – OR: press  or on the radio display, touch the
selection surface  .
– Should the system still behave in an unexpec-
ted fashion, have the system checked at a Disabling the rear view camera system
Volkswagen dealership. 
Drive forward at least 15 km/h. 

Representation on the display

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 139.

The image of the rear view camera system is dis-

25A.5L1.TCR.20

played on the radio system.

The functions and representations depend on the
version and may differ. 

Parking and manoeuvring 139

Settings Parking
With the rear view camera system enabled, set-
tings may be configured by means of the func-  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
tion touch pads. Some settings depend on the on page 139.
version.
Function touch pad surfaces and rear view cam-
era system icons:

x Exit current display.

 Adjust
colour.
the display: brightness, contrast,

 →Switch to Park Distance Control

page 137.

 Displays
tor,
the Park Distance Control indica-

 Hides the Park Distance Control indicator,

 Turning the Park Distance Control sound
on and off.

Orientation lines
Red line: safe distance backwards
Green side-lines: vehicle extensions.  Fig. 117 Exhibition on the radio system display:
parking with the rear view camera system.

Key for Fig. 117:

Assumptions  Select parking spot.
 Parking in the selected parking spot.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter  Line up vehicle to parking spot.
on page 139. 1 Lane.
2 Parking space.
To recognize a parking lot, the following assump-
3 Side limits of the parking space.
tions must be satisfied:
4 Rear limit of the parking space.
– Not exceed 15 km/h.
– Parking space width: vehicle length + 0.2 m. Entering the parking space
– Position the vehicle in front of the parking
For the display of a faultless image the following spot → Fig. 117 2 .
prerequisites must be satisfied:
– Selecting reverse gear.
– Closed boot lid. – Drive slowly in reverse and manoeuvre so that
– The surroundings correspond to a flat surface. the green side guides lead in between the de-
– The vehicle is not loaded in the back.  limiting lines of the selected parking space
2 .
– Align the vehicle in the selected parking spot
so that the green side guidelines are superim-
posed on the lateral limitation lines 3 .
– Stop the vehicle when the red line hits the rear
limit 4 . 

140 Owner's Manual

 Troubleshooting Park Assist
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 139.  Introduction
No camera image, malfunction warning, the
system turns off
– Clean the camera lens or remove the stickers
or accessories from the camera → page 236.
– Check for damages.

The system behaves different from expected

Several causes are possible:
– The camera is dirty → page 236. Apart from
dirt and snow, the camera view may also be
compromised by cleaning products residues or Fig. 118 On the centre console: park assist on/off
coatings. button.

– The system's prerequisites must be satisfied

→ page 140. The park assist system actively controls
– The camera lens is covered by water. the vehicle’s direction when parking and
– The vehicle is damaged in the area of the cam- leaving a parking space.
era, for example by parking bumping.
– The camera's viewing areas are obstructed by Depending on the vehicle version, the park assist
accessories such as bike support systems. system and/or button to turn on the park assist
– Modifications to the paint in the vicinity of the system may not be available.
camera or constructive modifications have The park assist system is an extension of Park
been made, for example, to the front or chas- Distance Control → page 137.
sis of the vehicle.
The park assist system automatically controls the
Solution for all cases vehicle’s direction. The driver must accelerate,
– Turn the system off temporarily. switch gears and brake!
– Check whether one of the mentioned possible WARNING
causes matches the problem.
Sudden steering wheel movements may cause
– After eliminating the source of the malfunc-
severe injuries.
tion, the system can again be turned on.
● Do not touch the steering wheel during the
– Should the system still behave in an unexpec-
manoeuvring procedure until prompted by
ted fashion, have the system checked at a
the system.
Volkswagen dealership. 
● Exception: take over the steering wheel in
case of danger.

NOTICE
The park assist system is guided only by parked
vehicles, curbs or other elements. Ensure the
tyres and rims are not damaged when parking. If
so, stop the parking process immediately to
avoid vehicle damages. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Parking and manoeuvring 141

Requisites tomatically when facing an obstacle. The driver
must then step on the brake pedal. Automatic
 Please refer to and at the start of the brake interventions to mitigate damages inter-
chapter on page 141. rupt parking manoeuvres.

To park and leave a parking space, the following WARNING

requirements must be met: Automatic brake interventions in the park assist
system must not encourage drivers to take
– Traction control (TCS) must be on → page 146.
risks that may jeopardize safety. The system
– Distance: 0.5-1.5 m when passing next to the cannot substitute the driver's attention.
parking spot.
● The park assist system is subject to certain
– The parking space must be of a minimum size limitations inherent to the system. Automat-
required to use the park assist system. Longi- ic brake interventions may only work partial-
tudinal spaces for line parking: vehicle length + ly or may not work in some situations.
80 cm. Traversing spaces for side-by-side
● Always be ready to brake the vehicle your-
parking: vehicle width + 70 cm
self.
– Speed when passing next to the parking spot
● Automatic brake interventions last for ap-
(lined spots): 40 km at most.
proximately 1.5 seconds. After this period,
– Speed when passing next to the parking spot the driver must brake the vehicle. 
(side-by-side spots): 20 km at most.
– Speed when parking: 7 km at most. An auto-
matic brake intervention may occur during
parking manoeuvres. Looking for a parking spot
After the automatic brake intervention, it is pos-  Please refer to and at the start of the
sible to resume the parking manoeuvre. chapter on page 141.
Automatic interventions only occur for each dis-
placement made during parking manoeuvres. If a
speed of approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) is excee-
ded, the manoeuvre is interrupted.

Automatic interruption of parking manoeuvre

The park assist system interrupts the parking ma-
noeuvre in the following cases:
– Press  OR touch the selection surface  on Fig. 119 On the instrument cluster display: indica-
the radio display. tion of parking modes.
– The driver holds the steering wheel.
The Park Assist System features three parking
– The driver door is opened. modes → Fig. 119 (schematic diagram).
– The parking manoeuvre does not complete the Line parking in reverse gear
course of approximately 6 minutes. 
– There is a system malfunction. Side-by-side parking in reverse gear

– If the TCS is switched off or takes control. Side-by-side parking in forward gear
Automatic brake intervention to mitigate

damages – Always drive slowly by a row of parked vehi-
cles while paying attention to traffic.
In some countries, the park assist system helps
drivers by automatically intervening in the brakes – Press  OR on the radio display, touch the se-
on some cases → . lection surface  . The park assist system au-
tomatically searches for a suitable parking
Depending on the version and certain conditions space on the front passenger side. 
(e.g. weather conditions or vehicle load or angle),
the park assist system may brake the vehicle au-

142 Owner's Manual

 – Stop the vehicle when the system recom- Parking in a parking space
mends a parking mode on the instrument clus-
ter display.  Please refer to and at the start of the
– Park upon the recommended parking mode chapter on page 141.
showing up on the instrument cluster display
→ Fig. 120 5 → page 143.

If you wish the park assist system to search for a

spot on the opposite side of the road, turn on the
respective turn signal.

Change the parking mode

If the park assist system found other possible
parking modes, they will be shown in reduced
viewing mode. To select successively, press 
OR touch the selection surface  on the radio
display. After selecting all parking modes found,
the system turns off. Press once again the button
 OR touch the selection surface  on the ra-
dio display to show the initially recommended
parking mode.

Side-by-side parking in forward gear

For side-by-side parking in forward gear, select
the mode “Side-by-side parking in forward gear” Fig. 120 On the instrument cluster display: park
side by side.  Looking for a parking spot.  Park-
→ Fig. 119 (if located by the system) by pressing
ing position.  Manoeuvring.
the button  OR touching the selection surface
 on the radio display.
Key to → Fig. 120 (side-by-side parking with re-
The Park Assist system must not be activa- verse gear):
ted “later”. The system will show if you pre- 1 Indication of movement with forward gear
viously passed by a suitable parking space. 
2 Own vehicle
3 Vehicle parked or obstacle
4 Parking space detected.
5 Indication to select reverse gear
6 Indication to step on the brake pedal
7 Status bar. Symbolizes the relative distance
to cover.

All required conditions must be met in order to

use the park assist system→ page 142 and the
vehicle must be stationary.
– Release the steering wheel.
– Select reverse gear after an arrow is shown in-
dicating the reverse gear on the instrument
cluster display.
– Accelerate carefully.
– Brake whenever a sound alarm prompts to
change direction, the arrow → Fig. 120 1 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

lights up, the white  symbol appears, or

when a message is displayed. 

Parking and manoeuvring 143

– Proceed until you hear a sound alarm or until – Accelerate carefully.
the reverse gear selection indication is shown – Brake whenever you hear the sound alarm, the
on the instrument cluster display. white symbol lights up  or the indication to
– Return and proceed until a message appears proceed appears on the instrument cluster dis-
on the instrument cluster display and a sound play.
alarm is heard, as applicable.  – Step on the brake pedal until the park assist
system finishes turning the steering wheel or
until the white symbol  goes off on the in-
strument cluster display.
Leave a parking space
– Return and proceed until a message appears
 Please refer to and at the start of the on the instrument cluster display and a sound
chapter on page 141. alarm is heard, as applicable.
– Take over the steering wheel with the steering
angle adjusted by the park assist system.
– Leave the parking space when possible. 

Troubleshooting
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 141.

Sensors with no visibility, malfunction

message, the system is shut off
The park assist system shuts off if the sensor is
damaged.
Fig. 121 On the instrument cluster display: leave a
parking space in line. – Clean the sensors or remove any stickers or ac-
cessories from the sensors and cameras
Key for Fig. 121: → page 236.
1 Parked vehicle – Check for visible damages,
2 Own vehicle with reverse gear engaged
The system behaves erratically
3 Status bar. Symbolizes the relative distance
to cover. There may be several causes:
– The sensors are dirty. Besides dirt and snow,
4 Direction indication for the next move
sensor visibility may be impaired due deter-
The Park Assist system can be used to leave a gent residues or any kind of coating material
parking space in line. → page 236.

All required conditions must be met in order to – The system requirements must be met
use the park assist system to leave a parking → page 142.
space → page 142. – The sensors are covered with water.
– Press  OR on the radio display, touch the se- – The vehicle has damages on the sensor area
lection surface  . . (e.g. due to impacts when parking).
– Turn on the corresponding turn signal based – The sensor detection range is blocked by an
on the side of the road from which you will accessory (e.g. a bicycle rack). 
leave the parking space.
– Selecting reverse gear.
– Let go of the steering wheel after the follow-
ing message appears: Active steering intervention.
Check your surroundings.

144 Owner's Manual

 – Modifications to the paint in the vicinity of the
sensors or structural modifications have been
made, for example, to the front or running
gear of the vehicle.
– Some sources of noises (e.g. rough asphalt or
cobblestones) may affect the ultrasound warn-
ing.

Solution for all cases

– Turn the system off temporarily.
– Check for any of the causes described above. Fig. 123 Infotainment system: display of the Rear
– Once the source of the problem is eliminated, Traffic Alert.
the system can be restarted.
– If the system still behaves erratically, seek as- Rear Traffic Alert monitors cross traffic
sistance from a Volkswagen Dealership or a when reversing out of a parking space or
qualified workshop. 
when manoeuvring.

Operation
Rear Traffic Alert The Rear Traffic Alert works with the help of ra-
dar sensors in the rear bumper.

Information about Rear Traffic The system detects objects that are approaching
or moving in the rear and side surroundings and
Alert alerts the driver to an obstacle → Fig. 122.
If there is an obstacle, a warning signal will
sound and the obstacle area will be displayed in
colour in the Infotainment system→ Fig. 123.
If the driver does not react, automatic braking in-
tervention may occur→ page 136.
Obstacle detected.

Automatic braking intervention by the Rear
 Traffic Alert.

1 Press the brake pedal to keep the vehicle sta-

tionary.

Fig. 122 Monitored area around the vehicle that Turn on and off
will leave the parking space (schematic representa-
tion). 1 To select the function on the instrument
cluster, press the steering wheel  button.
Or: depending on the version, open the Assist
systems menu in the vehicle settings of the In-
fotainment system.
2 Activate or deactivate the Rear Traffic Alert. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Parking and manoeuvring 145

Display Brake support systems
 Red image segment: nearby obstacle. The
vehicle is at risk. Brake!
 Yellow image segment: obstacle on the Information to the brake support
route. The vehicle is at risk. Adjust the systems
steering angle.

Malfunction The vehicle is equipped with a brake support sys-

tem:
If the Rear Traffic Alert is faulty, the following in-
– ESC system: the ESC, EDS, TCS, BAS, ABS and
dicator light will come on in the digital instru-
EBV brake support systems only function when
ment cluster:
the engine is running. They make a considera-
The Rear Traffic Alert is faulty, for exam- ble contribution to active driving safety.
 ple, the sensors are dirty or there is an er-
When the brake supporting systems are in opera-
ror in the system.
tion, the brake pedal may pulse or noises may oc-
Driving with a trailer cur. Keep the necessary pressure constantly on
the brake pedal.
If a trailer is electrically connected, the Rear Traf-
fic Alert cannot be activated. Traction control (TCS)
If the trailer has been disconnected, Rear Traffic The TCS reduces the engine drive in case of
Alert will reactivate after the ignition is turned wheel skidding and adjusts the drive to road sur-
on. face conditions. The TCS facilitates the starter,
With towing brackets not installed at the factory, acceleration, and uphill effort, even under ad-
the Rear Traffic Alert must be switched off man- verse road surface conditions.
ually when driving with a trailer. When the traction control system is active the 
indicator lamp will flash on the instrument clus-
WARNING ter display.
The intelligent technology shipped with the
parking systems cannot go beyond the limits Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
imposed by physics and will only operate within The ESC helps reduce the risk of skidding and im-
the system limits. Failure to comply may result prove driving stability under given driving condi-
in accidents, serious injuries, as well as damage tions → .
to the vehicle. In reverse gear, the ESC system may limit speed
● Pay attention to the traffic situation and the to ensure vehicle stability.
vehicle's surroundings.
When the ESC is controlling, the  indicator lamp
● Rear Traffic Alert may not be able to detect will flash on the instrument cluster display.
all objects that are approaching, for example,
pedestrians or quickly approaching objects. In ESC, the ABS, BAS, TCS and the EDS are inte-

grated. The ESC must always be enabled. If suffi-
cient propulsion is no longer reached in some
driving situations, the TCS may be disabled
through the radio system→ page 26. Next, re-en-
able the TCS → page 148.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The ABS prevents the wheels from locking when
the brakes are applied up until the point where
the vehicle is nearly stationary and assists the
driver in steering the vehicle and keeping it under
control. This means that the vehicle is also less
likely to spin, even when the brakes are de-
pressed fully: 

146 Owner's Manual

 – Strongly press and hold the brake pedal. Do wheel, to prevent skidding. This way traction is
not take your foot off the brake pedal or re- improved. This helps the vehicle to keep within
duce the force on the brake pedal! the desired lane.
– Do not “pump” the brake pedal or reduce the
Automatic Post-Collision Braking System
pressure on the brake pedal!
In case of an accident the Automatic Post-Colli-
– Steer the vehicle while the brake pedal is fully
sion Braking System may assist the driver in re-
depressed.
ducing the risk of skidding and the risk of further
– The ABS will switch off when the brake pedal collisions during the accident by way of and au-
is released or if the pressure on the brake ped- tomatically initiated braking.
al is reduced.
The Automatic Post -Collision Braking System
If the ABS is taking corrective action, you will be only works with frontal, side and rear collisions
aware of a pulsing movement in the brake pedal when the airbag control unit detects a given
and some noise. However, ABS will not necessa- threshold for its activation during the accident.
rily guarantee shorter braking distances in all
The braking of the vehicle occurs automatically
conditions. The braking distance could even be
by way of the ESC, as long as the brake's hydraul-
longer when braking on gravel or on fresh snow
ics, the ESC and the electric system are not dam-
covering an icy or slippery surface.
aged and remain operational.
Electronic brake variator (EBV) The following activities override the automatic
In all vehicles, upon activating the brakes, the ve- braking in an accident:
hicle's centre of gravity shifts forward. This gen-
– If the driver steps on the accelerator pedal. No
erates the risk of blocking rear wheels due to low
automatic braking will occur.
traction. The electronic braking distribution limits
the brake force on the rear wheels, ensuring an – When the pressure exerted by stepping on the
adequate brake force distribution between the brake pedal exceeds the pressure on the brake
front and rear axles. The electronic brake variator induced by the system. The vehicle is manually
is part of the ABS functions. braked.

Brake assist (BAS) WARNING

The BAS may assist in reducing the braking dis- The intelligent technology shipped with the
tance. The brake assist system enhances braking braking support systems cannot go beyond the
power when the driver suddenly hits the brake limits imposed by physics and will only operate
pedal in emergency braking situations. within the limitations of the system. Driving
Do not reduce the the pressure on the pedal fast on icy, slippery or wet roads can lead to a
when the BAS is actuating. Upon reducing the loss of control of the vehicle and could cause
pressure on the brake pedal the BAS stops its serious injury to the driver and its passengers.
brake enhancing action. ● Adapt your speed and driving style to ac-
cording to the visibility, weather, road and
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL and XDS) traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety
The EDL brakes the wheel that is skidding and afforded by the ABS, BAS, EDL, TCS and ESC
transfers the traction force to the other traction braking support systems lead you into temp-
wheel. tation of putting safety at risk when driving.
The EDL turns off automatically under extraordi- ● Slippery and wet roads remain rather dan-
nary strong demand to prevent the brake disc gerous, even with the ESC and all the other
from overheating. The EDL is automatically acti- systems.
vated again as soon as the brake has cooled ● Driving at high speeds on wet roads can
down. cause the wheels to lose contact with the
road surface and “aquaplane”. A vehicle can-
The XDS is an extension of the electronic differ-
not be braked, steered or controlled once it
ential lock. The XDS does not react to the skid-
25A.5L1.TCR.20

has lost contact with the road surface. 

ding of the wheels, but to the relief of the inside
front wheel when in fast curve driving. The XDS
exerts pressure on the brake of the curve inside

Parking and manoeuvring 147

● The brake support system cannot prevent an TCS Enabling and disabling
accident if, for example, you are driving too
close to the vehicle in front or are driving too Should not sufficient propulsion be reached, you
fast for the respective driving situation. may disable the TCS (for vehicles with ESC):
● Despite the braking support systems being
– When driving on loose ground or deep snow.
very effective and able to help control the
vehicle in difficult driving situations, please – During “free wheel spinning” while stuck in
always remember that the driving stability of mud or other areas.
the vehicle depends on tyre grip. Then, enable the TCS function again.
● When accelerating on a slippery surface, for
example on ice and snow, press the accelera- Enabling and disabling the TCS
tor carefully. Even with the braking support – According to the version of the vehicle and of
systems the wheels may skid. That may the radio, press the  button on the radio
cause the loss of control over the vehicle. system → page 26.
– Open the menu Vehicle settings on the radio sys-
WARNING tem.
The effectiveness of the ESC can be considera- – Touch the ESC system: function button.
bly reduced when other components and sys- – Turning the TCS off: select the TCS deactivated
tems that affect the dynamics of driving are option.
not correctly serviced or are not functioning
properly. This also applies, but not exclusively, – Turning the TCS on: select the TCS activated op-
to the brakes, tyres and other systems that tion.
have already been named. OR
● Always remember that modifications and – On the radio display, touch the selection sur-
changes to the vehicle may affect the correct face  .
functioning of the ABS, BAS, TCS, EDS and
ESC systems. – Touch the Car function button.
● Alterations to the suspension or the use of – Touch the Stability control (ESC) function button.
factory unauthorized wheel and tyre sets – Turn TCS off: select TCS off .
may have a detrimental effect on the work- – Turn TCS on: select ESC on .
ing of the ABS, BAS, TCS, EDS and ESC reduc-
ing their efficiency. With the TCS disabled, the yellow  warning
lamp will flash on the instrument cluster display. 
● ESC efficiency is also conditioned to the use
of suitable tyres → page 216.

WARNING Troubleshooting
Driving without the brake servo can considera-
 Stop driving! Damaged brake system.
bly increase the braking distance and thus
cause accidents and serious injuries.
 Seek out assistance from a Volkswagen
Dealership immediately → .
● Never allow the vehicle to roll if the engine is
Lit: ABS out of action or malfunctioning.
switched off.  Contact a Volkswagen Dealership. The ve-
● If the brake servo is not functioning or the hicle can be braked without ABS.
vehicle is being towed, the brake pedal will Lit: ESC disabled for system-related rea-
have to be depressed more forcefully, since  sons. Switch the ignition off and on again.
the braking distance will be increased due to As the case may be, drive on for a short
the lack of braking force support. distance at about 15-20 km/h. If  remains
Operating noises may be heard during regu- on, seek out a Volkswagen Dealership. 
lating procedures of the described systems. 

148 Owner's Manual

 Guidelines for the braking support systems
When there is a suspicion that there may be a
Practical equipment
faulty function, read and observe the following Stowage compartment
instructions:
– The ESC and TSC can only function properly
when all four wheels are equipped with the  Introduction
same tyre type and model. Different diameters
among the wheels/tyres may cause an unex-
Only use stowage compartments to stow light or
pected reduction in engine power.
small objects.
– In case of damages in the ABS system, the ESC,
TCS, and EDS will also be disabled. WARNING
– Operating noises may result from adjustments Loose objects may be flung through the vehicle
to the described systems. interior in the event of a sudden driving or
braking manoeuvre. This can cause serious in-
Adverse conditions:
jury and can also lead to loss of control of the
The electronic stability program (ESC) may not vehicle.
identify very steep slopes (over 30%). This cir-
● Do not stow any pets or any hard, heavy or
cumstance may affect the regular operation of
sharp objects in the vehicle's open stowage
the electronic stability program (ESC) and conse-
compartments, on the dash panel, on the
quently the hill assist system (HHC - Hill Hold
shelf behind the rear seats, or in items of
Control), emergency braking assistant (Front As-
clothing and bags in the vehicle interior.
sist) and parking sensor.
● Always keep stowage compartments closed
To restore the aforementioned systems, it is suf- while driving.
ficient that the vehicle is turned off and on again
and that the driver starts the car and drives it at a
WARNING
speed greater than 25 km/h for a few seconds.
Items in the driver footwell can hinder pedal
WARNING operation. This can lead to loss of control of the
vehicle and increase the risk of serious injury.
Driving with faulty brakes may cause severe ac-
cidents and injuries. ● Ensure that all pedals can always be operat-
ed without any hindrance.
● If the braking system warning lamp  lights
up along with the ABS control lamp , the ● Foot mats must always be properly secured
ABS function may be faulty. Because of this in the footwell.
it may be possible that the rear wheels block ● Additional foot mats or other floor coverings
relatively quickly when braking. Locking rear should never be placed over the fitted foot
wheels may cause the driver to loose control mat.
over the vehicle! If possible, reduce speed ● Ensure that no objects can enter the driver
and drive carefully at minimum speed to the footwell while the vehicle is in motion.
nearest Volkswagen Dealership to check the
braking system. Avoid sudden braking and NOTICE
driving manoeuvres while driving.
● Hard objects on the shelf can chafe against the
● If the ABS control lamp  lights up or re-
wires of the heating element in the rear win-
mains lit while driving, the ABS is not func-
dow and cause damages.
tioning properly. The vehicle can only be
braked with regular brakes (without ABS). ● Do not store any temperature-sensitive ob-
The protection provided by the ABS will not jects, food or medicines inside the vehicle. Hot
be available under this scenario. Go to a and cold temperatures could damage them or
Volkswagen Dealership as soon as possible. render them unusable. 

25A.5L1.TCR.20

Practical equipment 149

● Items stored in the vehicle made from trans- Wireless charging function
parent materials, e.g. glasses, magnifying
glasses or transparent suction cups on the  Please refer to and at the start of the
windows, can concentrate the sun's rays and chapter on page 149.
thus cause damage to the vehicle.

The ventilation openings between the rear

window and the luggage compartment cov-
er must not be covered as this would prevent
stale air escaping from the vehicle. 

Stowage area in the lower part of

the centre console
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 149.
Fig. 125 Stowage compartment with pad for wire-
less charging function. The symbol on the lining pad
may appear differently in some vehicles.

Depending on the vehicle version and country,

the wireless charging function may not be availa-
ble.
Depending on the vehicle version, the charging
area → Fig. 125 1 of the wireless charging func-
tion is located in the middle of the centre con-
sole or storage compartment, in the area be-
tween the front seats.
Fig. 124 In the lower part of the centre console:
stowage area. The wireless charging function allows wireless
power transferring by short-distance electro-
On the bottom of the centre console there is an magnetic induction.
open stowage area → Fig. 124. The QI standard allows the wireless charging of
Depending on the vehicle version, there smartphones to support the QI protocol.
may by an USB port  and wireless charg- To find out if a mobile phone device supports the
ing function in the stowage compart- QI standard, check the device specifications in
ment→ page 150.  the manufacturer's site.
Only a Qi-compatible mobile phone without a
protective cap with a dimension (width x length)
of approximately 80 mm x 140 mm (3.15 in x
5.512 in) can be placed evenly on the wireless
charging function floor mat.
The maximum charging power is 10 watts. The
power charge depends on mobile phone configu-
rations and is controlled based on battery level
and temperature.
Before charging a device, remove all foreign ob-
jects with metallic parts, such as coins, keys, and
clips, from the charging area. 

150 Owner's Manual

 To charge a mobile phone that supports the QI ● Always use mobile phones compatible with the
protocol, place it with the screen facing upwards Qi protocol in the charging area.
in the centre of the charging area. The charging
● Charging performance is optimal when the
process begins automatically.
mobile phone is placed on the centre of the
The factory-fitted radio system informs the be- charging area.
ginning of the charging process and, if applica- ● Thick mobile phone protective cases (greater
ble, also informs of any foreign objects with met- than 2 mm) may affect charging performance.
allic components detected in the charging area.
● Some people can hear faint clicks during
Remove these foreign objects to resume charg-
charging. That is perfectly normal and does
ing.
not indicate anything is wrong.
If a mobile phone is not placed correctly in the ● If the vehicle's interior temperature is too high
charging area or is too small, it may not be rec- (e.g. after prolonged exposure to sunlight),
ognized appropriately. In these special cases, the wait until the temperature drops before using
radio system may report a foreign object detec- the wireless charging function.
ted. In this case, simply place the mobile phone
closer to the centre of the charging area to ob- ● The mobile phone heats up more during wire-
tain better results. less charging compared to conventional cor-
ded charging. That is normal.
New technologies may not support the wireless
● Depending on the battery level and tempera-
charging function. The mobile phone manufac-
ture, some mobile phones may stop charging
turer provides more information about compati-
at around 80%. That is also normal. 
bility.

Storage compartment cover

Depending on the vehicle version and country, Front passenger side glove
the storage compartment for the wireless charg-
ing function has a cover for the mobile phone
compartment
screen.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
The cover may avoid distractions coming from chapter on page 149.
the mobile phone, such as incoming messages.
The cover must always be closed while driving
and the mobile phone screen must be completely
covered.

WARNING
● Notifications shown on the mobile phone
screen may distract the driver and increase
the risk of a serious accident.
● Do not place any objects made of metal or
containing metallic components on the
charging area. Metallic objects may become
extremely hot. This can cause skin burns and
even fire hazards, in more extreme cases.
Fig. 126 On the front passenger side: open glove
● Do not place identification cards (e.g. credit
compartment.
cards, bank cards) with magnetic strips or
chips in the charging area. In extremely rare The scope of items in the glove compartment de-
cases, the data stored in the magnetic strip pends on the version of the vehicle, the following
or chip may become useless. describes the maximum scope of the glove com-
partment and its functionalities.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

NOTICE
● Charging is only activated when while the igni- Key for Fig. 126:
tion is on. 1 Vehicle wallet holder. 

Practical equipment 151

Opening and closing the stowage WARNING
compartment
Never ever transport a person or a child on the
To open, pull the handle.
centre armrest.
To close, press the lid fully upwards.
Depending on the vehicle version, there
Vehicle wallet may be a USB port in the rear part of the
The glove compartment is intended to accommo- armrest . 
date the vehicle wallet. The vehicle wallet must
always be kept in this stowage compartment.
Storage compartment in the roof
WARNING
console (glasses compartment)
An open stowage compartment may increase
the risk of severe injuries in case of an accident  Please refer to and at the start of the
or a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre. chapter on page 149.
● Always keep glove box closed while driving. 

Stowage compartment in the front

centre armrest
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 149.

Fig. 128 In the roof console: glasses compartment.

Open: press and release the → Fig. 128 button.

Close: press the lid upwards until it engages.
To ensure proper interior monitoring of the
vehicle, the stowage areas must be closed
when locking the vehicle → page 64. 

Fig. 127 In the front centre armrest: stowage com-

partment.
Other stowage compartments
Depending on the vehicle version, the centre
armrest may not be available.  Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 149.
Open: lift the centre armrest → Fig. 127.
Close: swing the centre armrest down. Other possible compartments:
– In the front and rear door lining.
WARNING
– Stowage bag on the front passenger seat
The centre armrest may restrict the movement backrest.
of the driver's arms and lead to severe acci-
– Surface behind the rear seat for small clothes.
dents and injuries.
– According to the vehicles version, there may
● Always keep the centre armrest stowage
be a card holder in the lower centre console. 
area closed while driving.

152 Owner's Manual

 – Hooks for clothes on the centre door columns. ● Ensure that drink bottles or any other objects
– Bag hook in the luggage compartment do not enter the driver footwell and obstruct
→ page 169. the pedals while the vehicle is in motion.
● Never place heavy cups, food or any other
WARNING heavy items in the cup holder. These heavy
Objects that are not secured or are secured in- objects could be flung through the vehicle
correctly behind the rear seat backrest can interior during an accident and cause serious
cause serious injuries in the event of a sudden injuries.
driving or braking manoeuvre or accident.
● Do not stow any hard, heavy or sharp objects WARNING
in pockets, purses or loose on the surface of Closed drink bottles can explode in the vehicle
the luggage compartment cover. in extreme heat or crack in extremely cold tem-
● Never carry animals on top of the luggage peratures.
compartment cover. ● Never leave closed drink bottles in an ex-
tremely hot or extremely cold vehicle for ex-
WARNING tended periods.
Hanged clothing may compromise driver visi-
bility and, therefore, cause severe accidents NOTICE
and injuries. Do not leave any open drinks in the cup holder
● Ensure that clothes hanged on the clothing while the vehicle is in motion. Drinks that are
hook are not compromising driver visibility. spilled, for example during braking, can damage
the vehicle and the vehicle electric system. 
● Use the vehicle clothing hook only to hang
small clothes. Never leave hard, heavy or
sharp objects in pockets.
Cup holders in the centre console
NOTICE
Each bag hook supports a maximum load of 2.5  Please refer to and at the start of the
kg.  chapter on page 153.

Cup holder

 Introduction

Bottle holders
Bottle holders are located in the open stowage
compartments of the driver and front passenger
doors.

WARNING Fig. 129 In the front centre console: cup holder.

Incorrect use of the cup holders can cause in-
There are two cup holders in the front centre
jury.
console → Fig. 129. 
● Do not place any hot drinks in a cup holder.
In the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre
or accident, hot drinks in a cup holder can be
25A.5L1.TCR.20

spilled and cause scalding.

Practical equipment 153

Cigarette lighter WARNING
Improper use of the socket and electrical devi-
ces can cause fires and severe injuries.
● Never leave children in the vehicle unatten-
ded. The socket and the devices connected
to it can be used when the ignition is switch-
ed on.
● should the electric devices get very hot, turn
them off and disconnect them from the out-
Fig. 130 On the front centre console: cigarette let.
lighter.
NOTICE
The cigarette lighter is not available and may be
purchased at a Volkswagen Dealership. To prevent damage to the electrical system, nev-
er connect electric devices to the 12-volt outlet
– With the ignition switched on, press the ciga- socket which generate electric power to charge
rette lighter knob → Fig. 130 inward. the battery of the vehicle, such as solar panels or
– After a few seconds, the cigarette lighter knob battery charging units.
will automatically move back up. ● Only use accessories that have been approved
– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the to- in accordance with current directives concern-
bacco product on the glowing spiral → . ing electromagnetic compatibility.
– Place the cigarette lighter back into its com- ● To prevent damage from electric current fluc-
partment. tuation, the electric devices must be turned off
prior to switching the ignition on or off. Given
WARNING the version of the vehicle, if the Start-Stop
Improper use of the cigarette lighter could system automatically turns the engine off and
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries. on again, the electric equipment does not
need to be turned off.
● Always use the cigarette lighter properly.
Use it only to light cigarettes. ● Never connect electric devices to the 12 V
power outlet which consume more power than
● Never leave children in the vehicle unatten-
the indicated power. When exceeding the indi-
ded. The cigarette lighter can only be used
cated power, the vehicle's electrical system
when the ignition is switched on.
may be damaged.
The cigarette lighter compartment can also ● Refer to the owner's manuals of the connected
be used as a 12 V socket → page 154, Sock- devices!
et. 
Do not leave the engine running when the
vehicle is stationary.
Using electrical appliances with the engine
Socket switched off and the ignition switched on
will drain the battery.
Unshielded devices may damage the radio
 Introduction system and electronic components of the
vehicle. 
Electrical devices may be connected to the sock-
et in the vehicle.
The electric devices must be in perfect condition
for use. Do not use faulty devices.
The 12-volt socket only works while the ignition
is switched on.

154 Owner's Manual

 12 V Socket in the vehicle
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 154.

Fig. 131 12-V socket with folding cover 1 , 12-V

with removable cover 2 .

Maximum power rating

12 V socket 120 W
The maximum power rating of the sockets may
not be exceeded. The maximum power rating of
each device is stated on its type plate.

12 V socket
The 12-volt socket is located in the front centre
console and is powered only when the ignition is
switched on.
Using electrical appliances with the engine
switched off and the ignition switched on will
drain the battery. Therefore only plug electrical
consumers into the sockets when the engine is
running.
To prevent damage due to voltage fluctuation,
switch off any connected devices before switch-
ing the ignition or engine on or off. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Practical equipment 155

 radio to Bluetooth® and the Wi-Fi network. Fol-
VW Play low the instructions and select Need help? if you
have any doubts.
Welcome to VW Play
WARNING
Depending on the vehicle version, the radio may Initial settings require attention and time and
not be available. must only be performed while the vehicle is
Get ready for an unforgettable radio experience! parked.
The setup wizard will guide you through a few If there is no Wi-Fi connection available,
simple steps to set up your radio. You will set up some of the radio features cannot be con-
a user profile, date and time, and connect your figured during the initial setup. 

Device overview

Fig. 132 Control overview.

The radio is supplied in different versions of the 6 App store: press to open the application in-
device which are distinguished from each other terface.
by its group of functionalities, inscriptions and 7 Volume: press the adjust the volume.
button functions as well as by the lay out of the
8 Settings: press to open the settings.
controls.
9 Virtual switches: controls for assist systems
1 Display: touchscreen. and boot lid opening, if available.
2 Home screen shortcut: back to home screen. 10 Quick access screens: → page 157.
3 Phone: press to open the phone interface. 11 Clock and status icons: press to change user
profile information. If connected, status of
4 Media: press to open the radio and media in-
the Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi connection, phone
terface.
battery status, and mobile network signal in-
5 Power: press to enable the mute feature. formation. 
Hold for 3 seconds to enable the stand-by
feature.

156 Owner's Manual

 Quick access screens Open the main menu
Press the media button  and select  Radio .
To facilitate home screen browsing, the user can Press the arrow .
access menus through shortcuts. There are three
shortcut combinations available: Tune into stations
Select a frequency range FM/AM .
To configure the quick access screen, hold the
quick access screen for three seconds and select To choose a station, press the arrow buttons
the best combination. < / > to browse through available stations. Or
press  and select the desired station in the
Home screen shortcuts can access some func-
frequency range.
tions that require Bluetooth® connection, Wi-Fi
connection and specific apps.  The user can also enter the number of the de-
sired station, press  , enter the station number
and press GO .

Store stations
Radio The currently tuned in radio station is displayed
in the centre of the display.
 Introduction To store a station, turn into the station and press
+ . The stored station will appear in a position on
the bottom of the display. Briefly press the but-
Follow the national rules and legal provisions ton to access the station.
when using the radio.
Up to 6 stations can be stored for each user pro-
Other additional electric devices connected to file.
the vehicle may interfere with the receipt of the
broadcast radio signal and cause noises in the Replace stored radio stations
speakers. To replace stored radio stations, tune into the
station and briefly press the position to store the
Parking lots, tunnels, tall buildings or
new station.
mountains may interfere with unit signal
reception. Scan
Metal-coated stickers or films may hinder To scan stations in the Media menu, press
reception in vehicles with windscreen aer- Radio settings and press Search stations .
ials.  Or press a media button  and then Update .

Delete stored stations

Unit operation To delete stored stations, press the Settings but-
ton  , in the Media menu, select Radio settings
and press Delete presets . 

Media

 Introduction

“Media sources” are referred to as audio sources

Fig. 133 Main menu: Radio.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

that contain audio data in different data storage

units, such as external MP3 Players or audio files. 

VW Play 157
These audio files can only be played by the re- Media File Playing requirements
spective units or through the respective radio source sys-
system's audio input ports/interfaces (USB port tem
or Bluetooth® interface).
– Audio files MP2 (.mp2),
Copyrights APE (.ape), OGG (.ogg),
OGA (.oga), OPUS (.opus),
Audio and video files stored in data media may MP3 (.mp3), WMA
be subject to applicable national and internation- (.wma), WAV (.wav), FLAC
al copyright and data protection laws. Legal pro- FAT16, (.flac), and AAC (.aac).
visions must be followed. FAT32, – Video files WMV
Data storage
Volkswagen takes no responsibility for NTFS, (.wmv), MKV (.mkv), MOV
unit speci-
damaged or lost files.  exFAT, (.mov), AVI (.avi) and MP4
fied as per
Ext3 (.mp4).
USB 2.0
and – At most 2.000 ele-
Ext4 ments per folder level.
File and database requirements – Max. 20,000 audio and
video files per data stor-
Supported listed file formats are simply referred age unit.
to as “audio and video files”. Max. size of a FAT32 data
system file: 4GB.
 Audio file repro- – External Media Player
duction via Blue- must support Bluetooth®
tooth®a). A2DP profile.
External audio – External data storage
source playback via unit in the USB .
the USB port.
a) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth ® SIG, Inc.

Volkswagen may not be held liable for dam-

aged or lost files in data media. 

Media operation

Fig. 134 Main menu: Media.

Open the main menu

Press the media button  and select the desired
media source. Press the arrow .
The following media sources are available: 

158 Owner's Manual

 –  USB : external data storage unit in the USB
port.
–  Phone : Bluetooth® audio.

Basic functions
– To browse through media tracks, press the < /
> buttons.
– To stop playing media, press  .
– To resume playing, press  .
– Media can be sorted by artist, album, songs,
genres and video files. Fig. 136 Phone function.

Random mode  Connection via Bluetooth®

Random audio playback. – To connect the Bluetooth®, press the settings
button  and touch Connect .
Repeat mode – Press  Devices and then select "Add device".
– To repeat all tracks, select  . – The radio unit will automatically search for de-
– To repeat only the current track, select  . vices available (turn on Bluetooth® visibility in
on your device). For more information, refer to
NOTICE the audio device's instruction manual.
The screen is blocked for video playback and – To establish a connection, select the name of
games while driving.  the device to connect. Compare the code
shown on the radio display and the code
shown on the mobile phone. If the code
matches, confirm the code to connect.
– Depending on the radio version, 2 devices can
Connect be connected simultaneously. To define the
function on the device, select the phone but-
ton  to use phone functions and select the
Bluetooth®
media button  to use media functions
→ Fig. 135.

Bluetooth® audio function

To enable Bluetooth® audio mode, the audio but-
ton  must be active after connecting. In this
mode, audio files from audio sources connected
via Bluetooth® (e.g. mobile phone) will be played
on the vehicle's loudspeakers.
After connecting to a Bluetooth® audio source,
follow the functions in the Media menu 
→ page 158.
Fig. 135 Connect via Bluetooh.
Phone function 
Phone menu displays depend on the functions
available on the used mobile phone model. There
may be differences.
To enable Bluetooth® phone mode, the phone
button  must be active after connecting. In this
25A.5L1.TCR.20

mode, the user can access phone contacts, make

and receive calls using the vehicle's loudspeak-
ers. 

VW Play 159
Receiving phone calls: – Select the name of the desired Wi-Fi network.
– Press  to receive a phone call. In case of a secure Wi-Fi network, enter the
password and press .
Making phone calls:
– After connecting, the icon  will appear on
– In the phone function , enter the number to the top left corner.
call and press .
– Or open the contact list by pressing the con- Forget network
tacts button . Select the contact to call and Once the radio connects to a Wi-Fi network, it
press . will automatically connect to the same network
– To search through the contact list, press the whenever it is available.
contacts button  and enter the desired name To avoid automatic connection, touch
on the top bar Search contacts. Forget network in the connected network, in order
During a phone call: to end the connection. 
– Press  to mute the microphone during a
phone call. Press  again to unmute the mi-
crophone.
– Press  to mute the loudspeakers App store
– Press  to place an active call on hold. The
user can make or answer other calls with a call
on hold.
 Introduction
– Press  to resume the call on hold.
– Press  to open the keypad. The App store may not be available in all coun-
tries.
– To end a call on hold, press the hang up button
. The app store is the right tool to search and
download the perfect applications for your daily
Up to 1,000 contacts can be synchronized routine.
via Bluetooth® connection. 
Some applications are factory-installed.
Before using applications, read the respective use
terms and privacy policies. 
Wi-Fi

App store

Fig. 137 Connect Wi-Fi.

Connect to Wi-Fi network

– To connect Wi-Fi, press the settings button  Fig. 138 App-store
and touch Connect .
– Slide the selector to enable the Wi-Fi connec- To download applications on the App store, the
tion; the radio will automatically scan all avail- user must be connected to a Wi-Fi network and
able networks. logged with the Volkswagen ID. 

160 Owner's Manual

 To sign up for a Volkswagen ID, access the VWID Apple CarPlay™
login page or the My Volkswagen application and
fill out all registration information required.
To log in, press the App-store  menu or drag the Apple CarPlay™ Menu
screen to the left twice to open the quick access
screen, press Start session or read the code with
the phone camera.
After logging in, the information is loaded on the
home page.

Download applications
Search for the application you want to download.
Select the application and press Download .
The download will begin and the status will be
shown on the top corner of the page. Press
Cancel before the download is completed to can- Fig. 139 Apple CarPlay™ Menu.
cel.
Establish connection
After the download ends, press Open to open the
To use Apple CarPlay™ the mobile phone must
application and its features. Installed applications
support Apple CarPlay™.
are available on the left-hand side of the screen.
Depending on the mobile phone used, it is possi-
Basic functions ble to connect via Bluetooth® or via USB cable,
– Press My Apps to access installed apps. depending on the version of the mobile phone.
– Press Settings to access App-store settings. In When a mobile phone is connected for the first
this section, the user can check the App-store time follow the instructions on the radio display
software version and the use terms and condi- and on the display of the mobile phone.
tions. Confirm the use of Apple CarPlay™ on the mobile
– To update installed apps, press Update to check phone and the radio display.
for available updates.
– To delete installed apps, select the Settings  End connection
menu, select the app to delete in the Apps item – For USB cable connections: remove USB cable
and press Uninstall. – For Bluetooth® or wireless connections: follow
the instructions shown on the mobile phone.
NOTICE – Reconnecting to the Wi-Fi network also ends
Videos and other functions that may distract the the Apple CarPlay™ connection → page 160.
driver are blocked while the vehicle is in motion. 
Specificities
During an active Apple CarPlay™ connection, the
following features are enabled:
– If connected with a USB cable, Bluetooth con-
nections between mobile devices and the radio
are not possible.
– Phone functions are possible through Apple
CarPlay™ and through the radio's phone func-
tion.
– If connected via wireless Apple CarPlay™, Wi-
Fi connection is unavailable.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

– Apple CarPlay™ functions may be limited while

driving. 

VW Play 161
– An active Apple CarPlay™ device cannot be Depending on the mobile phone used, an ade-
used as a media device on the Media menu. quate application must be installed to use
– Navigation routes are not shown on the instru- Android Auto™ on the device.
ment cluster display. When a mobile phone is connected for the first
time follow the instructions on the radio display
NOTICE and on the display of the mobile phone.
Apple CarPlay™ is a software platform from Ap- Press the radio button  to access Android
ple that allows you to access certain applications Auto™ functions.
and features on your mobile phone through your
car's Infotainment System touchscreen or mobile To access radio controls, press the home screen
phone's voice assistants. Once connected, Apple shortcut  .
CarPlay™ mirrors a simplified version of the mo-
End connection
bile phone interface optimized for driving. All the
generated image and displayed functionalities – Remove USB cable or turn off Wi-Fi connec-
are controlled by the mobile phone itself in this tion.
situation. Therefore, any situation that influences – To return to the home screen, press  .
the performance of the mobile phone will direct-
ly affect the performance on the Infotainment Specificities
screen, causing the impression that the Infotain- During an active Android Auto™ connection, the
ment is faulty, when in fact the functions con- following features are enabled:
trolled by the vehicle are operating normally.
– An active Android Auto™ device may be simul-
For more information, refer to the mobile taneously connected to the radio via Blue-
device's owner's manual.  tooth.
– Bluetooth connections between mobile devi-
ces and the radio are not possible.
– Telephone functions are possible via Android
Android Auto™ Auto™. When the Android Auto™ device is si-
multaneously connected via Bluetooth to the
device, the phone function can also be used.
Android Auto™ Menu – Simultaneous phone calls via Android Auto™
and via the radio are not possible.
– An active Android Auto™ device cannot be
used as a media device on the Media menu.
– Navigation routes are not shown on the instru-
ment cluster display.

NOTICE
Android Auto™ is a software platform from Goo-
gle that allows you to access certain applications
and features on your mobile phone through your
car's Infotainment System touchscreen or mobile
Fig. 140 Android Auto™ Menu phone's voice assistants. Once connected,
Android Auto™ mirrors a simplified version of the
Connect mobile phone interface optimized for driving. All
To use Android Auto™ the mobile phone must the generated image and displayed functionali-
support Android Auto™. ties are controlled by the mobile phone itself in
Depending on the mobile phone used, it is possi- this situation. Therefore, any situation that influ-
ble to connect to the radio with a USB cable or ences the performance of the mobile phone will
with a wireless connection via Wi-Fi. directly affect the performance on the Infotain-
ment screen, causing the impression that the In-
fotainment is faulty, when in fact the functions
controlled by the vehicle are operating normally. 

162 Owner's Manual

 For more information, refer to the mobile Function button: effect
device's owner's manual.  Phone reminder : if a mobile phone is
connected via Bluetooth®, the message
“Don't forget your phone” is shown after
switching off the ignition.
Settings Audio : volume settings.
Maximum call volume : to set the maximum
initial volume.
 Introduction Speed-dependent volume : set volume ad-
justments based on the vehicle's speed.
The range of possible settings depends on the Navigation warning : sets the volume of the
country, unit, and the vehicle's version.  navigation system's directions.
Entertainment dimmer (parking) : set the au-
dio playback volume while the parking
aid sender is activated.
System settings
Ringtone volume : set the ringtone vol-
ume.
Media sound : establish media volume.
Phone sound : set phone volume.
BT audio volume : set the Bluetooth® audio
volume.
Tone : tone settings.
Equalizer : sound equalization settings.
Balance and Fader : sound distribution set-
tings. The grid shows the current point
of balance of the sound inside the vehi-
Fig. 141 Settings menu. cle. To change sound distribution, touch
the desired position in the vehicle inte-
Open the Settings menu rior display or use the arrow buttons to
– Press  . sequentially change settings. To centre
– Select the function for the area for which the sound distribution in the vehicle interior
settings are to be set. Changes are automati- display, touch the function surface be-
cally applied after closing a menu. tween the arrows.
Touchscreen sound  : enable or disable
Function button: effect
confirmation sound when touching a
System: system settings. function button enabled.
Bluetooth : Bluetooth® settings. Display : display settings.
Visibility : make the Bluetooth® device Turn display off (in 10 s)  : if the function is
visible or hidden. enabled and the device remains idle, the
Bluetooth name : show or change the de- display is automatically shut down after
vice name. 10 seconds. The display turns back on
Device manager : shows paired devices. by touching the screen.
Disconnect and connect individual Blue- Brightness : to display brightness set-
tooth® devices and Bluetooth® profiles. tings.
Phone : phone settings. Skins : depending on the vehicle version
Bluetooth : Bluetooth® settings. and mode, radio colour combinations
Ringtone : ringtone settings.
can be changed. In this case, open the
25A.5L1.TCR.20

App store and download new skins. 

Audio : volume and tone settings.
Sort contacts : sort contacts by first and
last name.

VW Play 163
Function button: effect Function button: effect
Touchscreen sound : enable confirmation Units : define measurement units.
sound when touching a button on the Parking and manoeuvring : configure the parking
screen. functions.
Automatic Valet mode  : when the door is Vehicle valet status : enable and disable valet
opened and whenever the key is far mode.
from the vehicle, Valet mode is auto- Factory setting : reset vehicle functions to fac-
matically enabled → page 165. tory settings.
Safe removal : remove the desired USB data
Media : to make media adjustments.
storage unit safely from the system. The re-
Audio : volume settings.
spective function button is disabled after
the data storage unit is successfully re- Bluetooth : Bluetooth® settings.
moved. Radio settings : radio station settings.
WI-FI : Wi-Fi network settings. Scan stations : scan stations available in
enable and disable the Wi-Fi network. the current frequency range.
Manage stored networks : settings of stored Arrow buttons : adjust arrow buttons 
Wi-Fi connections. and  to switch to the next station in
Generate security key : generate a new the frequency range or the next stored
Apple CarPlay™ wireless connection key. station.
Delete presets : delete all stored stations.
Find hotspot : search new network con-
nections. Safe removal : remove the desired USB data

Units : define measurement units. storage unit safely from the system. The re-
spective function button is disabled after
Language selection : select the desired lan-
the data storage unit is successfully re-
guage. moved.
Date and time : date and time settings.
Apps : app settings.
System data : display of system data (unit
Sort by : sort apps alphabetically or by instal-
number, hardware/software versions). lation date.
Welcome video : watch the welcome video
App management : manage installed apps.
again. Apps can also be deleted in this section.
Reset system : reset all or specific settings to
WI-FI : Wi-Fi network settings.
factory-settings.
Notifications : vehicle status data.
Copyright : copyright information.
Car : vehicle function settings. Settings menu shortcuts 
Stability control (ESC) : activate and deactivate There are shortcuts for some settings on the
stability control. main page of the Settings menu 
Light settings : configure the functions of the
– Screen OFF: place screen in stand-by.
lights.
– Audio: open audio settings.
Date and time : date and time settings.
– Connect: connection settings.
Mirrors and wipers : make settings for mirrors
and wipers. – Profile: edit profile settings → page 165.
Dashboard : carry out configurations of the – Lights: edit vehicle light settings.
functions of the dashboard. – Valet mode: enable valet mode → page 165.
Service settings : access information about the – Brightness: screen brightness settings.
inspection service.
Tires : setting the tire indicators. Reset system
Assistance systems : activate and deactivate To reset the system, press Settings  and in the
the assistance systems. System menu, press Reset system.
Opening and closing : configure the door open- It is possible to reset all settings or each setting
ing and closing functions. individually. 

164 Owner's Manual

 Search gine on → Fig. 142. In keyless vehicles, the radio
When in doubt, use the search bar in the Settings is locked immediately as the key moves away
menu. from the vehicle with the engine on. Enable this
feature for greater convenience and security.
The search will return the most relevant topics
related to the keywords entered. If you forget the PIN code, all factory settings
and data must be reset. To reset, press Reset all da-
WARNING ta and settings on the display.
Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is PIN code configuration
distracted.
To configure the PIN code, open the Settings menu
● Never proceed with settings while driving. and select Valet Mode. Edit the PIN code on the Set-
tings menu and then access the Profile and select
WARNING Edit PIN code.
Never reset the system while driving. The PIN code must contain 4 digits.
To make the best of the radio's features and Vehicle valet status
optimal operation it is important that the
During the period when the car’s Valet Mode is
date and time be correctly set. 
enabled, the Valet Status function will provide a
report of the events that took place with the ve-
hicle.
Valet mode On the Settings menu, open the Car menu and se-
lect  Vehicle valet status to enable this feature.
While Valet Mode is enabled, the Valet status
function will be available on the radio screen, al-
lowing the driver to monitor the following infor-
mation → Fig. 142:
– Maximum speed reached.
– Distance travelled.
– Vehicle doors open, except driver door.
– If the rear lid was opened.
– If the bonnet was opened.
Fig. 142 Automatic valet mode activation.
When Valet Mode is disabled, this information is
deleted. 

User profile
Depending on the radio version, up to 03 user
profiles can be configured. The user profile stores
memorized radio stations, driving mode (if avail-
able in the vehicle), language and applications
installed via the VW Play Apps store.
Fig. 143 Valet mode lock screen.
Add new user profile
The valet mode locks the radio and can be activa- Press the avatar picture on the top right corner
ted automatically or manually. of the screen or open the Settings menu and select
Activate valet mode through the Settings menu: Profile. Select Create new profile and enter the de-
25A.5L1.TCR.20

press Screen and select Automatic valet mode . sired name and avatar. 
When activated, the radio will be locked 10 sec-
onds after opening the driver door with the en-

VW Play 165
Edit avatar image and name
Press the avatar picture on the top right corner
Transporting
of the screen or open the Settings menu and select
Profile. Next, select Edit name and avatar . Stowing items of luggage
Change user profile
Heavy objects must always be stowed securely in
The vehicle must be stopped to change the user the luggage compartment and you must ensure
profile. that the rear seat backrests are securely engaged
Press the avatar picture on the top right corner in the upright position. Always use suitable se-
of the screen or open the Settings menu, select curing straps with the fastening rings to secure
Profile and select the desired profile. If a PIN code heavy objects. Never overload the vehicle. Both
is configured, the PIN code must be entered to the payload and the distribution of the load in
change the profile. the vehicle affect driving response and braking
distance → .
Edit PIN code
Open the Settings menu, press Profile, select Stow all items of luggage in the vehicle
Edit PIN code and enter the 4 digit code. securely

– Always distribute any loads in the vehicle as
evenly as possible.
– Place heavy objects as far forward in the lug-
gage compartment as possible. Position the
rear seat backrests securely in the upright po-
sition.
– Secure luggage in the luggage compartment
to the fastening rings with suitable straps.
– Adjust tyre pressure according to the vehicle
load. Refer to the tyre pressure sticker
→ page 219.
– In vehicles with tyre pressure control system,
set the new load conditions when necessary
→ page 214.

WARNING
Objects that are not secured, or are secured in-
correctly, can cause serious injuries in the event
of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or
accident. This applies particularly if objects are
struck by the airbag when activated and then
flung through the vehicle interior. Please apply
the following rules to reduce the risk of acci-
dents:
● Always stow all objects in the vehicle secure-
ly. Always stow luggage and heavy objects in
the luggage compartment.
● Always use suitable straps to prevent lug-
gage from entering the deployment zones of
the side airbag or the front airbag in the
event of a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvre or an accident. 

166 Owner's Manual

 ● Objects should be stowed in the vehicle inte- WARNING
rior in such a way that they can never enter
When the vehicle is not in use, always lock the
the airbag deployment zones while the
doors and boot lid to reduce the risk of severe
vehicle is in motion.
or fatal injuries.
● Always keep stowage compartments closed
● Never leave children unattended in the vehi-
while driving.
cle, especially when the boot lid is open.
● Stowed objects must never cause passengers Children could climb into the luggage com-
to assume an incorrect sitting position. partment and shut the boot lid. In these sit-
● Any seat blocked by stowed objects must not uations, children would not be able to leave
be used by any passengers. the luggage compartment by themselves.
This could lead to severe or fatal injuries.
WARNING ● Never let children play in or around the vehi-
The vehicle handling and braking effect may al- cle.
ter significantly if large or heavy objects are be- ● Never travel in the luggage compartment.
ing transported.
● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit WARNING
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- Objects that are not secured, or are secured in-
tions. correctly, can cause serious injuries in the event
● Accelerate carefully and gently. of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or
● Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeu- accident. This applies particularly if objects are
vres. struck by the airbag when activated and then
flung through the vehicle interior. Please apply
● Brake earlier than in normal driving.
the following rules to reduce the risk of acci-
dents:
NOTICE
● Remove any hard, heavy or sharp objects
Hard objects on the shelf can chafe against the from items of clothing and bags inside the
wires of the heating element in the rear window vehicle and stow them securely.
and cause damages.

Observe any information concerning towing WARNING

loading → page 172, Towing a trailer.  Transporting heavy objects changes the vehi-
cle's handling and increases the braking dis-
tance. Heavy loads that are not properly stow-
ed or secured in the vehicle can lead to a loss of
vehicle control and can cause serious injuries.
Luggage compartment
● Transporting heavy objects changes the ve-
hicle's handling and the centre of gravity.
 Introduction ● Always secure heavy objects as far back into
the luggage compartment as possible.

Heavy objects must always be stowed securely in NOTICE

the luggage compartment and you must ensure
that the rear seat backrests are securely engaged Hard objects could chafe against the wires of the
in the upright position. Always use suitable se- heating element in the rear window and cause
curing straps. Never overload the vehicle. Both damage.
the payload and the distribution of the load in
The ventilation openings between the rear
the vehicle affect driving response and braking
window and the luggage compartment cov-
distance → .
er must not be covered as this would prevent
stale air escaping from the vehicle. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Transporting 167
Luggage compartment cover ● Never carry animals on top of the luggage
compartment cover.
 Please refer to and at the start of the ● Never drive with the luggage compartment
chapter on page 167. cover raised. Double down or remove the
cover prior driving.

NOTICE
To prevent damages to the luggage compart-
ment cover:
● Always make sure the luggage compartment
cover is firmly secured to the side supports.
● Only load the luggage compartment upward
so that the luggage compartment cover is not
pressed against the luggage when the rear lid
is closed. 

Fig. 144 In the luggage compartment: remove and Variable luggage compartment
install the luggage compartment cover.
floor
When the rear lid is opened and closed, the cover
is automatically raised or lowered when the re-
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 167.
tention cords are attached.
The luggage compartment cover can be used to
stow light garments. Ensure rear visibility is not
impaired

Removing the luggage compartment cover

– Unfasten the retaining cords from the rear lid
support → Fig. 144 (upper arrows).
– Remove the luggage compartment cover from
behind out of the side supports → Fig. 144
(lower arrows).

Install the luggage compartment cover Fig. 145 In the luggage compartment: raise the
luggage compartment floor. 
– Push the luggage compartment cover forward,
engaging the side supports → Fig. 144 (lower
arrows).
– Fit the retaining cords on the rear lid
→ Fig. 144 (upper arrows).

WARNING
Loose objects or that are not correctly secured,
as well as animals on top of the luggage com-
partment cover can cause serious injuries in the
event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre
or accident.
● Do not stow any hard, heavy or sharp objects
in pockets, purses or loose on the surface of
the luggage compartment cover.

168 Owner's Manual

 NOTICE
When closing, always slowly move the luggage
compartment floor downwards. Otherwise, the
luggage compartment floor or lining could be
damaged. 

Bag hooks
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 167.

Fig. 146 In the luggage compartment: adjust the

luggage compartment floor height.

Depending on the vehicle version, the variable

luggage compartment floor may not be availa-
ble.
Fig. 147 On the luggage compartment: bag hooks.
Open and close the luggage compartment
variable floor Bag hooks may be available in the upper left and
To open, lift by the handle → Fig. 145 in the di- right-hand sides of the luggage compartment
rection indicated by the arrow and fold the lug- → Fig. 147.
gage compartment floor fully upwards.
To close, fold the luggage compartment floor WARNING
downwards. Never use the bag hooks for securing purposes.
The bag hook could break off during a sudden
Adjusting the variable luggage compartment braking manoeuvre or accident.
floor
– Lift the luggage compartment floor cover and NOTICE
pull it back removing it from the luggage com-
Each bag hook supports a maximum load of 2.5
partment side guides → Fig. 146 .
kg. 
– Insert the luggage compartment floor into the
side guides of the desired height and pull for-
ward up to the striker.

Unfold the luggage compartment downwards Roof carrier

– Lift the luggage compartment floor and push
down underneath the guide → Fig. 146  (ar-
rows).  Introduction
– Place the luggage compartment floor over the
floor lining. The vehicle is provided with two vertical ribs, and
– Fold the rear seat back rests forward if neces- cross struts may be acquired at Volkswagen
sary → page 73. Dealerships.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Only additional roof rack supports cleared by

Volkswagen may be used. 

Transporting 169
 WARNING Conventional roof carriers must not be installed
in vertical ribs. We recommend that only roof
When transporting heavy or large objects in the rack cross beams homologated by Volkswagen
roof carrier, vehicle driving conditions are al- are used.
tered due to the shift of the gravity centre and
increased wind resistance surface. WARNING
● Always secure loads properly using suitable Improperly fastening base supports and roof
and undamaged securing straps or tension carriers, as well as its incorrect use, may cause
belts. the entire system to detach from the roof, re-
● Heavy, large, long or flat loads negatively af- sulting in injuries and accidents.
fect the vehicle's aerodynamics, centre of ● If additional cross members homologated by
gravity and driving behaviour. Volkswagen are not used or are improperly
● Avoid abrupt and sudden braking and driving fixed, the transported load or the roof rack
manoeuvres. itself may fall off the vehicle roof.
● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit ● Always follow the instructions provided in
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- the owner's manual.
tions. ● Only use roof carriers when base supports
are properly fastened and the roof carrier
NOTICE presents proper use conditions.
● Remove the roof carrier before submitting the ● Correctly mount the roof rack cross mem-
vehicle into an auto-wash system. bers.
● The vehicle level is altered after assembling a ● Check fastening points before driving and re-
roof carrier and stowing loads. Compare the tighten them after short drives if necessary.
vehicle level with available passage heights, In case of long hauls, check the bolt and fas-
for example, in road bridges and garage doors. tening spots upon each stop.
● The roof aerial, sunroof operating range, and ● Always assemble special roof carriers for bi-
boot lid cannot be affected by the roof carrier cycles, skiing equipment, surf boards, etc.
system or loads secured in it. correctly.
● Ensure that the boot lid does not come into ● Do not modify or repair roof carriers and
contact with roof carrier loads upon opening. base supports.
Remove roof rack cross beams when not in
use, preventing unnecessary fuel consump-
NOTICE
tion due to greater aerodynamic resistance.  Always observe roof carrier cross beam manufac-
turer's installation instructions.
● Keep roof carrier manufacturer's installation
and use instructions along with the vehicle's
Using the roof rack documents.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 170. NOTICE
Damages caused by improper roof carrier fasten-
The longitudinal supports are but the base for a ing are not covered by the warranty.
complete load transport system and are supplied ● The vehicle level is altered after assembling a
with the vehicle. For luggage transport, addition- roof carrier and stowing loads. Compare the
al cross beams are necessary for safety reasons. vehicle level with available passage heights,
For safety reasons, exclusive additional supports for example, in road bridges and garage doors.
are required when transporting luggage, bicycles,
surf boards, skiing equipment, and boats. Addi- Read and follow installation instructions
tional accessories can be acquired at Volkswagen provided along with the roof carrier, always
Dealerships. keeping such instructions in the vehicle. 

170 Owner's Manual

 It is paramount to know applicable laws re- WARNING
garding the sizes of volumes transported
over vehicle roofs.  Loose or incorrectly fastened loads may fall
from the roof carrier and cause accidents and
injuries.
● Always secure loads properly using suitable
Loading the roof carrier and undamaged securing straps or tension
belts.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 170. ● Properly fasten loads.

Sometimes the roof rack beams remain

The load may be safely fastened when a roof rack mounted even if they're not longer neces-
system homologated by Volkswagen is used and sary. Due to the greater aerodynamic resistance,
is properly mounted → . the vehicle will unnecessarily consume more fuel.
Therefore remove the roof rack beams when no
Maximum roof weight permitted
longer in use.
The maximum roof weight permitted is 50 kg.
The roof load encompasses the weight of the The load transported on the roof must be
roof carrier and the load to be transported over properly fastened. Transporting loads on
the roof → . the roof changes the vehicle's behaviour. 
Always mind the weight of the roof carrier and
load to be transported. Never exceed the maxi-
mum roof load permitted. Usage guidelines
When using roof carriers with lower load capaci-
ties, the maximum roof load permitted may not  Please refer to and at the start of the
be used. In this case, the roof carrier may only be chapter on page 170.
loaded until the weight limit indicated in its in-
stallation instructions. When should the roof rack cross members be
removed:
Distributing load – When they're no longer necessary, thus spar-
Evenly distribute the load between the members ing fuel, the wind noise is reduced and theft of
and along their full length → . the roof rack is avoided.
– When the vehicle passes through an auto-
Controlling fastening points wash system.
After the roof rack members were fastened, – When the vehicle level exceeds the maximum
check them after a short drive and subsequently passage height in a garage, for example.
at regular intervals.
NOTICE
WARNING
● The vehicle’s height changes after installing a
Accidents and severe injuries can occur if the roof carrier and loading the carrier with cargo.
maximum permitted roof weight is exceeded. Compare the vehicle level with available pas-
● Never exceed the maximum roof weight per- sage heights, for example, in road bridges and
mitted, maximum axle weight permitted and garage doors.
the total vehicle weight permitted. ● The roof aerial, glass roof and rear lid must not
● Never exceed the roof carrier load capacity, be compromised by the roof carrier and cargo.
even if under the maximum roof load capaci-
ty. In this case load the roof rack beams only Vehicles equipped with roof carriers con-
to the weight limit indicated by the manu- sume more fuel due to the greater wind re-
facturer's instructions. sistance. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

● Fasten heavy objects as far ahead as possible

and uniformly distribute the load.

Transporting 171
Towing a trailer – Trailers with a high centre of gravity are
more likely to tip over than trailers with a
low centre of gravity.
 Introduction – Avoid abrupt and sudden braking and driv-
ing manoeuvres.
– Take special care when overtaking.
Observe any country-specific regulations when
– Reduce your speed immediately if the
towing a trailer and using a towing bracket.
trailer shows even the slightest sign of
Your car is intended mainly for transporting pas- snaking.
sengers and luggage. However, it can also be – When towing a trailer do not drive faster
used to tow a trailer or caravan, provided that it than 80 km/h (50 mph). This also applies
is fitted with the appropriate technical equip- to countries where higher speeds are per-
ment. This additional maximum trailer weight mitted Always obey speed limits. In some
will affect the durability, fuel consumption and areas speed limits for vehicles towing
performance of the vehicle and, in certain cir- trailers are lower than for vehicles without
cumstances, can shorten the service intervals. trailers.
Driving with a trailer not only places an extra – Never try to “stop” a trailer from snaking
load on the vehicle, but also requires increased by increasing your speed.
concentration on the part of the driver.
WARNING
Vehicles with Start-Stop system
With a retrofitted towing bracket, the Start-
Before towing a trailer, disable the Start-Stop Stop system must always be manually turned
system manually or by button  on the upper off when towing a trailer. Otherwise, this may
section of the centre console and keep the sys- cause damages to the brake system and result
tem disabled while towing a trailer → . in severe accidents and injuries.
DANGER In new vehicles, do not tow a trailer during
It is dangerous to transport people in a trailer the first 1,000 km → page 172. 
and it may also be illegal.

WARNING Technical requirements

Improper use of the towing bracket can cause
injury and accidents.  Please refer to and at the start of the
● Only use the towing bracket if it is fitted chapter on page 172.
properly and is not damaged.
Only use a towing bracket which is approved for
● Do not perform any modifications or repairs
the gross weight of the trailer you wish to tow.
to the towing bracket.
The towing bracket must be suitable for your ve-
hicle and trailer and must be securely bolted to
WARNING the vehicle's chassis. Always check and follow
Towing a trailer and transporting heavy or bul- the data provided by the towing bracket manu-
ky items can change the way the vehicle's han- facturer.
dling and cause accidents.
● Therefore, observing the instructions below Towing brackets fitted to the rear bumper
is essential to ensure the safety of the driver, Never fit a towing bracket to the rear bumper or
passengers, and other road users. to its fastening. A towing bracket must not pre-
– Always secure loads properly using suita- vent the rear bumper from functioning correctly.
ble and undamaged securing straps. Do not carry out any alterations to the exhaust or
brake systems. Check regularly to see if the tow-
– Adapt your speed and driving style to suit
ing bracket is fitted securely. 
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.

172 Owner's Manual

 Engine cooling system Volkswagen recommends additional serv-
There is an increased load on the engine and the ices between the normal inspection inter-
cooling system when towing a trailer. The cool- vals if the vehicle is used frequently for towing a
ing system must contain sufficient coolant and trailer. 
be able to cope with the extra load added by the
trailer.

Trailer brake Engaging and connecting the trailer

If the trailer is equipped with its own brake sys-  Please refer to and at the start of the
tem, observe any legal requirements. The trailer's chapter on page 172.
brake system must never be connected to the ve-
hicle brake system.
Emergency breakaway cable
Emergency breakaway cable Always fasten the emergency breakaway cable
Always use the emergency breakaway cable be- properly in the towing vehicle. In this case, leave
tween your vehicle and the trailer → page 173. some slack for the breakaway cable to allow
curves. However, the breakaway cable must not
Rear trailer lights drag on the ground while driving.
The rear lights on the trailer must meet legal re- Rear trailer lights
quirements → page 173.
Ensure that the rear trailer lights are functioning
Never connect the trailer lights directly to the properly and are in compliance with legal re-
electrical system of your vehicle. If you are un- quirements.
certain whether the trailer has been connected
correctly, please contact a qualified workshop. WARNING
Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen
Unsuitable or incorrectly connected electrical
Dealership for this purpose.
conductors may power the trailer, cause oper-
Exterior mirrors ating faults in the vehicle's electronics and
cause severe injuries.
you are unable to see the traffic behind the trail-
er in the vehicle's standard exterior mirrors, addi- ● All activities regarding the electrical system
tional exterior mirrors should be fitted in accord- can only be conducted by a Volkswagen
ance with any country-specific regulations. Be- Dealership or qualified workshop.
fore setting off, adjust the mirrors so that you ● Never connect the trailer's electrical system
have a sufficient view of the rear. directly to the electrical connections of the
tail lights or to other sources of electricity.
WARNING
If the towing bracket is unsuitable or incorrect- NOTICE
ly fitted, the trailer can become detached from A trailer parked over the support wheel or over
the vehicle and cause severe injuries. the trailer supports must not be connected to the
vehicle. For example, the vehicle is lifted or low-
NOTICE ered due to load changes or tyre damages. In this
● The vehicle electronics may be damaged if the case, major forces act over the trailer bracket and
trailer lights are not connected properly. over the trailer, which may damage the vehicle
and the trailer.
● The vehicle electronics may be damaged if the
trailer uses too much electricity. If the engine is not running and electrical
● Never connect the trailer's electrical system equipment is switched on in the trailer via
directly to the electrical connections of the tail the trailer socket, the vehicle battery will dis-
lights or to other sources of electricity. Use charge. 
only suitable connectors to supply power to
25A.5L1.TCR.20

the trailer.

Transporting 173
Loading the trailer WARNING
Accidents and serious injuries can occur if you
 Please refer to and at the start of the exceed the vehicle's maximum permitted gross
chapter on page 172. axle weight rating, drawbar load, gross vehicle
weight rating or gross combination weight rat-
Maximum trailer weight and drawbar load ing.
The maximum trailer weight is the weight that ● Never exceed the specified values.
the vehicle can pull → . The drawbar load is the
weight that the towing bracket exerts on the ball ● Never let the actual weights at the front and
coupling vertically from above → page 172. rear axles exceed the gross axle weight rat-
ings. Never exceed the permissible gross ve-
The figures for maximum trailer weight and draw hicle weight for the vehicle with weight at
bar weights that are given on the data plate of the front and rear of the vehicle.
the towing bracket are for certification purposes
only. The correct values for your specific model, WARNING
which may be lower than these figures, are provi-
ded in the vehicle registration documents. All da- Moving loads can severely impair the vehicle's
ta in the official vehicle documents take prece- stability and driving safety, which can cause ac-
dence over this data. cidents and severe injuries.
● Always load trailers correctly.
In the interest of road safety, Volkswagen recom-
mends that you always transport the maximum ● Always secure loads properly using suitable
drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the and undamaged securing straps. 
road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.
The drawbar load increases the weight on the
rear axle and reduces the maximum load level as Towing a trailer
a result.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
Gross combination weight chapter on page 172.
The gross combination weight is comprised of
actual loaded vehicle and loaded trailer weights. Headlight adjustment
Towing a trailer can raise the front end of the ve-
Loading the trailer
hicle enough for the dipped beam to blind other
The weight of the load should be distributed road users. The headlights must be adjusted in a
evenly. The maximum permitted drawbar load Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop.
should be utilised. Do not place the load only at
the front or the rear of the trailer: Things to note when driving with a trailer
– Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy ob- – If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the
jects are either over or as near to the axle as brakes gently at first, and then firmly. This will
possible. prevent the jerking that can be caused by the
trailer wheels locking.
– Secure all loads on the trailer properly.
– The gross combination weight causes the
Tyre pressure braking distance to increase.
Follow the trailer manufacturer's recommenda- – Prior taking on strong downhill slopes, select a
tions concerning the tyre pressure for the trailer lower gear (manual gearbox or Tiptronic mode
tyres. of the automatic gearbox) to make use of the
engine as a brake. The brake system could oth-
When towing a trailer, inflate the wheels on the
erwise overheat and fail. 
towing vehicle with the maximum permitted tyre
pressure → page 216.

174 Owner's Manual

 – The vehicle's centre of gravity and the vehi- Retrofitting a towing bracket
cle's handling will change because of the max-
imum trailer weight and the increased com-  Please refer to and at the start of the
bined towing weight of the vehicle and trailer. chapter on page 172.
– The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with
an unladen towing vehicle is very unfavoura-
ble. When driving in this situation, drive partic-
ularly carefully and slowly.

Pulling off on hills when towing a trailer

Depending on the steepness of the slope and the
total weight of the trailer and vehicle, a parked
vehicle towing a trailer could roll back a short
distance when moving off on a hill.
When towing a trailer, pull off on hills as follows:
– Press and hold the brake pedal.
– Pull the handbrake.
– Vehicles with manual gearbox: press the clutch
pedal fully down.
– Engage the 1st gear → page 107 or the D/S se-
lector lever position → page 108.
– Release the brake pedal.
– Pull away slowly. With manual gearbox, gently
release the clutch pedal.
– Only let go of the handbrake lever when the
engine has sufficient power to move off.

WARNING
Incorrect trailer towing can cause loss of vehi-
cle control and severe personal injuries.
● Towing a trailer and transporting heavy or
bulky items can change the way the vehicle's
handling and increase the braking distance.
● Always drive carefully and defensively. Brake
earlier than in normal driving.
Fig. 148 Attachment points for retrofitting a tow-
● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit ing bracket.
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions. Reduce your speed, especially when Figure → Fig. 148 illustrates as an example the
going downhill. fastening point to install a towing bracket on the
● Accelerate carefully and gently. Avoid abrupt T-Cross model.
and sudden braking and driving manoeuvres. Towing bracket retrofitting must be executed in
● Take special care when overtaking. Reduce accordance with the instructions provided by the
your speed immediately if the trailer shows bracket's manufacturer, always considering the
even the slightest sign of snaking. attachment points indicated in → Fig. 148 A .
● Never try to “stop” a trailer from snaking by The towing bracket securing points can be seen
increasing your speed. from the lower part of the vehicle. The towing
25A.5L1.TCR.20

● In some areas speed limits for vehicles tow- bracket must be secured to such points. 
ing trailers are lower than for vehicles with-
out trailers. 

Transporting 175
Retrofitting a towing bracket
– Observe applicable laws in the country in
Fuel
which the vehicle will run.
– It might be necessary to disassemble and reas- Fuel handling safety
semble the rear bumper. Additionally, it is also
necessary to tighten the towing bracket
guidelines
screws with a torque meter and connect a
socket to the vehicle's electrical system. For WARNING
such, special tools and expertise are required. Filling the tank incorrectly and improper han-
– The figure indicates securing points that must dling of fuel can cause explosions, fire and seri-
be observed when installing towing brackets. ous burns and injuries.
● Always ensure that the tank cap is closed
WARNING properly to prevent the evaporation and
Unsuitable or incorrectly connected electrical spillage of fuel.
conductors may cause operating faults in all of ● Fuel is highly explosive and inflammable and
the vehicle's electronic components, which can cause serious burns and other injuries.
may cause severe accidents and injuries. ● Fuel can spill out if the engine is not switch-
● Never connect the trailer's electrical system ed off or the filler nozzle is not fully inserted
directly to the electrical connections of the into the fuel filler neck when filling the tank.
tail lights or to other improper sources of This may cause fires, explosions and serious
electricity. Use only suitable connectors for burns and injuries.
trailer connection. ● When filling the tank with fuel, the engine
● Trailer bracket retrofitting activities must be and the ignition must be switched off for
conducted by a Volkswagen Dealership or safety reasons.
qualified workshop. ● When filling the tank, always switch off your
mobile telephone and two-way radio or any
WARNING other radio equipment. Electromagnetic ra-
If the towing bracket is unsuitable or incorrect- diation can generate sparks which can in turn
ly fitted, the trailer can become detached from start a fire.
the vehicle. This could lead to severe accidents ● When filling the tank, never get into the ve-
and fatal injuries. hicle. If in exceptional cases you have to en-
ter the vehicle, close the door and touch a
NOTICE metal object before touching the filler nozzle
Towing a trailer represents a greater stress for again. This will remove any spark-generating
the vehicle. Before deciding to retrofit, contact a electrostatic charges from you. Sparks can
Volkswagen Dealership to know if it is necessary cause a fire when filling the tank.
to perform any modifications in the cooling sys- ● Never fill the tank or fill up a spare canister
tem or if thermal shielding plates must be instal- near open flames, sparks or glowing items
led.  (e.g. cigarettes).
● Electrostatic discharge and electromagnetic
radiation must be avoided when filling the
tank.
● Follow all applicable safety information pro-
vided by the filling station when filling the
tank.
● Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the lug-
gage compartment. 

176 Owner's Manual

 WARNING WARNING
For safety reasons, Volkswagen does not rec- Incorrect handling of fuel may cause explo-
ommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the sions, fire and severe burns and injuries.
vehicle. Fuel can spill out of the full or empty ● Fuel is highly explosive and inflammable.
canister and catch fire, especially in the event
● Never handle fuel near open flames, sparks
of an accident. This could cause explosions, fire
or glowing items (e.g. lighters).
and injuries.
● Observe any valid safety information and
● If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to
legislation concerning the handling of fuels.
transport a spare fuel canister, please note
the following:
NOTICE
– When refilling, never place the canister in
or on top of the vehicle (e.g. in the lug- ● If the TOTALFLEX vehicle is immobilized by
gage compartment). There may be an “lack of fuel”, the vehicle must be refilled with
electrostatic charge during refilling caus- the last type of fuel used - petrol or ethanol.
ing the fuel fumes to ignite. ● If it is necessary to fill the tank with a different
– Always place the spare fuel canister on the type of fuel, the following may occur:
ground. – Considerable decrease in engine perform-
– When filling a spare fuel canister, place ance.
the filler nozzle as far as possible into the ● The vehicle must run for approximately 5 kilo-
filler opening. metres to recognize the new fuel type, in order
– If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, to prevent any of the scenarios above.
the filler nozzle must have constant con-
tact with the canister in order to avoid When the airbags are triggered during an
static charging. accident, the fuel supply is interrupted
→ page 41. 
– Please follow all legislation concerning the
use, stowage and transportation of spare
fuel canisters.
Petrol engine
NOTICE
● Remove spilt fuel from the vehicle paint as  Please refer to and at the start of the
quickly as possible in order to avoid damage to chapter on page 177.
the wheel housing, tyres and vehicle paint.
Vehicles with a petrol engine must be driven us-
● Do not run the tank empty. Irregular filling pe-
ing unleaded petrol free from any metallic addi-
riods can cause backfiring and allow unburnt
tives (such as manganese), in accordance with
fuel to enter the exhaust system. This could
applicable country laws.
damage the catalytic converter. 
Petrol additives
The quality of petrol influences the running prop-
erties, performance and service life of the en-
Fuelling and fuel types gine. Therefore, fuel up with quality fuel and,
when necessary, use the adequate additives.
The use of unsuitable petrol additives can cause
 Introduction considerable damage to the engine and catalytic
converter. Metallic petrol additives should be
The fuel cap is located at the rear right-hand side avoided at all times.
of the vehicle.
NOTICE
The factory- fitted sticker on the inside of the
25A.5L1.TCR.20

● The use of unsuitable petrol additives can

tank flap indicates the required fuel type for the
cause considerable damage to the engine and
vehicle.
catalytic converter. 

Fuel 177
● If, in an emergency, you have to use a different ● Just one tank full of leaded fuel, or fuel con-
from specified petrol, drive at medium engine taining other metallic additives (such as man-
speeds and avoid high engine loading. Avoid ganese), can seriously impair the efficiency
high engine speeds and heavy engine loads. and cause considerable damages to the cata-
Failure to do so can result in engine damage! lytic converter. 
Fill the tank with the recommended petrol as
soon as possible.

Just one tank full of leaded fuel, or fuel Fuelling

containing other metallic additives (such as
manganese), can seriously impair the efficiency  Please refer to and at the start of the
and cause damages to the catalytic converter.  chapter on page 177.

TOTALFLEX engine
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 177.

Petrol
Vehicles must be driven using unleaded petrol
free from any metallic additives (such as manga-
nese), with RON 95/E24 (blue) ethanol percent-
age. Fig. 149 Open tank flap with tank cap attached to
the holder.
Petrol additives
The quality of petrol influences the running prop- Switch off the engine, ignition and the mobile
erties, performance and service life of the en- telephones before filling the tank and leave them
gine. Therefore, fuel up with quality fuel and, switched off during the process.
when necessary, use the adequate additives. Vehicles with TOTALFLEX engine were designed
The use of unsuitable petrol additives can cause to use both petrol and ethanol in any amount.
considerable damage to the engine and catalytic Check the fuel tank capacity in → page 254.
converter. Metallic petrol additives should be
avoided at all times. Opening the tank flap
– Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key or
Ethanol press the central locking button  in the driv-
The vehicle must be fuelled exclusively with hy- er door to unlock the vehicle from the inside
drated ethanol, in accordance with applicable → page 59.
country laws. – On the aft part of the tank flap, press and open
the flap outward.
NOTICE
– Remove the tank cap rotating it counter clock-
● The use of unsuitable petrol additives can wise and stow it into the holder on the tank
cause considerable damage to the engine and flap → Fig. 149.
catalytic converter.
● If, in an emergency, you have to use fuel dif- Filling the tank
ferent than specified, drive at medium engine The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is shown
speeds and avoid high engine loading. Avoid on a sticker on the inside of the tank flap
high engine speeds and heavy engine loads. → page 177. 
Failure to do so can result in engine damage!
Fill the tank with the recommended petrol as
soon as possible.

178 Owner's Manual

 – The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks ● When filling, fuel may be spilt on the ground,
off for the first time → . polluting the environment. Always fill the at
– Do not continue filling the tank after it authorized filling stations with proper fluid
switches off! The expansion space in the fuel collection and disposal systems. 
tank will otherwise fill up and the fuel could
spill out. This could also happen when the fuel
warms up and expands.

Closing the tank cap

Engine control unit and
– Turn the tank cap clockwise into the fuel filler exhaust gas emission control
neck until you hear it engage. system
– Close the tank flap. The tank flap must be flush
with the vehicle bodywork.
 Introduction
WARNING
Do not continue filling the tank once the filler The relevant components for the exhaust emis-
nozzle stops automatically. The fuel tank can- sion system reduce the emission of harmful ele-
not be overfilled. This can cause fuel to splash ments:
out and overflow. This could cause explosions, – Engine Electronic Power Control (EPC)
fires and severe injuries. → page 180
– Catalytic converter → page 180
NOTICE
– Activated charcoal filter - supply system
● If the TOTALFLEX vehicle is immobilized by
→ page 180
“lack of fuel”, the vehicle must be refilled with
the last type of fuel used - petrol or ethanol. Information regarding warning and indicator
● If it is necessary to fill the tank with a different lamps is available in the Troubleshooting section
type of fuel, the following may occur: at the end of the chapter → page 181.
– Considerable decrease in engine perform-
ance.
WARNING
● The vehicle must run for approximately 5 kilo- Combustion engine combustion gases contain
metres to recognize the new fuel type, in order carbon monoxide which can provoke fainting
to prevent any of the scenarios above. and lead to death.
● Never start or run the engine in unventilated
NOTICE or closed spaces.
For TOTALFLEX vehicles with TSI engines: if there ● Never leave the engine running if you leave
is an option to refuel the vehicle exclusively with the vehicle unattended.
Ethanol-type fuel, it is recommended that every
10,000 km the vehicle be refueled with at least WARNING
one full tank of gasoline. This recommendation is The exhaust system components become very
mandatory to observe, and aims to prevent the hot. This may cause fires.
accumulation of contaminating matter arising ● Park the vehicle so that no part of the ex-
from the characteristics of Ethanol. This possible haust system can come into contact with any
accumulation of contaminating matter in the fuel inflammable material underneath the vehi-
supply system can result in loss of engine per- cle, e.g. dry grass.
formance or even difficulties in starting the vehi-
cle. ● Never apply underseal or anti-corrosion
coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
● After the fuel filler nozzle is automatically verter, diesel particulate filter or the heat
switched off for the first time, the tank will shields on the exhaust system. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

have reached its capacity. Do not force fuel

filling, since fuel may overflow.

Fuel 179
Electronic engine power control NOTICE
(EPC) Just one tank full of leaded fuel, or fuel contain-
ing other metallic additives (such as manganese),
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter can seriously impair the efficiency and cause
on page 179. damages to the catalytic converter.

The electronic engine power control (EPC) is a Even when the exhaust purification system
system designed to determine the throttle valve is working perfectly, there may be a smell
position based on the torque required by the of sulphur from the exhaust in some conditions.
driver through the electronic pedal (e-gas sys- This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel
tem); the indicator lamp  lights up in the event being used. Often, it is simply a case of using a
of system malfunctions. different fuel brand. 
Under normal operating conditions, when the
driver activates the accelerator pedal, the system
transforms such request into a need for speed Lambda probe
and power.
By controlling engine components (sensors and  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
actuators), the best performance possible is cal- on page 179.
culated, based on the driver's request. 
The purpose of the lambda probe is to monitor
exhaust gases through a sensor hit by led or oth-
er metallic additives (e.g. manganese) contained
Catalytic converter in the fuel, and gradually reduced. The lambda
probe completely loses its efficiency after 10,000
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter km. The resulting lack of monitoring could cause
on page 179. engine malfunctions, such as:
– changes in driving conditions;
The catalytic converter is used for exhaust gas
post-treatment and helps mitigate the emission – hot engine starting problems;
of pollutants into the atmosphere. Observe the – increased fuel consumption. 
following points to ensure that the exhaust sys-
tem and catalytic converter in the engine func-
tion properly for extended periods of time:
Activated charcoal filter - supply
– Fill the tank only with unleaded petrol free
system
from other metallic additives (such as manga-
nese)  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
– Never allow the fuel tank to run completely on page 179.
dry.
– Never overfill engine oil → page 201. The supply system has an activated charcoal sys-
– Never push and/or pull the vehicle to start the tem that accumulates hydrocarbons (steam) gen-
engine (“push starting”), but rather use the erated in the fuel tank (evaporative emission
jump starting system → page 191. control), preventing such hydrocarbons from be-
ing released into the atmosphere. While the en-
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of gine is running, these accumulated hydrocarbons
power when the vehicle is moving, reduce speed are used in the normal engine combustion proc-
immediately. The vehicle should be inspected at ess.
the nearest Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
workshop. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enter The activated charcoal filter prevents fuel
the exhaust system and escape into the atmos- tank gas hydrocarbons from being released
phere. The catalytic converter can also be dam- into the atmosphere. 
aged by overheating!

180 Owner's Manual

 Troubleshooting NOTICE
Failure to observe the illuminated indicator
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter lamps and its descriptions and meanings could
on page 179. lead to vehicle damages.

If the engine operates irregularly or in case of en- If the indicator lamps  or  are lit up,
gine jolts while driving, this could be related to fuel consumption may be higher and engine
insufficient fuel or low-quality fuel (e.g. water performance reduced. 
mixed in the fuel). In these cases, immediately
slow down and seek assistance at a Volkswagen
Dealership or qualified workshop nearby, driving
at low revs and speed. If these symptoms occur Fuel quality
immediately after filling the tank, switch the en-
Considering the impracticality of supervising all
gine off immediately – as well as to avoid secon-
filling stations, Volkswagen recommends filling
dary damages – and seek assistance from a
the tank in stations included in the Distributor
Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop.
Network, which have clear programs, in order to
Indicator lamps ensure product quality.
The combustion gases emission control system Volkswagen Dealerships are prepared to handle
(OBD) is not available in countries which legisla- engine sediments.
tion does not cover this system. In these cases
the indicator lamp  will only light up when the Fuel injection system
ignition is turned on and when starting the en- The vehicle is equipped with a fuel injection sys-
gine. tem that, under normal circumstances, waives
the need for any periodical cleaning process, ei-
Engine management system fault (Elec-
 tronic Power Control). On: the engine must
ther with fuel additives or disassembling the in-
jection valves to clean ultrasound systems.
immediately be checked at a Volkswagen
Dealership. Cleaning is required whenever damages or im-
Faulty emissions in the exhaust system proper engine function occur due to use of low-
 (OBD). On: slow down. Carefully drive to quality fuel. In this case, Volkswagen recom-
the nearest Volkswagen Dealership. The mends visiting a Volkswagen, Dealership, which
engine must be checked. has suitable additives and equipment.
Flashing: faulty catalytic converter. Reduce
 your speed. Carefully drive to the nearest
NOTICE
Volkswagen Dealership or qualified work- Damages caused on the engine due to the use of
shop. The engine must be checked. improper or insufficient fuel are not covered by
the warranty. 
When switching the ignition on, certain warning
and indicator lamps flash to check functions.
Such lamps go out after a few seconds.

WARNING
Failure to observe the warning lamps and text
messages could lead to your vehicle breaking
down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
juries.
● Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
sages that appear.
● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and
25A.5L1.TCR.20

when safe to do so.

Fuel 181
If and when
Vehicle toolkit

 Introduction

Observe any country-specific legislation when

securing your vehicle in the event of a break-
down.

WARNING
In the event of a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvre or accident, a loose vehicle toolkit and
spare wheel could be flung though the vehicle
and cause severe injuries.
● Always ensure that the vehicle toolkit or Fig. 151 On the luggage compartment: vehicle
spare wheel are secured in the luggage com- toolkit securing strap and vehicle toolkit.
partment.
The vehicle toolkit and spare wheel are located in
WARNING the luggage compartment, under the floor cover-
Unsuitable or damaged tools in the vehicle ing → Fig. 150.
toolkit can lead to accidents and injuries. To access the vehicle toolkit, the spare wheel
● Never work with unsuitable or damaged must be removed.
tools from the vehicle toolkit. 
Accommodation of the vehicle toolkit
– If the case, lift and secure the variable luggage
compartment floor → page 168.
Vehicle toolkit stowage and access – Lift the floor lining of the luggage compart-
ment → Fig. 150.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 182. – Remove the lining completely to remove the
spare wheel and access the vehicle toolkit.

Release the vehicle toolkit securing strap

To release the securing strap → Fig. 151 A , pull
the buckle in the direction of the arrow 1 .

Securing the vehicle toolkit

– Fit the vehicle toolkit in its housing.
– Pass the strap through the buckle in the direc-
tion of the arrow 2 and firmly pull the belt to
secure the vehicle toolkit.
Always ensure that the spare wheel and ve-
hicle toolkit are properly secured in the lug-
gage compartment. 
Fig. 150 On the luggage compartment, under the
floor lining: spare wheel and vehicle toolkit.

182 Owner's Manual

 Contents of the vehicle tool kit Window wiper blades
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 182. Service position

Fig. 152 Contents of the vehicle toolkit. Fig. 153 Window wipers in service position.

The content of the vehicle toolkit depends on the In the service position, the windscreen wiper
vehicle equipment level. The following describes arms can be lifted from the windscreen . Proceed
the maximum scope. as follows to place the windscreen wipers in
service position → Fig. 153:
Contents of the vehicle toolkit. → Fig. 152
Activate the service position
1 Jack: fold the pawl in before placing the jack
back into the vehicle tool kit. Next, place the – The bonnet must be closed → page 198.
handle next to the top part of the jack. – Switch the ignition on and off.
2 Lug wrench. – Press the window wiper lever briefly down-
3 Screwable towing eye (not available for wards.
some versions).
Suspending the windscreen wiper arms off
4 Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolt (not the windscreen.
available in some versions). Volkswagen rec-
– Place the windscreen wiper arms into service
ommends always to carry the adapter for the
position before suspending them → .
anti-theft wheel bolts together with the ve-
hicle tool kit tools. In case of loss, contact a – To suspend the windscreen wiper arms, hold
Volkswagen Dealership. them only by the wiper blade attachment area.
Place the windscreen wiper arms back on the
Turn the jack back to its original position af-
windscreen again prior driving! Press the wind-
ter use so it may be securely stored. 
screen wipers lever briefly down with the ignition
turned on, to return the windscreen wiper arms
back into the starting position.

NOTICE
● To avoid damages to the bonnet and window
wiper arms, lift the windscreen wiper arms on-
ly when in service position.
● Always ensure that the wiper arms are lowered
25A.5L1.TCR.20

onto the windscreen prior driving. 

If and when 183

Cleaning and replacing window – To suspend the windscreen wiper arms, hold
them only by the wiper blade attachment area.
wiper blades
– Carefully clean the windscreen wiper blades
with a damp sponge → .
– Fold the windscreen wiper arms carefully back
onto the windscreen.

Replacing windscreen wiper blades

– Place the windscreen wiper arms into service
position before suspending them → page 183.
– To suspend the windscreen wiper arms, hold
them only by the wiper blade attachment area.
– Press and hold the release tab → Fig. 154 1
Fig. 154 Replacing windscreen wiper blades. and pull off the windscreen wiper blade in the
direction of the arrow.
– Insert the new wiper blade of the same length
and design into the wiper arms until it is prop-
erly fitted.
– Fold the windscreen wiper arms carefully back
onto the windscreen.

Replacing the rear window wiper blades

– Lift and fold the rear window wiper arm.
– Press and hold the release button → Fig. 155
A pressed.
Fig. 155 Replacing the rear window wiper blades. – Remove the rear window wiper blade in the di-
rection of the arrow B .
The factory-fitted window wiper blades are coat-
ed with graphite. The graphite coating ensures – Insert a new rear window wiper blade of the
that the windscreen wiper blade slides quietly same length and design into the rear window
over the windscreen. A damaged graphite coat- wiper arms until it is properly fitted.
ing will among others, raise the noise level dur- – Fold the rear window wiper arm carefully back
ing the window wiping. onto the rear window.
Check the condition of the window wiper blades
WARNING
on a regular basis. Replace the window wiper
blades whenever they are dirty or are not per- Worn or dirty window wiper blades reduce visi-
forming properly → . bility and increase the risk of accidents and se-
vere injuries.
Damaged window wiper blades must be replaced
immediately. Window wiper blades can be ● Replace window wiper blades whenever they
bought at Volkswagen Dealerships or qualified are damaged or worn, and no longer appro-
workshops. priately perform their function.

Cleaning the windscreen wiper blades NOTICE

Observe on the windscreen wipers: place the ● Damaged or dirty window wiper blades may
window wiper arms into service position before scratch the window.
lifting them off the windscreen → . ● Detergents containing solvents, hard sponges
and other sharp objects can damage the
graphite coating during cleaning.
● Do not use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint
thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dows. 

184 Owner's Manual

 Exterior lighting – Tail lights (may not be available depending on
the vehicle version).
– License plate light: located on the rear cover,
 Introduction above the license plate.

WARNING
Before repairing the product, check which tech-
● Insufficient lighting of roads, such as streets,
nology is used, incandescent lamp or LED. As rule
avenues and squares, results in low visibility
of thumb, light bulbs can be replaced by yourself.
and increases the risk of accidents, since
When, according to the vehicle version, the exte-
other road users might be unable to see ve-
rior lighting is of LED technology, the replace-
hicles running with burnt bulbs.
ment of the LED light unit or of the individual
LEDs by yourself is not possible. The burning out
of individual LEDs may be an indication of possi-
NOTICE
ble burn outs of other LEDs. In such case, the Volkswagen recommends special attention to
lights must be checked, and if necessary, re- some plastic parts with clamps, which might
placed by a specialized workshop. break when removing or fitting bulbs.
Changing the vehicle bulbs requires considerable On cold and humid days the headlight len-
technical skill. If you do not feel confident with ses may become temporarily fogged be-
the procedure, Volkswagen recommends that cause of the difference of temperature between
you have the bulbs changed by a Volkswagen the outside and the inside.
Dealership or that you seek other expert assis-
● With the headlight turned on, the outgoing
tance. Contact a qualified workshop if other vehi-
light surface defogs in a short time, eventually
cle parts around the lights need to be removed.
leaving some residues at the borders.
A box containing spare light bulbs for lights that ● The tail lights and the turn signals may also be
are required to ensure that the vehicle is road- affected.
worthy should be stored in the vehicle at all
● The fogging phenomenon does not interfere
times. Spare bulbs are available from Volkswagen
with the life cycle of the lighting system of the
Dealerships.
vehicle. 
Driving with burned out exterior lighting devices
may be illegal.

LED technology in the vehicle Troubleshooting

The components that use LED (Light Emitting Di-
ode) have long service life and do not have to be  Please refer to and at the start of the
changed frequently. chapter on page 185.
Volkswagen recommends that the replacement
Depending on the vehicle version, the illumina-
of components that use LED be done at a
tion indicator lamp may not be available.
Volkswagen dealership.
Vehicle components that use LEDs are listed be- Lighting
low:
– Headlights (may not be available depending Central indicator lamp 
on the vehicle version).
– Side turn indicator lamp: located in the exteri-
 OR  plus additional text messaged Driv-
ing
or mirrors (depending on the version of the ve- illumination partially or totally out of or-
hicle this may not be available) der.
– Brake light bulb: located externally on the boot Check the vehicle lights and replace the respec-
lid, above the rear window. tive bulb when burned out → page 185. Case all
25A.5L1.TCR.20

– Daytime Driving Light: Located in the head- bulbs are in order or if there is a damage seek
light (depending on the vehicle version it may your Volkswagen Dealership. 
not be available).

If and when 185

Fuses ● You can damage another position in the elec-
trical system by using a fuse with a higher amp
rating.
 Introduction ● Fuse boxes must be protected from dirt and
moisture when opened. Dirt and moisture in
the fuse boxes can damage the electrical sys-
Several electrical consumers could share a single tem.
fuse. Conversely, a single consumer could have
more than one fuse. A single consumer may have more than one
Therefore, fuses should only be replaced when fuse.
the cause of a fault has been rectified. If a newly Several consumers may share a single fuse.
inserted fuse blows after a short time, the elec- 
trical system must be checked by a Volkswagen
Dealership.

WARNING Fuses in the dash panel

Before initiating any work in the engine com-  Please refer to and at the start of the
partment, always read and observe the warning chapter on page 186.
notes → page 196, Safety guidelines for work in
the engine compartment. The engine compart-
ment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area
and may cause severe injuries.

WARNING
High voltages in the electrical system can cause
electric shocks, severe burns and death!
● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-
tion system.
● Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical
system.

WARNING
Fig. 156 On the driver's side of the dashboard: fuse
Using unsuitable or repaired fuses and bridging
box cover.
an electrical circuit without fuses can cause
fires and severe injuries. Fuses must always be replaced with a new fuse
● Never fit fuses that have a higher fuse pro- which has the same amp rating (same colour and
tection limit. Fuses must always be replaced imprint) and size.
with a new fuse which has the same amp
rating (same colour and imprint) and size. Opening the fuse box in the dash panel
● Never repair a fuse. – Hold the fuse box cover → Fig. 156 and pull
● Never use a metal strip, paper clip or similar forward.
items to replace a fuse. – To install, put the cover on the fuse box of the
dash panel and press until it audibly engages.
NOTICE
NOTICE
● In order to avoid damage to the electrical sys-
tem in the vehicle, the ignition, the lights and ● Remove the covers for the fuse boxes carefully
all electrical consumers must be switched off and install them again properly so as to avoid
and the vehicle key removed from the ignition damage to the vehicle. 
cylinder before changing a fuse.

186 Owner's Manual

 ● Fuse boxes must be protected from dirt and F10 Free
moisture when opened. Dirt and moisture in F11 Free
the fuse boxes can damage the electrical F12 Free
system.  F13 Diagnostic socket / Rain and light sensor /
Headlight flasher lever / Rotary light con-
trol
Fuse box in the dashboard F14 Window wiper / Windscreen washer / Rear
window washer lever
 Please refer to and at the start of the F15 Instrument cluster
chapter on page 186. F16 Exterior vehicle lighting – right-hand side
F17 Electric window regulators - front right/
Electric window regulators - rear right/
Electric right hand side exterior mirror/ Ex-
terior mirror tilt down
F18 Windscreen wiper
F19 Radio
F20 Rear window heating
F21 Ignition lock/ starter motor solenoid (igni-
tion lock start)
F22 Free
F23 Rear view camera system
F24 Display of radio with navigation system /
Wireless charger
F25 Multifunction steering wheel
F26 Diagnostic interface module for data bus
F27 Free
F28 Ultrasound sensor (alarm)
F29 Free
F30 Free
F31 Climatronic control unit
or Air conditioner control unit
F32 Ignition lock
Fig. 157 On the dash panel: fuses arrangement. F33 Electric window regulators - front left/
Electric window regulators - rear left/
Some fuses may be specific to certain versions. Electric left hand side electric exterior mir-
ror
Locations with respective functions for equip-
ment that may be available in your vehicle are F34 Free
provided below: F35 Exterior vehicle lighting – left-hand side
F36 Horn
F1 Free
F37 Free
F2 Mobile phone USB charger (Universal Dock
Station) F38 Electronic control unit
F3 Free F39 Parking sensor control unit
F4 Free F40 Light switch / Reverse gear light switch /
Diagnostic socket / Interior mirror / Rear
F5 Electric sunroof
view camera / Headlight range adjustment
F6 Central locking switch
F7 Free
25A.5L1.TCR.20

F41 External mirror adjustment 

F8 Interior ventilation (Climatronic)
F9 Free

If and when 187

F42 Clutch sensor/ Relay 1 of pull-away assist Opening the fuse box in the engine
system/ Relay 2 of pull-away assist sys- compartment
tem/ Air conditioner pressure switch – Open the bonnet  → page 198.
F43 Rear window wiper – Press the retainers in the direction of the ar-
F44 Airbag system row → Fig. 158 1 to release the fuse box cov-
F45 Free er.
F46 Free – Remove the cover from the top.
F47 Free – To install, place the cover on the fuse box and
F48 Keyless Access control unit press down until the cover audibly locks on
F49 Free both sides.
F50 Free On the inside of the engine compartment fuse
F51 Free box cover there may be a pair of plastic tweezers
F52 Free → Fig. 158 2 to extract the fuses.
F53 Automatic gearbox selector lever / Ignition
key removal lock (only for vehicles with au- NOTICE
tomatic gearbox and no Keyless Access) ● Remove the covers for the fuse boxes carefully
F54 Free and install them again properly so as to avoid
F55 12 V socket damage to the vehicle.
F56 Interior ventilation ● Fuse boxes must be protected from dirt and
F57 Free moisture when opened. Dirt and moisture in
F58 Windscreen and rear window washers the fuse boxes can damage the electrical sys-
tem. 
F59 Free
F60 Free
F61 Free 

Fuses in the engine compartment

 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 186.

Fig. 158 In the engine compartment: fuse box cov-

er 1 with plastic claw 2 .

188 Owner's Manual

 Fuse box in the engine F11 Free
F12 Free
compartment
F13 Free
 Please refer to and at the start of the F14 Injection system main relay / Engine con-
chapter on page 186. trol unit/ ABS/ESC control unit
F15 Automatic gearbox control unit
F16 Free
F17 Pull-away assist
F18 Start assist(starter)
F19 Free
F20 ESC control unit
F21 ESC control unit
F22 Free
F23 Free
F24 Free
F25 Radiator fan – Speed 1 (MPI engine)
F26 Radiator fan
F27 Radiator fan – Speed 2 (MPI engine)
F28 Free 

Fuse box in the engine

compartment on the battery
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 186.

Fig. 159 In the engine compartment: fuse arrange-

ment.

Some fuses may be specific to certain versions.

Locations with respective functions for equip-
ment that may be available in your vehicle are
provided below:
F1 Engine control unit
F2 Fuel dosing valve / Water pump
F3 Lambda probe before catalytic converter /
lambda probe after catalytic converter Fig. 160 In the engine compartment on top of the
battery: fuse arrangement.
F4 Fuel pump
F5 Radiator fan – electronics / Oil pressure Fuses are located in the engine compartment,
valve / Variable intake manifold / Variable above the vehicle battery → in Introduction on
exhaust manifold / Activated charcoal filter page 186.
valve / Ethanol sensor
Fuses in the engine compartment must only be
F6 Ignition coil replaced by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen
F7 Vacuum pump recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for
F8 Fuel pump relay (MPI engine) / Fuel injec- this purpose. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

tors
F9 Brake pedal sensor
F10 Electronic control unit

If and when 189

Locations with respective functions and amp rat- Fuse versions
ing for equipment that may be available in your – Flat standard blade fuse (ATO®).
vehicle are provided below:
– Small flat blade fuse (MINI®).
1 350 A, alternator. – Cartridge fuse (JCASE®).
2 80 A, free.
3 150 A, engine compartment fuse box pow- Fuse colour coding
er supply. Fuses (ATO - MINI)
4 80 A,power supply 2 of the dash panel fuse Colour Nominal current in amperes
box. black 1 A
5 125 A,power supply 1 of the dash panel light brown 5 A
fuse box.
brown 7.5 A
6 80 A, power steering. 
red 10 A
blue 15 A
yellow 20 A
Changing a blown fuse white or clear 25 A
green 30 A
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 186. orange 40 A

Fuses (JCASE)
Colour Nominal current in amperes
blue 20 A
white or clear 25 A
pink 30 A
green 40 A
red 50 A
yellow 60 A

Preparations
– Switch off the ignition, the lights, and all elec-
trical consumers.
– Open the respective fuse box → page 186.
Fig. 161 Blown fuse:  flat fuse,  blocking fuse.
Detecting a blown fuse
– Shine a flashlight onto the fuse. This will help
you to spot the blown fuse more easily.
– A blown blade fuse (ATO®, MINI®) is detected
from above or from the side through its trans-
parent body by the melted metal strip
→ Fig. 161 .
– A blown cartridge fuse (JCASE®) is detected
from above by the melted metal strip visible
through the transparent housing → Fig. 161 .

Changing a fuse
– If applicable, take the plastic tweezers
→ Fig. 162 1 out of the fuse box cover.
Fig. 162 Removing or installing the fuse with the
plastic claw: : flat fuse,  blocking fuse. – According to the fuse type, apply the proper
claw of the plastic tweezers → Fig. 162  1
or → Fig. 162  1 to the fuse sides. 

190 Owner's Manual

 – Pull out the blown fuse. ● The battery should be replaced if it has fro-
– If the fuse has blown, replace it with a new zen or defrosted.
fuse of the same amp rating (same colour and ● A highly explosive mixture of gases is given
same imprint) and same size → . off when jump starting the vehicle battery.
– After having replaced the fuse place the plastic Always keep fire, sparks, naked flames and lit
claw pliers, if existing, back onto the cover. cigarettes away from the vehicle battery.
– Install the fuse box cover. Never use a mobile telephone when the
jump leads are being connected or discon-
NOTICE nected.

You can damage another position in the electrical ● Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated
system by using a fuse with a higher amp rating.  space as the battery emits a highly explosive
mixture of gases when the vehicle is being
jump started.
● Position the jump leads so that they never
come into contact with any moving parts in
Jump starting the engine compartment.
● Never confuse the negative and positive ter-
minals or connect the jump leads incorrectly.
 Introduction
● Observe the jump lead manufacturer's in-
structions.
If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
charged 12 V vehicle battery, it is possible to use NOTICE
another 12V battery from another vehicle to
Please note the following in order to avoid con-
jump start the engine.
siderable damage to the vehicle electrical sys-
The discharged vehicle battery must be properly tem:
connected to the vehicle's electrical system. ● short circuit can be caused if the jump leads
The jump leads must have sufficient length to are connected incorrectly.
ensure proper distance between the vehicles. ● The vehicles must not touch each other, other-
wise electricity could flow as soon as the posi-
WARNING tive terminals are connected. 
Using the jump leads incorrectly or completing
the jump start procedure incorrectly can cause
the battery to explode, which can lead to se-
vere injuries. Please note the following points
in order to reduce the risk of the battery ex-
ploding:
● All work on the vehicle battery and the elec-
trical system can cause serious chemical
burns, fire and electric shocks. Always read
the warnings and safety information before
carrying out any kind of work on the vehicle
battery → page 209, Vehicle battery.
● The assistance providing vehicle's battery
must be of the same voltage as the dis-
charged vehicle battery (12-volt) and be ap-
proximately of the same capacity (see im-
print on battery).
● Never charge a frozen or defrosted vehicle
25A.5L1.TCR.20

battery. A discharged vehicle battery can

even freeze at temperatures of around 0° C
(+32° F).

If and when 191

Jump starting point (grounding How to start the engine using jump
point) leads
 Please refer to and at the start of the  Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 191. chapter on page 191.

Fig. 163 On the engine compartment: jump starting Fig. 164 Jump lead attachment diagram: dis-
point (grounding point). charged vehicle battery A and battery in the vehicle
providing assistance B .
There is a jump starting point in the engine com-
partment – located on the interior wheel housing Key for → Fig. 164:
on the engine side, to connect the black
→ Fig. 163 jump lead.
A Vehicle with discharged vehicle battery
which is getting jump starting assistance.
The jump starting point is not designed to jump
B Vehicle with the current supplying battery
start other vehicles.
assisting jump starting.
Only jump start the vehicle (grounding point) X Proper grounding point: jump starting point
through this point.  (grounding point) or a solid metal part firmly
bolted to the cylinder block.

The discharged vehicle battery must be properly

connected to the vehicle's electrical system.
The vehicles must not touch each other. Other-
wise electricity could flow as soon as the positive
terminals are connected.
Make sure the battery clamps have good metal-
to-metal contact with the battery terminals.
If the engine does not start immediately, switch
off the starter after about 10 seconds and try
again after about one minute.

Attaching the jump leads

Connect the jumper cable strictly following the
sequence 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 → Fig. 164.
– Switch off the ignition in both vehicles
→ page 101.
– Open the positive terminal cover. 

192 Owner's Manual

 – Connect one end of the red jump lead to the ● Make sure there is no one inside the vehicle
positive terminal (+) of the vehicle with the when connecting battery jump leads. In case
discharged battery → Fig. 164 A → . of electrical failure, airbags may be acciden-
– Connect the other end of the red jumper lead tally engaged and cause severe or even fatal
to the positive (+) terminal of the assisting injuries to vehicle occupants.
battery B . ● Always wear suitable eye protection and
– Connect one end of the black jumper lead to never lean over the vehicle battery.
the negative terminal of the assistance supply- ● Attach the connector cables in the correct
ing battery B . order – the positive cable first, followed by
– Connect the other end of the black jump lead the negative.
X to the vehicle with the discharged battery ● Never connect the negative cable to parts of
at the jump starting point (grounding point) or the fuel system or to the brake hose/pipe.
to a solid metal part firmly bolted to the cylin-
● Non-insulated parts of the battery clamps
der block – but not near the battery A → .
must not be allowed to touch. Additionally,
– Position the leads in such a way that they can- the jump lead attached to the positive vehi-
not come into contact with any moving parts cle battery terminal must not touch metal
in the engine compartment. parts of the vehicle.
Starting the engine ● Check the window on the vehicle battery us-
ing a flashlight if necessary If the display is
– Start the engine of the vehicle which is provid- light yellow or colourless, do not jump start
ing assistance and let it run at idle. the vehicle. Seek expert assistance.
– Start the engine of the car with the discharged ● Avoid electrostatic discharge in the vicinity
vehicle battery and wait two to three minutes of the vehicle battery. The gas emitted from
until the engine is “running smoothly”. the vehicle battery could be ignited by
sparks.
Removing the jump leads
– Before disconnecting the jump leads, switch ● Never use jump starting to start the engine if
off the dipped beam headlights if they are the vehicle battery is damaged, frozen or has
switched on. defrosted.
– Turn the air conditioner and the rear window
NOTICE
defroster heating of the vehicle with the flat
battery on to reduce voltage peaks when dis- Incorrectly attached jump leads could result in
connecting the jumper leads. substantial damages to the vehicle's electrical
system. 
– Disconnect the jumper cable with the now
started engine running exactly in the connec-
tion reverse sequence 4 – 3 – 2 – 1.
– Close the positive battery terminal cover.
Towing
WARNING
Jump starting the vehicle incorrectly can cause
the battery to explode, which can lead to seri-
 Introduction
ous injuries. Please note the following points in
order to reduce the risk of the battery explod- Follow all applicable legal requirements when
ing: towing.
● All work on the vehicle battery and the elec-
Vehicles with discharged batteries must not be
trical system can cause serious chemical
towed for technical reasons.
burns, fire and electric shocks. Always read
the warnings and safety information before For technical reasons, the vehicle must not be
towed. Jump start the engine instead
25A.5L1.TCR.20

carrying out any kind of work on the vehicle

battery → page 209, Vehicle battery. → page 191. 

If and when 193

Vehicles with automatic gearbox must not be Before towing
towed for technical reasons, when it cannot be
confirmed that the selector lever is in position N  Please refer to and at the start of the
→ page 194. chapter on page 194.
When towing a vehicle with the engine switched
off and the ignition switched on, the vehicle's Whenever it is necessary to tow your vehicle, use
battery will be discharged, depending on the ve- a specialized towing service, using tow trucks or
hicle battery charge; after a few minutes, the platforms.
voltage drop may be so substantial that no elec- When using tow trucks, the vehicle must be se-
trical consumers will work inside the vehicle (e.g. curely fastened by the front wheels. Ensure that
warning lights). no gears are selected and the handbrake lever is
not applied.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle without a 12-V electric NOTICE
current. Always comply with applicable traffic laws re-
● Never remove the vehicle key from the igni- garding towing. 
tion cylinder.
● If the vehicle looses the 12-V electric current
during the towing process, interrupt the
towing process immediately and seek expert Towing instructions
assistance.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 194.
WARNING
After towing a vehicle, the steering behaviour Hard towing bar
and braking effect are considerably affected.
The safest way to tow a vehicle is using a hard
Please apply the following rules to reduce the
towing bar.
risk of accidents:
Secure the hard towing bar only to rings de-
● As the driver of the towed vehicle:
signed for such purpose or towing devices.
– Additional force must be applied to the
brake pedal in order to brake, since the When the vehicle with manual gearbox must
brake servo is disabled. Always pay atten- be towed:
tion in order not to hit the towing vehicle.
Check if the vehicle can be towed → page 195,
– Additional strength is required to steer the When can the vehicle not be towed?.
vehicle, since the assisted steering system
is disabled while the engine is stopped. – Position the gear selection lever into the neu-
tral position .
● As the driver of the towing vehicle:
– Accelerate carefully and gently. – Do not tow the vehicle at speeds higher than
50 km/h.
– Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeu-
vres. – Do not tow the vehicle for distances greater
– Brake before usual and applying lower than 50 km.
pressure to the brake pedal.
When the vehicle with automatic gearbox
itself must be towed:
NOTICE
Check if the vehicle can be towed → page 195,
● Carefully uninstall and install the towing eye When can the vehicle not be towed?.
and cover in order to prevent vehicles dam-
ages (e.g. paintwork damages). – Switch on the ignition.
● Unburnt fuel may leak into the catalytic con- – Shift the selector lever to position N
verter and damage it during a towing process.  → page 108.
– Do not tow the vehicle at speeds higher than
50 km/h. 

194 Owner's Manual

 – Do not tow the vehicle for distances greater
than 50 km.
– With the winch, the vehicle can only be tower
with the two front wheels lifted.

When can the vehicle not be towed?

– If the vehicle's transmission is no longer lubri-
cated due to damages
– With the 12-V vehicle battery discharged,
since the steering wheel remains locked in ve-
hicles equipped with Keyless Access locking Fig. 166 On the right-hand side of the front bump-
and starting system, and the steering column er: screw in the towing eye.
cannot be unlocked.
– If the towing distance is greater than 50 km. The threaded towing eye housing is located to
the right of the front bumper, behind a cover
– If the free movement of the wheels or steering
→ Fig. 165.
wheel is compromised due to an accident, for
example. Follow proper towing instructions → page 196.

NOTICE Assembling the right-hand side towing eye

– Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool-
Only tow vehicles with automatic gearbox with
kit, in the luggage compartment → page 182.
the selector lever in the N position.
– Press the lower area of the cover → Fig. 165
The vehicle can only be towed if the hand- 1 to release the cover lock.
brake is released.  – Move the cover forward 2 and hang it in the
vehicle.
– Install the towing eye counter clockwise into
Assembling the front towing eye the housing → Fig. 166 1 as tight as possible
→ . Use an appropriate object to tightly
 Please refer to and at the start of the screw the towing eye into the housing.
chapter on page 194. – After the towing procedure, unscrew the tow-
ing eye clockwise.
– Place the lower cover latch into the bumper
opening and the upper latch carefully into the
opening corner; press the upper latch up-
wards.
– Press the upper cover area until the lower
latch is secured to the bumper.

NOTICE
The towing eye must be firmly screwed into the
housing. Otherwise, the towing eye may be rip-
Fig. 165 On the right-hand side of the front bump- ped off during the towing process. 
er: release and remove the cover.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

If and when 195

Instructions for driving while Checking and refuelling
towing
In the engine compartment
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 194.
Safety guidelines for work in the
Towing requires some practice, particularly when engine compartment
using a hard towing bar. Both drivers must be
familiarized with the specificities of the towing Always park the vehicle on a levelled and stable
process. For this reason, inexperienced drivers surface before carrying out any work in the en-
must never tow vehicles. gine compartment.
While driving, ensure that there are no unbeara- The engine compartment of a motor vehicle is a
ble traction forces and excessive tensions. During hazardous area. Never carry out any work on the
towing manoeuvres away from paved roads, engine or in the engine compartment if you are
there is also a risk of overloading the fastening not familiar with the necessary procedures and
parts. the general safety requirements, as well as with-
If the vehicle is towed with warning lights and ig- out the unsuitable tools, fluids and resources
nition switched on, it is still possible to activate available → . If necessary, such work must be
turn signals when turning. Move the turn signal carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership. Serious
lever into the desired position. The warning light injuries can be caused if work is carried out incor-
is interrupted when the turn signals are used. As rectly.
soon as the turn signal lever moves back into de-
fault position, the warning light is automatically WARNING
engaged. Unintentional vehicle movements during serv-
ice work can cause serious injury.
Driver of the towed vehicle: ● Never work underneath a vehicle if it is not
– Leave the ignition on in order to avoid locking secured against rolling away. If you are
the steering wheel and to use turn signals, working underneath the vehicle while the
horn, window washers and wipers. wheels are on the ground, the vehicle must
– Since the assisted steering system is disabled be on a level, the wheels must be blocked
while the engine is switched off, additional and the vehicle key must be removed from
strength is required to steer. the ignition cylinder.
– Additional force must be applied to the brake ● If you have to work underneath the vehicle,
pedal in order to brake, since the brake servo is use suitable stands to provide extra support.
disabled. Do not hit the towing vehicle. The vehicle jack is not sufficient for this task
– Follow the information and instructions provi- and can fail, which can lead to serious inju-
ded in the Owner's manual of the vehicle being ries.
towed. ● The Start-Stop system must be manually dis-
abled.
Driver of the towing vehicle:
– Accelerate carefully and gently. Avoid sudden WARNING
manoeuvres. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle
– Brake before usual and applying lower pres- is a dangerous area and may cause severe inju-
sure to the brake pedal. ries!
– Follow the information and instructions provi- ● The utmost care and attention must be paid
ded in the Owner's manual of the vehicle being when carrying out any work and you must
towed.  follow the general safety rules. Never take
any risks.
● Never do any work on the engine or in the
engine compartment unless you know exact-
ly how to carry it out. If you are uncertain of 

196 Owner's Manual

 what to do, the work should be carried out – Never touch electrical wiring.
by a Volkswagen Dealership. Serious injuries
can result from work that has not been car- WARNING
ried out properly.
There are rotating components in the engine
● Never open the cover if you see steam or compartment that can cause serious injury.
coolant escaping from the engine compart-
● Never touch the radiator area or fan directly.
ment. Hot steam or coolant can cause severe
Touching the rotary blades may result in se-
burns. Always wait until you can no longer
vere injuries. The fan is temperature-control-
notice steam or coolant coming from the en-
led and can start automatically, even if the
gine compartment.
engine has been switched off and the vehicle
● Always let the engine cool down before key has been removed from the ignition cyl-
opening the engine compartment cover. inder.
● Hot parts of the engine or exhaust system ● If any work has to be performed when the
may burn the skin. engine is started or with the engine running,
● Before opening the engine compartment there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety
cover once it has cooled down: risk from the rotating parts, such as the Poly-
– Apply the handbrake and move the selec- V or drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc.,
tor lever to position P or the manual gear and from the high-voltage ignition system.
lever to the neutral position. Always be extremely cautious.
– Turn the ignition off and remove the vehi- – Always ensure that no body parts, jewel-
cle key from the ignition lock. lery, ties, loose items of clothing or long
– Always keep children away from the en- hair can be caught up in rotating engine
gine compartment and never leave the ve- components. Before starting work, remove
hicle unattended. any jewellery and ties, tie up long hair and
pull clothes in tightly to avoid them get-
● The engine cooling system is under pressure ting caught in the engine compartment.
when the engine is hot. Never open the cap
– Always depress the accelerator carefully
of the coolant expansion tank when the en-
and never thoughtlessly. The vehicle can
gine is hot. Coolant may spray out and cause
move even while the handbrake is applied.
severe burns and injuries.
– After cooling, turn the cap slowly and very ● Always make sure you have not left any ob-
carefully anticlockwise while exerting jects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in
some downwards pressure on the cap. the engine compartment. Any forgotten
items can cause malfunctions, engine dam-
– Always protect the face, hands and arms
age and fires.
from hot coolant or steam with a large,
thick cloth.
WARNING
● When refilling, do not spill any service fluids
on engine components or on the exhaust Additional insulations such as covering the en-
system. Spilt service fluids may start fires. gine compartment, may damage the running of
the engine, cause fire and severe injuries.
WARNING ● Never cover the engine with covers or other
isolations.
The high voltage in the electrical system can
cause electric shocks, burns, serious injuries
and death!
WARNING
● Never short circuit the electric system. The Operating fluids and some materials in the en-
vehicle battery could explode. gine compartment are highly flammable and
may cause fires and severe injuries!
● Please note the following guidelines to help
reduce the risk of an electric shock and seri- ● Never smoke around the engine compart-
ous injuries while the engine is running or ment.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

being started: ● Never work near naked flames or sparks. 

– Never touch the electrical wiring of the ig-
nition system.

Checking and refuelling 197

● Never spill fluids onto the engine. They could WARNING
ignite on hot engine components and cause
Ignoring any of the points on this important
injuries.
safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju-
● Please note the following when carrying out ries.
any work on the fuel system or the electrical
● Always follow the instructions on the check-
system:
list and comply with applicable safety pre-
– Always disconnect the vehicle battery. En- cautions. 
sure that the vehicle is unlocked before
the battery is disconnected. Otherwise,
the alarm system will be activated.
– Never work in the direct proximity of heat- Opening and closing the engine
ing systems, water heaters or any other compartment cover
open flames.

NOTICE
When refilling or changing operating fluids
please ensure that the fluids are in the correct
container. Incorrect operating fluids can cause
serious functional problems and engine dam-
ages!

Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-

ronment. Regularly check the ground un-
derneath your vehicle. If there are spots of oil or
other fluids on the ground, the vehicle must be
inspected by a Volkswagen Dealership. 

Preparing the vehicle for working in

the engine compartment
Checklist
The following steps should always be carried out
in the specified order before working in the en- Fig. 167  Bonnet release lever on the driver side
gine compartment→ : footwell.  Bonnet release lever on the inner side of
the bonnet. 
 Park the vehicle on a levelled and stable sur-
face.
 Depress and hold the brake pedal until the
engine has stopped.
 Apply the handbrake → page 136.
 Position the gear shift lever in the neutral
position → page 107 or move the selector
lever to position P → page 108. .
 Stop the engine and remove the key from the
ignition lock.
 Allow the engine to cool down sufficiently.
 Children and other people should be kept
well away from the engine compartment.
 Ensure that the vehicle cannot roll away un-
expectedly.

198 Owner's Manual

 The engine compartment cover sits flush with
the body parts around it when it is closed proper-
ly.

WARNING
When the open bonnet supported by the bon-
net stay, do not push or apply additional force
to close the bonnet, since this could cause bon-
net damages and severe injuries.

WARNING
If the engine compartment cover is not closed
properly, it can open suddenly while you are
driving and completely obscure your view of
the road. This could lead to accidents and se-
vere injuries.
● After closing the engine compartment cover,
always check that it is properly secured. The
engine compartment cover must be flush
with the surrounding body panels.
● If you notice that the bonnet is not closed
properly while the vehicle is in motion, stop
the vehicle as soon as possible and close the
Fig. 168  Bonnet stay.  Bonnet secured with the bonnet.
bonnet stay.
● Open or close the engine compartment cover
Opening the engine compartment cover only when you are sure that nobody is in its
path.
– Ensure that the windscreen wiper arms are
positioned on the windscreen before opening
the bonnet → . NOTICE
– Open the driver door and pull the release lever The bonnet should only be opened when the
in the direction indicated by the arrow wiper arms are flush to the windows in order to
→ Fig. 167  1 . The bonnet is released from avoid damage to the bonnet and window wiper
its lock by a spring mechanism → . arms. 
– To fully open the bonnet raise it slightly and at
the same time press the release lever on the
inner side of the bonnet in the direction indi-
cated by the arrow → Fig. 167  2 .
– Take the bonnet stay out of the holder as indi-
cated by the arrow → Fig. 168  and insert it
into the opening in the bonnet → Fig. 168 .

Closing the engine compartment cover

– Lift the bonnet slightly → .
– Take the bonnet stay out of the opening in the
bonnet → Fig. 168  and place it back into its
resting position holder on the lock carrier
→ Fig. 168 .
– Release the bonnet at approximately 20 cm
25A.5L1.TCR.20

from the lock – do not press down!

If the bonnet is not closed, open it again and
close it properly.

Checking and refuelling 199

Display indication Dealership or qualified workshop. Volkswagen
Dealerships are always updated about innova-
tions.

WARNING
Unsuitable service fluids and consumables, and
the incorrect use of these fluids and consuma-
bles, can cause accidents, serious injuries, burns
or poisoning.
● Service fluids must be kept in their original
sealed container.
● Never store service fluids in empty food con-
tainers, bottles or any other non-original
containers as people finding these containers
could drink them.
Fig. 169 On the instrument cluster display: incor- ● Keep children away from all service fluids
rectly closed or open bonnet (schematic representa- and consumables.
tion).
● Always read and follow the information and
According to the version of the vehicle the repre- warnings on the service fluid packaging.
sentation of the bonnet on the display may not ● When using products that give off harmful
be available. fumes, always work outdoors or in a well
ventilated area.
A symbolic representation → Fig. 169 on the in-
strument cluster display indicates that the bon- ● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail
net is open or is not correctly closed. varnish remover or other volatile fluids to
wash, clean or care for your vehicle. These
 Stop driving! if necessary lift and close the substances are poisonous and highly flam-
bonnet again. mable. They could cause fires and explo-
The representation is also visible with the igni- sions!
tion turned off and is deleted a few minutes after
the vehicle is locked with closed doors. NOTICE
● Only use suitable service fluids for refilling.
WARNING Never use the service fluids not recommended.
Not heeding the warning indications may cause Failure to observe this warning can result in
stoppages of the vehicle in the traffic, acci- serious faults and engine damages!
dents and severe injuries. ● Optional equipment and other accessories in
● Never ignore lit warning lamps. front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect
● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and safe of the coolant. The engine may overheat at
to do so. high ambient temperatures and high engine
loads!
According to the instrument cluster model,
the display of the icons may vary.  Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-
ronment. Regularly check the ground un-
derneath your vehicle. If there are spots of oil or
other fluids on the ground, the vehicle must be
Service fluids and inspected by a Volkswagen Dealership. 
consumables
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. toothed
belts, tyres, coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and
vehicle batteries, are being constantly perfec-
tioned. For this reason, service fluids and con-
sumables should be replaced at a Volkswagen

200 Owner's Manual

 Washer fluid ● Never mix up service fluids when refilling! Fail-
ure to observe this warning can result in seri-
ous faults and engine damages! 

Engine oil

 Introduction

WARNING
Incorrect handling of engine oil can cause se-
vere burns and injuries.
Fig. 170 On the engine compartment: window
● Always wear eye protection when handling
washer fluid reservoir cap.
engine oil.
The window washer fluid level should be checked ● Engine oil is toxic and must be stored out of
regularly and topped up as necessary. the reach of children.
– Open the bonnet  → page 196. ● Engine oil must be kept in the closed original
container. This also applies to used oil before
– The washer fluid reservoir is identified by
proper disposal.
the  symbol on its cap → Fig. 170.
● Never use empty food containers, bottles or
– Check whether there is enough window wash-
other containers to store engine oil, since
er fluid in the reservoir.
other people may then drink the engine oil.
– To top up, mix clean water with a washer fluid
● Regular contact with engine oil can damage
recommended by Volkswagen → . Observe
the skin. Skin that has been in contact with
the dilution instructions on the packaging.
engine oil should be washed thoroughly with
– At low temperatures, add a special antifreeze water and soap.
agent so that the fluid cannot freeze → .
● Engine oil becomes extremely hot when the
Check the window washer water reservoir ca- engine is running and may scald skin severe-
pacity in → page 254. ly. Always allow the engine to cool down.

WARNING Leaking or spilt engine oil can pollute the

environment. In order to prevent such
Never mix antifreeze or other unsuitable addi- event, replace the engine oil preferably at a
tives into the window washer fluid. An oily film Volkswagen Dealership, which is equipped with
may otherwise be left on the screen, compro- special tools and qualification to properly dispose
mising visibility. of used engine oil.
● Use clean water with a washer fluid recom- ● If engine oil or other fluid stains are found on
mended by Volkswagen. the floor, underneath the vehicle, Volkswagen
● Suitable antifreeze agents may be added to recommends inspecting the vehicle, preferably
the window washer fluid, if necessary. at a Volkswagen Dealership. 

NOTICE
● Never mix other cleaning agents with the
cleaning agents recommended by Volkswagen.
This may cause the components to coagulate
25A.5L1.TCR.20

and, as a result, clog the window wiper noz-

zles.

Checking and refuelling 201

Engine oil specification lowed, especially when the vehicle is used in ad-
verse conditions, which requires greater frequen-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter cy of such services.
on page 201. The engine oil and filter must be changed by
qualified workshops due to the fact that such
VW 508 88 is the standard engine oil in your procedure requires special tools and expertise.
Volkswagen. This standard must be described on This also ensures proper disposal of used oil.
the oil packaging. Engine oils approved by Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen
Volkswagen are available at Volkswagen Dealer- Dealership for this purpose.
ships.
More information on service intervals can be
When refuelling, engine oils approved by found at → page 231.
Volkswagen according to the VW 508 88 stand-
ard can be mixed with each other. WARNING
If, in an emergency, no approved VW 508 88 If, in exceptional cases, you have to carry out an
standard engine oil is available, you may tempo- oil change yourself, please note the following:
rarily use an engine oil that meets the following ● Always wear eye protection.
requirements: ACEA A3/B4 specification with the
● Always allow the engine to cool down com-
following viscosity grades: SAE 0W 30, SAE 0W
pletely to avoid burns.
40, SAE 5W 30, SAE 5W 40, SAE 10W 30 or SAE
10W 40. However, we recommend seeking a ● Keep your arms horizontal when removing
Volkswagen Dealership as soon as possible for the oil drain plug with your fingers to help
the oil change with factory approved engine oil. prevent oil from running down your arm.
● Use a suitable container when draining the
Engine oil specifications are available in the
used oil. It must be at least large enough to
product package.
hold the entire quantity of engine oil re-
Engine oils are constantly being developed and quired for refilling.
improved. Volkswagen Dealerships are always ● Never store engine oil in empty food con-
updated about innovations. That is why tainers, bottles or any other non-original
Volkswagen recommends having engine oil containers as people finding these containers
changes performed at a Volkswagen Dealership. may not know that they contain engine oil.
NOTICE ● Engine oil is toxic and must be stored out of
the reach of children.
● Use only expressly Volkswagen approved en-
gine oil specifications. Using other engine oils
NOTICE
may cause damages to the engine!
Do not mix additional lubricating additives to the
● Do not mix additional lubricating additives to
engine oil. Damages caused by such additives are
the engine oil. Damages caused by such addi-
not covered by the warranty.
tives are not covered by the warranty.
● Damages to the engine caused by using oil Volkswagen recommends replacing the oil
that does not meet the VW 508 88 standard and filter preferably at a Volkswagen Deal-
are excluded from the warranty.  ership, which is equipped with special tools and
qualification to properly dispose of used engine
oil.
● Never dispose of old oil in locations such as
Changing the engine oil gardens, woods, sewerage systems, on streets
and roads, or in rivers and waterways.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 201. ● In order to completely drain used oil, use an
appropriate and sufficient recipient to collect
The engine oil must be regularly renewed. Ob- all of the engine oil; refer to → page 254. 
serve which service interval applies to the vehicle
→ page 231. Ensure that such frequency is fol-

202 Owner's Manual

 Engine oil consumption
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 201.

Engine oil consumption may vary from engine to

engine. Due to the design of internal combustion
engines, in order to adequately lubricate compo-
nents, part of the engine oil is consumed during
normal engine operation. Therefore, engine oil
consumption may vary throughout the engine's
service life. In addition, depending on driving be-
haviors and vehicle use conditions, oil consump-
tion may reach up to 0.5 l in 1,000 km. Engine oil Fig. 172 On the engine compartment: engine oil
level must therefore be checked at regular inter- opening lid.
vals – preferably when refuelling and before long
journeys.
Key for → Fig. 171:
When the engine is working hard, the oil level A No filling up required.
must be kept within the → Fig. 171 A area – for
instance during long motorway cruising in sum- B Engine oil level in order.
mer or climbing mountain passes.  C Engine oil level too low - fill engine oil up.

Checklist
Carry out the steps in the specified order→ :
Checking the engine oil level and
1. With the engine at operating temperature,
refilling engine oil park the vehicle on a level surface to ensure
that the engine oil reading is correct.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
on page 201. 2. Switch off the engine and wait a few minutes
for the engine oil to flow back into the sump.
3. Open the bonnet  → page 196.
4. Identify the engine oil filler cap and oil dip-
stick. The engine oil filler opening bears the
 symbol on the cap → Fig. 172 and the oil
dipstick has a coloured handle. If you cannot
find the cap and dipstick please contact a
Volkswagen Dealership or qualified work-
shop.
5. Pull the dipstick out of the guide tube and
wipe it off with a clean cloth → .
6. Insert the oil dipstick into the guide tube
again as far as it will go. If the oil dipstick has
a marking, it must be adjusted to the corre-
Fig. 171 Oil dipstick with markings. sponding groove on the upper edge of the
guide tube upon insertion.
7. Pull the dipstick out again and read the en-
gine oil level on the dipstick → Fig. 171 as
follows:
A Do not refill oil → . Proceed to step 16. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Checking and refuelling 203

Checklist (Continued)
NOTICE
B Correct oil level. Refill with oil (approxi- ● Do not start the engine when the engine oil
mately 0.5 l). Proceed to step 8 or 16. level is above the range→ Fig. 171 A . Go to a
C recommended oil must be refilled until Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop.
level reaches region B . Proceed to step 8. The catalytic converter and the engine could
8. After reading the oil level, push the oil dip- otherwise be damaged!
stick back into the guide tube as far as it will ● When refilling or changing operating fluids
go. please ensure that the fluids are in the correct
9. Unscrew the engine oil filler opening cap container. Incorrect operating fluids can cause
→ Fig. 172. serious functional problems and engine dam-
ages.
10. Only refill with engine oils approved by
Volkswagen gradually, in small quantities (up
to 0.5 l). NOTICE
11. To avoid overfilling, wait for approximately Use only cloths that don't shred to clean the oil
one minute after each pour to allow the en- dipstick, since such shredding could damage the
gine oil to flow into the oil sump up to the engine.
marking on the engine oil dipstick.
The engine oil level must never exceed the
12. Read the engine oil level from the dipstick → Fig. 171 A region, otherwise, the oil may
again before refilling with a further small be aspirated by the crankcase ventilation and dis-
quantity of engine oil. Never overfill engine charged into the atmosphere by the exhaust sys-
oil → . tem. Additionally, oil may be combusted inside
13. After the refilling procedure, the engine oil the catalytic converter, damaging it.
level must be at least in the centre of area
Leaking or spilt engine oil can pollute the
→ Fig. 171 B , but never above area A → .
environment. In order to prevent such
14. If excess oil is accidentally refilled and the event, Volkswagen recommends replacing the
engine oil level is above the → Fig. 171 A engine oil preferably at a Volkswagen Dealership,
mark, do not start the engine. Go to a which is equipped with special tools and qualifi-
Volkswagen Dealership or qualified work- cation to properly dispose of used engine oil. 
shop.
15. After refilling, screw the engine oil filler cap
back on correctly.
Troubleshooting
16. Correctly insert the oil dipstick into the guide
tube again as far as it will go.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
17. Close the bonnet correctly  → page 196. on page 201.
Check the engine oil level in → page 254.
Warning lamps and text messages may light up
WARNING and be displayed on the instrument cluster dis-
play. In addition, acoustic signals may be soun-
Engine oil can ignite if it comes into contact ded. 
with hot engine components. This may cause
fires, serious burns and injuries.
● If engine oil is spilt on cold engine parts it
can heat up and ignite when the engine is
running.
● Always ensure that the engine oil filler cap is
securely tightened after refilling, and that
the dipstick is properly inserted back into the
guide tube. This will prevent the engine oil
from draining out on to hot engine compo-
nents when the engine is running.

204 Owner's Manual

 Engine oil Engine coolant
Central warning lamp 
 Introduction
and  On: engine oil pressure too low. 
Stop driving! Switch off the engine. Check
the engine oil and refill if necessary Never carry out any work on the engine coolant
→ page 203. If the warning light remains lit system if you are not familiar with the requisite
and the oil level is suitable, do not drive on procedures, or if you do not have access to the
or keep the engine running. The engine correct tools, operating equipment and fluids
could otherwise be damaged. Get immedi- → ! In this case, all activities must be carried
ate assistance from a Volkswagen dealer- out by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recom-
ship or specialized company. mends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this
purpose.
Fill up with engine oil. Engine oil level too
and  low. Switch off the engine. Check en- Serious injuries can be caused if work is carried
gine oil level → page 203. out incorrectly.

Central warning lamp  WARNING

Check oil level. Engine oil level too low. Engine coolant is toxic!
and  Switch off the engine. Check engine oil ● Engine coolant must only be kept in sealed
level → page 203. original containers in a safe place.
On: Engine oil level very low. Switch off ● Never store engine coolant in empty food
and  the engine. Check engine oil level containers, bottles or any other non-original
→ page 203. containers as people finding these containers
Flashing: engine oil system damaged. may then drink the engine coolant.
and  Get immediate assistance from a ● The engine coolant must be stored out of the
Volkswagen dealership or specialized com- reach of children.
pany.
● Please note that the amount of correct cool-
WARNING ant additive used must be sufficient for the
lowest ambient temperature that you expect
Failure to observe the warning lamps and text the vehicle to be exposed to.
messages could lead to your vehicle breaking
● Coolant can freeze at extremely cold outside
down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
temperatures, causing the vehicle to break
juries.
down. In this case, the internal vehicle heat-
● Never ignore warning lamps or text messag- ing will also no longer function, which may
es. lower the body temperature of vehicle occu-
● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and pants with inadequate winter clothing.
when safe to do so. ● Prolonged exposure to cold and loss of body
heat are hazardous factors to human health.
The oil pressure warning lamp  is not in-
dicative of the engine oil level. The engine Under no circumstance may old engine
oil level must be controlled in regular intervals, coolant be reused. Observe specific disposal
preferably whenever the tank is filled.  regulations for this product.

Volkswagen recommends changing or refill-

ing the engine coolant and its additives at a
Volkswagen Dealership, which has proper fluid
disposal procedures. Never dispose of used fluids
in locations such as gardens, woods, sewerage
25A.5L1.TCR.20

systems, on streets and roads, or in rivers and

waterways. 

Checking and refuelling 205

Engine coolant specifications NOTICE
Never mix genuine coolant additives with other
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter coolants that have not been approved by
on page 205. Volkswagen. Mixing with non-approved coolants
could cause serious damage to the engine and
The engine cooling system is factory supplied cooling system.
with a mixture of distilled water and 40% engine
● Brown liquid in the coolant expansion tank in-
coolant additive.
dicates that the engine coolant has been con-
This mixture provides the necessary antifreeze of taminated. he coolant must be changed as
up to -25° C (-13° F) and protects the alloy parts soon as possible if this is the case. Failure to
of the cooling system against corrosion. The mix- observe this warning can result in serious
ture also prevents scaling and raises the boiling faults and engine damages!
point of the coolant.
Under no circumstance may old engine
In order to protect the coolant system, the pro-
coolant be reused. Observe specific disposal
portion of coolant additive must always be at
regulations for this product.
least 40%, even if antifreeze is not required in
warm weather and warm climates. Volkswagen recommends changing or refill-
If greater antifreeze is required in very cold cli- ing the engine coolant and its additives at a
mates, the proportion of antifreeze additive can Volkswagen Dealership, which has proper fluid
be increased. However, the percentage of cool- disposal procedures. Never dispose of used fluids
ant additive must not exceed 60%, as this would in locations such as gardens, woods, sewerage
reduce the antifreeze and the cooling effect. systems, on streets and roads, or in rivers and
waterways. 
When topping up the coolant, a mixture of distil-
led water and at least 40% coolant additive must
be used for engines G 12 plus-plus or G 12evo
(both lilac colour) in order to obtain the optimum Checking coolant level and refilling
corrosion protection → . coolant
The G 12evo coolant acquired in the Brazilian
market is ready for use, with proper distilled wa-  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
ter and coolant ratios. on page 205.

Mixing G 12evo with the engine coolants G 13

(TL-VW 774 J), G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G), G
12 plus (TL-VW 774 F) or G 12 (red colour) signif-
icantly compromises ant-corrosion properties
and must be avoided.
G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F) or G 12 (red) significant-
ly compromises anti-corrosion protection and
must be avoided → .
Refer to Volkswagen Dealerships for more infor-
mation on coolants approved by Volkswagen.
That is why Volkswagen recommends having en-
gine oil changes done by a Volkswagen dealer-
ship.
Fig. 173 On the engine compartment: marking on
WARNING the coolant expansion tank. 
Insufficient antifreeze in the coolant system
can cause the engine to break down.
● Ensure that the correct engine coolant addi-
tive ratio is used based on the ambient tem-
perature to which the vehicle is exposed.

206 Owner's Manual

 WARNING
Hot steam or engine coolant can cause severe
burns.
● Never open the bonnet if steam or engine
coolant can be seen or heard coming out of
the engine compartment. Always wait until
no escaping steam or coolant can be seen or
heard.
● Always let the engine cool down completely
before carefully opening the bonnet. Hot
Fig. 174 On the engine compartment: engine cool-
parts may cause burns when touched.
ant expansion tank cover.
● Before opening the engine compartment
The warning lamp for the engine coolant will cover once it has cooled down:
light up if the engine coolant level is too low. – Apply the handbrake and move the selec-
tor lever to position P or the manual gear
Preparations lever to the neutral position.
– Park the vehicle in a flat and steady surface. – Turn the ignition off and remove the vehi-
– Allow the engine to cool down → . cle key from the ignition lock.
– Open the bonnet  → page 196. – Always keep children away from the en-
– The coolant expansion tank has the  symbol gine compartment and never leave the ve-
on its cap → Fig. 174. hicle unattended.
● The engine cooling system is under pressure
Checking the engine coolant level when the engine is hot. Never open the cap
– Check the coolant level at the side marking of of the coolant expansion tank when the en-
the expansion tank when the engine is cold gine is hot. Coolant may spray out and cause
→ Fig. 173. severe burns and injuries.
– Refill the engine coolant if the liquid level is – Turn the cap slowly and very carefully an-
below the minimum marking (“min”). When ticlockwise while exerting some down-
the engine is warm, the coolant level may be wards pressure on the cap.
slightly above the top end of the marked area. – Always protect the face, hands and arms
from hot coolant or steam with a large,
Refilling engine coolant thick cloth.
– Always protect your hands and arms from hot ● When refilling, do not spill any service fluids
coolant or steam by placing a suitable cloth on on engine components or on the exhaust
the cap of the coolant expansion tank. system. Spilt service fluids may start fires. In
– Carefully unscrew the cap → anticlockwise. certain circumstances, the ethylene glycol in
the engine can catch fire.
– Refill only new coolant according to
Volkswagen specifications (→ page 206) → .
NOTICE
– The coolant level must be between the marks
on the expansion tank → Fig. 173. Do not ex- ● Do not exceed the upper level marker when
ceed the upper level marker when filling up filling up with engine coolant → Fig. 173. Oth-
→ ! erwise the excess coolant will be pressed out
of the cooling system when the engine is hot
– Firmly screw-in the cap clockwise.
and could cause damage.
– If in an emergency you do not have access to
● If a large amount of coolant has been lost, do
the coolant of the required specification, do
not refill the coolant until the engine has com-
not use any other coolant additive! Instead,
pletely cooled. Substantial coolant loss is an
top off with distilled → only. Then add the
indication of leaks in the engine cooling sys-
25A.5L1.TCR.20

correct proportion of coolant additive

tem. The engine cooling system must be
→ page 206 to re-established as soon as possi-
checked by a Volkswagen Dealership. Failure
ble.the correct mix.
to do so can result in engine damage! 

Checking and refuelling 207

● When refilling operating fluids, please ensure Brake fluid level
that the correct container is filled. The use of
incorrect operating fluids could result in seri-  Brake fluid level is too low.  Stop driv-
ous malfunctions and engine damage!  ing! Check brake fluid level.
The brake fluid level must always be between the
MIN and MAX marking on the brake fluid contain-
er or above the MIN marking → .
Brake fluid
The brake fluid level cannot be checked accurate-
ly in all models, since engine components con-
ceal the brake fluid container. When the brake
fluid level cannot be accurately read, please seek
a Volkswagen dealership or expert technical as-
sistance.
The brake fluid level drops slightly when the ve-
hicle is being used as the brake pads wear and
the brakes are automatically adjusted.

Changing brake fluid

The brake fluid must be changed by a qualified
workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a
Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Only
Fig. 175 On the engine compartment: brake fluid brake fluid that conforms with the required spec-
reservoir cap. ification should be refilled.

Brake fluid will gradually absorb water from the WARNING

surrounding air. The brake system will be dam- Brake failure or reduced braking effect can be
aged if there is too much water in the brake fluid. caused by the brake fluid level being too low or
The boiling point of the brake fluid is also consid- by brake fluid that is too old or unsuitable.
erably reduced by the water content. Heavy use
● The brake system and brake fluid level must
of the brakes may cause a vapour lock in the
be checked regularly.
brake system if the water content is too high. Va-
pour locks reduce levels of braking power, con- ● Renew the brake fluid regularly.
siderably increase braking distance and can even ● Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour
cause the brake system to fail completely. Your lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for
own safety and that of other road users depends too long. Vapour locks reduce levels of brak-
on having a brake system that functions properly ing power, considerably increase braking dis-
at all times → . tance and can even cause the brake system
to fail completely.
Brake fluid specification
● Please ensure that the correct brake fluid is
Volkswagen has developed a brake fluid opti- used. Only use brake fluid compliant with the
mised for the brake system in the vehicle. To en- DOT 4 standard. Any other brake fluid or a
sure optimal operation of the brake system, low-quality one can affect the functioning of
Volkswagen recommends the use of DOT 4 the brakes and reduce their effectiveness. Do
standard brake fluid → Fig. 175. Additionally, we not use the brake fluid if the DOT 4 standard
recommend using original Volkswagen brake flu- is not indicated in the fluid package.
id.
● The refilled brake fluid must be new.
Before using a particular brake fluid, check that
the specifications printed on the container corre- WARNING
spond to the vehicle requirements.
Brake fluid is toxic. 
Suitable brake fluids may be acquired at a
Volkswagen Dealership.

208 Owner's Manual

 ● In order to reduce the risk of poisoning, nev- Vehicle battery installation location
er use bottles or other containers to store The vehicle battery is located in the engine com-
brake fluid. These containers could partment.
encourage other people to drink out of them,
even if they are labelled otherwise. Meaning of warnings on the vehicle battery
● Brake fluid must always be stored in its origi- Always wear eye protection!
nal sealed container and kept out of the

reach of children. Electrolyte is very corrosive and caustic.
 Always wear protective gloves and eye
protection!
NOTICE
Fires, sparks, smoke, and naked lights are
Spilt or leaked brake fluid may damage the vehi-  prohibited!
cle paintwork, plastic parts, and tyres. Immedi-
A highly explosive mixture of gases is given
ately clean spilt or leaked brake fluid over the ve-
hicle's paintwork or other vehicle parts.
 off when the vehicle battery is charging!
Always keep children away from acid and
● Never mix different types of brake fluids.  the vehicle battery!
● Clean the cover before removing it and placing
it back in the reservoir. WARNING
Brake fluid can pollute the environment. Works on the vehicle battery and the electrical
Collect and dispose of used fluids properly. system can cause severe chemical burns, fire
and electric shocks. Always read the following
Replacing brake fluids requires special pro- warnings and safety information before carry-
cedures, equipment and knowledge, in ad- ing out any kind of work:
dition to specific environmental standards.
● Switch off the ignition and all electrical con-
Therefore, disposing the brake fluid and its re-
sumers before carrying out any work on the
spective package as common trash is prohibited.
vehicle battery and also disconnect the neg-
Applicable laws establish specific disposal proce-
ative cable from the vehicle battery.
dures for these cases. For your safety and con-
venience, Volkswagen recommends replacing the ● Children should always be kept away from
brake fluid at Volkswagen Dealerships.  electrolyte and the vehicle battery.
● Always wear eye protection.
● Electrolyte is very aggressive. It can burn the
skin and can cause blindness. When working
Vehicle battery with the battery, ensure that your hands,
arms and face in particular are protected
from acid spillages.
 Introduction ● Never open a vehicle battery.
● Do not smoke and never work near naked
flames or sparks.
The vehicle battery is a component of the electri-
cal system in the vehicle. ● When handling cables and electrical equip-
ment, avoid generating sparks and electro-
Never carry out any work on the electrical system static charge.
if you are not familiar with the necessary proce-
● Never short circuit the battery poles.
dures and the general safety requirements and
only unsuitable tools are available → ! In this ● Never use a damaged vehicle battery. It can
case, all activities must be carried out by a quali- explode. A damaged vehicle battery must be
fied workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a replaced as soon as possible.
Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Serious ● A damaged or frozen vehicle battery must be
injuries can be caused if work is carried out incor- replaced immediately. A discharged vehicle
rectly. battery can even freeze at temperatures of
25A.5L1.TCR.20

around 0° C (+32° F). 

Checking and refuelling 209

● Ensure there is no one inside the vehicle Checking the electrolyte level of
while replacing the battery. In case of elec-
the vehicle battery
trical failure, airbags may be accidentally en-
gaged and cause severe or even fatal injuries  Please refer to and at the start of the
to vehicle occupants. chapter on page 209.

NOTICE
● Never disconnect the vehicle battery with the
ignition switched on or the engine running,
and never connect it to another battery; other-
wise the electrical system and electronic com-
ponents may be damaged.
● Do not allow direct sunlight onto the vehicle
battery for extended periods, since the UV rays
could damage the battery housing.
● If the vehicle is parked for extended periods,
ensure the vehicle is not parked in open spaces
in order to protect the vehicle battery from
“freezing” and being damaged.
Fig. 176 On the engine compartment: example of
Never install damaged or improperly sealed display position on the upper side of the vehicle bat-
batteries. Dispose of batteries according to tery.
environment protection standards → page 211,
Charging, replacing, disconnecting and connect- The electrolyte level of high-mileage batteries, in
ing the vehicle battery. hot countries and of older vehicle batteries
should be checked regularly. The vehicle battery
After starting the engine with a fully dis-
is otherwise maintenance-free.
charged or replaced battery, system set-
tings (such as time, date, convenience settings Preparations
and programs) may have been deprogrammed or
– Preparation for working in the engine com-
deleted. Check and adjust settings after the vehi-
partment→ page 196
cle battery is sufficiently charged. 
– Open the bonnet  → page 198.

Checking the electrolyte level

To access the round visor it is necessary to re-
move the fuse box support from the battery.
Volkswagen recommends having the battery
checked at a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
workshop.
– Ensure that sufficient light is available in order
to see the colours clearly. Never use naked
flames or glowing items as a light source.
– The round display → Fig. 176 on the top side of
the vehicle battery changes its colour accord-
ing to the electrolyte level.
– Tap lightly on the display to eliminate air bub-
bles that may affect the colour. 

210 Owner's Manual

 Light yellow or without colour The electrolyte Charging, replacing, disconnecting
level of the battery is too low. The vehicle
battery should be checked and replaced by and connecting the vehicle battery
a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified work-
shop.  Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 209.
Black The electrolyte level of the battery is in or-
der.
Eventual different colours are destined to battery
diagnosis at a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
workshop.

WARNING
Handling the vehicle battery may cause chemi-
cal burns, explosions or severe electrical
shocks.
● Always wear protective gloves and eye pro-
tection.
● Electrolyte is very aggressive. It can burn the
skin and can cause blindness. When working
with the battery, ensure that your hands, Fig. 177 Batteries contain toxic substances and
arms and face in particular are protected must be recycled. Therefore, batteries may not be
from acid spillages. disposed in common trash; they must be returned to
the reseller after replacement.
● Never tip the vehicle battery. Electrolyte
might leak from the vents and cause chemi- Charging the battery
cal burns. The vehicle battery should be charged by a quali-
● Never open a vehicle battery. fied workshop, as the technology used in factory-
● In case of spilled electrolyte on the skin or fitted batteries requires voltage-limited charging
eyes, wash the affected area immediately → . Volkswagen recommends using a
with cold water for a few minutes. Then seek Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose.
medical assistance.
Replacing the battery
● In case of electrolyte ingestion, seek medical
assistance immediately. The battery has been developed to suit the con-

ditions of its location and has special safety fea-
tures. If a vehicle battery has to be replaced, dis-
cuss the electric compatibility, appropriate load
capacity (A/h) for the vehicle, size and necessary
servicing, output and safety requirements for the
new vehicle battery with a Volkswagen Dealer-
ship before purchasing. Volkswagen recommends
changing the vehicle battery in a Volkswagen
Dealership.

Disconnecting the battery

Please note the following points if the vehicle
battery has to be disconnected from the electri-
cal system in the vehicle: 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Checking and refuelling 211

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical con- – Slow-gear rotation is increased in order for the
sumers. alternator to provide more current.
– The vehicle must be unlocked before discon- – If necessary, some power consumers are limi-
necting the battery as the alarm will otherwise ted or deactivated completely, in case of
be triggered. emergency.
– First disconnect the negative cable and then – During engine start-up, the 12 V and lighter
the positive cable → . voltage supply may be temporarily interrupted.
If the vehicle is stationary for a long period of The electric management system does not al-
time, disconnect the negative battery cable. Oth- ways prevent the battery from being discharged.
erwise, the battery could be discharged by the This may occur if the ignition remains switched
current consumers in the vehicle, preventing the on while the engine is turned off for extended
engine from starting. periods, of if the indicator light remains on for
extended periods, while the vehicle is parked.
Connecting the battery
– Switch off all electrical consumers and the ig- What can cause the vehicle battery to
nition before reconnecting the vehicle battery. discharge?
– First connect the positive cable and then the – Long periods at a standstill in which the en-
negative cable → . gine is not running, especially if the ignition is
switched on.
In case of issues during start-up in low gears,
– Use of electrical consumers when the engine is
switch the ignition on for 30 seconds and then
switched off.
switch it off. Then, switch the engine on.
Various indicator lamps may light up after the ve- WARNING
hicle battery has been connected and the ignition Incorrect attachment of the battery and the use
is switched on. Such lamps go out after a few of incorrect vehicle batteries can cause short
seconds. If the indicator lamps remain lit up, the circuits, fire and serious injuries.
vehicle should be checked by a Volkswagen Deal-
ership. ● Always use maintenance-free and leak proof
batteries which have the same properties,
If the vehicle battery was disconnected for long specifications and dimensions as the factory-
periods, the system may not able to calculate or fitted vehicle battery.
correctly display the time when the next service
● Ensure there is no one inside the vehicle
is due → page 14. Observe the maximum permis-
while replacing the battery. In case of elec-
sible service intervals in the → page 231.
trical failure, airbags may be accidentally en-
Vehicles with Keyless Access: if, after connecting gaged and cause severe or even fatal injuries
the battery the ignition cannot be turned on, un- to vehicle occupants.
lock and lock the vehicle from outside. Then try
to turn the ignition on again. Case the ignition WARNING
can still not be turned on, contact a Volkswagen
A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off
dealership.
when the vehicle battery is charging!
Automatic consumer deactivation ● Vehicle batteries should only be charged in
Through a smart electric management system, in well-ventilated spaces.
case of high battery demand, different measures ● Never charge a frozen or defrosted vehicle
are adopted to prevent the battery from being battery. A discharged vehicle battery can
discharged: even freeze at temperatures of around 0° C
(+32° F).
● A vehicle battery must be replaced if it has
been frozen.
● Incorrectly connected cables can cause a
short circuit. First connect the positive cable
and then the negative cable. 

212 Owner's Manual

 NOTICE For vehicles with Start-Stop system, the Start-
Stop system cannot start the engine → page 105.
● Only recode the radio if the battery is recon-
nected and the radio is switched on before the
ignition. Please refer to a qualified Volkswagen
Central warning lamp 
Dealership to recode the radio system. Low battery.
and 
● Never disconnect or connect the vehicle bat-
tery with the ignition switched on or the en- The vehicle battery is charged by the alternator
gine running, and never connect it to another while driving however the charge level is not suf-
battery; otherwise the electrical system and ficient
electronic components may be damaged. – Charge the battery by driving around for a lon-
● Never connect equipment which generates ger period of time.
electricity, such as solar panels or battery For vehicles with Start-Stop system, the Start-
charging units for charging the vehicle battery, Stop system cannot start the engine → page 105.
to the 12-volt socket or to the cigarette light-
Replace the battery.
er. This can damage the vehicle electrical sys-
tem.

The vehicle battery is not in good condition.
Batteries may contain toxic substances such – Go to a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
as sulphuric acid and lead. This product can- workshop.
not be disposed / discarded along with common
trash. There are specific legal requirements re- For vehicles with Start-Stop system, the Start-
garding the disposal / discarding of used batter- Stop system cannot start the engine → page 105.
ies. For your safety and convenience, Volkswagen When switching the ignition on, certain warning
recommends replacing vehicle batteries at a and indicator lamps flash to check functions.
Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Such lamps go out after a few seconds.
The acid solution and lead contained in the
battery could contaminate the ground and WARNING
waters if disposed of incorrectly. Consumption of Failure to observe the warning lamps and text
lead-contaminated waters may cause high blood messages could lead to your vehicle breaking
pressure, several gastrointestinal disorders and down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
anaemia (weakness and drowsiness).  juries.
● Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
sages that appear.
Troubleshooting ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and
when safe to do so.
 Please refer to and at the start of the
chapter on page 209. NOTICE
Failure to observe the illuminated indicator
Vehicle battery lamps could lead to vehicle damages. 

Central warning lamp 

Fault in the alternator. The vehicle battery is not
and  be charged by the alternator.
The vehicle battery will not be charged by the al-
ternator while the vehicle is in motion.
– Switch off unnecessary electrical consumers.
– Go to a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
workshop.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

– Have the electric system checked.

Checking and refuelling 213

Wheels and tyres Do not rely only on the tyre monitoring sys-
tem. Regularly check the tyres to ensure
that their pressures are correct and to see
Tyre monitoring system whether there are signs of damage, such as
holes, cuts, cracks or bubbles. Remove foreign
bodies from the tread of the tyre before they
 Introduction penetrate the tyre interior. 

The tyre monitoring system warns the

driver when tyre pressure is too low.
Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
Depending on the vehicle version, the tyre moni- on page 214.
toring system may not be available.
Operation instructions
WARNING The tyre pressure loss indicator compares, assis-
The intelligent technology shipped with the ted by the ABS sensors, the speed and, conse-
tyre monitoring systems cannot go beyond the quently the rolling circumference of each tyre,
limits imposed by physics and will only operate among other things.
within the limitations of the system. Inade-
The rolling circumference of the tyre can
quate use of the wheels and tyres may cause a
change:
sudden loss of tyre pressure, displacement of
the treads of the tyres and even their blowing – When the tyre pressure has been changed.
up. – When the tyre pressure is very low.
● Check tyre pressures regularly and always – When the tyre has structural damages.
keep to the specified tyre pressure value – When the vehicle is loaded on only one side.
→ page 219. When the tyre pressure is very
– Whether an emergency wheel is mounted.
low, the tyre can become so hot that the tyre
tread may come loose and the tyre blow up. – Whether one wheel per axle has been
changed.
● Check and correct the tyre pressures always
according to the prescribed values on the The tyre pressure loss indicator  can be delayed
sticker → page 219. or display nothing under given conditions such
● Check the tyre pressures regularly on cold as, for example, when the driving style is very
tyres. If necessary, calibrate the tyres moun- sporty, on snow covered roads or on unpaved
ted on the vehicle when they are cold ac- roads,
cording to the indicated values on the sticker
→ page 219.
Setting the tyre pressure loss indicator
After a tyre pressure change or after changing
● Check the tyres regularly, looking for wear
one or more wheels, the tyre pressure loss indi-
and tear signs.
cator must be reset again. This is also valid after
● Never exceed the top speed and load capaci- exchanging the wheels, for example the front
ty permitted for the fitted tyres. wheels with the rear wheels.
A too low tyre pressure increases fuel con- To reset the system the saved values must first
sumption and tyre wear. be reset.
When driving for the first time with new – Switch on the ignition.
tyres at high speed, they may expand some- – According to the version of the vehicle and of
what and so a single tyre pressure warning may the radio, press the  button on the radio
be issued. system → page 26.
Old tyres should only be replaced by tyres – Open the menu Vehicle settings on the radio sys-
that have been approved by Volkswagen for tem.
the vehicle type. – Touch the Tyres function button. 

214 Owner's Manual

 – Touch the SET function button. – Resetting the tyre pressure loss indicator again
– If the 4 tyre pressures correspond to the pre- → page 214.
scribed values, touch the Confirm function but- – Seek assistance from a Volkswagen Dealership
ton to save the tyre pressures. if necessary.
OR
 flashes for about one minute and then
– Switch on the ignition. remains permanently lit
– On the radio, touch the settings button  . System damaged.
– Touch the Car function button. –  Stop driving!
– Touch the Tyres function button. – Turn the ignition off and on again.
– Touch the Configure function button. – Resetting the tyre pressure loss indicator again
– If the 4 tyre pressures correspond to the pre- → page 214.
scribed values, touch the Confirm function but- – Seek assistance from a Volkswagen Dealership
ton to save the tyre pressures. if necessary.
After a longer driving period and at different WARNING
speeds, the system resets the new values auton-
omously and monitors them. Different tyre pressures or very low tyre pres-
sures may result in collapsing tyres, loss of con-
The tyre pressure loss indicator must be reprog- trol over the vehicle, accidents, severe injuries
rammed again under the following circumstan- and loss of life.
ces:
● If the indicator lamp  lights up, stop imme-
– When the tyre pressures have been adjusted. diately and check all tyres → page 219.
– When one or more wheels have been ex- ● Different tyre pressures or very low tyre
changed. pressures may increase tyre wear, deterio-
– When the wheel positions have been changed, rate stability and increase braking distance.
for example, the front wheels to the rear ● Different tyre pressures or very low tyre
→ page 217. pressures may result in a sudden collapse of
The tyre pressure loss indicator does not the tyre, causing the tyre to blow up and the
work when the ESC or the ABS are damaged loss of control over the vehicle.
→ page 146. ● The driver is responsible for the correct pres-
sure in all the tyres of the vehicle. The rec-
After a low tyre pressure warning turn the ommended tyre pressure is always available
ignition off and on again. Only then can the on a sticker → page 219.
tyre pressure loss indicator be programmed
● The tyre monitoring system can only fulfil its
again. 
mission when all tyres have the correct pres-
sure when cold.
● Using incorrect tyre pressure values may
Tyre pressure loss indicator cause accidents and damages to the tyres.
troubleshooting All tyres must always have their tyre pres-
sure adjusted to the carried load condition
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter → page 219.
on page 214. ● Prior each trip, always calibrate the tyres to
the correct tyre pressure → page 219.
 on ● When travelling with very low tyre pressure,
The pressure of one or more tyres went down or the tyres necessarily undergo more deforma-
the tyre suffered a structural damage. tions. This way the tyres may get so hot that
–  Stop driving! the tread may come loose, the tyres may
25A.5L1.TCR.20

blow up and loss of control over the vehicle

– Check all the tyre pressures and adjust may occur. 
→ page 219.
– Replace the damaged tyres.

Wheels and tyres 215

● High speeds and overload may heat a tyre in Important information on
such a way that the tyre may blow-up and
lead to loss of control over the vehicle. wheels and tyres
● If the tyre pressure is too low or too high,
the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehi-  Introduction
cle will not handle well.
● If the tyre is not “punctured” and is not nec-
essary to change the wheel immediately, Tyres are the most used and most underestima-
drive at low speed to the nearest ted parts of a vehicle. Tyres are very important as
Volkswagen dealership, to check and correct the narrow tyre surfaces are the only contact be-
the tyre pressures → page 219. tween the vehicle and the road.
The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre
WARNING pressure, driving style, handling, and fitting.
Failure to take notice and heed activated warn- Volkswagen recommends that work on tyres and
ing lamps and text messages could cause the wheels is carried out by a qualified workshop.
vehicle to stop in middle of traffic, severe acci- They are familiar with the procedure and have
dents and injuries. the necessary special tools and spare parts as
● Never ignore the warning lamps and the text well as the facilities for proper disposal of old
messages. tyres. Volkswagen recommends using a
● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose.
when safe to do so.
WARNING
NOTICE Worn or damaged tyres cannot provide full lev-
Failure to observe the illuminated indicator els of vehicle control and braking power.
lamps could lead to vehicle damages. ● Incorrect handling of wheels and tyres can
reduce vehicle safety and cause accidents
With the ignition turned on, if a low tyre and severe injuries.
pressure is detected, the indicator lamp
● All 4 wheels must be fitted with radial tyres
lights up . In addition, an acoustic warning
of the same type, size (rolling circumference)
sounds and a text message may be exhibited.
and the same tread pattern.
When a damage to the system is detected ● New tyres will have to be run in, as they will
with the ignition turned on, the yellow  initially have reduced grip and braking effect.
indicator lamp flashes for a while and then stays Drive particularly carefully for the first 600
permanently lit. In addition a text message may km in order to prevent accidents and severe
be exhibited. injuries.
A long drive over unpaved roads or a spor- ● At high and continuous speed, tyres with low
tive driving style may temporarily disable pressure are excessively heated, which could
the tyre pressure loss indicator. The indicator cause the treads from detaching or even ex-
lamp displays the malfunction, but goes off, ploding. Always maintain the recommended
however, when the road conditions or driving tyre pressure.
style change.  ● Never drive with worn tyres or tyres that are
damaged (cuts, cracks or blisters). Driving
with tyres in this condition can result in
blown tyres, accidents and severe injuries.
Worn or damaged tyres must be replaced
immediately.
● Never exceed the top speed and load permit-
ted for the fitted tyres.
● The effectiveness of the driver assist systems
and brake assist systems depends on the tyre
grip. 

216 Owner's Manual

 ● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve- Volkswagen recommends having the wheels ro-
hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the tated by a Volkswagen Dealership.
car immediately and check the wheels and
tyres for damage. Avoiding damages to the tyres
● Do not use wheels or tyres if you do not – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar ob-
know their previous history. Used wheels and stacle, drive slowly and at a right angle if pos-
tyres could be damaged, even if the damage sible.
is not visible. – Inspect the tyres regularly for damage such as
● Old tyres – even if never used – may loose cuts, cracks or blisters.
pressure or burst, especially at high speeds, – Remove foreign objects that are in the outer
and thus cause accidents and severe injuries. tyre tread and have not penetrated the inner
Avoid using tyres that are more than six tyre → page 221.
years old. If you have no alternative, drive – Worn or damaged tyres must be replaced im-
slowly and with extra care at all times.  mediately → page 221.
– Regularly check the tyres for hidden damage
→ page 221.
Handling wheels and tyres – Never exceed the top speed and load permit-
ted for the fitted tyres → page 223.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter – Protect the wheels, including the spare wheel,
on page 216. from contact with corrosive substances, in-
cluding oils, lubricants, fuel and brake fluid
→ .
– Replace missing valve caps immediately.

Tyres older than 6 years

Tyres age through physical and chemical pro-
cesses which can impair their function.
Volkswagen recommends replacing tyres older
than 6 years with new tyres. This also applies to
tyres, including the spare wheel, which appear to
still be in good condition and on which the tread
depth has not yet reached the minimum value
provided by law → in Introduction on
page 216.
Fig. 178 Diagram showing how to swap wheels.
The age of each tyre can be determined from the
Tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the manufacturing date → page 223.
vehicle's design. Tyres and wheels approved by
Volkswagen are specifically matched to the char- Storing tyres
acteristics of the vehicle and make a major con- Mark tyres before you remove them to ensure
tribution to good road holding and safe handling. you will be able to mount them correctly when
replacing (left, right, front, rear). When removed,
Rotating wheels the wheels or tyres should be stored in a cool,
A regular rotation of the wheels as shown in the dry and preferably dark place. Do not vertically
illustration → Fig. 178 is recommended to ensure store tyres mounted on the wheels.
a uniform level of wear for the tyres. All the tyres Tyres without wheels should be protected
will then last for about the same time. against dirt and stored in proper covers standing
Volkswagen recommends to check the need to on the tread. 
rotate the tyres at every servicing of the vehicle,
25A.5L1.TCR.20

and when there is such need, that alignment and

balancing be performed.

Wheels and tyres 217

New tyres ● Always keep chemicals, oils, lubricants, fuel,
– Drive particularly carefully for the first 600 km brake fluid and other corrosive substances
with new tyres, as the tyres have to be run in. away from the tyres.
Tyres that have not been run in have reduced
grip → and braking effect → . WARNING
– All 4 wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of New tyres will have to be run in, as they will in-
the same type, size (rolling circumference) and itially have reduced grip and braking effect.
the same tread pattern. ● Drive particularly carefully for the first 600
– The tread depth of new tyres may differ from km in order to prevent accidents and severe
manufacturing and profile modelling charac- injuries.
teristics according to the type and make of
tyre and the tread pattern. WARNING
Replacing tyres Wheels must have the proper necessary free-
dom of operation. If the wheels do not have the
– Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and
necessary freedom of operation, the tyre could
not individually (e.g. both front tyres or both
rub on parts of the running gear, the vehicle
rear tyres together) → .
body and the brake system. This can lead to a
– Old tyres should only be replaced by new tyres fault in the brake system and to tread separa-
that have been approved by Volkswagen for tion and thus to a tyre bursting.
the vehicle type. Ensure that the tyres used are
● The actual tyre size must not exceed the tyre
correct in respect of size, diameter, load-carry-
dimensions of manufacturers approved by
ing capacity and maximum speed.
Volkswagen and must not rub on any vehicle
– Never use tyres with an effective size that is body parts.
larger than Volkswagen-approved tyres. Larger
tyres could rub against the body or other parts NOTICE
of the vehicle.
Avoid strong shocks and, if possible drive around
Reprogram the tire control indicator the obstacles The tyres may get deformed, espe-
After each change of a wheel or several wheels, cially by holes in the road and bumping into the
the tyre pressure loss indicator must be reset sidewalk guides. That may cause damages to the
again. This is also valid when rotating front ver- tyres and wheel rims.
sus rear wheels → page 214.
Old tyres must be disposed of with specific
Vehicles with tyre Pressure Monitoring technical knowledge and equipment, based
System on specific standards. Therefore, we recommend
visiting a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
When replacing the factory installed wheels, en- workshop for such purpose.
sure that the new wheels are equipped with sen-
sors compatible with the tyre pressure monitor- Tyre disposal requires equipment and
ing system → page 214. To have the new wheels knowledge of applicable environment pro-
recognized by the system, the vehicle must be tection standards. Tyres cannot be disposed /
driven for some time at speeds above 25 km/h. discarded along with common trash. Applicable
At the time of replacement and change of the laws establish specific disposal procedures for
sensors, Volkswagen always recommends the in- these cases. For your safety and convenience,
stallation of a new set of valves or caps Volkswagen recommends replacing tyres at a
Volkswagen Dealership.
More information on the Tyre Pressure Monitor-
ing System → page 214. Despite identical size details, the actual size
of the various tyre makes may vary from
WARNING these specified dimensions, or the tyre contours
may vary considerably.
Corrosive liquids and other substances can
cause visible and invisible damage to the tyres, Volkswagen-approved tyres are guaranteed
which can cause the tyre to burst. to have the dimensions that are suitable for
the vehicle. The salesperson will have to provide 

218 Owner's Manual

 a certificate from the tyre manufacturer for other WARNING
tyre makes to prove that the tyre is also suitable
for the vehicle. This certificate must be stored in The use of improper or damaged wheels can
a safe place within the vehicle.  impair vehicle safety and cause accidents and
severe injuries.
● Only use wheels which have been approved
for the vehicle.
Wheels
● Check the wheels regularly for damage and
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter replace as necessary. 
on page 216.

The design of the wheel bolts is matched to the Tyre pressure

wheels. If different wheels are fitted, the correct
wheel bolts with the right length and properly  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures on page 216.
that the wheels are fitted securely and that the
brake system works properly → page 226.
For technical reasons, it is not generally possible
to use the wheels from other vehicles. This can
also apply to wheels of the same vehicle type.
Tyres and wheels approved by Volkswagen are
specifically matched to the characteristics of the
vehicle and make a major contribution to good
road holding and safe handling.

Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must always be tightened with the Fig. 179 Sticker with the tyre pressures.
correct tightening torque → page 226.

Wheels with bolted-on trims

Wheels may have removable trims which are at-
tached to the wheel with self-locking bolts.
Damaged trims may only be repaired by a quali-
fied workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a
Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose.

Wheel identification
Due to legal requirements in some countries, the
information on new wheels may contain some Fig. 180 On the inner side of the fuel tank flap: tyre
specific wheel features. The following wheel data pressure label.
may be available, depending on the country:
– Seal of conformity Indications on the tyre pressure sticker
– Rim size → Fig. 179:

– Manufacturer or brand name A Tyre pressures for the front axle tyres.
– Manufacture date B Tyre pressures for the rear axle tyres.
– Country of origin 1 Guideline: regularly check the pressure on
the cold tyres.
– Manufacturing number
2 Tyre pressure under partial load.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

– Raw material
3 Depending on the vehicle’s version: Comfort
– Part code
tyre pressure under partial load. 

Wheels and tyres 219

4 Tyre pressure under full load. ● Fast speeds or overloading of the vehicle can
5 Emergency wheel tyre pressure. cause overheating, sudden tyre damage in-
cluding tyre bursts and ripping of the tread
The sticker only indicates the correct tyre pres- surface and thus to a loss of control of the
sures for approved tyres and is located on the in- vehicle.
side of the tank flap → Fig. 180.
● Check tyre pressures regularly, at least twice
According to the version of the vehicle the ap- a month, and before every long journey.
pearance of the sticker may vary. Additional tyre ● All tyres must have the correct tyre pressure
sizes may be contained → page 223. to suit the vehicle load.
If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the ● Never reduce excess pressure when the tyres
tyres will wear prematurely and the vehicle will are warm.
not handle well → . Proper tyre pressure is par-
ticularly important at high speeds. Incorrect tyre NOTICE
pressure causes premature wear and can cause
tyres to burst. ● When attaching the tyre pressure gauge, make
sure that it does not touch the valve shaft.
Checking tyre pressure Otherwise, this could damage the tyre valve.
The tyre pressure should only be checked if the ● Missing valve caps, or valve caps which are not
tyres have not been driven for more than just a suitable or not screwed on properly, may dam-
few kilometres at low speed in the last 3 three age the tyre valve. Always use valve caps that
hours. comply with the factory-fitted valve cap speci-
fications. Always screw on valve caps fully.
– Check tyre pressures regularly, at least every
15 days, and, additionally, prior any longer trip. Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
– Check the tyre pressures only on cold tyres. sumption. 
The indicated tyre pressures are valid only for
cold tyres. Tyre pressure is always higher in
warm tyres than it is in cold tyres. Therefore
Tread depth and wear indicators
never release the air of hot tyres to adjust their
pressure.  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
– Always adjust the tyre pressures to the vehicle on page 216.
load condition → Fig. 179 3 .
– After adjusting the tyre pressures, make sure
to put the valve caps back on and to follow the
instructions regards the tyre pressure monitor-
ing system → page 214.
– Calibrate the tyres always to the pressures in-
dicated on the sticker. Never exceed the maxi-
mum allowable pressure of the tyres as indica-
ted on the tyre sidewalls.

WARNING
A tyre pressure that is too high or too low may Fig. 181 Tyre profile: wear indicators.
cause the tyre to suddenly lose pressure or
burst while the vehicle is in motion. This could Tread depth
lead to severe accidents and fatal injuries. In most countries, the minimum tread depth re-
● Low tyre pressure may cause the tyres to quired by law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread
heat to such an extent that the tread peels grooves next to the tread wear indicators). Ob-
off and the tyre bursts. serve any country-specific legal requirements. 

220 Owner's Manual

 Difficult driving situations demand the deepest – Reduce your speed immediately if you suspect
possible tread depth for the tyres and the same that a wheel is damaged!
tread depth for the tyres on the front and rear – Check the tyres and wheels for damages.
axles → .
– If the tyre is damaged, do not drive on. Seek
The tread depth of new tyres can vary according expert assistance.
to type and manufacturer due to construction – If there is no visible damage, drive slowly and
and tread design. cautiously to the closest Volkswagen Dealer-
Observe the specific legal prescriptions of the ship or a qualified workshop in order to have
country on the minimum tyre tread depth of win- the vehicle checked.
ter tyres and regular tyres → page 225.
Foreign bodies in the tyre
Tyre wear indicators – Leave the foreign body in the tyre if it has en-
Tread wear indicators show if a tyre is worn tered the inner tyre. However, foreign bodies
down. The tyre must be replaced at the latest that are stuck between the tyre tread blocks
when the tread depth is just before the tread can be removed.
wear indicator. – Replaced the damaged wheel if necessary.
The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm Seek expert assistance if necessary.
high tread wear indicators running across the Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen
tread → Fig. 181. These wear indicators are posi- Dealership for this purpose.
tioned at set intervals around the tyre. Markings – Control and correct the pressure.
on the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters
“TWI” or other symbols indicate the positions of Tyre wear
the tread wear indicators. Tyre wear is affected by several factors, such as:

WARNING – Driving style.

– Unbalanced wheels.
Worn tyres threaten the safety of vehicle occu-
pants and may cause loss of vehicle control and – Running gear setting.
severe injuries. Driving style – Fast cornering, heavy acceleration
● Tyres must be replaced at the latest when and hard braking all increase tyre wear. The run-
the tread is worn down to the tread wear in- ning gear should be checked by a Volkswagen
dicators. Dealership or qualified workshop if the tyres
● Worn tyres have considerably less tread, par- show excessive wear despite a normal driving
ticularly on wet roads, which can cause the style.
vehicle to “glide” along the road surface Unbalanced wheels – The wheels on new vehi-
(aquaplaning). cles are balanced. However, various factors en-
● Worn tyres reduce the possibility of control- countered in normal driving can cause them to
ling the vehicle well in normal and difficult become unbalanced, which results in steering vi-
driving situations and increase braking dis- bration. Unbalanced wheels will affect levels of
tance and the risk of sliding.  wear on the steering system and the suspension.
In this case the wheels should be balanced again.
New wheels must be balanced out prior mount-
ing on the vehicle.
Tyre damage
Running gear setting – incorrect wheel alignment
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety
on page 216. of the vehicle. The wheel alignment should be
checked by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
Damage to tyres and wheels is often not readily workshop if tyres show excessive wear. 
visible. Unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls
25A.5L1.TCR.20

to one side, one of the tyres might be damaged

→ .

Wheels and tyres 221

 WARNING – Reinsert the floor covering onto the top edge
of the luggage compartment.
Unusual vibrations or if the car pulls to one side
– If the case, close the variable luggage com-
while driving, one of the tyres might be dam-
partment floor → page 168.
aged.
– Close the boot lid.
● Reduce speed immediately and park the ve-
hicle while complying with traffic laws. Case the temporary spare wheel is different
● Check the tyres and wheels for damages. from the installed wheels
● Never drive on if the wheels or tyres are If the spare wheel is different from the normal
damaged. Seek expert assistance instead.  vehicle tyre version, for example, the former may
be used only in case of emergency, temporarily
and with due precautions → . Also see
→ page 227.
Spare wheel
Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter Observe the driving notes:
on page 216.
– Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph)!
– Avoid full acceleration, sudden braking and
fast driving through bends in the road!
– Tyre pressure must be checked as soon as pos-
sible after fitting the spare wheel → page 220.
The temporary spare wheel tyre pressure must
be checked together with the tyre pressures of
the regular wheels at least every 15 days
→ page 219.

WARNING
Incorrect use of the spare wheel or temporary
spare wheel can lead to a loss of control of the
vehicle, to collisions or other accidents and
Fig. 182 On the luggage compartment: spare wheel cause serious injuries.
fastening handwheel.
● Never use a spare wheel or temporary spare
Removing the spare wheel wheel if it is damaged or worn down to the
– Open the boot lid → page 65. tread wear indicators.

– If the case, lift and secure the variable luggage ● On some vehicles, the emergency spare
compartment floor → page 168. wheel may be of a different size from the
other wheels and tyres→ page 227, Tempo-
– Lift the floor lining and remove it from the lug- rary spare wheel of different size from the
gage compartment. regular wheels. Different sized emergency
– Unscrew the handwheel in the middle of the spare wheels are identified by an adhesive
spare wheel → Fig. 182 anticlockwise fully and label and by the “80 km/h” inscription. This
remove the spare wheel. marking indicates the maximum rolling
speed of the tyre.
Storing the removed wheel
● Never exceed 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid full
– If necessary, place the vehicle toolkit back in acceleration, sudden braking and making
the container in the luggage compartment. turns at high speeds!
– Place the removed wheel into the spare wheel ● Replace the spare wheel with a regular
well with the rim with the central hole in the wheel as soon as possible. The spare wheel is
rim positioned exactly above the stud. only intended for use in short periods of
– Turn the handwheel clockwise on the stud un- time. 
til the wheel is secured firmly.

222 Owner's Manual

 ● The temporary spare wheel must always be ● After fitting the temporary spare wheel, the
secured firmly with the wheel bolts supplied tyre pressure must be checked as soon as
by the factory. possible → page 219, Tyre pressure.
● Never overuse a spare wheel.
If possible, firmly fasten the spare wheel or
replaced wheel in the luggage compart-
ment. 

Tyre markings and types

 Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 216.

Fig. 183 International tyre lettering (example).

→ Fig. 183 Tyre lettering (example). Definition

1 Product name Individual tyre lettering from the manufacturer.
DOT The tyre complies with the legal requirements of the De-
2 partment of Transportation, responsible for tyre safety
standards.
JHCO CHWS 2213 Tyre identification number ( a) – in some cases only on the
inner side of the wheel) and manufacturing date:
Tyre manufacturing origin identification code
3 JHCO
and manufacturer information regarding tyre
CHWS
size and features.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

2213 Manufacture date 22nd week of 2013.

Information for the end user concerning comparative values for specified basic tyres (standardised
test procedure)→ page 246: 

Wheels and tyres 223

→ Fig. 183 Tyre lettering (example). Definition
TREADWEAR 280 Relative life expectancy for the tyre, based on a standard
test. Tyres with a treadwear of 280 tyres wear out 2.8 times
slower than regular tyres with a treadwear of 100. Tyre per-
4 formance varies depending on use conditions and may sig-
nificantly vary from standard values due to driving behavior,
maintenance, different road characteristics and weather
conditions.
TRACTION AA Wet braking response of the tyre (AA, A, B or C). This rating
is measured in certified test tracks, under controlled condi-
tions. Tyres marked with C have low traction power. The
5
traction rating assigned to the tyre is based on levelled
track tests and does not include acceleration, lateral curves,
aquaplaning, or traction under maximum load.
TEMPERATURE A Temperature stability of the tyre at higher test speeds (A, B
or C). Tyres marked with A and B exceed legal requirements.
The temperature test is based on tyres with the proper
6
pressure and excludes excess pressure. Excessive speeds,
improper or excess tyre pressure may heat or damage the
tyres, either separately or in combination.
7 88 H Load → page 225 and speed index → page 225.
Rolling direction and ar- Identification of the tyre's rolling direction → page 225.
8 row
OR: Outside Identification of the tyre's outer wall → page 225.
MAX INFLATION 350 KPA US maximum air pressure limitation.
9
(51 psi / 3,51 bar)
M+S or M/S or  Denotes winter tyres (mud and snow tyres). Spiked tyres are
10
identified with an E after the S.
TWI Indicates the position of the Tread Wear Indicator
11
→ page 220.
12 Brand name, logo Manufacturer.
13 Made in Germany Manufacturing country.
Specific identification for China (China Compulsory Certifi-
14
 cation).
15  023 Specific identification for Brazil.
E4 e4 0200477-b Certification of conformity with international requirements
with the number of the country that issued the approval.
16 Tyres approved as per ECE regulations are marked with E,
and tyres approved as per EG regulations are marked with e.
This is followed by the multi-digit approval number.
17 RADIAL TUBELESS Tubeless radial tyre.
P 195 / 65 R 15 XL Size designation:
P Identification for passenger vehicle.
195 Tyre width from wall to wall in mm.
18 65 Height/width ratio in %.
R Tyre construction: radial.
15 Wheel diameter in inches.
XL Heavy-duty tyres (“Reinforced”). 

224 Owner's Manual

 → Fig. 183 Tyre lettering (example). Definition
MAXIMUM LOAD 615 KG US maximum load rating per wheel.
19
(1235 LBS)
SIDEWALL 1 PLY RAYON Indications on the components of the inner structure of the
tyre:
1 Rayon layer (artificial silk).
20 TREAD 4 PLIES Tread component indications:
1 RAYON + 2 STEEL + In this example, there are 4 layers under the tread: 1 layer
1 NYLON of Rayon (synthetic silk), 2 layers of steel strap and 1 layer
of nylon.
a) TIN is the tyre serial number.

Tyres with directional tread pattern 95 690 kg

Tyres with directional tread pattern have been 97 730 kg
developed to roll in a single direction. An arrow 99 775 kg
on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of ro- 100 800 kg
tation on tyres with directional tread . The direc-
tion of rotation must be followed. This is the only Speed index
guarantee for optimum grip and helps to avoid The speed index indicates the maximum permit-
aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear. ted speed that may be driven when particular
If, however, the tyre is fitted in the opposite di- wheels are fitted.
rection to the tread pattern, you must take more P max. 150 km/h
care when driving as the tyre is now no longer
Q max. 160 km/h
being used according to its designation. This is
particularly important on wet roads. Tyres must R max. 170 km/h
be replaced as quickly as possible or be fitted S max. 180 km/h
with the tread in the correct direction. T max. 190 km/h
U max. 200 km/h
Tyre load capacity
H max. 210 km/h
The load capacity index indicates how many kilo-
V max. 240 km/h
grams can be loaded onto an individual tyre (tyre
load). W max. 270 km/h
Y max. 300 km/h
80 450 kg
85 515 kg Some tyre manufacturers use the code “ZR” for
tyres with a highest permitted speed of over 240
90 600 kg
km/h (149 mph). 
91 615 kg
93 650 kg

Winter tyres the vehicle, particularly if winter conditions are

expected on the roads Winter tyres will also im-
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter prove the braking response of the vehicle and
on page 216. will help to reduce braking distances in winter
weather. At temperatures below +7 °C (+45° F)
In winter road conditions winter tyres will con- Volkswagen recommends that winter tyres be
siderably improve the car's handling. The design fitted to the vehicle. 
of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread
25A.5L1.TCR.20

pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.

Volkswagen urgently recommends the use of
winter tyres or all-year tyres on all 4 wheels of

Wheels and tyres 225

lose a large degree of their effectiveness when Changing a wheel
the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm. Win-
ter tyres also largely lose their effectiveness
through ageing – regardless of the remaining  Introduction
tread depth.

The following applies when using winter Only change the wheel yourself when the car is
tyres: parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the
– Observe any country-specific legal require- necessary actions and safety procedures and you
ments. have access to all the correct tools! Seek expert
– Use winter tyres on all 4 wheels at the same assistance if this is not the case.
time.
– Only use in winter road conditions.
WARNING
– Only use the sizes of winter tyre that have Changing a wheel can be dangerous, especially
been approved for the vehicle. when carried out at the side of a road. Please
note the following points in order to reduce the
– Winter tyres must have the same type, size risk of serious injuries:
(rolling circumference) and the same tread
pattern. ● Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe
location. Park the vehicle at a safe distance
– Observe the maximum speed permitted by the from moving traffic in order to carry out the
speed index → . wheel change.
Speed limit ● All passengers, especially children, must be
Winter tyres have a speed limitation depending at a safe distance and away from your area
on the speed index → page 225. of work during the wheel change.
● Switch on the hazard warning lights and set
If you use V-rated winter tyres, the speed limits
up the warning triangle to warn other road
and tyre pressure depend on the motorization.
users.
You must ask your Volkswagen Dealership about
the highest permitted speed and required tyre ● Make sure that the ground is flat and firm. If
pressure. necessary use a large, strong board or similar
support for the vehicle jack.
WARNING ● Only change the wheel yourself if you feel
Improved driving conditions due to the use of confident carrying out the procedure. Seek
winter tyres during winter weather does not expert assistance if this is not the case.
mean safety risks must not be prevented. ● Always use suitable and undamaged tools to
● Adapt your speed and driving style to suit change the wheel.
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- ● Always switch off the engine, firmly apply
tions. the handbrake and, with an automatic gear-
● Never exceed the maximum speed and load box move the selector lever to position P or
limits for fitted winter tyres. engage a gear on a manual gearbox to re-
duce the risk of the vehicle moving.
Reassemble summer tyres only after the ● The wheel bolt tightening torque should be
winter season is over. At temperatures checked with a torque wrench immediately
above +7° C (+45° F) vehicle handling is better after changing a wheel.
with summer tyres fitted. They are quieter, do ● On vehicles with tyre pressure loss indicator,
not wear so quickly and reduce fuel consump- the system needs to be reset after each
tion. wheel change → page 214. 
On vehicles with tyre pressure loss indica-
tor, the system needs to be reset after each
wheel change → page 214.
Volkswagen Dealerships can provide details
on permissible winter tyre sizes. 

226 Owner's Manual

 Preparations for changing a wheel Apart from a different sized wheel rim, the vehi-
cles equipped with light alloy wheels may have a
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter temporary spare wheel of steel.
on page 226. The temporary spare wheel must be used tempo-
rarily, replacing a 15-inch wheel, only for as long
Checklist as necessary before having the regular wheel or
The following actions must always be carried out tyre repaired → .
in the given order in preparation for changing the During this period, mind the following precau-
wheel→ : tions: after installing a temporary spare wheel of
1. In case of flat tyres, park the vehicle at a saf- different dimensions, the tyre pressure must be
est distance possible from the traffic flow, in checked and adjusted, if necessary. Check proper
a steady and even terrain. pressure values on the inside of the fuel tank
cover. On vehicles with tyre pressure loss indica-
2. Apply the handbrake → page 136.
tor, the system needs to be reset after each
3. Automatic gearbox: move the selector lever wheel change → page 214.
to position P → page 108.
The different sized wheel must return as soon as
4. Stop the engine and remove the key from the
possible to its initial condition, after the reinstal-
ignition lock → page 101.
lation of the regular wheel an tyre, repaired or
5. Manual gearbox: select the gear → page 107. replaced. Additionally, consider the maximum
6. Have all occupants get out of the vehicle and load capacity, specified in the tyre sidewall.
placed in a safe spot away from the traffic. To reduce the chances of damages to the tyres
7. Place a wedge on the opposite wheel, using and wheelrims of your vehicle:
a rock or similar object.
– Avoid driving on roads with holes, depressions
8. While towing trailers: unhitch the trailer or bumps. The impacts suffered when running
from the vehicle and park it properly. over obstacles such as these can damage your
9. While the luggage compartment is loaded: vehicle's tyres and wheel rims. If it is necessary
remove baggage items. to drive under such conditions, it is absolutely
10. Remove the spare wheel and the vehicle necessary to check the vehicle's tyres and
toolkit from the luggage compartment. wheel rims afterwards, or seek the assistance
from a nearby Volkswagen dealership or speci-
WARNING alized outfit.
– Perceiving any damage to the tyre it is neces-
Ignoring any of the points on this important
sary to replace it as soon as possible as there is
safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju-
a risk of the tyre blowing up and loss of con-
ries.
trol over the vehicle.
● Always follow the instructions on the check-
list and comply with applicable safety pre- WARNING
cautions. 
Incorrect use of the temporary spare wheel of
different wheel rim dimensions for an extended
period of time, or by permanent replacement of
Temporary spare wheel of different the 15, 16 and 17 inch wheel rims, may result
size from the regular wheels in vehicle control loss, collisions or other acci-
dents with risk of severe injuries.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter ● Never drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h
on page 226. while using the different sized temporary
spare wheel rim. Avoid sudden brakes or ac-
On vehicles equipped with 16 and 17 inch wheel celeration, as well as steep curves.
rims, the temporary spare wheel has a wheel rim ● Never use more than one different sized
25A.5L1.TCR.20

of different dimensions from the regular wheel wheel rim at the same time. 
rims.

Wheels and tyres 227

Wheel bolts Removing the anti-theft wheel bolt
Anti-theft wheel bolt is not available for some
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter countries.
on page 226. – Get the anti-theft wheel bolt adapter form the
vehicle toolkit.
– Fit the adapter onto the anti-theft wheel bolt
and press-in until the stopper.
– Push the wheel wrench onto the adapter till
the stopper.
– Hold the end of the box spanner and turn the
wheel bolt approximately one turn anticlock-
wise → .

Important information about the wheel bolts

The wheel bolts were specifically designed for
the factory-fitted wheels. If different wheels are
fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right
length and properly shaped bolt heads must be
Fig. 184 Changing the wheel: loosen wheel bolts. used. This ensures that the wheels are fitted se-
curely and that the brake system works properly.
The anti-theft wheel bolt must be fitted on a
wheel in position → Fig. 185 2 or 3 in relation
to the tyre valve position 1 . Anti-theft wheel
bolt is not available for some countries.

Tightening torque for the wheel bolts

Prescribed tightening torque for light alloy wheel
rims and steel wheel rims:
– 120 Nm
Fig. 185 Wheel change: Tyre valve 1 and installa- If the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to
tion position of the anti-theft wheel bolt 2 or 3 . turn, they must be replaced and the wheel hub
threads cleaned before the tightening torque is
Only the spanner delivered with the vehicle
checked.
should be used to loosen the wheel bolts.
Never grease or lubricate the wheel bolts or the
Only loosen the wheel bolts by approximately
threads of the wheel hub. This could cause them
one turn before raising the vehicle with the vehi-
to loosen while the vehicle is in motion, even if
cle jack.
the required torque setting is used.
If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to
The tightening torque should be checked with a
loosen it by pushing down the end of the spanner
torque wrench immediately after changing a
carefully with your foot. Hold on to the car for
wheel.
support and take care not to slip.

Loosening the wheel bolts WARNING

– Fit the box spanner over the wheel bolt as far Incorrectly tightened wheel bolts can loosen
as it will go → Fig. 184. while the vehicle is in motion and cause acci-
dents, serious injury, and loss of control of the
– Hold the end of the box spanner and turn the
vehicle.
wheel bolt approximately one turn anticlock-
wise → . ● Only use wheel bolts corresponding to the
respective wheel.
● Never use different wheel bolts. 

228 Owner's Manual

 ● The wheel bolts and threads of the wheel The jack may be applied only at the jacking
hubs must be clean, free from oil and grease, points shown (markings on the body) → Fig. 186.
and turn easily. Always use the jacking point closest to the wheel
you are working on → .
● Always use the box spanner placed in the ve-
hicle at the factory to loosen and tighten the Checklist
wheel bolts.
To ensure your own safety and the safety of your
● Only loosen the wheel bolts by approximate- passengers, observe the following points in the
ly one turn before raising the vehicle with order given→ :
the vehicle jack.
1. Find a flat and firm surface suitable for lifting
● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is the vehicle.
too low, the wheel bolts and wheels can
2. Turn the engine off, engage a gear
loosen while the vehicle is in motion. The
→ page 107, when manual gearbox or, move
wheel bolts and threads can be damaged if
the selector lever to position P → page 108,
the tightening torque is too high.  when automatic gearbox, and apply the
handbrake → page 136.
3. Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle.
Lifting the vehicle with the jack 4. Place a wedge on the opposite wheel, using
a rock or similar object.
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter
5. While towing trailers: unhitch the trailer
on page 226.
from the vehicle and park it properly.
6. Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel that is
being changed → page 228.
7. Find the jacking point under the vehicle
→ Fig. 186 closest to the wheel that is being
changed.
8. Secure the manual crank into the jack hous-
ing.
Fig. 186 Jacking points 9. Raise the vehicle jack until it just fits under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
10. Ensure that the entire surface of the foot of
the jack is resting securely on the ground and
that the foot of the vehicle jack is positioned
precisely below the jacking point → Fig. 187
 and .
11. Align the jack and, at the same time, raise
the vehicle jack claw until it engages with
the cross piece under the vehicle → Fig. 187.
12. Crank the vehicle jack further until the wheel
is just clear of the ground.

WARNING
Incorrect use of the vehicle jack can cause the
vehicle to slip, which can lead to severe injuries.
Please apply the following rules to reduce the
risk of accidents:
● Only use jacks which have been approved by
Fig. 187 Jacking points and vehicle jack at the rear
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Volkswagen for the vehicle. Other vehicle

left-hand side of the vehicle. jacks could slip out of position – this includes
vehicle jacks supplied with other Volkswagen
models. 

Wheels and tyres 229

● The ground must be flat and firm. Tilted or Changing the wheel
unstable surfaces can cause the vehicle to
slide. If necessary use a large, strong board  Please refer to at the start of the chapter
or similar support for the vehicle jack. on page 226.
● On a hard, slippery surface (such as tiles) use
a rubber mat or similar to prevent the vehicle
jack from slipping.
● Fit the vehicle jack only at the points descri-
bed. The vehicle jack claw must grip the ver-
tical rib under the sill securely → Fig. 187.
● When towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer
from the traction vehicle before changing
the wheel.
● Never place any part of your body (e.g. arm
or leg) underneath the vehicle if the latter is
only supported by the vehicle jack.
● Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle.
● If you have to work underneath the vehicle, Fig. 188 Wheel replacement: wheel bolt removal
use suitable stands to provide extra support. sequence.
● Never lift the vehicle while the engine is run-
ning or if the vehicle is parked over a slope Removing the wheel
surface. – Read the checklist → page 227.
● Never start the engine when the vehicle is – Loosen the wheel bolts → page 228.
raised on a vehicle jack. Engine vibrations – Lift the vehicle → page 229.
can cause the vehicle to fall off the vehicle
jack. – Completely remove the loose wheel bolts A
using the wheel wrench and place them on a
clean surface.
WARNING
– Remove the wheel.
Ignoring any of the points on this important
safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju- Install spare wheel
ries.
If applicable, take note of the running direction
● Always follow the instructions on the check- of the tyre → page 214.
list and comply with applicable safety pre-
cautions. – Insert the spare wheel.

– Install the anti-theft wheel bolt turning it
clockwise and tighten lightly with the adapter.
Anti-theft wheel bolt is not available for some
countries.
– Install the remaining wheel bolts turning them
clockwise and tighten them lightly with the
wheel wrench.
– Lower the vehicle with the jack.
– Use the box spanner to tighten all the wheel
bolts securely → . Do not tighten the bolts in
clockwise or anticlockwise sequence. Tighten
them in diagonal sequence. 

230 Owner's Manual

 WARNING Maintenance
An incorrect torque or incorrectly handled
wheel bolts can lead to a loss of control of the Service
vehicle, cause accidents and serious injuries.
● Always keep all wheel bolts and threads in
the wheel hubs clean and free from oil and
Digital maintenance and warranty
grease. Wheel bolts must be easy to turn and services
be tightened to the specified torque.
The vehicle data label on the back cover of this
Wheel bolts must be clean and able to turn instruction manual confirms the initial release or
freely. Never lubricate wheel bolts. delivery date, the delivery inspection and thus
the start of the warranty coverage for your vehi-
When changing wheels, if you notice that cle.
the bolts are corroded or worn, they must
be replaced before checking the tightening tor- For some markets the digital Maintenance and
que.  warranty is not available. In this case your Volks-
wagen Dealership will be able to inform you
about its service and documentation.
Digital electronic registration of maintenance
After changing a wheel services performed
 Please refer to at the start of the chapter Service vouchers will be stored in the central sys-
on page 226. tem memory by the Volkswagen Dealership or
specialized company. Through this transparent
– Clean the tools as necessary and place them service history documentation, performed vehi-
back in the luggage compartment → page 182. cle maintenance work can be accessed at any
– Stow the spare wheel or the removed wheel time. Volkswagen recommends requesting, after
securely in the luggage compartment. each service performed, a printed proof of serv-
ice containing data on maintenance work stored
– The tightening torque of the wheel bolts in the system.
should be checked immediately with a torque
wrench With each new service, the previous proof of
service is replaced by an updated printout.
– The damaged wheel should be replaced as
soon as possible. Digital registration of maintenance services
In the Digital Maintenance and Warranty, the fol-
WARNING
lowing information from your Volkswagen Dealer
After changing the wheel, always ensure that or specialized workshop is registered:
the vehicle toolkit and spare wheel are properly
secured in the luggage compartment. – When a given service was performed.
– Whether a repair recommendation was given,
On vehicles with tyre pressure loss indica- as for example, whether the brake pads will
tor, the system needs to be reset after each have to be replaced soon.
wheel change → page 214. 
– Which components or fluids have been re-
newed.
– When your next service call will be due.

WARNING
Insufficient or not performed maintenance and
failure to observe the service intervals may
cause vehicle stops, traffic accidents, and seri-
25A.5L1.TCR.20

ous injuries. 

Maintenance 231
● Have the maintenance work performed by an – fuel with high sulphur content;
authorized Volkswagen Dealership or quali- – frequent driving at low engine speeds with in-
fied workshop. tense traffic, with extended periods operating
at idling speed ("stop-and-go"; urban traffic),
NOTICE – in short trajectories (below 8 km per day) or
Volkswagen may not be held liable for damage to with the engine running below ideal tempera-
the vehicle due to insufficient service or missing tures;
parts. – in urban routes with frequent stops;
Regular vehicle maintenance services not – high ambient temperature associated to con-
only serve the purpose to maintain the val- stant use of the air conditioning system
ue of the vehicle, but also contribute to opera- – frequent traffic in unpaved or dusty roads and
tional and traffic safety. Servicing work should highways.;
therefore always be carried out in accordance – predominant driving under environments with
with the Volkswagen maintenance guidelines.  high levels of suspended particles (mining, ce-
ment, steelworks, marble, and saline factories,
etc.),
First service – predominant operation towing trailers or
transporting cargoes;
The servicing interval may be different according – vehicle operation to provide taxi services,
to the country. school transportation, deliveries, special serv-
ices (patrolling, escorting, ambulance, fire
Petrol engines trucks, military use) and/or similar applica-
Service based on time or mileage tions.
Oil Change Service These conditions particularly affect the follow-
The service is carried out in accordance with the ing parts:
next servicing indicator, and according to which- – toothed belt;
ever occurs first:
– dust and pollen filter
– after 1 year or every 10,000 km; – air filter,
– after 1 year or every 15,000 km. – engine oil.
TOTALFLEX Engine Your Volkswagen Dealership will inform you of
Service based on time or mileage any eventual need to perform intermediary serv-
ices based on your vehicle driving conditions.
Standard service inspection
The costs of Volkswagen services may vary ac-
The service is carried out in accordance with the cording to the vehicle model and equipment ver-
next servicing indicator, and according to which- sion, as well as additional services and inspec-
ever occurs first: tions eventually required. Your Volkswagen Deal-
– after 1 year or every 10,000 km.  ership will inform you of all costs (labour and ma-
terial) regarding Volkswagen maintenance serv-
ices. 

Information on use conditions

The indicated service intervals are established Service scopes
based on normal driving conditions.
In case of adverse driving conditions, some in- Depending on the vehicle model/version, some of
termediary services are required between each of the scope items may not be available and/or be
the service intervals indicated. applicable to the vehicle. 
Adverse driving conditions include the following
cases:

232 Owner's Manual

 The service scopes include all the necessary Maintenance items
maintenance items to keep your vehicle in safe In addition to the inspection items (depending on
condition for driving and the traffic (depending the use and the vehicle's equipment, such as en-
on the conditions of use and the equipment of gine, power transmission or fluids), other mainte-
the vehicle such as for example, engine,transmis- nance items may have to be performed on your
sion or fluids). The maintenance service work is vehicle. These items must be looked after based
split between inspection items and maintenance on the time and/or mileage.
items. You can consult your Volkswagen Dealer-
ship for a detailed overview of the necessary ac- – Additives: change/fill up
tivities . – Toothed belt/toothed belt tensioning roller:
check/ replace
Inspection items – Poly V-belt: replace
Electric system – Air cleaner: replace
– Battery: check – Fuel filter: replace (only TOTALFLEX vehicles)
– Horn: check – Brake fluid: replace
– Lighting (interior and exterior): check – Dust and pollen filter: replace
– Service interval display: reset – Engine: replace filter/oil
– Sun roof: clean and oil
Engine / Gearbox
– Spark plugs: replace
– Poly V-belt: check
– Engine and engine compartment components There may be changes to the service scope for
(upper and lower parts): check technical reasons (continuous components devel-
opment). Volkswagen Dealerships are always up-
– Cooling system: check dated about innovations. 
– Exhaust system: check
– Power transmission and final drive system:
check

Running gear
Vehicle conservation
– Coil springs and elastic stops: check
– Protective joint hoods: check Guidelines for the conservation of
– Electric power steering: check the vehicle
– Swivel joints/track rods: check
Regular and expert care helps to maintain the
– Brake fluid level: check value of the vehicle. Proper maintenance may al-
– Brake pads/discs: check so be one of the requirements for the approval of
– Tyres: check warranty claims in the event of corrosion or paint
defects.
– Tyre pressure of all tyres: check
– Shock absorbers and brake system: check Suitable care products are available from
Volkswagen Dealerships.
Body
WARNING
– Body: check for damages and corrosion
Car care products can be toxic and hazardous.
– Water drains: check
Unsuitable care products and incorrect applica-
– Window wiper blades: check tion of care products can cause accidents, se-
– Windscreen: check vere injuries, burns or poisoning.
– Underside of the vehicle: check ● Care products must be kept in its original
– Window wiping and washing system: check sealed container.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

– Test drive: perform ● Read the manufacturer's instructions. 

Maintenance 233
● Never store car care products in empty food and strong sunlight further intensify the corro-
containers, bottles or any other non-original sive effect. The underside of the vehicle must al-
containers as people finding these containers so be cleaned thoroughly on a regular basis.
may not know that they contain care prod-
ucts. Car washes
● Keep children away from care products. Please observe the signs on the automatic car
wash. Before using an automatic car wash, take
● The products may generate harmful fumes the usual precautions, such as closing all win-
during use. Such products should therefore dows and folding in the exterior mirrors, in order
only be used outside or in well-ventilated to avoid vehicle damages. Inform the car wash
spaces. operator if there are special parts on your vehicle
● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail such as spoilers, radio aerials → .
varnish remover or other volatile fluids to
The paint is so hard-wearing that the car can
wash, clean or care for your vehicle. These
normally be washed without problems in an au-
substances are toxic and highly flammable.
tomatic car wash. However, the effect on the
paint depends to a large extent on the design of
WARNING the car wash. Volkswagen recommends the use
Incorrect care and cleaning of vehicle parts can of car washes without brushes.
impair the safety features of the vehicle and
To remove any wax residues from the windows
thus cause serious injuries.
and to prevent windscreen wipers from rubbing,
● Vehicle parts must be cleaned according to please follow the below guidelines → page 236,
the manufacturer's instructions. Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors.
● Only use approved or recommended cleaning
products. High pressure washing machine
Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-
NOTICE turer when cleaning your vehicle using a high-
pressure cleaner. This applies in particular to the
Cleaning agents that contain solvents attack the
pressure and spraying distance → .
material and can cause damage.
Washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner
NOTICE may cause water to enter the vehicle. Avoid using
high-pressure cleaners at distances lower than
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust from
30 cm from the vehicle's surface. Using a high-
a dry vehicle surface. Additionally, never use dry
pressure cleaner of over 8,000 kPa (80 bar) could
cloths or sponges in order to prevent risking the
damage or remove paintwork or adhesives.
vehicle paint or windows. Dirt, mud and dust
must be softened with water before they are re- Maintain sufficient distance to soft materials
moved. such as rubber hoses, insulation, and the park
distance control sensors. Parking distance con-
Environmentally-friendly care products trol sensors are located in the rear bumper → .
should be used.
Never use concentrated jet nozzles or dirt blast-
Leftover car care products should not be ers → .
disposed of with common waste. Read the
manufacturer's instructions.  Washing the car by hand
When washing by hand, first soften the dirt with
plenty of water and rinse off as well as possible.
Washing of the vehicle Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a
glove or a brush, using only light pressure. Start
The longer substances such as insects, bird drop- with the roof and work from the top to the bot-
pings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial de- tom. Use a shampoo for very persistent dirt only.
posits, tar, soot or road salt and other corrosive The sponge or glove should be wrung out thor-
materials remain on the vehicle, the more dam- oughly at regular intervals. 
age they do to the paintwork. High temperatures

234 Owner's Manual

 Clean the wheels, sill panels etc. last. Use a dif- NOTICE
ferent sponge for this purpose.
● Water temperature should not be higher than
Vehicle paintwork conservation +60 °C.
Waxing protects the paintwork. As soon as water ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight in
no longer forms visible drops on the clean paint- order to avoid damage to the vehicle paint-
work it is time to protect it again with a good car work.
wax. ● The parking distance control sensors in the
Even when a wax solution is used regularly in the bumpers must be clean and free of ice to guar-
car wash, Volkswagen recommends protecting antee correct function. When cleaning with
the paint with a coat of hard wax at least twice a pressure hoses and steam cleaners, the sen-
year. sors should only be sprayed briefly, always
maintaining a distance of over 30 cm.
Polish the vehicle's paintwork ● Never clean with hard sponges, rough kitchen
Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its sponges or similar products as these can dam-
shine, and the gloss cannot be brought back by age the surface.
applying wax. ● Do not clean windows that are iced over or
The car must be waxed after polishing if the pol- covered in snow with a high-pressure cleaner.
ish used does not contain wax compounds to seal ● Never clean the headlights with a dry cloth or
the paint. sponge. Soapy water is the preferred choice.
● Vehicle washing under cold weather: if the ve-
WARNING hicle is rinsed with a hose, do not direct the
Parts of the vehicle with sharp edges may water into the lock cylinders or the gaps round
cause injuries. the doors, boot, or bonnet. The locks and seals
● Protect your hands and arms from cuts on could freeze.
sharp parts, for example when cleaning the
underbody or the inside of the wheel hous- NOTICE
ings. Before using an automatic washing system, the
following points must mandatorily be checked to
WARNING prevent damages to the vehicle:
After the car has been washed, the braking ef- ● Make sure that the gap between the guide rails
fect could set in later than normal and extend in the car wash is sufficient to prevent dam-
the braking distance as the brake discs and ages in wheels and tyres!
brake pads will be wet, or iced up in winter. ● Check that the car wash is tall and wide
● “Dry the brakes and eliminate ice” through enough for your vehicle.
careful braking manoeuvres. Proceed with- ● Fold in the exterior mirrors.
out putting other drivers at risk or failing to
● In order to prevent damage to the paintwork
abide by legal requirements.
on the engine compartment cover, fold the
windscreen wipers back onto the windscreen
WARNING after drying the wiper blades. Do not let them
Incorrect use of a high-pressure cleaner can drop!
cause visible and invisible long-term damage to ● Lock the boot lid to avoid unexpected opening
tyres and other materials. This could lead to ac- in the automatic car wash.
cidents and severe injuries.
● Maintain sufficient distance between the NOTICE
nozzle and the tyres.
● In order to avoid damage, painted parts with a
● Never clean the tyres with concentrated jet matt finish, plastic parts, headlight lenses and
nozzles (“dirt blasters”). Even at large spray- the tail lights should not be treated with polish
25A.5L1.TCR.20

ing distances and short cleaning times, visi- or hard wax.

ble and invisible damage can occur to the
● Do not polish the paint if the vehicle is in a
tyres.
sandy or dusty environment or if it is dirty. 

Maintenance 235
 The vehicle should only be washed in spe- A window cleaner specifically for removing wax
cially provided wash bays. This prevents will stop the blades rubbing if added to the win-
toxic, oil, grease and fuel laden waste water from dow washer water. Dilute the cleaner as instruc-
entering the sewage system. In some regions, ted. Grease removing cleaners will not remove
washing vehicles anywhere else may be prohibi- wax deposits → .
ted.  Special cleaners, glass cleaners and glass clean-
ing cloths are available from Volkswagen Dealer-
ships.
Cleaning and conserving the
Remove the snow
exterior of the vehicle
Use a small brush to remove snow from the win-
dows and exterior mirrors.

Remove the ice

The best method for removing ice is to use a de-
icer spray. If you use an ice scraper, do not move
it to and from, but push it in one direction only.
Moving the ice scraper backwards can cause dirt
to scratch the window.

Clean chrome and aluminium parts

– Use a damp, clean, lint-free and soft cloth to
Fig. 189 Between the engine compartment and the clean the surfaces.
windscreen: plenum chamber (schematic represen- – For heavy soiling use a special solvent-free
tation). cleaning product.
Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors – Polish the chrome and aluminium trim parts
using a soft and dry cloth.
Moisten the windows and exterior mirrors with
standard alcohol-based glass cleaner. Cleaning steel wheels
Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust
leather or a lint-free cloth. Chamois leathers caught in the wheel. Steel wheels should there-
which have been used on painted surfaces have fore be cleaned regularly with a separate sponge.
grease residues and are therefore not suitable for
Any damage to the paint on steel wheels should
use on glass surfaces.
be touched up before the metal starts to rust.
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to
clean off rubber, oil, grease and silicone deposits Caring for and cleaning alloy wheels
→ . Wash grit and brake dust from alloy wheels ap-
proximately every 2 weeks. Then use an acid-free
Remove wax residues detergent to clean the wheels. Volkswagen rec-
Car washes and care products could leave wax ommends applying a hard wax compound to the
deposits on the glass surfaces. Wax residue can wheels approximately every 3 months.
only be removed using a special cleaning product
If the brake dust is not removed regularly, the al-
or cleaning cloths. Wax residues can affect the
loy wheel could be damaged.
window wiper system's performance, in addition
to causing irregular movement or excessive Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy
noises. Volkswagen recommends using a glass wheels. Car polish or other abrasive agents
cleaning cloth to remove wax deposits from the should not be used on the wheels.
windows and exterior mirrors each time the vehi- If the protective coating is damaged (e.g. by
cle is washed. stone impact) the damaged area should be re-
paired immediately. 

236 Owner's Manual

 Conserve the rubber seals Plenum chamber
The rubber seals on the doors, windows etc. will – The plenum chamber is located in the engine
seal better, remain flexible and last longer if they compartment between the windscreen and the
are treated at regular intervals with a suitable engine and has a perforated cover → Fig. 189.
care product. Air from outside is drawn in from the plenum
Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the chamber and is passed into the vehicle interior
rubber seals before applying the product. via the heating and fresh air or the air condi-
tioning system.
Defrost the door lock cylinders – Leaves and other loose items must be re-
Volkswagen recommends the use of genuine moved from the cover of the plenum chamber
Volkswagen spray with lubricating and anti-cor- at regular intervals using a vacuum cleaner or
rosive properties to de-ice the lock cylinders. by hand.

Protection of the underside of the vehicle Sensors, rear view camera lens
The underside of the vehicle is coated to protect Clean the area in front of the sensors or camera
it from corrosion and damage. The protective with a soft cloth and a cleaning product free of
coating on the underside of the vehicle could be solvents. Observe the installation locations
damaged when driving. Volkswagen recommends → page 7.
therefore that the protective coating on the un-
derside of the vehicle and on the running gear WARNING
should be checked regularly and repaired if nec- Dirty or misted windows reduce visibility and
essary. increase the risk of accidents and severe inju-
ries.
Hollow cavities
● Only drive when you have a clear view
All hollow spaces exposed to corrosion are facto- through all windows.
ry-fitted with long-lasting protective coating.
● Ice, snow and mist must be removed from
Such coating does not require maintenance. If, the inside and outside of all windows.
due to extremely high temperatures, a small
amount of wax is melted, it may be removed us- WARNING
ing a plastic spatula and benzene.
All work in the engine compartment carries the
Clean the engine compartment risk of injury, scalding, accidents and fire!
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is ● Before carrying out any work make sure that
a hazardous area → page 196. you are familiar with the requisite proce-
dures and general safety regulations
The engine compartment must be cleaned by a
→ page 196, Safety guidelines for work in the
Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. An
engine compartment.
incorrect cleaning procedure could possibly re-
move corrosion protection and damage electrical ● Volkswagen recommends having the work
components, among others. Additionally, water carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership.
could enter the vehicle interior directly via the
plenum chamber → . CAUTION
If the engine compartment is very dirty, we rec- Underseal and anti-corrosion coatings may ig-
ommend that you always go to a qualified work- nite on the hot exhaust system or on other hot
shop to have it cleaned following correct proce- engine parts.
dures. Volkswagen recommends using a ● Never apply underseal or anti-corrosion
Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
verter, heat shields or other vehicle compo-
nents that become hot. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Maintenance 237
 NOTICE Considering that when washing the engine,
toxic waste water containing oil, grease and
● Properly cleaning the windows enhances the fuel may enter the sewerage system, the conta-
window wiper system's performance and pres- minated water needs to be purified by an oil sep-
ervation. arator. Therefore, the engine compartment
● Never combine the recommended cleaning should only be washed in extreme cases and in
agents with other products in the window appropriate locations. 
washer fluid reservoir. This may cause the
components to coagulate and, as a result, clog
the window wiper nozzles.
Cleaning and conserving the
● Never use warm or hot water to remove snow
and ice from windows and mirrors. This may interior of the vehicle
cause the glass to crack!
Modern fabrics, such as dark denim, are often not
● Never use ice scrapers on mirror lens, other- colourfast. Light-coloured upholstery (soft mate-
wise the chromed-coated surface will be rials or leather) is particularly sensitive to stain-
scratched. ing caused by these fabrics, even if you are care-
● The heating elements for the rear window ful. This is not caused by a fault in the upholstery,
heater are located on the inside of the rear but by the non-colourfast nature of the gar-
window. Never apply stickers over the heating ments.
elements and never clean the inside of the rear
Leaving stains, dirt and other deposits on the
window with corrosive or acidic detergents or
surface of vehicle components and cloth seat
any other chemicals.
covers for a long time can make it difficult to
clean and treat them. Stains, dirt and deposits
NOTICE may become impossible to remove, particularly if
To ensure that the chrome and aluminium parts left for a long time.
are not damaged:
● Do not clean or polish in direct sunlight. Seat covers
● Do not clean or polish in sandy or dusty envi- Please note the following for handling and con-
ronments. servation of the seat covers:
● Do not use any abrasive care products (e.g. – Before getting into the vehicle, close all Velcro
cream cleaners). fasteners that could touch the cloth seat cov-
ers and fabric trims. Open Velcro fasteners can
● Never clean with hard sponges, rough kitchen
cause damage to cloth seat covers and fabric
sponges or similar products.
trims.
● Do not polish dirty surfaces.
– Avoid the direct contact of sharp-edged items
● Do not use solvent-based cleaning products. and accessories to the upholstery and fabric
● Do not use any hard wax. trims in order to prevent damage. Accessories
include zips, studs, rhinestones on clothing or
NOTICE belts.
Lock de-icers which contain substances which – Dust and grit in the pores and seams should be
dissolve grease may cause the door lock cylinder removed regularly so that no permanent dam-
to rust. age is caused to the surface of the seats by
scratching.
NOTICE – Always check whether garments are colourfast
Water that has entered the plenum chamber via to prevent damage to the upholstery. This is
a manual process (e.g. from a high-pressure especially important for light-coloured uphols-
cleaner) can cause considerable damage to the tery. 
vehicle.

Before removing wax with benzene, comply

with applicable safety and environment
standards regarding such product.

238 Owner's Manual

 Cleaning paddings, fabric and NT - Non Water-based stains (e.g. coffee, fruit juice or
microfiber fabric soda).
– Please read and follow the instructions, notes First, clean the stain as quick as possible
and warnings on the package before using with a dry and absorbent cloth, to prevent
cleaning products. the liquid from penetrating the upholstery.
For more difficult stains, moisten the
– Upholstery, fabric trims, NT - non-microfiber
sponge with an atomizer and clean the
fabric trims, and carpeting must be regularly
stain with circular motions. Clean with a
cleaned with a vacuum cleaner (brush tip).
dry and absorbent cloth.
– Do not use high-pressure cleaners, steam
Stubborn stains, e.g. chocolate, make-up. Only
cleaners or coolant spray.
use detergents that have been approved by
– We recommend that you use a soft sponge or Volkswagen. If necessary, take the vehicle
commercially available lint-free microfiber to a specialist cleaning company.
cloth for cleaning jobs → . Oily stains, e.g. oil, lipstick. Only use detergents
– Clean NT - non-microfiber fabric surfaces with that have been approved by Volkswagen. If
a slightly damp cotton or woollen cloth or a necessary, take the vehicle to a specialist
commercially available lint-free microfiber cleaning company.
cloth → .
Conservation and treatment of natural leather
General surface soiling of the upholstery and fab- covers
ric trim can be cleaned with standard foam
cleaners. Please contact a Volkswagen Dealership or quali-
fied workshop if you have any questions on
If the upholstery and fabric trims are generally cleaning and caring for the leather equipment in
heavily soiled, consult a Volkswagen Dealership your vehicle.
for information on suitable cleaning methods be-
fore attempting any cleaning procedure. Take the Natural leather is a sensitive material.
vehicle to a specialist cleaning company, if nec- – Use a leather cream with sunlight protection
essary. and impregnation properties on a regular basis
and always after cleaning. The cream nourish-
Padding, fabric and NT - Non microfiber fabric es the leather, keeps it breathable and supple
stain treatment and replaces lost moisture. It also protects the
When cleaning stains, it may be necessary to surface.
clean the entire surface and not just the stain it- – Leather should be cleaned every two to three
self. This particularly applies if the surface shows months to remove fresh stains.
general signs of wear. The cleaned area could
otherwise be lighter than the surrounding area. If – Treat the leather with a special leather care
in doubt, consult a specialist cleaning company. product every six months → .
– Always apply cleaning and care products ex-
tremely sparingly and always use a dry cotton
or woollen cloth that is lint free. Do not apply
cleaning and care products directly to the
leather.
– Remove fresh stains such as ink, ball-point pen
ink, lipstick, shoe cream etc. as quickly as pos-
sible.
– Look after the pigment. Use a special coloured
leather cream to refresh the colour where nec-
essary.
– Wipe off excess with a soft cloth.

Cleaning natural leather covers

25A.5L1.TCR.20

Volkswagen recommends that you use a damp

cotton or wool cloth for general cleaning purpo-
ses. 

Maintenance 239
Do not let the water soak through the leather or Conserving and cleaning plastic parts,
soak into the seams. wooden decorative elements and the dash
panel
Please observe the following notes before clean-
ing the leather upholstery → page 239, Cleaning – Moisten a clean, lint-free cloth with water and
paddings, fabric and NT - Non microfiber fabric. clean the parts.
– Treat plastic parts (inside and outside the vehi-
Stubborn stains – Spread the smooth soap solu-
cle) and the dashboard with a special solvent-
tion1) with a twisted cloth. Absorb by
free plastic cleaning and care product ap-
pressing lightly with a dry cloth.
proved by Volkswagen → .
Water-based stains, such as coffee, tee, juice,
blood, etc. – Treat wooden trims with a mild soap solu-
Remove the stains while they are still tion1).
moist with an absorbent cloth. Use a
Cleaning the seatbelts
cleaning product appropriate for already
dried stains → . The automatic belt will not be able to roll back
properly if there is dirt on the belt and thus pre-
Fat based stains, such as oil, lipstick, etc. Re-
vent the seat belt from working properly.
move the stains while they are still moist
with an absorbent cloth. Use a cleaning Seat belts must never be removed for cleaning
product appropriate for stains that have purposes.
not yet penetrated the surface → .
– Remove dirt with a soft brush → .
Special stains, such as biro, felt tip pen, nail Dry
– Carefully pull the dirty seat belt right out and
varnish, emulsion paint, shoe polish, etc.
leave it out.
with a dry and absorbent cloth. Clean with
a special stain remover for leather. – Clean the seat belt with a mild1) soap solution.
– Allow the seat belt fabric to dry completely.
Cleaning vinyl covers
– Do not allow the seat belt to roll up until it has
Please observe the following notes before clean- dried completely.
ing vinyl covers → page 239, Cleaning paddings,
fabric and NT - Non microfiber fabric. WARNING
Only use water and neutral soap to clean vinyl Incorrect care and cleaning of vehicle parts can
covers. impair the safety features of the vehicle and
thus cause serious injuries.
Cleaning stowage compartments and drink
holders ● Vehicle parts must be cleaned according to
the manufacturer's instructions.
Some stowage compartments and cup holders
have a removable rubber insert in the base. ● Only use approved or recommended cleaning
products.
– Moisten a clean, lint-free cloth with water and
clean the parts. WARNING
– If this does not provide satisfactory results, Cleaning agents that contain solvents cause the
use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning surface of the airbag modules to become po-
product. rous. In case of an accident that triggers the
airbag, loose plastic parts can cause serious in-
Cleaning the ashtray
jury.
– Remove and empty the ashtray.
● Never clean the dash panel or the airbag cov-
– Wipe the ashtray with a cloth. ers with cleansers that contain solvents. 
To clean the snuffer, use a toothpick or similar
object to pick out the ashes.

1) Smooth soap solution: two teaspoons of neutral soap in one litre of water.

240 Owner's Manual

 WARNING NOTICE
Check the condition of all seat belts regularly. ● Soft-bristle brushes should be used on carpets
Damaged belt bands or any other seat belt and mats only! Other surfaces could be dam-
parts must be removed and replaced immedi- aged by brushes.
ately by a Volkswagen Dealership. Damaged ● When washing paste or fine detergent solu-
seat belts are extremely dangerous and can tions are applied with a damp cloth or sponge,
cause severe or fatal injuries. visible edges may appear on the upholstery
● Never use chemical cleaning agents on the once it has dried. These edges are usually diffi-
seat belts or their components. Additionally, cult or even impossible to remove.
seat belts may not come into contact with
corrosive fluids, solvents or sharp objects. NOTICE
This can considerably weaken the bands.
● The NT - non-microfiber fabric cannot be
● After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry com- drenched in any circumstances.
pletely before rolling them up. Otherwise the
● Do not use leather care products, solvents,
automatic belt retractors could become
wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or sim-
damaged and thus impair their function.
ilar products on NT - non-microfiber fabric.
● Never let any foreign bodies or liquids enter
● Do not use brushes if cleaning with liquids.
the seat belt buckle slot. This could prevent
This could damage the surface of the material.
the belt buckle and seat belt from working
properly.
NOTICE
● Never attempt to repair, modify or remove
the seat belts yourself. ● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,
spot removers or similar products on leather.
● Damaged seat belts must be replaced imme-
diately with new seat belts approved by ● A stain cannot be removed if it has been left
Volkswagen for your vehicle type. Seat belts on the leather for a long time and has penetra-
subjected to stress and stretched during an ted the surface.
accident must be replaced by a Volkswagen ● Spilt liquids should be cleaned immediately us-
Dealership. Replacement may be necessary ing an absorbent cloth as the leather surface
even if there is no apparent damage. The belt and seams absorb liquids quickly.
anchorage should also be checked. ● Protect the leather from excessive sun expo-
sure to prevent fading.
NOTICE
● Cleaning agents that contain solvents attack NOTICE
the material and can cause irreparable dam- Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot
ages. removers or similar products on vinyl. These may
● Stains, dirt, and other deposits with corrosive cause the material to become hard and brittle
components and solvents may cause irrepara- prematurely.
ble damages to the material, even in case of
short exposure periods. NOTICE
● Stains, dirt and other deposits must be re- Some car fresheners have substances in its
moved as quickly as possible and not allowed chemical formula that may damage the structure,
to dry in. surface and paintwork of the vehicle's internal
● To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be linings.
removed by a specialist cleaning company.
Suitable care products are available from a
Volkswagen Dealership.
NOTICE
● Do not use steam cleaners as the steam push- Volkswagen recommends cleaning stained
es the soiling into the fabric and sets it. upholstery in a qualified workshop.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

● High-pressure cleaners and coolant sprays can Slight colour changes of the natural leather
damage the upholstery. covers due to use are normal. 

Maintenance 241
Accessories, modifications, ● Volkswagen strongly recommends that you
only use approved Volkswagen accessories
repairs and part replacement and Volkswagen genuine parts. These parts
and accessories have been specially tested
by Volkswagen for suitability, reliability and
Accessories and spare parts safety.
Volkswagen recommends that you seek advice ● Repairs and modifications to your vehicle
from a Volkswagen Dealership before purchasing should only be carried out by a Volkswagen
accessories, spare parts or service fluids. For ex- Dealership. Volkswagen Dealerships have the
ample, if the vehicle is to be retrofitted with ac- necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, repair
cessories or if parts have to be renewed. information and qualified personnel.
Volkswagen Dealerships can recommend acces- ● Never fit parts to your vehicle that are in any
sories, parts and service fluids which are suitable way different from the factory-fitted parts.
for your requirements. ● Only use wheel/tyre combinations which
Volkswagen strongly recommends that you only have been approved by Volkswagen for your
use approved Volkswagen Accessories and vehicle type. 
Volkswagen Genuine Parts. These parts and ac-
cessories have been specially tested by
Volkswagen for suitability, reliability and safety.
Volkswagen Dealerships are also qualified to per-
Repairs and technical modifications
form proper installation procedures.
Repairs and modifications must always be car-
Despite constant monitoring of the market, ried out according to Volkswagen specifications
products not approved by Volkswagen cannot be → !
evaluated by Volkswagen in terms of their credi-
Unauthorised modifications to the electronic
bility, safety and suitability for use in the vehicle.
components or software in the vehicle may cause
Volkswagen can therefore assume no responsi-
faults As the electronic components are linked
bility for these parts, even if they have been ap-
together in networks, these faults may indirectly
proved by an official testing agency or are cov-
affect the working of other systems. This can se-
ered by an official approval certificate.
riously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of
components, and also compromise the vehicle's
WARNING
operating function.
Incorrectly performed repairs or modifications
to your vehicle can impair the effectiveness of Volkswagen Dealerships cannot be held liable for
the airbags, cause operating failures, accidents any damage caused by technical modifications
and fatal injuries. and/or work performed incorrectly.

● Never secure or mount objects such as cup The authorised Volkswagen repairer cannot be
holders, telephone holders and GPS (global held liable for any damage caused by technical
positioning system) on or next to the airbag modifications and repairs performed incorrectly.
covers or within the deployment zone of the Such damages are also not covered by the
airbag. Volkswagen warranty.
● Items which are either on or next to the air- Volkswagen recommends that all repairs and
bag module covers or are in the deployment technical modifications be performed by an au-
zone of the airbags can cause severe or even thorised Volkswagen Dealership with Volkswa-
fatal injuries should the airbags be activated. gen Genuine Parts.

WARNING WARNING
Unsuitable spare parts and accessories as well Incorrect repairs and modifications can cause
as incorrectly carried out work, modifications functional problems and damage to the vehicle
and repairs can lead to damage to the vehicle, and impair the effectiveness of the driver assist
accidents and serious injuries. systems. This could lead to accidents and se-
vere injuries. 

242 Owner's Manual

 ● Repairs and modifications to your vehicle WARNING
should only be carried out by a Volkswagen
Incorrect repairs and modifications can cause
Dealership.  functional problems and damage to the vehicle
and impair the effectiveness of the airbag sys-
tem. This could lead to accidents and severe in-
Repairs and limitations in the juries.
airbag system ● Repairs and modifications to your vehicle
should only be carried out by a Volkswagen
Repairs and modifications must always be car- Dealership.
ried out according to Volkswagen specifications ● Airbag modules cannot be repaired. They
→ ! must be replaced.
Modifications and repairs to the front bumper, ● Never use recycled airbag components or
the doors, the front seats, the roof or the body- components that have been taken from end-
work should be carried out by a Volkswagen of-life vehicles in your vehicle.
Dealership. System components and airbag sys-
tem sensors can be located on these vehicle WARNING
components. Modifications to the vehicle's suspension, in-
If you work on the airbag system or remove and cluding the use of unsuitable tyre/wheel com-
install parts of the system when performing oth- binations not approved by Volkswagen may
er repair work, parts of the airbag system may be cause the airbag system to work differently and
damaged. The consequence may be that, in the increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries in
event of an accident, the airbag inflates incor- the event of an accident.
rectly or does not inflate at all. ● Never install any components in the suspen-
Regulations must be observed to ensure that the sion system that do not have the same char-
effectiveness of the airbags is not reduced and acteristics as the original factory-fitted com-
that removed parts do not cause any injuries or ponents.
environmental pollution. Volkswagen Dealerships ● Never use tyre/wheel combinations that
are familiar with such requirements. have not been approved by Volkswagen.
Any modifications to the vehicle's suspension Airbag system parts must never be reused
could prevent the airbag system from working in case of vehicle or component scrapping.
properly during a collision. For example, using All applicable environment disposal standards
tyre/ wheel combinations which have not been must be followed, in addition to other safety
approved by Volkswagen, lowering the vehicle, standards in effect. Volkswagen Dealerships are
making modifications to the suspension rate in- familiar with such requirements. 
cluding work on the springs, struts and shock ab-
sorbers can affect the reaction of airbag sensors
sending information to the electronic control
unit. Some alterations to the suspension springs Retrofitting two-way radios
can, for instance, cause changes to the suspen-
sion and consequently affect the reaction of the You will need an external aerial to use a two-way
sensors. This can lead to the airbag system being radio in the vehicle.
triggered in collision scenarios where it normally Any retrofit installation of electrical or electronic
would not be triggered had no modifications equipment in the vehicle will affect its vehicle
been made to the suspension. Other modifica- type approval. Under certain circumstances, this
tions can affect the reaction measured by the can negate the type approval for the vehicle.
sensors, preventing the airbag system from being
triggered when it should have been. Volkswagen has approved the vehicle for use
with two-way radios providing the following
conditions are observed:
25A.5L1.TCR.20

– Correct installation of external aerial.

– Maximum transmitting power of 10 watts. 

Maintenance 243
An external aerial is needed to give the equip- Reprogramming control units
ment its optimal range. All data for the control of components is initially
If a transmitter with a transmitting power of over stored in the control units. Some convenience
10 W must be used, seek assistance at a work- functions, such as lane change flash, single door
shop qualified to make technical modifications or unlocking and displays, can be reprogrammed
a Volkswagen Dealership. using special workshop equipment. If the con-
venience functions are reprogrammed, the de-
Please observe legislation as well as the instruc- scriptions in your Owner’s Manual will no longer
tions and information given in the operating correspond with the original functions.
manuals for radio equipment. Volkswagen recommends adding the reprogram-
ming coverage to the digital warranty and main-
WARNING tenance at a Volkswagen Dealership.
If radio equipment is not secured or not proper-
Information about possible reprogramming can
ly secured in the vehicle, it could be flung
be obtained from Volkswagen Dealerships.
though the interior during a sudden driving or
braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an acci- Reading the vehicle fault memory
dent. This can cause injuries.
A diagnosis interface for reading the fault memo-
● While the vehicle is in motion, always secure ries is located in the vehicle interior → . Elec-
two-way radios properly outside the airbag tronic control unit status and operating data is
deployment zones or stow them away safely. stored in the fault memory. Additional informa-
tion on stored data can be obtained from your
CAUTION Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop.
If two-way radios that are not connected to an The diagnostics connection is located on the
external aerial are used, electromagnetic radia- driver's side footwell, near the fuse box.
tion in the vehicle could exceed limit values and
thus be a health hazard for drivers and other The fault memory should only be read and reset
vehicle occupants. This also applies to external by a Volkswagen Dealership.
aerials which have not been correctly installed. After correcting faults, the respective data is de-
● Two-way radios should only be used in the leted from the fault memory. Other memory con-
vehicle if an external aerial is properly con- tents are successfully updated.
nected. 
WARNING
Improper use of the diagnostics connection
may lead to operating faults, in addition to se-
Information stored in control units vere accidents and injuries.
Your vehicle is factory fitted with electronic con- ● Never read the faulty memory through the
trol units which are responsible for engine and diagnostics connection yourself.
transmission control functions. The control units ● The diagnostics connection must only be
also monitor the function of the exhaust system read by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified
and the airbags. workshop. 
These electronic control units continuously eval-
uate data relevant to the vehicle while the vehi-
cle is being driven. Only this data will be stored if Using a mobile telephone in the
there are any faults recorded or any deviations
from the specified values. This is generally dis-
vehicle without a connection to the
played by the indicator lamps on the instrument external aerial
cluster.
During a telephone call and when in standby
Special units are required to read and evaluate mode, mobile telephones transmit and receive
data stored in the control units. radio waves, also known as high-frequency ener-
Under no circumstances do such control units re- gy. Current scientific literature warns us that ra-
cord conversations held inside the vehicle. dio waves can be harmful to human beings if 

244 Owner's Manual

 they exceed certain limits. Government agencies Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
and international committees have introduced tooth ® SIG, Inc.
threshold values and guidelines to ensure that
electromagnetic radiation produced by mobile WARNING
telephones does not pose a hazard to health. If a mobile phone is not secured or not properly
However, there is no proven scientific evidence secured in the vehicle, it could be flung though
that demonstrates that cordless telephones are the interior during a sudden driving or braking
absolutely safe. manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. This
For this reason, some experts are calling for a can cause injuries.
precautionary use of mobile telephones through ● Mobile telephones, other devices and tele-
the application of measures which reduce the phone accessories such as telephone holders,
level of personal exposure to electromagnetic ra- notepads and GPS (global positioning sys-
diation. tem) must always be secured properly out-
If a mobile telephone which is not connected to side of the airbag deployment zones or be
the vehicle's external aerial is used inside the ve- stowed in a safe place whilst the vehicle is in
hicle, the level of electromagnetic radiation could motion.
be higher than when the mobile telephone is
connected to an integrated aerial or any other WARNING
external aerial. If mobile telephones or two-way radios that are
If the vehicle is fitted with a suitable hands-free not connected to an external aerial are used,
unit which enables the use of innumerable addi- electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could
tional functions of Bluetooth® compatible mobile exceed limit values and thus be a health hazard
telephones, this will comply with legal require- for drivers and other vehicle occupants. This al-
ments in many countries which permit the use of so applies to external aerials which have not
a mobile telephone in a vehicle only if a hands- been correctly installed.
free unit is used. ● Maintain a minimum distance of 20 centime-
Mobile telephones must be located in a suitable tres between the mobile phone's antenna
telephone holder or be stored securely in the ve- and the heart pacemaker, since the former
hicle. If a telephone holder is used it must be se- may interfere with the latter.
curely attached to the base plate. This is the only ● Do not carry a mobile telephone in your
way to ensure that the mobile telephone is se- breast pocket above a pacemaker.
curely attached to the dashboard and always ● The mobile telephone must be switched off
within reach of the driver. immediately if there is a suspicion of inter-
If the mobile telephone is connected to a tele- ference with a pacemaker or other medical
phone aerial integrated in the vehicle or to an ex- devices. 
ternal telephone aerial, the electromagnetic radi-
ation generated by the telephone that could af-
fect the human body is reduced. Moreover, it im-
proves the quality of the signal.
If a mobile telephone is used in the vehicle interi-
or without this hands-free system, it is not safely
secured in the vehicle and also not connected to
the vehicle's external telephone aerial. Further-
more, the mobile telephone is not being charged
in the telephone holder. It is also likely that the
telephone connection will be disrupted and the
signal strength will be poor.
A mobile telephone should only be used in the
25A.5L1.TCR.20

vehicle if it is connected to a hands-free unit.

Volkswagen recommends the use of an external
aerial when using a mobile telephone in the vehi-
cle.

Maintenance 245
Consumer information After conducting due body repair services, your
Volkswagen Dealership will confirm due warranty
coverage for corrosion perforations in the re-
Volkswagen warranty paired area. 

Volkswagen Dealership Warranty

General information
Volkswagen Dealerships provide a warranty
against manufacturing defects for the vehicles Volkswagen offers one of the largest and most
sold by them. efficient Dealership Network to assist your vehi-
Volkswagen Dealerships provide a warranty cle.
against manufacturing defects for new vehicles. Volkswagen Dealerships are equipped with cut-
Please refer to your purchase agreement for ting-edge equipment and tools designed espe-
more information on warranty terms and condi- cially for your vehicle, in addition to highly-quali-
tions. fied technical personnel and a wide range of ve-
hicle parts.
For additional information, please contact your
Volkswagen Dealership. All Volkswagen Dealerships abide by high-end
standards recommended by the Factory. These
The warranty does not cover natural wearing, include Service instructions, which ensure all re-
damages caused by abusive vehicle use, improper pair activities are carried out based on optimal
maintenance, or unauthorized modifications. quality standards and in a timely fashion, guaran-
If your vehicle is not operating properly, please teeing appropriate and safe vehicle conditions.
contact the nearest Volkswagen Dealership.  Volkswagen Dealerships are clearly prepared to
assist your vehicle. Make sure you don't miss out
on all of these amenities. 
Body warranty
Volkswagen Dealerships grant vehicles they sell
a warranty against puncture corrosion on the Additional service offers
body.
In addition to the warranty terms for new
Volkswagen vehicles, Volkswagen Dealerships al- Mandatory inspection services
so grant on the vehicles they sell – according to
the purchase contract– a warranty against perfo- Depending on local laws, the vehicle must be
rating body corrosion over a period of time limi- submitted to periodic mandatory inspections.
ted to 6 years. In several countries, vehicles must be periodically
In case such defects are eventually identified, submitted to inspections conducted by compe-
they will be fully repaired by any Volkswagen tent authorities, duly evidencing its effective and
Dealership free of charge. safe traffic operation and/or exhaust system con-
ditions.
The warranty is voided in the following cases:
Volkswagen Dealerships are aware of all manda-
– defects result from external influences or lack tory inspections and duly qualified to perform
of proper vehicle maintenance; or such verification services, along with an inspec-
– any body defects are not repaired in a timely tion service. This will save you time and money.
fashion, as per the Factory's instructions; or They will indicate aspects that require special at-
– corrosion perforations result from noncompli- tention in order to prevent your vehicle from be-
ance with the manufacturer's instructions re- ing submitted to new inspections due to faults. 
garding body repairs.

246 Owner's Manual

 Volkswagen® Genuine Parts In addition, Volkswagen Dealerships offer all ap-
propriate products to maintain and care for your
Volkswagen® Genuine Parts are particularly de- vehicle. 
signed for your vehicle and approved by
Volkswagen, especially regarding safety meas-
ures. These parts accurately comply with Factory Information stickers and
specifications regarding type, measurements,
and materials. Volkswagen® Genuine Parts are plates
the most suitable for your vehicle. Therefore, we
recommend always using Volkswagen® Genuine Safety certificates, stickers and plates containing
Parts. Volkswagen does not guarantee the relia- important information on operating the vehicle
bility, safety, and suitability of non-original parts. are factory-fitted in the engine compartment and
on certain parts such as the tank flap, front pas-
The most essential Volkswagen® Genuine Parts senger sun visor, the driver door pillar or in the
are virtually always available in stock. If any spe- luggage compartment floor.
cific part is not available in stock, it can usually
be ordered and received in brief periods of time. – Never remove or damage the safety certifi-
cates, stickers and plates. They must remain
Volkswagen Dealerships offer a warranty for
legible at all times.
Volkswagen® Genuine Parts after assembly or
purchase. Always keep your Volkswagen Dealer- – If vehicle parts bearing safety certificates,
ship invoice for warranty purposes. stickers or plates are removed from the vehi-
cle, replacement safety certificates, stickers or
For additional information, please contact your plates with the same information must be ap-
Volkswagen Dealership. plied properly to the new parts by Volkswagen
Warranty claims regarding these parts can be Dealership or qualified workshop.
filed at any Volkswagen Dealership. 
Safety certificate
A safety certificate on the door pillar of the driver
door provides the information that all necessary
Original Volkswagen accessories safety standards and specifications of the trans-
port safety authorities of the individual country
We recommend using original Volkswagen ac- have been met at the time of production. The
cessories and other accessories approved by month and year of production and the chassis
Volkswagen. number may also be listed.
Please follow the recommendations below when
equipping your vehicle with accessories: High voltage warning stickers
There is a sticker near the engine compartment
Only use original Volkswagen accessories or oth-
cover lock that provides a warning of the high
er accessories duly approved by Volkswagen,
voltage in the electrical system of the vehicle.
whose reliability, safety, and suitability have
been duly tested for the specific vehicle model.
WARNING
Volkswagen does not guarantee the reliability,
safety, and suitability of non-original parts. Handling the vehicle incorrectly increases the
risk of accident and injuries.
Volkswagen Dealerships offer a warranty for
original accessories after assembly or purchase. ● Legal provisions must be followed.
Always keep your Volkswagen Dealership invoice ● Consult the Owner's Manual.
for warranty purposes.
For additional information, please contact your NOTICE
Volkswagen Dealership. Handling the vehicle incorrectly may cause dam-
ages to the vehicle.
In addition to providing accurate and updated in-
formation, the Volkswagen Accessories Service ● Legal provisions must be followed.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

also offers optional equipment assembly services ● Perform maintenance services as prescribed. 
by qualified personnel.

Consumer information 247

Aerial and radio feed Navigation system or radio
A radio feed aerial is installed on the roof of vehi-
volume
cles with factory-fitted radio units.
Radios or navigation systems have separate in-
Interference of AM radio reception could structions containing all relevant information for
occur if electric devices are used in the vi- proper operation.
cinity of the roof aerial (e.g. mobile phones). 
WARNING
Operating radios or navigation systems with
excessive volume, especially if over 85 decibels,
Installing the radio may cause ear injuries.
Follow the recommendations below when retro- ● If the volume is excessively high, exterior
fitting a radio or replacing a factory-fitted radio: acoustic signals, such as police and fire de-
partment sirens and other vehicles' horns,
– In some versions, existing vehicle connections may not be audible and may cause accidents. 
were designed for original Volkswagen radios,
as of the model year of 2005.
– Radio devices with different connections will
have to use adapting cables, which are availa- Headphones
ble at Volkswagen Dealerships.
When using mobile phones or other devices, con-
– Radios not covered in the Volkswagen Original
sult the respective owner's manual, applicable
Accessories Programme may require additional
laws and standards regarding the use of head-
adaptors if the signal feed is weak.
phones. For example, driving while using head-
– Radios should be installed at a Volkswagen phones is prohibited in Brazil.
Dealership, whose personnel is qualified and
trained on technical specifications of vehicles WARNING
and if there are original radios and assembly
parts required from the Volkswagen Accesso- When using headphones while driving, exterior
ries Programme, as well as the fact that all ac- acoustic signals, such as police and fire depart-
tivities are conducted based on factory guide- ment sirens and other vehicles' horns, may not
lines. be audible and may cause accidents. 
– The maximum power of original factory-fitted
speakers is 20 W (RMS).
– Volkswagen recommends also using speakers,
assembly sets, aerials and interference sup-
pression kits of the Volkswagen Accessories
Programme. These parts were designed espe-
cially for each vehicle type.

WARNING
Never cut the connection wire, leaving it ex-
posed. This may cause fires.

NOTICE
● Different radio connections may destroy or af-
fect important electrical components. Eventual
interferences, such as the speed signal, may
cause faults in the engine, ABS system, etc.
● Simply connecting the speed signal to a radio
with automatic volume adjustment from dif-
ferent manufacturers may cause such faults. 

248 Owner's Manual

 Declarations of conformity The individual manufacturer declares herewith
that the following products comply with essen-
tial requirements of each country, among other
relevant provisions and laws at the time of vehi-
cle manufacturing:
Radiofrequency equipment
– Electronic immobilizer.
– Vehicle key with remote control.
– Keyless Access locking and starting system.
– Radios with Bluetooth connection.
– Wireless charger.

FCC (Federal Communications Commission)

The following equipment is approved by the FCC
under the identification number:
Wireless charger
– 2AHPN-WLC
Refer to the following links for more information:
– https://fcc.report/FCC-ID/2AHPN-WLC
– https://fccid.io/2AHPN-WLC
VW Play radio
– NT8-VWMIBREGIO
Fig. 190 Some approval identifications.
QI
The wireless charger complies with the Qi
ID:10518 protocol.
QI is an open interface standard that regulates
wireless energy transfer using charging by induc-
tion developed by the Wireless Power Consorti-
um.
Refer to the following link for more information:
Fig. 191 Tag valid only for Nigeria. – https://www.wirelesspowerconsortium.com/
products/10518
Approval identifications → Fig. 190:
South Africa
1 Argentina.
The VW Play radio is approved by ICASA (Inde-
2 Brazil. pendent Communications Authority of South Af-
3 Russia and countries that authorize and allow rica) under identification number TA-2020/7390.
radio transmission systems as per EAC guide-
lines. Argentina
4 South Africa. The following equipment is approved by EN-
5 Europe and countries that authorize and al- ACOM (Entidade Nacional de Comunicações) un-
low radio transmission systems as per Euro- der the identification number:
pean guidelines. Wireless charger
6 Paraguay. – TL01774
25A.5L1.TCR.20

7 Zambia. VW Play radio

8 Mexico. – C-24447 

Consumer information 249

Brazil
Devices activated by radiofrequency comply with
Technical data
all applicable approval and use standards, and
their use in vehicles was authorized by the Brazil- Guidelines on the technical
ian National Telecommunications Agency (ANA-
TEL). data
Such approval must be used to obtain use licen- To check which engine a vehicle is equipped
ses in other countries. with, refer to the vehicle data sticker and vehicle
license documents.
Ghana
The VW Play radio is approved by the NCA under All data in the official vehicle documents take
identification number 7E5-7M-X0B-RDR. precedence over this data. All data in this manual
are valid for the basic model. The figures may be
Jamaica different if additional equipment is fitted, for dif-
The VW Play radio is approved by the SMA (Spec- ferent models, for special vehicles and for other
trum Management Authority). countries.

Mexico Engine
The VW Play radio is approved by the NOM (Nor- On the vehicle data sticker or in the vehicle docu-
ma Oficial Mexicana) under identification number ments it can be seen with which engine the vehi-
IFT ID: RCPVIVW20-0478. cle is equipped.

Nigeria Range
The wireless charger and its connection are per- The values quoted here may differ if additional
mitted by the Nigeria Communication Commis- equipment is fitted, for different models or for
sion → Fig. 191 ARCEP (Autoridade Reguladora special vehicles.
para Comunicações Eletrônicas e Correios). The values for the kerb weight in the following
table apply for the road-ready vehicle with serv-
Paraguay ice fluids, including fuel tank carrying 90% of to-
The VW Play radio is approved by CONATEL tal capacity and tools and spare tyre, if applicable
(Comisión Nacional de Telecomunicaciones) un- → . The indicated gear order weight is in-
der identification number NR:2020-02-I-0111. creased due to optional equipment and addition-
al accessories installed, which proportionally re-
Zambia duces the maximum permitted load.
The VW Play radio is approved by ZICTA (Autori-
The load includes the following weights:
dade de Tecnologia da Informação e Comunica-
ção da Zâmbia) under identification number – Passengers.
ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2020/10/51. – All luggage.
This equipment is not entitled to protection – Trailer towing support load.
against prejudicial interference and do not – Trailer support load over the lug.
cause interference in duly authorized systems. 
Performance
Performance figures relate to the basic model.
Data may vary according to the local fuel used,
optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle
route and driving habits. These figures were
measured without equipment which may influ-
ence performance, such as mud flaps. 

250 Owner's Manual

 Gross combination weight sumption does not depend exclusively on the ef-
The listed admissible traction ratings are only ap- ficiency of the vehicle, but also on the way it is
plicable for altitudes of up to 1,000 m above sea driven and other non-technical factors.
level. The maximum weight of the car and trailer
must be reduced by approximately 10% for every Measuring fuel consumption
further 1,000 m in altitude. The vehicle consumption and emissions values
were determined according to directive UE
WARNING 70/220/EEC in the currently valid version and ap-
ply for the given vehicle kerb weight. The figures
Ignoring or exceeding specific values and limits
do not refer to any one individual vehicle. Two
regarding weights, payloads, vehicle dimen-
measuring cycles are carried out on a rolling road
sions, and speed limit could result in severe ac-
test bed to calculate fuel consumption. The test
cidents and injuries.
criteria are as follows:
WARNING Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an en-
Exceeding the permitted gross weight and axle gine cold start. Thereafter city driving at
weights may damage the vehicle and cause se- speeds between 0 and 50 km/h (0 and 31
vere accidents and injuries. mph) is simulated.
Extra-urban cycle In the extra-urban cycle the
● Actual axle loads must never exceed permit-
car undergoes frequent acceleration and
ted axle loads.
braking in all gears, as in normal everyday
● The payload and distribution of the load in driving. In this case the driving speed rang-
the vehicle affect driving response and brak- es from 0 to 120 km/h (0 to 75 mph).
ing distance. Adjust your speed accordingly. Combined cycle The combined consumption is
● Observing maximum weight and axle load calculated with a weighting of around 37%
limits is essential to ensure the safety of the for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra-
driver, passengers and other road users. urban cycle.

WARNING Kerb weight may vary according to the re-

spective version. This may slightly increase
Accidents and severe injuries can occur if the fuel consumption figures.
maximum trailer weight is exceeded.
● Never exceed the specified maximum trailer In practical terms, fuel consumption figures
weight. may differ from those measured based on
the UE 70/220/EEC guidelines. 
NOTICE
The payload should be distributed as evenly as
possible in the vehicle's luggage compartment.
When transporting heavy objects in the luggage
compartment, they should be placed either in
front of or over the rear axle in order to minimise
the effect on the vehicle's handling. 

Information on fuel
consumption
The figures quoted for fuel consumption and
emissions do not refer to any one individual vehi-
cle. Their purpose is to enable comparisons to be
25A.5L1.TCR.20

made between various vehicle types. Fuel con-

Technical data 251

Vehicle identification data NOTICE
In case it is necessary to replace stickers or re-
engrave vehicle components, contact a local
Volkswagen Dealership.

NOTICE
The plastic layer applied over the vehicle identifi-
cation number (chassis number) engraving is an
anti-corrosive protection that prevents transfer-
ring the number into a paper sheet. Therefore, it
must not be removed under any circumstances -
risk of voiding warranty against perforation due
to corrosion! 

Fig. 192 In front of the rear passenger seat, on the

right-hand side of the floor: vehicle identification Vehicle identification number
number (running gear number).
on the windscreen
Vehicle identification number (VIN - chassis
number)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) engraving
is located in front of the passenger seat, on the
right-hand side of the floor → Fig. 192.

Partial vehicle identification number (VIS –

partial chassis number)
The plates (VIS) are located on the lower area of
the front right door pillar and in the engine com-
partment on the driver side, in the suspension
strut. These plates are destroyed when removed.
Additionally, the VIS number is also available in
the windscreen, rear window, and side windows.
Fig. 193 On the windscreen: vehicle identification
Engine identification number number.
The engine identification number is located on The vehicle identification number on the wind-
the engine block. Open the bonnet to access the screen may not be available for some countries.
manufacturer identification sticker 
→ page 198. The vehicle identification number (chassis num-
ber) can be read from the outside through the
In some regions, the engine identification num- windscreen. The identification number is dis-
ber is included in the official vehicle document. played laterally at the bottom of the windscreen.
Manufacturer identification sticker On some mod, depending on the radio system,
The manufacturer identification sticker is located the vehicle identification number may be dis-
in the front cross strut in the engine compart- played on the Service menu or in the vehicle set-
ment. Open the bonnet to access the manufac- tings. 
turer identification sticker  → page 198.

Manufacturing year identification plate

The manufacturing year identification plate is lo-
cated on the lower area of the front right door.
This plate is destroyed when removed.

252 Owner's Manual

 Information on the air Symbol and description:
Warning: air conditioning maintenance can
conditioning system  only be carried out by qualified personnel.
Engine coolant type.

Lubricant type.

Check workshop information (only availa-
 ble for Volkswagen Dealerships).

WARNING
To ensure safe and risk-free operation, air con-
ditioning system maintenance procedures may
only be carried out by qualified personnel. 
Fig. 194 Information on the air conditioning.

Key for → Fig. 194:

1 Air conditioner lubrication oil specification.
2 Air conditioner coolant specification.
3 Air conditioner load level

Dimensions

Fig. 195 Dimensions.

Table indications apply for the basic model with Indicated values may vary due to wheel and tyre
basic equipment. sizes, optional equipment, different model ver-
sions, or different accessory installations.

Key for → Fig. 195:

25A.5L1.TCR.20

A Vehicle width (including exterior mirrors) 1,977 mm

B Vehicle width (not including exterior mirrors) 1,760 mm 

Technical data 253

 Key for → Fig. 195:
Front tracka) 1,524 - 1,531 mm
C
Rear tracka) 1,509 - 1,516 mm
D Maximum vehicle height (including longitudinal members)a) 1,601 - 1,605 mm
E Vehicle length 4,218 mm
F Clearance between axles 2,651 mm
G Height of the free gap between the vehicle and the groundb) 190 - 194 mm
H Height with the bonnet open a)x 1,792 - 1,796 mm
I Height with the tailgate open b) 2,007 - 2,011 mm
– Minimum vehicle rotation diameter approximately 10.9 m
a) Data may vary according to wheel and tyre sizes.
b) Weight in gear order, without driver and cargo.

NOTICE ● Carefully drive through terrain entrances,

ramps, kerbs, and other objects. Lowered vehi-
● Drive carefully in parking lots with long kerbs
cle parts, such as the bumper, spoiler and
or fixed posts. Objects higher than the ground
chassis, engine or exhaust parts may be dam-
level may damage the bumper and other vehi-
aged in these situations. 
cle parts when parking.

Capacities
Petrol engines
Window washer fluid reservoir
3.1 litres
(→ page 201)
Fuel tank approximately 52 litres,
(→ page 178) of which approximately 7.5 litres reservea)
Engine oil capacity
4.0 litres
(→ page 203)
a) The reserve will be activated when the total tank level is reduced to approximately 7.5 litres of fuel.

TOTALFLEX Engine
Window washer fluid reservoir
3.1 litres
(→ page 201)
Fuel tank approximately 52 litres,
(→ page 178) of which approximately 7.5 litres reservea)
Engine oil capacity
4.0 litres
(→ page 203)
a) The reserve will be activated when the total tank level is reduced to approximately 7.5 litres of fuel. 

254 Owner's Manual

 Petrol engine

1.0 74 kW - TSI petrol engine

Power 74 kW (101 hp) at 5,000 rpm

Maximum torque 170 Nm (17.3 kgfm) at 2,000 - 4,000 rpm
EC DRPB
Cylinders, 3 cylinders,
Displacement 999 cm3
Compression ratio 10,5:1
Spark plugs 04E.905.602._a)
Super i.o. 95
Normal i.o. 91b)
Unleaded petrol free from other metallic additives
(such as manganese) Valid only for Argentina
Grade 2 or
Superior min. 91 ON
Gearbox type 5-gear manual gearbox (MQ 200)
Maximum speedc) 184 km/h
Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hc) 6.7 s
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hc) 10.7 s
Kerb weightd) 1,205 kg
Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) 1,660 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle 880 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle 830 kg
Roof load permitted 50 kg
Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Gross combination weight (CMTe)) 2,060 kg
Valid only for Argentina
Fuel consumptionf) - Combined 7.3 l/100 km
Euro 5 legislation
Valid only for Argentina
169 g/km
CO2 emissions
a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws.
b) With slight reduction in performance and increase in fuel consumption, with graded increase in engine noise until detonation regula-
tion intervention.
c) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits.
d) Weight for basic model without optional equipment.
e) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight.
f) For reasons of vehicle registration and taxation, the fuel consumption of some engines may differ from the following indications in
other countries. 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Technical data 255

 1.0 85 kW - TSI petrol engine

Power 85 kW (116 hp) at 5,500 rpm

Maximum torque 200 Nm (20.4 kgfm) at 2,000 - 3,500 rpm
EC DHSC
Cylinders, 3 cylinders,
Displacement 999 cm3
Compression ratio 10,5:1
Spark plugs 04E.905.602.a)
Super i.o. 95
Normal i.o. 91b)
Unleaded petrol free from other metallic additives
(such as manganese) Valid only for Argentina
Grade 2 or
Superior min. 91 ON
Gearbox type 6-speed Automatic (AQ 250)
Maximum speedc) 188 km/h
Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hc) 6.9 s
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hc) 10.3 s
Kerb weightd) 1,263 kg
Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) 1,710 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle 930 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle 830 kg
Roof load permitted 50 kg
Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Gross combination weight (CMTe)) 2,110 kg
Valid only for Argentina
Fuel consumptionf) - Combined 7.3 l/100 km
Euro 5 legislation
Valid only for Argentina
169 g/km
CO2 emissions
a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws.
b) With slight reduction in performance and increase in fuel consumption, with graded increase in engine noise until detonation regula-
tion intervention.
c) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits.
d) Weight for basic model without optional equipment.
e) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight.
f) For reasons of vehicle registration and taxation, the fuel consumption of some engines may differ from the following indications in
other countries. 

256 Owner's Manual

 1,6 81 kW petrol engine

81 kW (110 hp) at 5,500 rpm

Power Valid only for Northern Africa
81 kW (110 hp) at 5,750 rpm
Maximum torque 155 Nm (15.8 kgfm) at 3.850 rpm
EC CWSA
Cylinders, 4 cylinders,
Displacement 1,598 cm3
Compression ratio 10,5:1
Spark plugs 04C 905 616a)
Super i.o. 95
Normal i.o. 91b)
Unleaded petrol free from other metallic additives
(such as manganese) Valid only for Argentina
Grade 2 or
Superior min. 91 ON
5-speed manual (MQ 200)
or
Gearbox type 6-speed automatic (AQ 160)
Manual Automatic
Maximum speedc) 188 km/h 180 km/h
Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hc) 7.1 s 7.5 s
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hc) 10.7 s 11.5 s
Kerb weightd) 1,202 kg 1,249 kg
Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) 1,670 kg 1,720 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle 890 kg 940 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle 830 kg
Roof load permitted 50 kg
Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Gross combination weight (CMTe)) 2,070 kg 2,120 kg
Valid only for Argentina
Fuel consumptionf) - Combined 7.0 l/100 km 7.2 l/100 km
Euro 5 legislation
Valid only for Argentina
164 g/km 167 g/km
CO2 emissions
a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws.
b) With slight reduction in performance and increase in fuel consumption, with graded increase in engine noise until detonation regula-
tion intervention.
c) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits.
d) Weight for basic model without optional equipment.
e) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight.
f) For reasons of vehicle registration and taxation, the fuel consumption of some engines may differ from the following indications in
25A.5L1.TCR.20

other countries. 

Technical data 257

TOTALFLEX engines

1.0 TOTALFLEX 85/94 kW - TSI Engine

Petrol 85 kW (116 hp) at 5,500 rpm

Power
Ethanol 94 kW (128 hp) at 5,500 rpm
200 Nm (20.4 kgfm) at 2,000
Petrol
- 3,500 rpm
Maximum torque
200 Nm (20.4 kgfm) at 2,000
Ethanol
- 3,500 rpm
EC DHSB
Cylinders, 3 cylinders,
Displacement 999 cm3
Compression ratio 10,5:1
Spark plugs 04E.905.602.Fa)
Gearbox type 6-speed Automatic (AQ 250)
Petrol 188 km/h
Maximum speedb)
Ethanol 192 km/h
Petrol 7.1 s
Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hb)
Ethanol 6.9 s
Petrol 10.6 s
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hb)
Ethanol 10.2 s
Kerb weightc) 1,236 kg
Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) 1,710 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle 930 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle 830 kg
Roof load permitted 50 kg
Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Gross combination weight (CMTd)) 2,110 kg
Idling speede) 980 +/- 50 rpm
CO emission at idlee) < 0.2% (max)
a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws.
b) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits.
c) Weight for basic model without optional equipment.
d) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight.
e) This vehicle complies with the Environment preservation program for motor vehicles (PROCONVE). 

258 Owner's Manual

 1.4 TOTALFLEX 110/110 kW - TSI Engine

Petrol 110 kW (150 hp) at 5,000 - 5,250 rpm

Power
Ethanol 110 kW (150 hp) at 4,500 - 5,000 rpm
Petrol 250 Nm (25.5 kgfm) at 1,500 - 3,800 rpm
Maximum torque
Ethanol 250 Nm (25.5 kgfm) at 1,500 - 4,000 rpm
EC CWLA
Cylinders, 4 cylinders,
Displacement 1395 cm3
Compression ratio 10,0:1
Spark plugs 04E 905 602 Aa)
Gearbox type 6-speed Automatic (AQ 250)
Petrol 200 km/h
Maximum speedb)
Ethanol 202 km/h
Petrol
Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hb) 5.9 s
Ethanol
Petrol 8.7 s
Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hb)
Ethanol 8.6 s
Kerb weightc) 1,305 kg
Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) 1,740 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle 960 kg
Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle 830 kg
Roof load permitted 50 kg
Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8% 400 kg
Gross combination weight (CMTd)) 2,140 kg
Idling speede) 750 +/- 50 rpmf)
CO emission at idlee) < 0.2% (max)
a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws.
b) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load,
tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits.
c) Weight for basic model without optional equipment.
d) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight.
e) This vehicle complies with the Environment preservation program for motor vehicles (PROCONVE).
f) Air conditioning off 
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Technical data 259

Abbreviations
Abbreviation Definition
A Amp; electrical current measurement unit.
A/h Ampere-hour.
A2DP Audio transmission technology via Bluetooth® common in many manufacturers (Advanced
Audio Distribution Profile).
ABS Anti-lock brake system.
AM Amplitude modulation (medium wave, MW).
AQ 160 6-speed automatic gearbox.
AQ 250 6-speed automatic gearbox TSI engine.
ARCEP Regulatory Authority for Electronic Communication and Post Office (L'Autorité de Régula-
tion des Communications Electroniques et des Postes)
AUX Auxiliary audio input.
AVRCP Audio source remote control technology via Bluetooth® common in many manufacturers
(Audio Video Remote Control Profile).
bar Pressure unit.
BAS Brake assist
BCM Body Control Module.
CDM Engine code.
cm³ Cubic centimetres. Unit of displacement.
CO Carbon monoxide.
DIN German Institute for Standardisation.
EBV Electronic brake variator.
ECE Economic Commission for Europe-Regelung.
EDS Electronic differential lock.
ENACOM National Communication Entity
EON Enhanced Other Network.
EPC Engine management system (Electronic Power Control).
ESC Electronic stability control.
ESS Emergency brake lights (Emergency Stop Signal).
FCC Federal Communications Commission.
FM Frequency modulation (ultra short wave, UKW)
GALA Adjustment of the volume in relation to the vehicle's speed.
GRA Cruise control system.
GSM Global System for Mobil Communications.
HFP Hands-Free-Profile.
hp Horsepower, engine power.
IMEI Serial number for the exclusive identification of the GSM (International Mobile Station
Equipment Identity) end devices.
kg Kilogram, mass unit of the International System of Units.
kPa Kilopascal, standard pressure and tension unit of the International System of Units. 

260 Abbreviations
 Abbreviation Definition
kW Kilowatt, engine power.
l Litre, capacity unit of the metric system.
LED Light Emitting Diode.
m Metre, length measurement unit of the International System of Units.
mm Millimetre, length unit equal to one thousandth of a metre.
MP3 Audio file compression format.
MQ 200 5-speed manual transmission.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
o C Celsius Degrees; temperature measurement unit.
PIN Personal identification number.
psi Pounds per Square Inch, tyre pressure information.
QI Open interface standard that regulates wireless energy transfer using charging by induction
developed by the Wireless Power Consortium.
RDS Radio Data System for additional services (Radio Data System - RDS).
rpm Engine revolutions per minute.
s Seconds, basic time measurement unit of the International System of Units.
SIM Subscriber Identity Module.
SMS Short Message Service
TCS Traction control system.
TFT Thin-film transistor display technology.
TSI® Turbo charged with direct fuel injection.
TWI Trade Wear Indicator.
UMTS Mobile network standard (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System).
USB Universal Serial Bus
V Volts, electrical difference of potential measurement unit.
VBR Variable bit rate.
VIN Chassis number (Vehicle Identification Number).
VIS Partial vehicle identification number with the last 8 digits of the running gear (Vehicle Indi-
cator Section).
W Watts, mechanical or electrical, thermal flow and energy flow of radiation measurement
unit.
WMA Audio file compression format.
XDS Extension of the electronic differential lock.
25A.5L1.TCR.20

Abbreviations 261
Index
A using child seats
vehicle conservation
42
238
ABS wooden ornamental elements 238
see Brake assist systems 146 Airbag System
ACC in case of airbag triggering 41
see Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 121 Air conditioner
Accessories 242 turn off 91
Access the service deadline 24 water underneath the vehicle 94
Acoustic alarms water vapour underneath the vehicle 94
light 77 window heating 91
Acoustic warning Air conditioning 89, 90
unfastened seat belt 31 air distribution 91
Activated charcoal filter 180 air recirculation mode 93
Active Info Display 14, 16 blower 91
information profiles 15, 16 controls 90
navigation map 15 cooling mode 91
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 121 operating failure 93
adjust 125 operating instructions 93
driving scenarios 122 temperature setting 91
radar sensor 123 tips 93
system limitations 123 Air recirculation mode 93
troubleshooting 125 air-conditioning 91
turn on and off 124 operation 93
Additional instruments switch off 93
off-road indicator 115 Alarm system 63
Additional service offers 246 interior monitoring system 64
Adjust risk of false alarm 64
front seat 72 Alertness detection system
Adjusting malfunction 22
correct sitting position 29 Alterations 242, 247
head rest 75 Android Auto™
steering wheel 70 connect 162
Aerial 248 end connection 162
Air-conditioner menu 162
AUTO (automatic mode) 91 specificities 162
Air-conditioning Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 146
air recirculation mode 91 Anti-theft alarm system 63
Airbag description 63
crash detection function 41 Anti-theft wheel bolt 183
Airbag system 38 Antifreeze 206
curtain airbags 44 Apple CarPlay™
dash panel cleaning 238 end connection 161
description 40 establish connection 161
differences among front passenger front air- menu 161
bag systems 39 specificities 161
front airbag 41 App store 160
function 40 basic functions 161
indicator light 39 download 161
limitations 243 Assemblies and insertions 242
repairs 243 Assistance systems
side airbags 43 blind spot monitor 132
switching off the passenger front airbag 42 Assist systems
switching off with the key activated switch 42 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 121
anti-lock brake system (ABS) 146

262 Index
 Automatic Post-Collision Braking System 147 Bluetooth
brake assist (BAS) 147 audio function 159
driving mode selection 114 connect 159
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 147 phone function 159
electronic stability control (ESC) 148 Body warranty 246
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 146 Bonnet
Front Assist 126 display indication 200
Lane Assist 130 warning lamp 200
lane keeping assist 130 Boot lid 65
Park Assist 141 check boot lid 65
park distance control 137 emergency opening or closing 66
parking aid 141 opening 65
rear view camera system 139 unlocking 65
speed limiter 119
Brake
Start-Stop system 105
brake support system 146
Traction control system (TCS) 148
emergency brake indicator 54
traction control (TCS) 146
handbrake 136
Tyre monitoring systems 214
Brake assist (BAS) 147
Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator 214
uphill assist systems 112 Brake fluid 208
specification 208
Assumptions
rear view camera system 140 Brake pad
run-in 97
Automatic belt retractor 36
Brake pad run-in
Automatic consumer deactivation 212
also see brakes 97
Automatic driving light control 78
Brakes
Automatic gearbox 108
brake fluid 208
blockage of the ignition key 103
brake pad run-in 97
driving 110
brake pads 97
ignition lock 101
brake servo 98
Kick-down function 110
changing brake fluid 208
Pulling away uphill 110
fault 100
shifting gear 108
Brake servo 98, 146
stopping on uphill slopes 110
towing 194 Brake support system 146
Automatic Post-Collision Braking System 147 Brake support systems 146
ABS 146
Automatic washing system 234
BAS 146
EDS 146
B ESC 146
Background lighting 82 TCS 146
BAS XDS 146
see Brake assist systems 147 Brake system 146
Battery check brakes 100
check vehicle battery 209 troubleshooting 100
replacing the battery in the vehicle key 56
Battery electrolyte 211 C
Belt height adjuster 36 Capacities
Belt tensioner engine oil 204, 254
disposal 37 fuel tank 178, 254
service and disposal 37 washer fluid reservoir 254
blind spot monitor windscreen washer reservoir 201
system limits 132 Caring for the vehicle
Blind spot monitor 132 cleaning the window wiper blades 184
25A.5L1.TCR.20

operation failure 132 replacing window wiper blades 184

troubleshooting 134 window aerial 248
turn off 133 Car phone 243
turn on 133

Index 263
Carrier Cleaning
see Roof carrier 169 see Vehicle conservation 233
Catalytic converter 180 Clock 22
operating failure 181 Close
Central locking 59 doors 59
central locking button 61 tank flap 178
description 60 tilting panoramic sunroof 68
Keyless Access 58 tilting panoramic sunroof sun blind 88
locking or unlocking from inside 61 windows 67
single door unlocking 60 Clothing hook 152
Central locking system Coming Home function 80
anti-theft alarm system 63 Conservation
Centre arm rest 76 see Vehicle conservation 233
Changing a wheel 226 Conservation of aluminium parts 236
lifting the vehicle 229 Conservation of the chrome parts 236
preparation actions 227 Consumables 200
wheel bolts 228
Consumer information 246
Changing gears
Control and indications on the radio 26
gear change indication 95
Control light
manual gearbox 107
fuel level 17
selecting gears (manual gearbox) 107
fuelling 17
Changing the wheel
Control list
after changing a wheel 231
rear view camera system 140
changing the wheel 230
Control units 244
Characteristics
reprogramming 244
towing 195
Convenience closing
Chassis number 252
electric windows 67
Checking and refuelling 196
sunroof 69
Checklist
Convenience functions
before working in the engine compartment 198
reprogramming 244
checks when fuelling 26
Convenience opening
check the engine oil level 203
electric windows 67
fill engine oil 203
sunroof 69
in an emergency 54
in case of faults 54 Coolant
lifting the vehicle with the jack 229 check engine coolant 205
preparations for changing a wheel 227 Copyrights 158
preparations for travel 26 Cornering light 79
safe driving 26 with engaged reverse gear 79
seat belts 33 Crash detection function
travels abroad 26 airbag 41
Checks when fueling 26 Cruise control system 118
Check the engine oil 203 Cruise control system (GRA)
Childproof lock 53 operation 118
Child seat crystal waxing the paintwork 234
airbag sticker 48 Cup holder 153
securing systems 46 front centre console 153
securing with the seat belt 51 Cup holders
securing with Top Tether 51 beverage bottles 153
switching off front passenger front airbag 42 Curtain airbags
weight classes 46 see Airbag system 44
Child seats 45
child seat types 46
standard 46
D
transporting children in the vehicle 47 Dashboard
Cigarette lighter 154 airbag system 38

264 Index
 Dash panel with automatic gearbox 110
airbag system 238 with environmental awareness 95
cleaning 238 Driving economically 95
Dash panel insert Driving guidelines 94
indicators 24 Driving instructions
menu structure 24 temporary spare wheel 222
operation by way of the multifunction steer- Driving in the winter
ing wheel 25 mirror 85
Dash panel insert operation 24 winter tyres 225
Data recording 244 Driving mode selection 114
Data recording while driving 244 default behaviours of driving modes and ve-
Daytime running light 77, 78 hicle systems 115
Declarations of conformity 249 Driving safety 26
Defrosting Driving saving fuel 95
windows 91 Driving through salt water in roads 100
Device overview 156 Driving through water on roads 99
Diagnostics connector 244 Driving with environmental awareness 95
Differential lock Dust filter 93
see Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 147
Digital clock 22
E
digital instrument cluster
see Active Info Display 14, 16 EBV
see Braking support systems 147
Digital maintenance and warranty services 231
Economical driving style 95
Dimensions 253
EDL
Display 14, 16, 18, 19
see Brake support systems 147
instrument cluster 18, 19
Electrical consumer 155, 173
Display indicators
doors, bonnet and boot lid open 19, 20 Electrical consumers 154
speed limiter 120 Electricity-consuming equipment 55
time 22 Electric tilting panoramic sunroof
Disposal see Glass roof 68
belt tensioner 37 Electric windows 67
Doors 59 buttons 67
childproof lock 53 close 67
emergency closing or opening 61 convenience closing 67
Driver alert system 21 convenience opening 67
function 21 open 67
operation 21 operational failure 67
turn off 22 roll-back function 67
turn on 22 Electronic brake variator (EBV) 147
Driver door Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 147
overview 8 Electronic engine power control - EPC 180
Driving Electronic immobilizer 104
data records 244 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 146
driving economically 95 Electronic Stability Control(ESC) 148
driving through water on roads 99 Emergency brake indicator 54
fuel gauge 17 Emergency brake lights 54
fuel level too low 17 Emergency breakaway cable 173
parking on downhill inclines 135
Emergency closing
parking on uphill inclines 135
front passenger door 62
preparations for travel 26
rear doors 62
pulling away uphill 110
Emergency closing or opening
25A.5L1.TCR.20

stopping on uphill slopes 110

through salt water 100 driver door 61
towing 196 emergency unlocking the selector lever 111
travels abroad 26

Index 265
Emergency opening or closing Environmental impact note
boot lid 66 fuel 179
Emergency shut down 104 EON 260
Emergency start function 104 EPC - Electronic engine power control 180
Emergency unlocking the selector lever 111 ESC
Engaging the gear enable and disable 148
automatic gearbox 108 see Braking Support Systems 148
Engine ESS - Emergency Stop Signal 54
irregular engine operation 181 Ethanol 178
noises 103 fuel gauge 17
running-in 100 Exhaust gas emission control system 179
Engine and ignition 101 Exterior
automatic ignition turn off 102 door handles 6
emergency shut down 104 Exterior lighting 185
emergency start function 104 Exterior mirrors 87
ignition cylinder 101 fold 87
immobilizer 104 memory for reverse gear 87
non-authorised vehicle key 101 operation failure 88
starting the engine with Keyless Access 101 towing a trailer 173
start the engine 102
Exterior temperature indicator 19, 20
stopping the engine 103
External aerial 243
unauthorized vehicle key 104
External jump starting
Engine compartment 196
check Jump starting 191
cleaning 236
engine coolant 205 external mirrors
engine oil 201 vehicle conservation 236
plenum chamber 236
preparation activities 198 F
vehicle battery 209 Fault memory 244
Engine compartment cover Faults
closing 198 protect the vehicle 53
opening 198
Fire extinguisher 55
Engine control unit 179
First service 232
Engine coolant 205
Fixation with i-Size 49
check engine coolant level 206
refilling 206 Fixation with ISOFIX
refilling opening 206 child chair 49
specifications 206 Fixation with LATCH 49
temperature indicator 18 FM 260
warning light 18 Fog lights 78
Engine data 255, 256, 257, 258, 259 Front airbag
Engine identification number check airbag system 41
establish 252 Front Assist 126
Engine management critical warning 127
indicator lamp 104 distance warning 127
troubleshooting 104 see Front Assist 126
Engine oil 201 troubleshooting 129
changing 202 Front Assist peripheral monitoring system
check the engine oil 203 Front Assist system limits 128
complete 203 Front passenger airbag
consumption 203 check airbag system 38
engine oil filler 203 Front passenger side glove compartment light 82
oil dipstick 203 Front seat 71
specification 202 Front towing eye 195
Engine speed 17 fuel
Ethanol 178

266 Index
 Fuel 176 Headlight range control 80
environmental impact note 179 Headlights
information on fuel consumption 251 international trips 81
petrol 177, 178 washers 84
problems 181 Headphones 248
Fuel consumption Head rest 75
driving economically 95 Head restraints 74
how to measure? 251
Heating 89, 90
information 251
Heating and air conditioning 89
what increases consumption? 181
High pressure washing machine 234
Fuel gauge 17
control light 17 Hollow cavities 236
petrol or ethanol 17 Hooks to hang bags on 169
Fuel handling safety guidelines 176 Horn 9
Fuelling Hour setting 22
checks when fuelling 26
control light 17 I
ethanol 178
Identification number 252
fuel gauge 17
petrol 178 Identification sticker 252
with ethanol 178 Ignition 101
with petrol 178 check engine and ignition 101
fuelling and fuel types 177 non-authorised vehicle key 101
Fuel quality 181 Ignition lock
blockage 103
Fuses 186
lock 101
changing 190
removing the key from the ignition 104
colour coding 190
dash panel 186 Immobiliser
detecting a blown fuse 190 malfunction 104
engine compartment 188 In an emergency 53
fuse box in the dashboard 187 checklist 53
fuse box in the engine compartment 189 faults 53
fuse box in the engine compartment on the making you and your vehicle safe 53
battery 189 warning lamps 53
preparations for changing 190 In case of emergency
versions 190 warning triangle 55
Indicator lamp
ABS 148
G braking support systems 148
Gear change indicator 95 central locking 60
General information 246 engine management 104
Glasses compartment 152 ESC 148
Glass roof lane keeping assistant 131
see Sunroof 68 malfunctioning bulb 81
see Tilting panoramic sunroof 68 on the driver door 60
Glove compartment seat belt 31
light 82 shifting gear 111
see Glove compartment 151 Start-Stop system 105
GRA 118 turn signals 81
tyre monitoring system 215
Grounding point 192
Indicator lamps
Guidelines for the conservation of the vehicle 233
overview 12
Guidelines on the technical data 250
Indicator light
airbag system 39
25A.5L1.TCR.20

H Indicators of the display

Handbrake 136 Warning and information texts 21
Head light lever 77 Indicators on the dash panel insert display 24

Index 267
Information on fuel consumption 251 Lane Assist 130
information on the air conditioning system 253 sensor system 130
Information on use conditions 232 system limits 130
Information profiles 15, 16 Lane keep assist
Information stored in control units 244 activate 131
deactivate 131
Installing the radio 248
Lane Keep Assist
Instrument cluster 9, 14
indicator lamp 131
display 14, 16, 18, 19
indicator lamps 12 Lane keeping assist 130
instruments 14, 16 Lane Keeping Assist
service interval display 23 Troubleshooting 132
symbols 12 LATCH
warning lamps 12 child chair 49
Instruments 14, 16 Leave a parking space with Park Assist 144
Interior light 82 Leaving Home function 80
Interior lighting 82 Lifting the vehicle
Interior mirror 86 checklist 229
Interior monitoring system 64 jack 229
with the jack 229
Intermittent convenience signals 77
Light
International trips
acoustic alarms 77
headlights 81
automatic side light or parking light switch
Interval recommendation 21
off 80
function 21
daytime running light 77
operation 21
fog light 78
turn off 22
functions 78
turn on 22
headlight lever 77
ISOFIX 49 instruments and switches lighting 82
light's switch 77
J permanent parking light on both sides 79
Jump starting 191 side light 77, 78
grounding point 192 switch off 77
jump starting point (grounding point) 192 switch on 77
turn signal lever 77
lighting
K Turn signals 77
Key Lighting
see vehicle key 56 daytime running light 78
Key activated switch Driving light 77
switching off the passenger front airbag 42 main beam 79
Keyless Access 58 troubleshooting 81
starter button 101 Lights 77
Unlock or lock with Keyless Access 58 AUTO 78
Keyless Access Locking and starting system Limiter
see Keyless Access 58 see Speed limiter 119
Keyless locking and starting system Keyless Ac- Load capacity index 224
cess 58 Loading
Kick-down function 110 driving with the rear lid open 99
luggage compartment 167
L roof carrier
stowing items of luggage
171
166
Lambda probe 180 towing 174
Lamp Locking
Coming Home 80 with Keyless Access 58
interior lights 82
Locking button
Leaving Home 80
automatic gearbox 108
reading lights 82

268 Index
 Locking the front passenger door and rear doors
in case of emergency 62
N
Luggage compartment 167 New engine 100
cover 168 Noises
luggage compartment light 82 brake assist system 148, 149
Variable luggage compartment floor 168 engine 103
Luggage compartment cover 168 tyres 226
Luggage compartment floor 168 NT - non microfiber fabric 238
Number of seats 28

M
Main indicator 16
O
Maintenance 231 Octane number 177, 178
malfunction Off-road indicator 115
park distance control 137 altimetre 115
compass 115
Malfunction
coolant temperature indicator 115
alertness detection system 22
oil temperature indicator 115
immobiliser 104
select instruments 115
tilting panoramic sunroof 68
steering angle indicator 115
tyre monitoring system 215
Oil
Mandatory inspection services 246
check engine oil 201
Manoeuvre braking 138
Oil dipstick 203
Manual gearbox 107
Old tyres 217
see also Changing gear 107
see also Shift gears 107 Open
towing 194 doors 59
tank flap 178
Mats 94
tilting panoramic sunroof 68
Mechanical windows tilting panoramic sunroof sun blind 88
close 67 windows 67
open 67
Opening
Media 157 boot lid 65
copyrights 158
Operating failure
file and database requirements 158
air conditioning 93
media controls 157
catalytic converter 181
media operation 158
radio feed 248
settings 163
rain sensor 84
Mileage recorder 14, 16
Operation
Mirror park distance control 137
areas with no visibility 85
Operational failure
blind spot 85
electric windows 67
Mirrors 85, 86
Operation failure
exterior 87
blind spot monitor 132
folding 88
electric exterior mirrors 88
interior mirror 86
right-hand exterior mirror operation 87 Original Volkswagen accessories 247
Mobile phone Overall guidelines 26
use without external aerial 244 Overseas
Modifications 242 extended permanence 100
vehicle sales 100
Multi Collision Brake
see Automatic Post-Collision Braking Sys- Overview
tem 147 centre console 10
driver door 8
Multifunction display 20
driver's side 9
Multifunction steering wheel 9, 25
25A.5L1.TCR.20

front passenger side 11

front view 6
indicator lamps 12
instruments 14, 16

Index 269
 menu structure 24 Plenum chamber 236
rear view 7 Polishing 234
roof headliner 11 Pollen filter 93
turn signal and main beam lever 77 Pollutant filter 93
warning lamps 12
Preparation actions
Overview of the vehicle changing a wheel 227
front view 6 vehicle battery 210
rear view 7
Preparation activities
check the engine oil 203
P complete engine oil 203
Park Assist 141 prior each travel 26
automatic interruption 142 working in the engine compartment 198
early interruption 142 Preparation procedures
in line parking 143 check engine coolant level 206
leave a parking space 144 refilling the engine coolant 206
parking conditions 143 Preparations for travel 26
park side by side 143 Press & Drive
troubleshooting 144 see Keyless Access 58
Park distance control 137
operation 137 R
Park Distance Control
Radar sensor 123
representation on the display 138
trouble shooting 138 Radio 157, 248
control 26
Parking 135
indication 26
with the Park Assist system 143
radio operation 157
Parking aid 141
settings 163
Parking and manoeuvring 135
Radio feed
Parking distance control aerial 248
using high pressure washing machine 234 operating failure 248
Parking light 79 Radio system
Park Pilot off-road indicator 115
see Park distance control 137 Radio volume 248
Particularities Rain sensor 84
remove the key from the vehicle 103 operating failure 84
water vapour underneath the vehicle 94
Reading light 82
Part replacement 242
Rear lid
Passenger compartment 9 driving with the rear lid open 99
Passenger front airbag Rear seat 73
switching off with the key activated switch 42
Rear seat backrest
Pedals 29, 94 fold backward 73
Peripheral monitoring system (Front Assist) fold forward 73
Operate 128 Rear seat backrest rake adjuster 73
Permanent parking light 79 Rear seats 72
Petrol 177, 178 Rear Traffic Alert 145
additives 177, 178
Rear View
fuel 177, 178
see Rear view camera system 139
fuel gauge 17
Rear view camera system 139
types 177, 178
assumptions 141
Petrol engine 255
control list 140
Phone function Enabling and disabling 139
during phone calls 159 operational guidelines 141
making phone calls 159 parking 140
receiving phone calls 159 Representation on the display 139
Physical principles of a frontal collision 31 settings 141
Plates 247 Rear window defrost function 92

270 Index
 Rear window wiper blade fastening 34
cleaning 184 not fastened 32
replacing 184 roll-back function 36
Reduction of exhaust gases seat belt tensioner 36
problems 181 twisted seat belts 34
Removing ice 236 unfastening 34
Removing snow 236 using 33
Removing wax residues 236 Seat belts protect 33
Repairs 242 Seat belt tensioner 36
airbag system 243 Seat covers 238
plates 247 cleaning NT - non microfiber fabric 238
stickers 247 cleaning the fabric cover 238
Replacement key cleaning the padding 238
see vehicle key 56 conserving and cleaning the natural leather 238
seat cover handling 238
Representation on the display
vinyl 238
Park Distance Control 138
Seat functions 76
Reprogramming control units 244
Seats 28, 71
Retrofitting
front seat 72
car phone 243
two-way radio 243 Selection of driving mode
characteristics of driving modes 115
Rev counter 14, 16
Selection of the driving mode
Right-hand exterior mirror operation 87
manoeuvre 114
Rims
operation 114
cleaning 236
Selector lever lock
Roll-back function
automatic gearbox 108
electric windows 67
Service 231
sunroof 69
tilting panoramic sunroof sun blind 88 Service fluids 200
Roof carrier 169 Service interval display 23
usage guidelines 171 Service Menu 23
Roof rack 170 Service position
use the supports 170 Windscreen wipers 183
Rubber seals 236 Service scopes 232
Run-in Set
tyres 218 hour 22
Running-in Settings
engine 100 user profile 165
first kilometres 100 valet mode 165
Shifting gear
automatic gearbox 108
S emergency unlocking the selector lever 111
Safety equipment 40 shifting gears (automatic gearbox) 108
Screen with the Tiptronic 109
settings 163 Shifting gears
Seat 73 warning and indicator lamps 111
Seat belt Shift paddle
automatic belt retractor 36 Tiptronic 109
seat belt status indicator 31 Side airbags
warning lamp 31 see Airbag system 43
Seat belt roll-back function 36 Side light 77, 78
Seat belt routing 35 Single door unlocking 60
Seat belts 30 Sitting
25A.5L1.TCR.20

belt height adjuster 36 adjusting the head rests 75

belt routing 35 adjusting the steering wheel position 70
checklist 33 correct sitting position 29
cleaning 238 fitting the head rests 75

Index 271
 number of seats 28 Stowage area
rear seat backrest 73 front centre console 150
removing the head rests 75 front passenger side 151
Sitting position glove compartment 151
incorrect position 28 Glove compartment light 82
Sliding headliner 88 in the lower part of the centre console 150
Socket 154 vehicle wallet 151
12 Volts 155 Stowage compartment 149
Sounds front centre arm rest 152
warning lamps and indicator lamps 12 Stowage compartments
Spare fuel canister 177 other stowage compartments 152
Spare parts 242 Stowing items of luggage 166
Spare wheel 222 Sunroof
remove 222 convenience closing 69
convenience opening 69
Specificities
roll-back function 69
engine jolting 181
folding mirrors 88 Sun visor 88
irregular engine operation 181 Support load
parking 135, 254 loading the trailer 174
radio feed 248 Support systems
remove the vehicle key 101 cruise control system 118
towing 193 driver alert system 21
towing a trailer 174 electronic brake variator (EBV) 147
Speed index 225 GRA 118
Speed limiter 119 interval recommendation 21
controls 120 Symbols
display indicators 120 see Indicator lamps 12
troubleshooting 121 see Warning lamps 12
Speed ranges Synchronize vehicle key 57
Speed ranges 127 System
Start-Stop system 105 ABS 146
indicator lamp 105 anti-lock brake system (ABS) 146
when towing a trailer 172 settings 163
Start button Systems
emergency shut down 104 automatic driving light control 78
emergency start function 104 BAS 147
Starter button 101 brake assist (BAS) 147
cruise control system 118
Starting the engine with jump leads
EBV 147
how to 192
EDL 147
jump leads 192
electronic brake variator(EBV) 147
Steering
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) 147
indicator lamp 114
GRA 118
warning light 114
TCS 146
Steering assistance 113 traction control (TCS) 146
Steering wheel 70 Uphill assist system 112
adjusting 70 XDS 147
unilateral traction 221
vibration 221
Stickers 247
T
Stopped in traffic Tachometer (Rev counter) 17
protect the vehicle 53 Tank flap
Storage compartment check tank flap 178
glasses compartment 152 ethanol 178
roof console 152 petrol 178

272 Index
 TCS front towing eye 195
enable and disable 148 hard towing bar 194
see brake assist systems 146 headlight adjustment 174
see Braking Support Systems 148 loading 174
Technical data 250 manual gearbox 194
capacities 178, 201, 204, 254 rear lights 173
dimensions 253 retrofitting a towing bracket 175
displacement 255, 256, 257, 258, 259 specificities 193
engine data 255, 256, 257, 258, 259 support load 174
engine oil specification 202 technical requirements 172
identification sticker 252 the vehicle 194
petrol engine 255 towing a trailer 174
power 255, 256, 257, 258, 259 towing prohibition 194
roof load 171 trailer load 174
TOTALFLEX engines 258 Towing a trailer
type plate 252 check towing 172
tyre pressure 219 Towing bracket
Vehicle data sticker 252 retrofitting 175
Technical modifications 242 Traction 224
plates 247 Traction control system (TCS) 148
stickers 247 Traction control (TCS) 146
Temperature display Trailer load
engine coolant 18 loading the trailer 174
Temperature indicator Transporting 166
exterior temperature 19, 20 driving instructions 98
off-road indicator 115 driving with the rear lid open 99
Temporary spare wheel Hooks to hang bags on 169
driving instructions 222 loading the trailer 174
Temporary spare wheel of different size from roof carrier 169, 171
the regular wheels 227 stowing items of luggage 166
Thawing the door lock cylinder 236 towing 172
Thawing the locks 236 towing a trailer 174
Tightening torque Transporting children in the vehicle 45, 47
wheel bolts 228 Travels abroad
Tilting panoramic sunroof 68 checklist 26
close 68 Tread depth 220
malfunction 68 Tread depth and wear indicators 220
open 68 Treadwear 224
sun blind 88 Troubleshooting 63, 66
Tilting panoramic sunroof sun blind 12 V vehicle battery warning lamp 213
open and close 88 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 125
roll-back function 88 airbag deployment 63
TIN 223 airbags system 39
Tiptronic 109 alternator warning lamp 213
Toolkit Auto Lock 63
check vehicle toolkit 182 blind spot monitor 134
TOTALFLEX engines 258 braking support systems 148
Towing 172 check engine oil level 204
a trailer 174 cruise control system (GRA) 119
automatic gearbox 194 driving mode selection 115
characteristics 195 dual clutch gearbox 111
connecting 173 Trouble shooting
driving instructions 196 engine management 104
25A.5L1.TCR.20

emergency breakaway cable 173 Troubleshooting

engaging 173 engine oil level sensor 204
exterior mirrors 173 engine oil pressure 204

Index 273
 faulty bulb
Front Assist
185
129
V
front passenger front airbag disabled 40 Valet mode
front passenger front airbag enabled 40 VW Play 165
ignition lock 104 Valve caps 220
immobiliser 104 Variable luggage compartment floor 168
indicator lamp of the driver door 63 Vehicle
Keyless Access 63 locking or unlocking from inside 61
Lane Keeping Assist 132 protection in case of faults 53
Park Assist 144 stopping on downhill inclines 135
Trouble shooting stopping on uphill inclines 135
Park Distance Control 138 unlocking or locking with Keyless Access 58
Troubleshooting Vehicle battery 209
re-establishing the one touch closing and automatic consumer deactivation 212
opening operation of the windows 68 battery electrolyte 211
Start-Stop system 106 charging 211
start button 104 check electrolyte level 210
steering 114 connecting 211
sunroof 70 discharged 55
turn signals 59, 63 discharging 212
Turn parking light on/off 79 disconnecting 211
Turn signal and main beam lever 77 installation location 209
Turn signals on/off 77 meaning of warnings on the vehicle battery 209
preparation actions 210
Turn the main beam on and off 79
replacing 211
Two-way radio 243 starting the engine with jump leads 192
Type plate 252 symbol definition 209
Tyre control indicator Vehicle battery (12 V)
change the tyres 218 grounding point for jump starting 192
Tyre damage 221 Vehicle conservation 233
Tyre load capacity 225 aluminium parts 236
Tyre monitoring system 214 automatic washing system 234
indicator lamp 215 chrome parts 236
malfunction 215 cleaning the seat belts 238
Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator 214 cleaning the wheels 236
Tyre pressure 219 dash panel 238
checking 220 engine compartment 236
Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator 214 exterior 233
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System external mirrors 236
change the tyres 218 fabric covers 238
Tyres high pressure washing machine 234
check wheels and tyres 214 hollow cavities 236
see wheels and tyres 216 interior 238
manual wash 234
Tyres with directional tread pattern 225
natural leather 238
Tyre wear 221 NT - non microfiber fabric 238
Tyre wear indicators 221 paddings 238
paintwork of the vehicle 234
U plastic components 238
rubber seals 236
UKW 260
seat cover handling 238
Unlock
thawing the door lock cylinder 236
with Keyless Access 58
vehicle underbody protection 236
Uphill assist system 112 washing the vehicle 234
USB port 150 windows 236
USB Port 152 windscreen wipers service position 183
User profile wooden ornamental elements 238
VW Play 165 Vehicle data sticker 252

274 Index
 Vehicle delivery 232 Washing 233
Vehicle identification data 252 manual 234
Vehicle identification number 252 with high pressure washing machine 234
Vehicle jack 226 Washing the vehicle 234
Vehicle key 56 folding mirrors 88
replacement key 56 What happens to passengers who have not fas-
replacing the battery 56 tened their seat belts 32
see vehicle key 56 Wheel
troubleshooting 57 shift paddle (Tiptronic) 109
unauthorized 104 Wheel bolts 226, 228
Vehicle maintenance tightening torque 228
airbag module (dash panel) 238 Wheels 219
cleaning the stowage compartment 238 bolted-on trims 219
vinyl 238 identification 219
Vehicle modifications 242 Wheels and tyres 214, 216
plates 247 avoiding damages 217
stickers 247 changing a wheel 226
Vehicle sale 4 check wheels and tyres 217
Vehicle sales foreign bodies in the tyre 221
in other countries / continents 100 identification 223
Vehicle toolkit 182 markings 223
new tyres 218
Vehicle tool kit
old tyres 217
contents 183
replacing tyres 218
Vehicle toolkit
run-in 218
stowage 182
serial number 223
toolkit access 182
spare wheel 222
Vehicle underbody protection 236 speed index 224, 225
Vehicle wallet compartment 151 storing the removed wheel 222
Ventilation 90 storing tyres 217
Ventilation and heating system technical data 223
controls 90 Temporary spare wheel of different size from
temperature setting 91 the regular wheels 227
Volkswagen Dealership Warranty 246 tread depth 220
Volkswagen® Genuine Parts 247 tyre damage 221
VW Play 156 tyre identification number (TIN) 223
welcome 156 tyre load capacity 225
tyre pressure 219
tyres with directional tread pattern 225
W tyre types 223
Warning lamp tyre wear 221
bonnet 200 tyre wear indicators 221
brake system 148 unbalanced wheels 221
braking support systems 148 valve caps 220
seat belt 31 wheel alignment fault 221
shifting gear 111 wheel balancing 221
Warning lamps wheel rotation 217
overview 12 wheels 219
Warning light winter tyres 225
engine coolant 18 Wi-Fi
Warning lights 53 connect 160
Warning triangle 55 forget network 160
Washer fluid Window activation 67
Windows
25A.5L1.TCR.20

check 201
replenish 201 defrosting 91
see Window activation 67
Window washers 83

Index 275
Window wiper blades 183
cleaning 184
replacing 184
Window wipers 83
automatic headlight washing system 84
functions 84
heatable windscreen washer nozzles 84
rain sensor 84
Window wipers / rear window
windscreen / rear window wiper lever 83
Windscreen / rearwindow washers
windscreen / rear window washers lever 83
Windscreen wiper blades
cleaning 184
replacing 184
Windscreen wipers
lifting the wiper arms 183
service position 183
swing the wiper arms outward 183
Windscreen wipers and washers
trouble shooting 84
Winter driving
fuel consumption 97
tilting panoramic sunroof 68
Winter tyres 225
speed limit 226
Wireless charging function 150
Wrench icon 23

X
XDS
see Brake support systems 147

276 Index